Gateway West Transmission Line Final EIS

Appendix B

Proponents’ Plan of Development
Plan of Development 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared By:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................. 1-1

2.0 PROJECT PURPOSE AND NEED ...................................................................... 2-1

2.1 PacifiCorp (Rocky Mountain Power) ............................................................ 2-1

2.2 Idaho Power................................................................................................. 2-2

2.3 Team Constructional and Operational Responsibilities................................ 2-3

2.4 Federal Oversight of Transmission Planning................................................ 2-3

2.5 State Regulation of Transmission ................................................................ 2-5

2.6 Demand Side Management.......................................................................... 2-5

2.7 Existing Transmission System Reliability Constraints .................................. 2-6

2.8 Purpose of the Gateway West Project ......................................................... 2-9

2.8.1 Gateway West Substation Purposes.............................................. 2-10

2.8.2 Gateway West Transmission Line Segment Purposes .................. 2-12

3.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Overall Project.............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Proposed Project.............................................................................. 3-2

3.1.2 Structure Lighting........................................................................... 3-14

3.1.3 Proposed Route ............................................................................. 3-14

3.1.4 Segment 1W – Windstar/Dave Johnston to Aeolus........................ 3-15

3.1.5 Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston ..................................................... 3-16

3.1.6 Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline................................................... 3-17

3.1.7 Segment 3A – Anticline to Bridger ................................................. 3-17

3.1.8 Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus .................................................. 3-17

3.1.9 Segment 5 – Populus to Borah ...................................................... 3-19

3.1.10 Segment 6 – Borah to Midpoint...................................................... 3-19

3.1.11 Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill ................................................ 3-20

3.1.12 Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway............................................. 3-20

3.1.13 Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway .......................................... 3-21

3.1.14 Segment 10 – Midpoint to Cedar Hill.............................................. 3-22

3.2 Substations ................................................................................................ 3-22

3.2.1 Proposed Substations .................................................................... 3-23

3.2.2 Existing Substations....................................................................... 3-26

3.3 Transmission Line Components................................................................. 3-29

3.3.1 System Components...................................................................... 3-29

3.3.2 System Construction...................................................................... 3-31

3.3.3 Operations and Maintenance ......................................................... 3-31

3.3.4 Decommissioning........................................................................... 3-32

4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLANS ........................................................ 4-1

5.0 LITERATURE CITED........................................................................................... 5-1
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 ii

LIST OF TABLES

Table 2.7-1. Rating and Capacity of Paths with and without the Gateway West Project ......2-7

Table 2.8-1. Substations to Be Connected by Gateway West............................................2-11

Table 2.8-2. Gateway West Transmission Line Segments.................................................2-12

Table 3.1-1. Proposed Project Summary of Miles and Percent Crossed by Ownership .......3-3

Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities ..........................................................................3-4

Table 3.1-3. Proposed Action Construction Schedule........................................................3-13

Table 3.1-4. Summary of Proposed Route.........................................................................3-14

Table 4-1. Environmental Protection Plans.......................................................................4-3

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 3.2-1. CR 121 Access to Aeolus Substation ............................................................3-24

Figure 3.2-2. Looking Westerly Toward the Existing CR 121 Bridge...................................3-25

LIST OF APPENDICES

Appendix A Proposed Route and Substation Maps and Figures 

Appendix B Transmission Line and Substation Components

Appendix C Environmental Compliance Management Plan

Appendix D Framework Reclamation Plan

Appendix E Framework Noxious Weed Plan

Appendix F Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

Appendix G Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and 

Countermeasures Plan

Appendix H Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan

Appendix I Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan

Appendix J Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan

Appendix K Framework Agricultural Protection Plan

Appendix L Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan

Appendix M Framework Blasting Plan

Appendix N Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 iii

Appendix O Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan

Appendix P Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan 

Appendix Q Framework Construction Emergency Preparedness and Response 

Plan

Appendix R Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response 

Plan

<Appendices S through Y do not exist>

Appendix Z Environmental Protection Measures
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 iv

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AC alternating current

ACEC Area of Critical Environmental Concern

aMW average megawatts

BES Bulk Electric System

BLM U.S. Bureau of Land Management

CR County Route

Companies PacifiCorp and Idaho Power Company 

EIS Environmental Impact Statement

EO Executive Order

EPM environmental protection measure

EPP Environmental Protection Plan

FERC Federal Energy Regulatory Commission

Forest 

Service

U.S. Forest Service

Gateway 

West

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

GIS geographic information system

I Interstate

IDANG Idaho Army National Guard

IPUC Idaho Public Utility Commission

IRP Integrated Resource Plan

kV kilovolt

MP milepost

MW megawatt

MWh megawatt hours

NERC North American Electrical Reliability Corporation

NF National Forest

OATT Open Access Transmission Tariff

POD Plan of Development

Project Gateway West Transmission Line Project

ROW right-of-way

SR State Route

SRBOP Morley Nelson Snake River Birds of Prey National Conservation 

Area

SRMA Special Recreation Management Area

VRM Visual Resource Management

WECC Western Electricity Coordinating Council

WGFD Wyoming Game and Fish Department

WSR Wild and Scenic River

WWE West-wide Energy
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 1-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 PacifiCorp (doing business as Rocky Mountain Power) and Idaho Power Company, collectively 

3 known as the Companies, applied to the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) for a right-of-way 

4 (ROW) grant to use the National System of Public Lands for portions of the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Gateway West or Project) on May 7, 2007. The original application 

6 was revised in October 2007, August 2008, May 2009, and January 2010 to reflect changes and 

7 refinements in their proposed Project and in response to feedback from the public regarding 

8 routing alternatives. This application was assigned the case file numbers of IDI-35849 for 

9 Idaho, WYW-174598 for Wyoming, and NVN-089270 for Nevada. Because the BLM is no 

10 longer considering a route that crosses into Nevada, the Nevada application has been 

11 withdrawn. 

12 The Companies are proposing to construct and operate approximately 990 miles of new 230-

13 kilovolt (kV), 345-kV, and 500-kV alternating current (AC) electric transmission system 

14 consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the 

15 Hemingway Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho (see Appendix A, 

16 Figure A-1). Greater detail is shown for each segment in maps found in Appendix A, Figures A17 2 through A-12. The proposed transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission 

18 lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the 

19 existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of 

20 additional energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. 

21 The Project includes ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of above22 ground, single-circuit transmission lines involving, access roads, multi-purpose yards, fly yards, 

23 pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply 

24 distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau 

25 of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), other federal agencies, and the 

26 states of Idaho and Wyoming.

27 The Plan of Development (POD) is intended to serve several purposes. It describes the Project, 

28 including its purpose and need, details of its construction and operation, and lists the measures 

29 the Companies have taken and will take to avoid, minimize, and mitigate for environmental 

30 impact. It provides the details needed to support the Companies’ application to the BLM and 

31 other agencies for rights of way or easements across lands managed by those agencies. The 

32 Companies intend that the BLM and other agencies use the details supplied in this POD to 

33 support the analysis for and the development of all needed permits for the construction and 

34 operation of the Project. 

35 The POD is organized as follows:

36 Section 1—Introduction and organizational structure

37 Section 2—Purpose and need for the project

38 Section 3—Details of the project description, including construction and operation procedures 

39 and protocols

40 Section 4—Plans that detail the Companies’ commitment to avoidance, minimization, and 

41 mitigation of environmental impact and the proposed means of accomplishing this 

42 commitment. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 1-2

1 The purpose of this version of the POD and the SF-299 (filed February 29, 2012) is to further 

2 supplement and revise information previously submitted through January 2010 and to support 

3 the analysis and publication of the BLM’s Final Environmental Impact Statement (FEIS) analysis 

4 and publication. This POD revises and supplements routes, substation descriptions, ROW and 

5 structure configurations, construction timeframes, and environmental protection plans contained 

6 in the January 2010 POD and SF-299. These revisions reflect responses to comments on the 

7 Draft EIS and further negotiations with stakeholders along the Project alignment. It provides 

8 revisions in Section 2 to clarify the Companies’ purpose and need; revises the project 

9 description in Section 3, and provides new and revised environmental protection plans in 

10 Section 4 and in the appendices to the POD.

11 This POD revision is submitted after the BLM has indicated its preferred route. An additional 

12 planning-level POD may be issued to support additional contracting and permitting once the 

13 route to be permitted has been finalized, and a final Construction POD (also known as a 

14 Construction, Operation, and Maintenance Plan for the Forest Service) will be issued as part of 

15 the Companies’ request to the various agencies for permission to proceed to construction. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-1

1 2.0 PROJECT PURPOSE AND NEED

2 The proposed transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to 

3 relieve operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric 

4 transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional energy 

5 for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project is 

6 principally necessary to serve the Companies’ customers, though other markets may also be 

7 served. While the earliest phase of the Project needs to be in service by 2018, each segment 

8 has its own construction schedule. A more detailed description of the route, design, and 

9 construction schedule is presented in Section 3.1.

10 Under Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) tariff requirements, utilities must plan, 

11 design, construct, operate, and maintain an adequate electric transmission system that meets 

12 not only the customers’ energy demands (measured in megawatt-hours) but also meet the 

13 customer’s peak load demands (measured in megawatts). Both are important in determining 

14 the need for the project.

15 2.1 PacifiCorp (Rocky Mountain Power)

16 PacifiCorp is an electric utility that transmits electricity via a grid of transmission lines located 

17 throughout a six-state region and a distribution system that serves more than 1.7 million retail 

18 customers. Rocky Mountain Power, a business unit of PacifiCorp, delivers electricity to 

19 approximately 1 million customers in Utah, Wyoming, and Idaho. As an essential service 

20 provider, Rocky Mountain Power is required to operate under the oversight and regulatory 

21 controls of the Public Service Commission of Utah, the Wyoming Public Service Commission, 

22 and the IPUC. Pacific Power, another business unit of PacifiCorp, provides service to 

23 approximately 730,000 customers in Oregon, Washington, and California, and is subject to the 

24 regulatory oversight of the Oregon Public Utility Commission, the Washington Utilities and 

25 Transportation Commission, and the California Public Utilities Commission. Although the 

26 objectives of these multiple commissions vary somewhat, they do share a common goal of 

27 ensuring utilities such as Rocky Mountain Power provide safe, reliable, adequate, and efficient 

28 delivery of electricity.

29 PacifiCorp’s system peak-hour load is forecast to increase from 10,450 MW in 2011 to 12,609 

30 MW in 2020, a 2.1 percent average annual growth rate. The Company’s eastern system peak is 

31 expected to continue growing faster than its western system peak, with average annual growth 

32 rates of 2.4 percent and 1.4 percent respectively, over the forecast horizon. PacifiCorp’s 

33 system-wide average customer load is also forecasted to grow at a 2.1 percent annual rate from 

34 2011 to 2020, increasing from 63,131,000 MWh in 2011 to 76,137,000 MWh in 2020. This 

35 average forecasted growth rate is moderately higher than the average growth rate experienced 

36 from 1995 to 2005 when the average increase per year was 1.6 percent. PacifiCorp’s three 

37 highest state loads—Oregon, Utah and Wyoming (included in the MWh loads above)—are 

38 forecasted to grow at a rate of 1.4 percent, 2.4 percent, and 2.9 percent, respectively, through 

39 the same 2011–2020 period (PacifiCorp 2011). PacifiCorp’s customer base in Wyoming is 

40 anticipated to increase by approximately 340 MW in the same timeframe. The growth rate is 

41 reflective of all customer loads.

42 PacifiCorp is a public utility under the jurisdiction of the FERC. PacifiCorp is obligated to 

43 expand its transmission system to provide requested firm transmission service and to construct 

44 and place in service sufficient capacity to reliably deliver resources to customers requesting 

45 service and existing customers as provided in their OATT under Sections 15.4, 28.2, and 28.3 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-2

1 (FERC 2008). PacifiCorp’s Attachment K of the OATT also requires planning for the expansion 

2 of the system to ensure that its transmission system meets industry, regulatory, and reliability 

3 standards.

4 2.2 Idaho Power

5 Idaho Power is a wholly owned subsidiary of IDA-CORP, a holding company. Idaho Power is 

6 responsible for providing electrical service to its service area, which includes most of southern 

7 Idaho and a portion of eastern Oregon. The number of customers in Idaho Power’s service 

8 area is expected to increase from around 492,000 in 2010 to over 650,000 by 2030. Firm peak9 hour load (the peak hourly electricity that the system must supply when demand is at its highest) 

10 has increased from 2,052 MW in 1990 to over 3,000 MW in 2006, 2007, 2008, and 2009. In 

11 June 2008, the peak-hour load reached 3,214 MW, which was a new system peak-hour record.

12 Average firm load (the average annual demand from customers) has increased from 10,500,000 

13 megawatt hours (MWh) in 1990 to 15,800,000 MWh in 2008 (excluding Astaris/FMC) (IPC 

14 2011). While the economic downturn is expected to depress customer demand for electricity in 

15 the near term, Idaho Power forecasts that their average-system load will continue to grow at 

16 about 1.4 percent per year (29 average MW [aMW] annually) over the 20-year planning period. 

17 During the same 20-year planning period, the peak-hour load is expected to increase at 1.8 

18 percent per year (69 MW annually) (IPC 2011).

19 Idaho Power is a regulated public utility under the laws of the State of Idaho whose mission is to 

20 provide reliable, responsible, fair-priced energy. Idaho Power operates under the oversight and 

21 regulatory controls of the Idaho Public Utility Commission (IPUC). Under Title 61 of the IPUC 

22 regulations, Idaho Power “shall furnish, provide and maintain such service, instrumentalities, 

23 equipment and facilities as shall promote the safety, health, comfort and convenience of its 

24 patrons, employees and the public, and shall be in all respects adequate, efficient, just and 

25 reasonable.”

26 Idaho Power is also a public utility under the jurisdiction of the FERC. Idaho Power is obligated 

27 to expand its transmission system to provide requested firm transmission service, and to 

28 construct and place in service sufficient capacity to reliably deliver resources to network and 

29 native load customers as provided in their Open Access Transmission Tariff (OATT) under 

30 Sections 15.4 and 28.3 (FERC 2008). Idaho Power’s OATT requires planning for the expansion 

31 of the transmission system in order to provide network integration transmission services that 

32 complies with regulatory reliability standards.

33 Idaho Power’s 2011 Integrated Resource Plan (IRP) divides the 20-year planning horizon into 

34 two 10-year segments. The first 10-year period is analyzed first (2011-2020), followed by the 

35 second 10-year period (2021-2030). Idaho Power customer needs are largely met in the first 

36 10-year period with the construction of the Boardman to Hemingway transmission line project.

37 For the second 10-year period, ten resource portfolios were analyzed in the IRP and some of 

38 these portfolios required Gateway West transmission capacity to deliver energy to major load 

39 centers in southern Idaho while others did not. The need for Gateway West capacity in each of 

40 these portfolios was driven by the assumed locations of the resources in each portfolio.

41 While the selected portfolio for the second 10-year period was marginally able to deliver energy 

42 to major load centers without additional transmission capacity across southern Idaho, many of 

43 the other portfolios analyzed did require additional transmission capacity. The selection of 

44 resources in the second 10-year period is largely an academic exercise, and is likely to change 

45 substantially every two years when the IRP is updated.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-3

1 Without adequate transmission capacity across southern Idaho, the Company’s ability to site 

2 future generation resources will be limited. The long lead time required to permit, design and 

3 construct high voltage transmission simply will not allow new transmission capacity to be built in 

4 conjunction with the construction schedule of a new generation resource. Therefore, Idaho 

5 Power believes it is prudent to continue to pursue additional transmission capacity across 

6 southern Idaho through the Gateway West project.

7 2.3 Team Constructional and Operational Responsibilities 

8 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power signed an agreement in 2007 to approach permitting 

9 the Project as a team. That teaming agreement is still in place, though RMP has taken the lead 

10 in the place of Idaho Power in the permitting effort as of January 12, 2012. Rocky Mountain 

11 Power is responsible for the construction and operation of Segments 1 through 4. Construction 

12 and operation of Segments 5 through 10 is still under discussion and has not been resolved as 

13 of the date of this POD. When this information is known, it will be provided in an update to the 

14 POD. 

15 2.4 Federal Oversight of Transmission Planning

16 The Companies are subject to federal and state oversight and regulation for the planning, 

17 construction, operation, and maintenance of their energy transmission system. Under the 

18 FERC’s authority, the Companies are required to conduct transmission planning necessary to 

19 reliably serve their native load customers and conduct planning for third-party transmission 

20 service requests in compliance with its FERC-approved Open Access Transmission Tariff 

21 (OATT). Procedures and processes for transmission planning for network customers and for 

22 third-party requests is documented in OATT Section III- Network Integration Transmission 

23 Service and subsections 28 through 33. Gateway West, as part of the larger Energy Gateway 

24 concept, has been developed, engineered, designed and will be constructed to reliably deliver 

25 designated network resources to network customer loads, both today and long-term. 

26 FERC Order 890 presently provides the transmission planning requirements for public utility 

27 transmission providers nationwide, including all public utility transmission providers within 

28 WECC. Through Order 890, FERC requires that transmission providers participate in local 

29 planning processes as well as sub-regional and regional planning processes. PacifiCorp and 

30 Idaho Power both participate in the Northern Tier Transmission Group (NTTG), which is a sub31 regional planning group comprised of transmission providers and customers. PacifiCorp and 

32 Idaho Power are also active in WECC regional transmission planning committees and studies.

33 FERC issued Order 1000 in July 2011 with the requirement that public utility transmission 

34 providers make compliance filings on most of the issues by October 2012. The following is a 

35 summary of FERC Order 1000, as stated in the Order:

36 “The Federal Energy Regulatory Commission is amending the transmission planning and cost 

37 allocation requirements established in Order No. 890 to ensure that Commission‐jurisdictional 

38 services are provided at just and reasonable rates and on a basis that is just and reasonable and not 

39 unduly discriminatory or preferential. With respect to transmission planning, this Final Rule: (1) 

40 requires that each public utility transmission provider participate in a regional transmission planning 

41 process that produces a regional transmission plan; (2) requires that each public utility transmission 

42 provider amend its OATT to describe procedures that provide for the consideration of transmission 

43 needs driven by public policy requirements in the local and regional transmission planning 

44 processes; (3) removes from Commission‐approved tariffs and agreements a federal right of first 

45 refusal for certain new transmission facilities; and (4) improves coordination between neighboring 

46 transmission planning regions for new interregional transmission facilities. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-4

1 Also, this Final Rule requires that each public utility transmission provider must participate in a 

2 regional transmission planning process that has: (1) a regional cost allocation method for the cost of 

3 new transmission facilities selected in a regional transmission plan for purposes of cost allocation; 

4 and (2) an interregional cost allocation method for the cost of certain new transmission facilities that 

5 are located in two or more neighboring transmission planning regions and are jointly evaluated by 

6 the regions in the interregional transmission coordination procedures required by this Final Rule. 

7 Each cost allocation method must satisfy six cost allocation principles.”

8 NTTG members are in the process of identifying and modifying the existing compliance filings to 

9 address the requirements of Order 1000; however, it is believed that transmission planning 

10 process under the Order 1000 requirements will remain largely unchanged from the Order 890 

11 requirements within the NTTG footprint. NTTG’s current planning process evaluates the 

12 reliability of the transmission system 10 years into the future. Each load serving entity provides 

13 10 year projections for load and generation. The load and resource projections serve as the 

14 basis for analysis. The adequacy of the existing transmission system is evaluated for the future 

15 projections. The adequacy of the future transmission system is then evaluated for various 

16 seasonal demand and generation scenarios with proposed transmission improvements.

17 An Order 1000 modification of note, as differentiated from Order 890 requirements, is that the 

18 NTTG regional transmission plan must identify transmission facilities that “more efficiently or 

19 cost-effectively” meet the region’s reliability, economic and Public Policy Requirements. In other 

20 words, a project’s relative benefit and cost will now be analyzed as part of the transmission 

21 planning process, and the transmission plan (a single plan) will be a compilation of proposed 

22 projects that most “efficiently and cost-effectively” meet a region’s needs.

23 The Gateway West project is one of the projects in the 2011 NTTG Biennial Transmission Plan 

24 and will most certainly be included in the 2012-2013 NTTG regional planning process. Once 

25 NTTG adopts the requirements of Order 1000, the transmission planning process will evaluate 

26 the efficiency and cost effectiveness of projects within the plan and consider any proposed 

27 alternatives that may address regional needs more efficiently or cost effectively than the 

28 projects proposed by the transmission providers in local transmission plans. It is too early to 

29 predict the Order 1000 implications on the Gateway West project with much certainty; however, 

30 Order 1000 will not undermine the previously established load service need that the project is 

31 intended to address.

32 FERC granted the Company incentive rate treatment, but equally important, the commission 

33 issued a 4-0 decision in which FERC stated:

34 “...we find that PacifiCorp has adequately demonstrated that the Project (with the exception of 

35 segment A) will ensure reliability and reduce transmission congestion... We find that segments B 

36 through H of the Project would establish for the first time a backbone of 500 kV transmission lines in 

37 PacifiCorp’s Wyoming, Idaho and Utah regions. This would provide a platform for integrating and 

38 coordinating future regional and sub‐regional electric transmission projects being considered in the 

39 Pacific Northwest and the Intermountain West, connection existing and potential generation to loads 

40 in an efficient manner, thus reducing the cost of delivered power. Also, the Petition cites the 2006 

41 DOE National Electric Transmission Congestion Study and the 2004 Rocky Mountain Area 

42 Transmission Study in stating that that proposed Project will reduce congestion or maintain reliability 

43 in the Western Interconnection. Additionally, the project would establish a direct link between 

44 PacifiCorp’s east and west control areas, providing numerous benefits including increasing transfer 

45 capability, reducing the need for curtailments, and reducing transmission congestion.”

46 WECC 10-Year Regional Transmission Plan was approved by the WECC Board of Directors 

47 September 22, 2011 and Plan Summary can be found at: 

48 (http://www.wecc.biz/library/StudyReport/Documents/Plan_Summary.pdf). Energy Gateway, including 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-5

1 Gateway West, is an integral part of the Foundational Transmission Project identified for the 

2 Regional Plan as shown in Section 3.2.3-Transmission. Independent stakeholders involved in 

3 data input, development and review of the plan are identified in Section 6-Organizations 

4 Involved in Development of the Plan.

5 2.5 State Regulation of Transmission

6 The state commissions involved in the review of Gateway West are Utah, Wyoming, Idaho, 

7 Oregon, California and possibly Washington. These are the states where the Companies serve 

8 retail customers. Each state has approved regulatory processes to review and determine the 

9 prudence and usefulness of any investment made on behalf of the Companies’ 2.2 million 

10 customers. Although each state has slight variations in the regulatory process, essentially 

11 approval of investments occurs in the following two steps.

12 1. Each company files for a Certificate of Public Convenience and Necessity (CPCN) in the 

13 states physically impacted by the investment. For Gateway West, the Companies will 

14 file in Idaho and Wyoming. This process determines that an investment proposed by the 

15 Company is in the public interest and is necessary to provide safe, adequate and reliable 

16 electric service. The Companies will initiate this process when the BLM publishes the 

17 final EIS. 

18 2. The Companies file for cost recovery of an investment through a rate case. This step 

19 occurs after the investment is made and the respective project is constructed and placed 

20 in service. This review focuses on prudence of project alternative selection, cost control, 

21 customer benefits and usefulness of the facilities resulting from the investment. Funds 

22 expended in advance of this prudency review and rate change approval by each state 

23 are ‘at risk’ as transmission projects are rarely “preapproved” by the states before they 

24 are initiated. There is no uniform pre-approval process for investments or for approval of 

25 project development investments in all states.

26 These regulatory processes change occasionally to facilitate additional and more 

27 comprehensive review by commissions and stakeholders. As an example, Rocky Mountain 

28 Power agreed in its recent 2010 Wyoming rate case settlement to provide additional justification 

29 for Gateway West and other Gateway segments through future regulatory filings in Wyoming. 

30 This will give the Wyoming commission and Wyoming customers additional information and 

31 insight into the need and benefits of these transmission investments prior to the Companies

32 initiating construction. PacifiCorp sees this as a positive development for the company, the 

33 commission and customers. 

34 In support of this two-step process the Companies engage in a series of regional activities to 

35 inform commissions and stakeholders about its projects, their purpose and need and investment 

36 requirements. The IRPs are examples of this informational process. As regulated utilities, both 

37 Idaho Power and Rocky Mountain Power are required to produce and periodically update an 

38 IRP for each state in which they operate, with the exception of Wyoming. The Public Utilities 

39 Commissions of the states where these utilities operate review and acknowledge these IRPs 

40 and their updates.

41 2.6 Demand Side Management

42 Part of the planning process that results in the IRPS and their updates includes addressing 

43 conservation and other means of reducing or controlling the growth of the demand for electricity 

44 among the utilities’ customers. When the Public Utilities Commission for a given state 

45 acknowledges the IRP, it is agreeing that the balance of demand-side measures and 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-6

1 development of additional generation resources, including associated transmission, is 

2 appropriate to meet the needs of the customers of its state while complying with the various 

3 laws and regulations on renewable energy requirements, carbon emissions, and other energy4 related issues.

5 The Companies have detailed their demand-side management in their respective IRPs, which 

6 have been acknowledged by the Public Utilities Commissions for which they were written (RMP 

7 2011; IPC 2011).

8 2.7 Existing Transmission System Reliability Constraints

9 Transmission systems in the United States must be planned, operated, and maintained under 

the North American Electrical Reliability Corporation (NERC)1 10 reliability performance standards. 

11 These mandatory national standards govern the level of performance and reliability of the Bulk 

12 Electric System (BES) operated within the United States. Additionally, the Companies are 

governed by the Western Electricity Coordinating Council (WECC)2 13 policy procedures, criteria, 

14 and standards that may be more stringent than those required by NERC. In compliance with 

15 the above standards, transmission systems must be planned, designed, built, and continually 

16 operated with sufficient levels of redundancy to enable the transmission system to reliably 

17 operate in the event of the loss of any single element (i.e., generation unit, transmission line 

18 segment or substation equipment) or loss of multiple elements, thereby providing adequate 

19 service to Customers and to other interconnected utilities. Adding new transmission facilities to 

20 a network provides not only new transmission capacity but also levels of backup to each other 

21 during outage conditions when elements of the system are taken out of service during both 

22 planned and unplanned events.

23 Transmission paths consist of single lines or combinations of lines operated together as a single 

24 transmission unit to maximize capacity of the system and to maintain reliability. Path capacities 

25 are usually limited by the line in the path with the least capacity. The capacity ratings of the 

26 paths are based on maintaining established reliability criteria. The existing path capacity 

27 “bottlenecks” and how the path rating will increase with the Gateway West segments in place 

28 are shown Table 2.7-1.

29

 1 NERC’s mission is to improve the reliability and security of the bulk power system in North America. To achieve 

that, NERC develops and enforces reliability standards; monitors the bulk power system; assesses future adequacy; 

audits owners, operators, and users for preparedness; and educates and trains industry personnel. NERC is a selfregulatory organization that relies on the diverse and collective expertise of industry participants. As the Electric 

Reliability Organization, NERC is subject to audit by the FERC and governmental authorities in Canada (NERC 

2012).

2 WECC and the nine other regional reliability councils were formed due to national concern regarding the reliability of 

the interconnected bulk power systems, the ability to operate these systems without widespread failures in electric 

service, and the need to foster the preservation of reliability through a formal organization. The Western 

Interconnection encompasses a vast area of nearly 1.8 million square miles. It is the largest and most diverse of the 

eight regional councils of the NERC. WECC’s territory extends from Canada to Mexico. It includes the provinces of 

Alberta and British Columbia, the northern portion of Baja California, Mexico, and all or portions of the 14 western 

states in between (WECC 2011).
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-7

1

2 Table 2.7-1. Rating and Capacity of Paths with and without the Gateway West Project

Path Name 2/

Path Rating 

Limit (Present 

Operational 

Maxima) (MW)

Existing 

Available 

Transmission 

Capacity 

(MW)

Proposed 

Gateway West 

Parallel 

Segments 1/

Planned 

Rating/Capacity 

Increase from 

Gateway West 

(MW)

Proposed Path 

Rating/Capacity 

with Gateway 

West (MW)

TOT 4A (WY 

Northeast to WY 

Central)

937 0 Segments 1W 

Windstar-Aeolus

838 1,775

Aeolus West 

(WY Central to 

WY Southwest)

NA NA Segments 2 and 

3, AeolusAnticline plus 

existing lines

2,670 2,670

Bridger West

2,400 0 Segment 4 Jim 

Bridger-Populus

1,700 4,100

Borah West

2,557 0 Segments 5, 6, 

and 7 PopulusBorah, BorahMidpoint, and 

Populus-Cedar 

Hill

1,893 4,450

Midpoint West

2,287 0 Segments 8, 9 

and 10 Cedar 

Hill-Midpoint, 

MidpointHemingway and 

Cedar HillHemingway

2,113 4,400

1/ Refer to Figure A-1 for segments and substations.

2/ Each of the paths listed in Table 2.7-1 is part of the Gateway West Project and is dependent on the others to move power 

from east to west (Wyoming to Idaho).

3 In siting new transmission facilities, the Companies are obliged to be prudent and site and install 

4 facilities to avoid a potential “common mode failures” where system element failures or outages 

5 can impact other elements during a single outage event (lines adjacent to each other on a 

6 common transmission tower or two parallel transmission lines in close proximity to each other). 

7 Common mode failures include, but are not limited to, a snagged lighting protection shield wire 

8 from one line being dragged into the adjacent line, an aircraft flying into more than one line, 

9 smoke from a fire across the ROW shorting out more than one line, lightning strikes affecting 

10 more than one line, high winds, dust storms, ice storms, blizzards, landslides, earthquakes, 

11 vandalism, and equipment failure. 

12 As a minimum requirement, NERC/WECC reliability performance standards require that a 

13 multiple contingency analysis (an analysis of the simultaneous failure of two adjacent lines) 

14 must be performed to evaluate the BES impact resulting from the loss of multiple transmission 

15 lines to the remaining transmission system. For the Gateway West analysis, the electrical 

16 power flowing on the two transmission lines, once removed from service, must now flow across 

17 the remaining transmission system in the area and subsequently overloads portions of the 

18 remaining system or the electric system enters an unstable operating state and shuts down. 

19 The useable system capacity limit is consequently reduced to protect the remaining system from 

20 this overload or unstable operating condition. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-8

1 When transmission lines are separated from each other, common mode failures pose a 

2 significantly reduced risk and the NERC/WECC reliability standards only requires evaluation of 

3 one line out of service at a time. Constructing transmission lines physically separated from 

4 each other allows the Companies to operate their interconnected electric system at a higher 

5 electrical capacity than would otherwise be possible. The net result of line separation is that 

6 fewer transmission lines are needed overall to adequately serve Customers’ energy needs.

7 Due to the high transfer capacity requirements necessary for the Gateway West Project, high8 capacity lines must be located on separate corridors to increase reliability and to provide the 

9 highest capacity possible. 

10 The WECC Board of Directors approved a regional transmission planning criterion (TPL [001-

11 004]-WECC-1-CR), on April 18, 2008. This planning criterion specifies that utilities must plan 

12 for two lines to be out of service at the same time if they are located adjacent to each other 

13 unless those lines are separated by at least “the longest span length of the two transmission 

14 circuits at the point of separation or 500 feet, whichever is greater, between the transmission 

15 circuits” (WECC 2008). This criterion has subsequently been revised, but the initial siting study 

16 for Gateway West was based on this criterion. 

17 In that study, the longest span was assumed to be 1,500 feet, thereby dictating the minimum 

18 distance between existing and proposed transmission lines. In the final design, the separation 

19 distance could increase where existing line spans are determined to be greater than 1,500 feet 

20 thereby requiring Gateway West to be located the maximum span distance away when adjacent 

21 to longer spans. This criterion in itself does not guarantee transmission system reliability or 

22 future system performance. Utilities are expected to use their history of experience and prudent 

23 judgment in planning, siting, and designing transmission systems to ensure the reliability of the 

24 interconnected grid. Utilities can and do elect to provide wider separation or select an alternate 

25 transmission line route to reduce the risk of multiple line outages along common routes used by 

26 high-capacity lines.

27 The recent WECC revision of this criterion affects only one of many criteria that need to be 

28 considered when planning transmission projects. Specifically, WECC has relaxed its definition 

29 of a common corridor from the greatest span or 500’ from an existing line to a minimum of 250’ 

30 from an existing line. The remaining criteria still obligate a transmission provider to take into 

31 consideration the potential impacts to reliability. For Gateway West, the originally planned 

32 minimum separation is still needed when taking into consideration potential impacts to reliability 

33 of siting the proposed project closer than the span distance of that adjacency. The Companies’ 

34 approach remains the same, and consistent with others, who have stated that ‘by far the most 

35 cost effective preemptive strategy against multiple simultaneous line loss involves ensuring 

36 adequate distance separation between lines at the planning stage’ (West Wide Energy Corridor 

37 EIS, ANL 2008). 

38 Even though the WECC separation criterion has been revised, the WECC/NERC requirements 

39 to provide reliable electricity have remained the same. Acts of nature such as fires or micro 

40 bursts or other acts such as vandalism or required fire suppression management may impact 

41 the reliability of the bulk transmission system if lines are sited in close proximity. Common 

42 corridor outages, in particular outages caused by smoke and fire, are prevalent through the 

43 open areas of Wyoming and Idaho. During the drier parts of the year, fires can ignite and move 

44 extremely fast. When heavy smoke rises to the level of the conductors, the air between the 

45 conductors loses some of its insulation properties, and the conductor will begin to conduct 

46 electricity to ground, or “fault”; protective instrumentation will disconnect the transmission line 

47 from the electrical system. If Gateway West transmission lines are constructed close to other 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-9

1 transmission lines and the two lines disconnect in rapid succession, major problems may result 

2 for the electrical grid, potentially leading to wide-spread outages (area blackouts).

3 There have been numerous occurrences of fire, wind, geological and other related corridor 

4 outages. If a major event did occur, preparation for a future similar outage would likely be 

5 mandated. The first step toward preparing for a similar occurrence would be to reduce the 

6 rating and capacity of the facilities, resulting in a project that is vastly inferior to the purpose and 

7 need. For example, following the WECC west wide disturbance in 1996 PacifiCorp was 

8 required to make a significant reduction in transmission system capacity ratings on its WECC 

9 rated Path C between southeast Idaho and northern Utah. A significant system capacity 

10 reduction, from 1,000 MW to 600 MW, was a direct result of the disturbance investigation by 

11 WECC, to reduce the stress on the system and gain more reliability. As a result PacifiCorp 

12 constructed the Populus to Terminal transmission line to restore reliability. The project 

13 sponsors believe the first step to avoid a common corridor outage is to locate the lines as far 

14 apart as feasibly possible, without creating additional undue impact to the environment and 

15 surrounding areas. Forcing the Gateway West project into close proximity to other lines 

16 undermines the overall purpose and need of the project.

17 If BLM were to consider an alternative for Gateway West that studied the consequences of 

18 siting the proposed Gateway West only 250 feet from existing transmission in one or more 

19 corridors along the proposed Project route, the Companies could not build that alternative 

20 because it would not meet minimum standards for reliability. The Companies received WECC 

21 approval to carry the proposed load found in the Purpose and Need for the Project based on the 

22 average separation distance, among several other factors, for the proposed Gateway West 

23 alignment. 

24 There were several instances where outages on systems operated by the Companies and 

25 others have led to serious consequences. In 2007, a fire burned through the Jim Bridger 

26 transmission line ROW resulting in an outage of all three 345-kV lines and three of the four Jim 

27 Bridger generating units (Gerrard 2010). Also in 2007, a fire caused the Mona – Huntington and 

28 Mona – Bonanza 345-kV lines in Central Utah to de-energize (Gerrard 2010). In California, two 

29 adjacent 500-kV line towers failed in 2005, leaving an estimated 5.2 million customers in 

30 California, Nevada, Oregon, and Texas without power (California ISO Corporation 2005).

31 To further ensure reliability requirements are met, the Companies have proposed that a 

32 permanent service road to each transmission structure be retained (see Appendix B, Section 

33 2.5, for further detail) to control vegetation in the ROW for safe operation and for periodic 

34 inspections and maintenance (IPC and RMP 2011).

35 2.8 Purpose of the Gateway West Project

36 This Project is designed to provide for the delivery of up to 1,500 MW to the service areas of the 

37 Companies and possibly other markets. From Windstar to Populus, Gateway West will deliver 

38 up to 1,500 MW of primarily wind energy for transmission to markets south and west of Populus, 

39 including the Wasatch Front. 

40 Idaho Power forecasts a peak-hour load growth of 69 MW per year over the next 10 years. 

41 PacifiCorp forecasts the megawatt-hour growth between 2010 and 2019 for Utah, Wyoming, 

42 and Oregon will be 6.8 million, 3.7 million, and 1.1 million megawatt-hours, respectively. These 

43 forecasts are based on the IRPs prepared by each company as required to fulfill the regulatory 

44 requirements and guidelines established by the public utilities commissions of the states served 

45 by the Companies (PacifiCorp 2011; IPC 2011). Each IRP addresses the obligations of each 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-10

1 company pursuant to its OATT to plan for and expand its respective transmission systems in a 

2 non-discriminatory manner based on the needs of its native load customers, network customers, 

3 and all eligible customers that agree to expand their transmission systems. This includes 

4 entities that generate or plan to generate electricity, including coal-fired, natural-gas-fired, and 

5 renewable energy sources (biogas, wind, and geothermal). 

6 The Bonneville Power Administration (BPA) supplies wholesale power to six utilities (two towns 

7 and four rural cooperatives) in Southeast Idaho. Until recently, a portion of that power has 

8 come from PacifiCorp and a portion from BPA’s hydroelectric facilities. PacifiCorp has given 

9 BPA a five-year notice that it will no longer supply power under the old agreement. Therefore, 

10 by 2017, BPA must come up with another source of power for its six small utility clients in 

11 Southeast Idaho. As a part of future planning, BPA has entered into an agreement with 

12 PacifiCorp and Idaho Power to help fund the permitting of the Boardman to Hemingway (B2H) 

13 project and to consider the possibility of asset swaps in the future. 

14 BPA is considering six alternatives to provide that power:

15 • Power Purchase with OATT Service

16 • B2H with OATT Service

17 • B2H with Transmission Asset Swaps

18 • MSTI with Tap to Goshen Substation

19 • Two BPA Construction Scenarios from Montana to SE Idaho

20 The second alternative depends upon the capacity of Gateway West through Idaho as well as 

21 on the completion of B2H. The other options do not depend upon the completion of the 

22 Gateway West project. BPA conducted a public comment period on these options which closed 

23 August 27, 2012. BPA must still conduct a NEPA analysis on its options to supply power to its 

24 Southeast Idaho customers, which has not yet started (BPA 2012). In October 2012, the BPA 

25 announced that it had selected the B2H with Transmission Asset Swaps as its top priority for 

26 pursuit. While BPA is not ruling out the other options, it is less likely that BPA will select the 

27 second alternative that depends upon the capacity of Gateway West through Idaho (BPA 

28 2012a).

29 Gateway West is independent of, and will be built regardless of, any particular new generation 

30 project. The transmission grid of which it will become a part can be thought of in terms of hub 

31 and spokes, with a backbone connecting to the hubs. Each substation is a hub and receives or 

32 sends electricity along the spokes. For this system to work, a backbone of high-capacity 

33 transmission lines is needed to connect the hubs and transport the electricity from where it is or 

34 can be generated (in this case, mostly Wyoming but also Idaho), to where it is needed (in this 

35 case, mostly Idaho and Utah, though other markets may also be served).

36 2.8.1 Gateway West Substation Purposes 

37 This Project proposes to connect 12 substations, which are essential control points for the route. 

38 These are illustrated in Appendix A, Figure A-1, and in subsequent maps by segment. The 

39 purposes of the individual substations to support the need for the overall location of the 

40 Gateway West Project are displayed in Table 2.8-1. Nine of the substations are in service now 

41 and three are proposed as part of this Project. 

42
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-11

1 Table 2.8-1. Substations to Be Connected by Gateway West

Substation Description Purpose

Windstar Existing: 

interconnection and 

generation-driven

The purpose of this substation is to integrate future wind and thermal 

resources with the existing transmission system by adding one existing 

230-kV transmission line into the substation. The Gateway West Project 

starts at this substation because of the recent large development of 

nearby energy sources needing transmission to points west, including 

200 MW integrated at the Windstar 230-kV Substation, Glen Rock 1 & III 

– 138.5 MW, Rolling Hills – 99 MW, Three Buttes – 99 MW, and Casper 

Wind – 17 MW. 

Dave Johnston 

Power Plant 

Existing: 

interconnection and 

generation-driven

Work inside the existing 230kV yard will consist of rebuilding bus 

breakers and switches to increase capacity to match the rebuilt 1W(c). 

No ground-disturbing activity or expansion of the fence line will be 

needed. 

Heward Existing : 

interconnection-driven

The existing Difficulty substation will be expanded. The expanded 

portion is given a new name because ownership is different. Difficulty 

must be kept in service while Segment 1W(c) is reconstructed, requiring 

the additional bus construction to be conducted adjacent to the existing 

substation. Construction of Heward will allow PacifiCorp to control the 

operation of the new buses, essential for reliability of the reconstruction. 

Shirley Basin Existing: 

interconnection-driven

Shirley Basin is an existing interconnection point for an existing wind 

energy facility. 1W(c) must interconnect here during the reconstruction 

of the line and the communication system must be improved. However, 

there will be no expansion of the fence line and no ground disturbance 

anticipated. 

Aeolus Proposed : part of 

Gateway West, 

generation-driven

This substation is intended to serve high wind areas identified in portions 

of Wyoming and will be the location for interconnecting new wind-driven 

sourced energy. The Aeolus 230-kV substation will be integrated into 

the RMP transmission system by looping the Dave Johnston – Heward –

Shirley Basin – Miners 230-kV line into Aeolus. Aeolus will be used to 

interconnect future wind generation projects.

Anticline Proposed: part of 

Gateway West, 

generation-driven

The new transmission lines will interconnect to the existing transmission 

system in the vicinity of the Jim Bridger Power Plant by constructing a 

new substation nearby. The purpose of the proposed substation is to 

support the existing thermal generation hub as well as an expanded hub 

for new wind resources expected to be sited in the area.

Jim Bridger 

Power Plant 345-

kV 

Existing: 

interconnection and 

generation-driven

This substation will be expanded to connect the Jim Bridger Power Plant 

with a new transmission line. No new generation will be added at the 

Jim Bridger Power Plant as a result or as part of this Project. 

Populus Existing: 

interconnection and 

generation-driven

This substation will interconnect with the proposed Gateway West 500-

kV transmission lines, the existing Jim Bridger West 345-kV system, and 

the 345-kV transmission lines running north-south. The north-south 345-

kV transmission lines (not part of Gateway West) begin at the Populus 

Substation (near Downey, Idaho), run south to the Wasatch Front1/, and 

transport new resources south to the Wasatch Front demand centers. 

Borah Existing: 

interconnection and 

load-driven

The substation expansion will allow the interconnection of new 500-kV 

transmission lines between Populus and Midpoint, as well as a new 

termination of a 345-kV line to Kinport. 

Midpoint Existing: 

interconnection and 

load-driven

The substation expansion will allow interconnection of new transmission 

lines from Cedar Hill and Hemingway and allow for the existing 345-kV 

transmission line between Borah and Midpoint Substations to be 

energized at 500 kV, thereby creating a continuous 500-kV system 

expansion and reliability tie with the Cedar Hill Substation

2

3
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-12

1 Table 2.8-1. Substations to be Connected by Gateway West (continued)

Substation Description Purpose

Cedar Hill Proposed: part of 

Gateway West, loaddriven

The substation serves two purposes:

1) a reliability tie between the proposed Gateway West north and south 

transmission lines, and 

2) a 500-kV to 230-kV transformation station for serving the Magic Valley 

load. This will complement the existing service from Midpoint to the north of 

the Magic Valley. The Magic Valley Electrical Plan is under development, 

with this station being considered as a future source to the valley.

Hemingway Existing; 

interconnection and 

load-driven

The substation expansion will serve as an interconnection point for the 

Gateway West, Summer Lake, Boardman, and Captain Jack 

transmission lines. The station itself currently serves the Treasure 

Valley load. The station is the southwestern 500-kV to 230-kV 

transformation point in the Treasure Valley 500-kV loop, as defined in 

the Treasure Valley Electrical Plan. The Hemingway Substation is the 

western terminus of the Gateway West Project because it is the major 

load point for the generation resources brought in from the east, 

primarily Wyoming.

1/ About 75 to 80 percent of all of the electricity use in the state of Utah is in the area known as the Wasatch Front. 

This area includes the entire electrical load served out of the Spanish Fork Substation in the south up to the 

electrical load served out of the Ben Lomond Substation in the north. This includes parts of Juab and Sanpete 

Counties, and all of Utah, Salt Lake, Summit, Tooele, Wasatch, Davis, Morgan, and Weber Counties.

2 2.8.2 Gateway West Transmission Line Segment Purposes

3 Table 2.8-2 summarizes the purpose for each of the segments of Gateway West. Each 

4 segment’s Project description is presented in detail in Section 3.

5 Table 2.8-2. Gateway West Transmission Line Segments

Transmission Line Segment Purpose 

Segment 1W—Windstar to Aeolus, 

single-circuit 230-kV and Dave 

Johnston to Aeolus , rebuilt 230-kV line

Transport existing and new resources to load centers farther west via 

interconnection at Aeolus Substation. This line also represents the 

Companies’ portion of a future 230-kV network of lines that are required to 

integrate other projects in areas of high wind potential.

Segment 2—Aeolus to Creston1/, 

single-circuit 500-kV line 

Transport new resources to load centers farther west. 

Segment 3—Creston1/ to Anticline, 

single-circuit 500-kV line 

Transport new resources to load demand centers farther west. 

Segment 3A—Anticline to Jim Bridger 

345-kV 

Provide for bidirectional transfer of power and integration of the Gateway 

West project by providing an intermediate tie line with the existing EHV 

system at Jim Bridger Substation. 

Segment 4—Anticline to Populus, 

single-circuit 500-kV line 

Transport new resources to load demand centers farther west and 

interconnect with existing systems. 

Segment 5—Populus to Borah, singlecircuit 500-kV lineTransport Wyoming energy resources from Populus to loads in southern 

Idaho and the Pacific Northwest. Additionally, this line will transport 

Pacific Northwest sourced energy to Populus to serve load in the Salt 

Lake City metropolitan area. Provides physical separation to meet 

reliability criteria between a northern route (Populus – Borah – Midpoint –

Hemingway) and a southern route (Populus – Cedar Hill – Hemingway). 

Physical separation is needed due to existing transmission line congestion 

(multiple lines in the same area) and wildland fires resulting in outages. 

Segment 6—Borah to Midpoint, 

energize existing 345-kV line to 500 kV

Increase the capacity of the existing line to transport existing and new 

energy resources in the service areas of the two Companies. Replace or 

reconfigure up to five spans at each end to accommodate new 

connections in substations to new 500-kV bays. No new transmission line 

construction

6
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 2-13

1 Table 2.8-2. Gateway West Transmission Line Segments (continued)

Transmission Line Segment Purpose 

Segment 7—Populus to Cedar Hill, 

single-circuit 500-kV line

Transport existing and new energy resources to load demand centers to 

the west. Additionally, this line will transport existing and new Pacific 

Northwest energy resources to serve load demand centers to the east. 

Provide physical separation to meet reliability criteria between a northern 

route (Populus – Borah – Midpoint – Hemingway) and a southern route 

(Populus – Cedar Hill – Hemingway). Physical separation is needed due 

to existing transmission line congestion (multiple lines in the same area) 

and wildland fires resulting in outages. 

Segment 8—Midpoint to Hemingway, 

single-circuit 500-kV line

Transport existing and new energy resources to load demand centers 

throughout the system. Provide physical separation to meet reliability 

criteria between a northern route (Populus – Borah – Midpoint –

Hemingway) and a southern route (Populus – Cedar Hill – Hemingway). 

Physical separation is needed due to existing transmission line congestion 

(multiple lines in the same area) and wildland fires resulting in outages. 

Segment 9—Cedar Hill to Hemingway, 

single-circuit 500-kV line

Transport energy resources to serve load demand centers throughout the 

system. Provide physical separation to meet reliability criteria between a 

northern route (Populus – Borah – Midpoint – Hemingway) and a southern 

route (Populus – Cedar Hill – Hemingway). Physical separation is needed 

due to existing transmission line congestion (multiple lines in the same 

area) and wildland fires resulting in outages.

Segment 10—Midpoint to Cedar Hill, 

single-circuit 500-kV line

Provide a midway tie between the northern and southern routes, which is 

required for system reliability to move flows of the north system or the 

south system when transporting greater than 2,500 MW of power. 1/ 2 Creston Substation has been deleted from the Project. The location of the Creston substation is now used as the 

3 dividing point between Segments 2 and 3. See Section 3 for details. 

4
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-1

1 3.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2 3.1 Overall Project

3 As proposed in this revised POD, the Gateway West Project is composed of ten segments of 

4 high-voltage transmission lines that will run between proposed or existing substations. These 

5 segments start at the existing Windstar Substation close to the Dave Johnston Power Plant near 

6 Glenrock, Wyoming, and continue west until reaching the existing Hemingway Substation 

7 approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. An overview map of the Project location and 

8 facilities is provided in Appendix A, Figure A-1. Figure A-1 shows the Proposed Route (red). 

9 Maps of each segment are shown on Figures A-2 through A-12 in Appendix A. Maps of each 

10 existing or proposed substation are provided in Appendix A as Figures A-13 through A-24. 

11 Changes since Draft Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) and January 2010 POD

12 The major facility design changes from the Project described in the Draft Environmental Impact 

13 Statement (EIS) and January 2010 POD are:

14 Elimination of Segment 1E – Elimination of the proposed single-circuit 230-kV line that would 

15 have been constructed between Windstar and Aeolus along Segment 1E. Segment 1E is no 

16 longer part of the Project because of lack of timely development of previously announced and 

17 planned wind resources within the project timeframe. As now proposed, Segment 1 will be a 

18 new 230-kV line between the Windstar and Aeolus substations (Segment 1W(a)) and a 

19 reconstruction of an existing 230-kV line between Dave Johnston Power Plant and Aeolus 

20 Substation (Segment 1W(c)). Elimination of Segment 1E results in the elimination of some 

21 equipment in the Windstar and Aeolus substations.

22 Elimination of one of the Segment 2, 3, and 4 electrical circuits – Adoption of one single23 circuit 500-kV transmission line for Segments 2, 3, and 4. This alternative is described in the 

24 Draft EIS as the first phase of the Schedule Variation and therefore is fully evaluated in that 

25 document. The difference between the Schedule Variation and the Project as described herein 

26 is that the second phase will not be built. Elimination of the second circuit between Aeolus and 

27 Populous Substations eliminates the need for the Creston and Bridger 230-kV Substations and 

28 some equipment in the Aeolus and Anticline Substations. .

29 Elimination of Creston Substation – The demand for oil and gas field electrical energy has 

30 not materialized. The Creston Substation is no longer needed and therefore was eliminated. 

31 However, the location continues to be used as the terminus for Segments 2 and 3, whose 

32 routing was determined by the WWEC and by the Wyoming Governor’s EO-2011-5.

33 Proposed Route changes – Since the January 2010 POD, engineering has progressed on 

34 portions of the Proposed Route. A design centerline has been developed for portions of the 

35 Proposed Route Segments 1W(a), 1W(c), 2, 3, 4, and portions of 7. These micro-siting 

36 changes range from less than 100 feet up to several miles. The changes are due to more site37 specific information, refined design criteria for structure placement and conductor spans, and 

38 compliance with clearance and set-back codes for mine operations, railroads, and highways. 

39 Other changes are due to continued consultation with landowners. Finally, the Companies have 

40 adopted Alternative 2C and Alternative 4A as their Proposed Routes based on public comment 

41 during the Draft EIS review process. 

42 Variation changes – The Schedule Variation, Structure Variation, and Design Variation 

43 alternatives are no longer part of the Project. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-2

1 To maintain the segment numbering system and naming convention with the elimination of the 

2 Creston Substation, the location of the termination of Segment 2 and the beginning of Segment 

3 3 is now simply called “Creston.”

4 The following Project description incorporates the changes described above.

5 3.1.1 Proposed Project

6 The Project starts in Wyoming at the Windstar Substation and Dave Johnston Power Plant. 

7 Segment 1W(a) for the most part follows or parallels the West-wide Energy (WWE) corridor and 

8 an existing 230-kV line. This 230-kV line is the proposed route for reconstruction as Segment 

9 1W(c). Both lines will terminate at the proposed Aeolus Substation. The Project then proceeds 

10 as one single-circuit 500-kV line from Aeolus to Populus Substation though Segments 2, 3, and 

11 4. The interconnection from Anticline to its neighboring existing substation at the Jim Bridger 

12 Power Plant, Segment 3A, is 5.5 miles of 345-kV single-circuit line. At Populus, the Gateway 

13 West Project splits into two single-circuit 500-kV roughly parallel paths. Segments 5, 6, and 8 

14 follow a more northerly route toward the Hemingway Substation through the Borah and Midpoint 

15 Substations, while Segments 7 and 9 travel a more southerly route through the Cedar Hill 

16 Substation to Hemingway. Segment 10 provides an interconnection between the Cedar Hill and 

17 Midpoint Substations and also provides an interconnection between the more northerly and 

18 more southerly routes. The Companies have proposed this split because of the need to serve 

19 loads along the way and also to increase reliability.

20 The transmission line segments will cross federal, state, and private lands. Table 3.1-1 

21 summarizes miles crossed by ownership for the Proposed Route. The total length of all 

22 segments requiring new transmission line construction is approximately 1,000 miles. The ROW 

23 width requested for the transmission line is 125 feet for single-circuit 230-kV segments, 150 feet 

24 for the 345-kV segment, and 250 feet for single-circuit 500-kV segments.

25 Facilities included as part of the Project include:

26 • Ten transmission line segments, including their associated access roads, multi-use and 

27 helicopter fly yards, and other temporary construction ground disturbances; 

28 • Three proposed substations and expansion or modifications at nine existing substations; 

29 • Other associated facilities including communication systems and optical fiber 

30 regeneration stations, and 

31 • Access roads and distribution supply lines where needed for proposed substations and 

32 optical fiber regeneration stations.

33 Details of construction and operations are summarized in Section 3.5 and detailed in Appendix 

34 B. Environmental protection plans are briefly summarized in Section 4.0 and included as 

35 appendices. These plans are considered part of the Project description for the proposed 

36 Project. Table 3.1-2 illustrates and summarizes the Proposed Action. Table 3.1-3 shows the 

37 construction schedule for the Project.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-3

Table 3.1-1. Proposed Project Summary of Miles and Percent Crossed by Ownership

Segment Length (Miles) Percent of Total

BLM NF1/ State Private Other 2 Total BLM NF State Private Other

Segment 1W(a) – Windstar to Aeolus 27.0 2.3 17.5 27.0 0.1 73.8 36.6 3.1 23.6 36.5 0.1

Segment 1W(c) – Dave Johnston to 

Aeolus 24.7 2.3 16.1 30.4 .1 73.6 33.6 3.2 21.8 41.3 0.1

Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston 37.6 – 4.7 49.5 0.1 91.9 41.0 – 5.1 53.9 0.1

Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline 22.5 – 1.0 22.5 – 45.9 48.9 – 2.2 48.9 –

Segment 3A—Anticline to Jim Bridger 

345-kV 3.2 1.9 5.1 63.0 37.0

Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus 72.0 9.1 12.5 100.7 3.3 197.6 36.4 4.6 6.3 500.9 1.7

Segment 5 – Populus to Borah 13.2 – 3.6 38.9 0.1 55.7 23.7 – 6.5 69.8 .1

Segment 6 – Borah to Midpoint3/ – – 0.5 – 0.5 – 100.0 –

Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill 28.3 – 4.3 85.6 – 118.2 24.0 – 3.6 72.4 –

Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway 87.1 – 9.3 31.5 3.6 131.5 66.2 – 7.1 24.0 2.7

Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway 129.2 – 4.6 28.4 – 162.2 79.7 – 2.8 17.5 –

Segment 10 – Midpoint to Cedar Hill 16.2 – – 18.0 0.1 34.4 47.2 – – 52.5 0.3

Total Project4/ 461.1 13.7 73.4 434.9 7.3 990.5 46.6 1.4 7.3 43.9 0.7

1/ Totals reflect mileage crossed on National Forest System (NFS) land. 

2/ Other includes Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, etc.

3/ Segment 6 does not include ground-disturbing activity except in association with the expanded Borah and Midpoint Substations.

4/ Totals may not equal 100 percent due to rounding.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-4

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities 

Project Facility Description

Transmission Line Segments

Transmission Line Features 

Common to All Proposed 500-

kV Segments

• Three-phase 500-kV construction for all tower designs, conductor 

spacing and clearances1. 

• Conductors: Bundled 1949.6 kcmil 42/7 aluminum conductor steel 

reinforced (ACSR)/TWD “Athabaska/TW”, with three 

subconductors per phase. Non-specular (dull) finish rather than a 

shiny finish.

• Estimated subconductor diameter: 1.504 inches.

• Bundle spacing: Distance between subconductors is 18 inches 

and 25 inches.

• Non-reflective, non-refractive insulators.

• One optical ground wire (OPGW) containing 48 fibers and with 

diameter of 0.637 inch on one side of tower.

• One extra high strength (EHS) steel overhead ground wire.

• Steel overhead ground wire diameter: approximately 0.495 inch.

• Minimum ground clearance: 35 feet.

• Structure types: lattice steel single-circuit structures. Dulled 

galvanized steel finish.

• Structure heights: Single-circuit structure varies between 145 and 

180 feet. Average height of 156 feet.

• Approximate distance between structures: 1,200 to 1,300 feet.

• .ROW width for one single-circuit: 250 feet.

• The exact quantity, distance between, and placement of the 

structures will depend on the final detailed design of the 

transmission line, which is influenced by the terrain, land use, 

environmental constraints, and economics. Alignment options 

may also slightly increase or decrease the quantity, location, and 

height of structures.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-5

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Transmission Line Features for 

Segment 3A (345-kV)

• Three-phase 345-kV construction for all structure designs, 

conductor spacing and clearances1.

• Conductors: Bundled 1272 kcmil 45/7 ACSR “Bittern” with three 

subconductors per phase. Non-specular finish.

• Estimated subconductor diameter: 1.345 inches. 

• Bundle spacing: 18 inches and 25 inches.

• Non-reflective, non-refractive insulators.

• One optical ground wire (OPGW) containing 48 wires and with 

diameter of 0.637 inch where communications is required

• One EHS steel overhead ground wire.

• Estimated shield wire diameter: approx. 0.495 inch.

• Minimum ground clearance: 30 feet.

• Structure types: single-circuit steel H-frame structures, selfweathering steel.

• Above-ground structure heights: varies between 80 and 110 feet.

• Approximate distance between structures: 800 feet.

• ROW width: 150 feet.

• The exact quantity, distance between and placement of the 

structures will depend on the final detailed design of the 

transmission line, which is influenced by the terrain, land use, 

environmental constraints, and economics. Alignment options may 

also slightly increase or decrease the quantity, location, and height 

of structures.

Transmission Line Features 

Common to All Proposed 230-

kV Segments

• Three-phase 230-kV construction for all structure designs, 

conductor spacing and clearances1.

• Non-specular finish applied to conductors.

• Bundle spacing: 18 inches vertical with two subconductors per 

phase.

• Non-reflective, non-refractive insulators.

• One optical ground wire (OPGW) containing 48 fibers and with 

diameter of 0.637 inch where communications is required

• Two EHS steel overhead ground wires where communication is 

not required. One EHS steel overhead ground wire where 

communication is required.

• Estimated shield wire diameter: approx. 0.495 inch.

• Minimum ground clearance: 28 feet.

• Structure types: single-circuit steel H-frame structures, selfweathering steel.

• Above-ground structure heights: varies between 60 and 90 feet.

• Approximate distance between structures: 800 feet.

• ROW width: 125 feet.

• The exact quantity, distance between and placement of the 

structures will depend on the final detailed design of the 

transmission line, which is influenced by the terrain, land use, 

environmental constraints, and economics. Alignment options may 

also slightly increase or decrease the quantity, location, and height 

of structures.

2

3
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-6

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Segment 1W(a) – Windstar to 

Aeolus

• Single-circuit 230-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Conductors: Bundled 1272 kcmil 45/7 ACSR “Bittern” with two 

subconductors per phase.

• Approximate number of structures: 531.

• Line length: Approximately 73.8 miles.

• One optical signal regeneration site.

• See Figure A-2.

Segment 1W(c) – Dave 

Johnston to Aeolus

• Existing single-circuit 230-kV transmission line to be reconstructed. 

• Conductors: Bundled 1272 kcmil 45/7 ACSR “Bittern” with two 

subconductors per phase between Dave Johnston Substation and 

Shirley Basin Substation; approximately 58.8 miles.

• Conductors: Bundled 1557 kcmil 45/7 ACSS/TW “Potomac” with 

two subconductors per phase between Shirley Basin Substation 

and the proposed Aeolus Substation; approximately 13.8 miles.

• Approximate number of structures to be replaced: 547.

• Line length: Approximately 73.6 miles.

• No optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-2.

Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston • One single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 390.

• Line length: Approximately 91.9 miles.

• Two optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-3.

Segment 3 – Creston to 

Anticline

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW. 

• Approximate number of structures: 194.

• Line length: Approximately 45.9 miles.

• No optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-4.

Segment 3A – Anticline to 

Bridger 345-kV Yard

• Single-circuit 345-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 25.

• Line length: Approximately 5.1 miles.

• No optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-4.

Segment 4 – Anticline to 

Populus

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 856.

• Line length: Approximately 197.6 miles.

• Three optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figures A-5 and A-6.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-7

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued)

Project Facility Description

Segment 5 – Populus to Borah • Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 246.

• Line length: Approximately 55.7 miles.

• No optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-7.

Segment 6 – Borah to 

Midpoint 

• Re-energize existing 345-kV system to 500-kV (this line segment 

was previously constructed to 500-kV standards).

• Transmission line construction only required at segment ends to 

reroute from the existing 345-kV substation bays to the proposed 

500-kV substation bays.

• Structure type illustration is only for the new structures required.

• Approximate number of structures: 10.

• See Figure A-8.

Segment 7 – Populus to 

Cedar Hill 

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 523.

• Line length: Approximately 118.2 miles.

• Two optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-9.

Segment 8 – Midpoint to 

Hemingway 

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 575.

• Line length: Approximately 131.5 miles.

• Two optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-10.

Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to 

Hemingway 

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 708.

• Line length: Approximately 162.2 miles.

• Two optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-11.

Segment 10 – Midpoint to 

Cedar Hill 

• Single-circuit 500-kV transmission line in one ROW.

• Approximate number of structures: 157.

• Line length: Approximately 34.4 miles.

• No optical signal regeneration sites.

• See Figure A-12.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-8

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Substation Facilities

Windstar Substation • Modification of substation within existing fenceline. 

• Existing access road is gravel and will not need extension for 

Gateway West.

• 230-kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, potential and current transformers..

• 230-kV line termination structures approximately 70 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added to the 

existing control building.

• See Figure A-16.

Dave Johnston Power Plant • Modification of substation within existing fenceline.

• Existing access road is adequate.

• All construction will be inside the existing fence line. No additional 

area is required.

• 230-kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, potential and current transformers.

• 230-kV line termination structures approximately 70 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added to the 

existing control building.

• See Figure A-17.

Heward Substation • Expansion of existing Difficulty substation.

• Developed acreage: approximately 5 acres fenced and owned 

separately from the existing Difficulty substation.

• 230 kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, potential and current transformers. 230 kV line 

termination structures approximately 70 feet in height. 

• Control, protection, and communications equipment.

• Addition of new control building within the substation fenced area.

• See Figure A-18.

Shirley Basin Substation • Modification of substation within existing fenceline.

• Existing access road is adequate.

• All construction will be inside the existing fence line. No additional 

area is required.

• 230-kV line termination structures approximately 70 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added to the 

existing control building.

• See Figure A-19.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-9

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Substation Facilities

Aeolus Substation • Proposed substation.

• Developed acreage: Approximately 100 acres fenced with an 

improved access road. 

• Upgrading County Route 121 is needed and will result in 

approximately 64 acres of construction disturbance and 33 acres 

of new permanent roadway, including replacement of an existing 

bridge.

• 500-kV and 230-kV circuit breakers and related switching 

equipment, bus and support structures, 500/230-kV transformer 

banks, 500-kV shunt reactor banks, 500-kV series capacitor bank,

500-kV and 230-kV shunt capacitor banks, potential and current 

transformers.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment.

• 500-kV line termination structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• 230-kV line termination structures approximately 70 feet in height.

• Addition of new control buildings within the substation fenced area.

• New Static Var Compensator occupying 10-15 acres within the 

substation fenced area, housed in a building that contains power 

electronic equipment and associated cooling equipment.

• See Figure A-13.

Anticline Substation • Proposed substation.

• Developed acreage: Approximately 140 acres fenced with an 

improved access road.

• To access the new 500-kV yard, an existing dirt road about a mile 

long will be improved with construction of an all-weather surface 

with improved access approaches, main highway entrance, and 

Union Pacific Railroad (UPRR) crossing arrangements.

• 500-kV and 345-kV circuit breakers and related switching 

equipment, bus and support structures, 500/345-kV transformer 

bank, 345-kV phase shifting transformer, 500-kV shunt reactor 

banks, 500-kV series capacitor bank, and 500-kV shunt capacitor 

banks, potential and current transformers.

• 500-kV line termination structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• 345-kV line termination structures approximately 100 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment.

• Addition of new control buildings within the substation fenced area.

• See Figure A-14.

Jim Bridger 345-kV Substation • Expansion of existing substation.

• Existing access road is adequate.

• Expansion of 345-kV yard by 10 acres.

• Additions to Jim Bridger 345-kV yard, including 345-kV circuit 

breakers and related switching equipment, bus and support 

structures, potential and current transformers.

• Development of a new 345-kV transmission line termination 

structure approximately 100 feet in height to connect with the 

proposed line to Anticline Substation.

• Relocation of an existing 345-kV shunt capacitor bank within the 

substation fenced area.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added inside 

the existing control building.

• See Figure A-20.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-10

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Substation Facilities

Midpoint Substation • Expansion of existing substation.

• Developed acreage: increase the fenced area by approximately 40 

acres. 

• Existing access roads are paved and will not need extension.

• 500-kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, 500-kV shunt reactor banks, 500-kV series 

capacitor bank, 500-kV shunt capacitor banks, potential and 

current transformers.

• 500-kV line termination structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added to 

existing control building. 

• See Figure A-23.

Cedar Hill Substation • Proposed substation. 

• Developed acreage: approximately 54 acres fenced with access 

road. Adjacent existing road is gravel and will not need extension.

• 500-kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, 500-kV shunt reactor banks, 500-kV shunt 

capacitor banks, potential and current transformers.

• 500-kV line termination structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment.

• Addition of new control building within the substation fenced area.

• Up to 5 single circuit 500-kV structure relocations required on 

existing line from Borah Substation.

• See Figure A-15.

Hemingway Substation • Expansion of existing substation.

• Expansion of existing station to add a 500-kV line bay for 

termination of the Hemingway – Midpoint and the Hemingway –

Cedar Hill transmission lines.

• All construction will be inside the existing fence line. No additional 

area is required.

• Existing access is adequate.

• 500-kV circuit breakers and related switching equipment, bus and 

support structures, 500-kV shunt reactor banks, 500-kV series 

capacitor bank, 500-kV shunt capacitor banks, potential and 

current transformers.

• 500-kV line termination structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added to the 

existing control building. 

• See Figure A-24.

Populus Substation • Expansion of existing substation.

• Developed acreage: increase the fenced area by approximately 80 

acres. 

• Existing access road is adequate. 500-kV and 345-kV circuit 

breakers and related switching equipment, bus and support 

structures, 500/345-kV transformer bank, 500-kV shunt reactor 

banks, 500-kV series capacitor bank, 500-kV shunt capacitor 

banks, potential and current transformers. 500-kV line termination 

structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment.

• Addition of new control building within the substation fenced area. 

See Figure A-21.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-11

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Substation Facilities

Borah Substation • Expansion of existing substation. 

• Developed acreage: increase the fenced area by approximately 35 

acres. 

• Existing access road is gravel and will not need extension. 

• 500-kV and 345-kV circuit breakers and related switching 

equipment, bus and support structures, 500/345-kV transformer 

bank, 500-kV shunt reactor banks, 500-kV shunt capacitor banks, 

potential and current transformers. 500-kV line termination 

structures approximately 135 feet in height.

• Control, protection, and communications equipment added inside 

the existing control building.

• Up to 5 single circuit 500-kV structure relocations required on 

existing line from Midpoint Substation.

• See Figure A-22.

Communications and Control 

Facilities – Optical Signal 

Regeneration Sites

• Regeneration sites are required to amplify the system control and 

monitoring signals carried over the fiber optic cable attached to the 

transmission towers.

• Up to 13 regeneration sites will be needed for the Project. 

Segments requiring regeneration sites are noted in the 

transmission line section of this summary table. The locations for 

the regeneration sites are determined after detailed design 

engineering is completed.

• Regeneration sites will be located either within a substation or at 

another location along the route.

• Regeneration sites are located within a 75- X 75-foot fenced area.

• Typical building dimensions within the fenced area are 12 feet 

wide X 32 feet long X 9 feet tall.

• The fiber within the OPGW cable supported on the transmission 

structures is routed in and out of the regeneration site building 

from the nearest transmission structure either underground or 

overhead along two independent diverse paths.

• Electronic equipment, required to support the fiber optic cable 

installation, is located inside the building.

• At sites not within a substation, a liquid propane fueled emergency 

generator will be installed to provide backup power during an 

outage of the local electric distribution system supply.

• Maximum regeneration site spacing is 55 miles or less depending 

on access and proximity to local electric distribution lines.

• The primary siting criteria for a regeneration site are: adjacent to 

the Gateway West transmission line ROW, proximity to existing 

low-voltage electric distribution lines to provide power to the 

facility, and the ability to easily access the site by vehicle.

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-12

1 Table 3.1-2. Summary of Project Facilities (continued) 

Project Facility Description

Ancillary Facilities

Distribution Supply Lines • Distribution line extensions are required to provide operational 

power and station service power at:

o Up to 13 regeneration sites (locations to be determined during 

final design) 

o Aeolus 500-kV Substation (11 miles across BLM and private 

lands), needed for construction and possibly for operation. 

o Anticline 500-kV Substation (3.3 miles across private land)

o Cedar Hill Substation (less than 200 feet across private land).

o Heward Substation (new distribution line but same 

configuration as existing Difficulty substation distribution line)

• Typically provided from an existing distribution line located in 

proximity to the site.

• Not required for modifications at Dave Johnston and Shirley Basin 

or for expansions at Windstar, Jim Bridger, Populus, Borah, 

Midpoint, and Hemingway Substations since these substations 

exist.

2 1/ Project design follows the Avian Power Line Interaction Committee recommendations. Details for tower 

3 construction and components such as conductor spacing are provided in Appendix B.

4
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-13

1 Table 3.1-3. Proposed Action Construction Schedule 

Segment 

Number

Segment or 

Substation Name

Primarily Wyoming Idaho

Start June 

2015

End Dec 

2018

Start June 

2017

End Dec 

2021

Windstar Substation Windstar Expansion

Dave Johnston 230-

kV Substation 

Dave Johnston 230-kV 

Substation

Heward Substation Heward Substation

Aeolus Substation Aeolus Substation

Populus Substation Populus Expansion

Anticline and Jim 

Bridger 345-kV 

Substations

Anticline Substation and 345-kV 

bays at existing Jim Bridger 

Substation

1W(a) Windstar – Aeolus #1 Single-Circuit 230-kV and 

rebuild a short section of the 

existing single-circuit 230-kV 

line

1W(c) Dave Johnston –

Heward –Aeolus

Rebuild the existing single 

circuit 230-kV 

2 Aeolus – Creston Single-Circuit 500-kV 

3 Creston – Anticline Single-Circuit 500-kV 

3A Anticline – Jim 

Bridger 

Single-Circuit 345-kV

4 Anticline – Populus Single-Circuit 500-kV

Populus Substation Populus Expansion

Cedar Hill Substation Cedar Hill Substation

Hemingway 

Substation

Hemingway Expansion

7 Populus – Cedar Hill Single-Circuit 500-kV

9 Cedar Hill –

Hemingway

Single-Circuit 500-kV

10 Midpoint – Cedar Hill Single-Circuit 500-kV

Borah Substation

Midpoint Substation Borah Expansion

Hemingway 

Substation

Midpoint Expansion

5 Populus – Borah Hemingway Expansion

6 Borah – Midpoint 1 Single-Circuit 500-kV

8 Midpoint –

Hemingway 

Existing single-circuit

2 1/ Existing single circuit constructed to 500-kV standards (energized from 345-kV to 500-kV)

3
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project 

 January 2013 3-14 

1 3.1.2 Structure Lighting 

2 RTO Infrared (IR) obstruction lights that incorporate both red and IR light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 

3 in a single unit would be installed on every other transmission tower on the east side of the 

4 Jarbidge Military Operating Area between milepost (MP) 46.5 and MP 54.4 of RMP’s Proposed 

5 Route; in the Saylor Creek Air Force Range restricted area on every structure between MP 91.2 

6 and MP 95.7 of RMP’s Proposed Route; and in the IDANG Orchard Combat Training Center to 

7 ensure visibility for aircraft pilots, both during normal flight and when aided by night vision 

8 systems. Night Vision Goggles (NVGs) and Aviator’s Night Vision Imaging System (ANVIS) 

9 often employ Class A, B, and C filters. These filters can reduce LED sources that emit light in 

10 the visible spectrum. The Vigilant IR Series overcomes this obstacle by combining visible red 

11 LEDs and IR LEDs in a single unit. This obstruction light system utilizes a unique optical, 

12 electrical, and mechanical design. The RTO is a universal, compact, and efficient obstruction 

13 light that has been ETL Certified to FAA requirements. In order to ensure that the intensity of 

14 lighting is not so bright as to render the NVGs ineffective, RMP proposes to use equipment with 

15 peak lighting intensities of 860 nanometers for the IR lights and 30-50 candelas for red lighting. 

16 3.1.3 Proposed Route 

17 The route changes since the January 2010 POD include elimination of Segment 1E and 

18 incorporation of Alternatives 2C and 4A into the Proposed Route. 

19 Because the Project connects a series of three proposed and nine existing substations, it is 

20 described by segment and numbered sequentially between substations. The exception is 

21 between Segments 2 and 3 where the formerly proposed Creston Substation was eliminated. 

22 Table 3.1-4 lists the Proposed Route segments. The reference points are illustrated in 

23 Appendix A, Figures A-2 through A-12 by segment. 

24 Table 3.1-4. Summary of Proposed Route 

Figure Designation Reference Points

Segment 1W – Windstar to Aeolus

A-2 Segment 1W(a) 1,2 

Segment 1W(c) 1d, 1e, 1g, 2 

Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston

A-3 Segment 2 2, 3 

Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline

A-4 Segment 3 3, 4 

Segment 3A – Anticline to Bridger

A-4 Segment 3A 3c, 4 

Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus

A-5, 

A-6 Segment 4 4, 5 

Segment 5 – Populus to Borah

A-7 Segment 5 5, 6 

Segment 6 – Borah to Midpoint

A-8 Segment 6 6, 8 

Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill

A-9 Segment 7 5, 9 

Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway

A-10 Segment 8 8, 11 

Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway

A-11 Segment 9 9, 11 

Segment 10 – Cedar Hill to Midpoint

A-12 Segment 10 8, 9 

25 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-15

1 3.1.4 Segment 1W – Windstar/Dave Johnston to Aeolus 

2 Segment 1W is composed of Segments 1W(a) and 1W(c). Both consist of single-circuit 230-kV 

3 transmission lines. Segment 1W(a) will be a new transmission line and 1W(c) involves 

4 reconstruction of a portion of the existing Dave Johnston – Rock Springs 230-kV transmission 

5 line. Reconstruction of the existing transmission line is necessary to increase the load-carrying 

6 capacity of this existing line. The existing single conductor per phase will be replaced with two 

7 larger conductors per phase, requiring the replacement of all of the existing wood structures 

8 with stronger steel-pole, H-frame structures, similar in height and appearance to the existing 

9 line. Each single-circuit line will be constructed in a separate ROW to meet reliability criteria. 

10 The 230-kV lines will be carried on steel H-frame structures between 60 and 90 feet tall 

11 (Appendix B, Figure B-1). Appendix A, Figure A-2 is a map of the Segment 1W routes. 

12 Segment 1W(a) will carry the fiber optic communication system for Segment 1. Because of its 

13 length it needs an optical signal regeneration site approximately midway along its route. Final 

14 locations for the regeneration station will be determined after detailed design engineering is 

15 completed.

16 3.1.4.1 Proposed Route 1W(a)

17 The Proposed Route 1W(a) extends south and west approximately 73.8 miles from the existing 

18 Windstar Substation to the proposed Aeolus Substation (points 1, 2). The Proposed Route 

19 crosses the Burlington Northern Railroad, North Platte River, U.S. Highway (US) 87/20, and 

20 Interstate 25 (I-25). At MP 4.0, the line turns to the southwest on the east side of Deer Creek,

21 parallel to and west of Segment 1W(c). The routes maintain a minimum of separation of 1,500 

22 feet to meet reliability criteria. 

23 3.1.4.2 Proposed Route 1W(c)

24 Proposed Route 1W(c) is a rebuild of an existing 230-kV line from the existing Dave Johnston 

25 Power Plant to the proposed Aeolus Substation. The route leaves the existing substation at the 

26 Dave Johnston Power Plant and proceeds west and south to the proposed Aeolus Substation, a 

27 distance of approximately 73.6 miles (points 1d, 1e, 1g, 2). The Proposed Route crosses the 

28 North Platte River, Burlington Northern Railroad, US 87/20, and I-25. At MP 2.0, the route turns 

29 southwest on the east side of Deer Creek, crossing Deer Creek at MP 14.7 to join Segment 

30 1W(a). 

31 From Banner Mountain, Proposed Routes 1W(a) and 1W(c) follow similar paths, proceeding 

32 south and crossing into Natrona County at approximately MP 21.0. After crossing the county 

33 line, the two Proposed Routes cross the West Fork of Duck Creek Deer Creek Range and the 

34 western edge of the Medicine Bow National Forest, and then proceed generally south passing 

35 east of Ice Cave Mountain and Bates Creek Reservoir before crossing into Carbon County. At 

36 MP 44.3 Proposed Route 1W(c) enters and then exits the proposed Heward Substation 

37 (expansion of the existing Difficulty Substation). Both Proposed Routes then parallel SR 487 for 

38 about 14 miles across Shirley Basin. At MP 55.4, Proposed Route 1W(c) ties into existing 

39 transmission lines looping into and out of the existing Shirley Basin Substation before 

40 proceeding south, still parallel to Proposed Route 1W(a). At MP 58.0, both Proposed Routes 

41 turn southwest through Little Basin to the northwest of the Freezeout Mountains. At MP 64.0, 

42 the Proposed Routes diverge to a maximum separation of approximately 7,500 feet as 

43 Proposed Route 1W(a) swings west to avoid a private landing strip in Red Draw before turning 

44 south and crossing Difficulty Creek at MP 70.0. Both Proposed Routes cross the southern toe 

45 of the Freezeout Mountains at MP 70.5 and 69.0 before terminating at the proposed Aeolus 

46 Substation at MP 73.8 (MP 70.3 for the Dave Johnston – Rock Springs line) on the north side of 

47 the Medicine Bow River. Preferred Route 1W(c) will be realigned for a short distance resulting 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-16

1 in the removal of approximately 1 mile of existing 230-kV transmission line where transitions 

2 occur between the new and existing transmission line segments that comprise Proposed Route 

3 1W(a). Proposed Route 1W(c) enters and then exits the proposed Aeolus Substation, heading 

4 south to MP 71.0 before turning west to rejoin the existing Dave Johnston-Rock Springs line at 

5 MP 71.7. Approximately 1.2 miles of the existing 230-kV in the vicinity of the Aeolus Substation 

6 will be demolished in order to arrange the new line entry and exit points to the substation. 

7 3.1.5 Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston

8 Segment 2 consists of one single-circuit 500-kV transmission line between the proposed Aeolus 

9 Substation and the location of the originally planned Creston substation (hereafter abbreviated 

10 as Creston) near Wamsutter, Wyoming. This segment generally follows a combination of the 

11 WWE corridor and existing transmission lines. Appendix A, Figure A-3 is a map of Segment 2 

12 between the Aeolus Substation and Creston. 

13 Segment 2 as proposed will use 500-kV single-circuit lattice towers between 145 and 180 feet 

14 tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Segment 2 is about 92.0 miles long and therefore will need two 

15 optical signal regeneration sites, one site in the in the area south of Rawlins and another in the 

16 general location of the formerly-planned Creston substation. Final locations for regeneration 

17 stations will be determined after detailed design engineering is completed. 

18 The proposed 92.0 mile-long 500-kV single-circuit line (points 2, 3) exits the proposed Aeolus 

19 Substation directly west crossing County Route (CR) 121 and the Medicine Bow River 

20 paralleling the north side of the Seven Mile Hill Wind Energy Project. About 7.2 miles west of 

21 the substation, the route turns south, generally following Hanna Draw, for about 27.0 miles 

22 through the Hanna Sage Grouse Core Area and an active coal mining area north and west of 

23 Hanna. The Proposed Route between MP 3.0 and 30.0 was recommended as the preferred 

24 route by the Wyoming Governor’s Office and follows the corridor established by EO-2011-5. At 

25 MP 28.0, the Proposed Route passes between Dana Ridge and Saint Mary’s Ridge before 

26 turning west near Walcott Junction. The Proposed Route parallels north of I-80 for about 4.5 

27 miles, crosses I-80 and the North Platte River south of the Fort Steele State Historic Site before 

28 continuing west between two bald eagle nest buffers on the west bank of the North Platte River 

29 at MP 38.0. From there, the route proceeds west, passing between two Wyoming Game and 

30 Fish Department (WGFD) parcels and a BLM Special Recreation Management Area (SRMA), 

31 and north Hogback ridge and multiple raptor nests. The Proposed Route then passes through 

32 alternating sections of private and BLM-managed land, following an existing pipeline northwest 

33 for 4 miles before again continuing west at MP 42.2.

34 Proceeding west, the Proposed Route passes north of Severson Flats and south of the 

35 Greenville Dome, the Wyoming State Penitentiary, and the Rawlins water treatment facility 

36 before crossing SR 71 about 2.7 miles south of Rawlins. West of SR 71, the route traverses 

37 Coal Creek and Coal Mine Ridge south of and parallel to an existing 230-kV line. The route 

38 continues at varying distances from the existing line to Creston. In this last 40-mile segment, 

39 the route crosses Hogback Ridge, Red Rim, SR 789, and several active oil and gas fields 

40 before reaching Creston about 4.0 miles south of Wamsutter. 

41 The Proposed Route follows the WWE corridor, which is also a BLM-designated ROW corridor 

42 (BLM 2008a), where feasible. It diverts only to stay within the transmission corridor through 

43 core sage-grouse population areas established by the Governor’s Executive Order (EO-2011-5), 

44 and to avoid the Fort Fred Steele State Historic site, the Seven Mile Hill Wind Energy Project, 

45 sage-grouse leks, and oil and gas well infrastructure. The Proposed Route is within or parallel 

46 to the WWE corridor (which is also an existing utility corridor) for 50.0 miles out of a total route 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-17

1 length of 92.0 miles. Of its 92.0 mile length, the route parallels existing transmission lines for 

2 50.0 miles. The Proposed Route crosses the Hanna Sage-Grouse Core Area (Hanna Core 

3 Area) within the Wyoming Governor’s EO-2011-5 designated corridor on a Greenfield route from 

4 approximately MP 3.0 to 30.0. 

5 3.1.6 Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline

6 Segment 3 has two components: a short 5.1-mile 345-kV interconnection between the existing 

7 Jim Bridger 345-kV substation and the proposed Anticline substation (Segment 3A see Section 

8 3.1.7), and a 45.9-mile-long 500-kV line between the terminus of Segment 2 near the previously 

9 proposed Creston substation and the proposed Anticline substation (called simply Segment 3). 

10 The 500-kV portion of Segment 3 is located between points 3 and 4. It begins at Creston and 

11 proceeds west for 17 miles, at which point it turns northwest and crosses I-80 at MP 19.3. This 

12 17-mile segment parallels I-80 approximately 2 to 3 miles to the south, north of the Delaney 

13 Rim. Once north of I-80, Segment 3 stays north of this highway until it reaches the east side of 

14 the Jim Bridger Power Plant access road. In this segment, oil and gas pipelines and wells were 

15 important routing considerations. At MP 43.1, the 500-kV circuit turns north and proceeds for 

16 about 2.6 miles along Deadman Wash parallel to the power plant road before entering the 

17 proposed Anticline Substation. 

18 Appendix A, Figure A-4 is a map for Segment 3. Segment 3 as proposed will use 500-kV 

19 single-circuit lattice towers between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Segment 3 

20 (in total) parallels existing transmission lines for 42.1 miles.

21 No optical signal regeneration site is needed. 

22 3.1.7 Segment 3A – Anticline to Bridger

23 Because Segment 3A is a different voltage from the rest of Segment 3, it is listed and treated 

24 separately for the purposes of a technical project description. A 5.1-mile interconnecting 345-kV 

25 transmission line will be constructed between the proposed Anticline Substation and the existing 

26 Jim Bridger Substation 345-kV yard to electrically connect the two substations. About 0.5 mile 

27 east of the plant access road, this route angles to the northwest on the east side of Deadman 

28 Wash before turning west and then south into the existing substation. Appendix A, Figure A-4 is 

29 a map for Segment 3A. The structure type will steel-pole H-frame (Figure B-2, Appendix B).

30 No optical signal regeneration site is needed. 

31 3.1.8 Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus

32 One single-circuit 500-kV line is proposed between the proposed Anticline Substation and the 

33 existing Populus Substation near Downey in southern Bannock County, Idaho. This segment 

34 generally follows an existing transmission line corridor. Appendix A, Figures A-5 and A-6 show 

35 the Proposed Route for Segment 4 in Wyoming and Idaho, respectively. 

36 Segment 4 as proposed will use 500-kV single-circuit lattice towers between 145 and 180 feet 

37 tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3).

38 Segment 4 is 197.6 miles long and will require three optical signal regeneration sites spaced 

39 approximately equidistant along its route. Final locations for regeneration stations will be 

40 determined after detailed design engineering is completed. 

41 The proposed single-circuit 500-kV segment extends from the proposed Anticline Substation 

42 southeast of the Jim Bridger Power Plant and partially along the existing 345-kV corridor in 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-18

1 Sweetwater County, Wyoming, to the existing Populus Substation west of the community of 

2 Downey in Bannock County, Idaho (points 4, 5). The Proposed Route exits the proposed 

3 Anticline Substation to the west and parallels to the south side of the existing 345-kV corridor for 

4 about 40.0 miles, then, after by-passing the Seedskadee National Wildlife Refuge, continues to 

5 follow the existing transmission lines, except for two short deviations in the vicinity of the two 

6 U.S. Highway 30/SR 89 crossings, a further 120.0 miles. The Proposed Route crosses the 

7 Greater South Pass Core Area in the Wyoming Governor’s EO-2011-5 designated corridor 

8 between MP 32.0 to MP 45.0. The route then crosses the Seedskadee Core Area in the 

9 Wyoming Governor’s EO-2011-5 designated corridor between MP 58.0 to MP 70.2. The route 

10 further crosses the Sage Core Area in the Wyoming Governor’s EO-2011-5 designated corridor 

11 between MP 104 to MP 120. All three crossings of sage grouse core area occur adjacent to 

12 existing 345-kV transmission lines. 

13 The Proposed Route crosses Deadman Wash and North Baxter Basin before crossing 

14 Killpecker Creek, US 191 and the White Mountains about 10 miles north of Rock Springs. The 

15 route continues to parallel the existing 345-kV corridor west toward the Seedskadee National 

16 Wildlife Refuge where it deviates south at MP 45.8 through Stevens Flat to avoid the southern 

17 boundary of the Refuge near Big Island. The Proposed Route crosses the Green River at MP 

18 52.0 then turns north at MP 53.4 paralleling SR 372 for approximately 3.5 miles before turning

19 west again to parallel the existing 345-kV corridor through the oil and natural gas fields in 

20 Whiskey Basin, crossing Oyster Ridge and US 189 about 4.5 miles north of Kemmerer. 

21 Between MP 67.0 and MP 136.8, the Proposed Route follows the alignment recommended by 

22 the Wyoming Governor’s Office. At MP 100.0, the Proposed Route crosses to the north side of 

23 the existing 345-kV corridor in the Pomeroy Basin before continuing west parallel to the corridor, 

24 crossing Commissary Ridge and then the Ham’s Fork River south of Kemmerer Reservoir. Still 

25 parallel to the 345-kV corridor, the route continues to the northwest across the Ham’s Fork 

26 Plateau and the Tunp Range, deviating slightly to cross US 30/SR 89, before crossing the Bear 

27 River about 0.5 miles south of Cokeville.

28 At MP 126.0 the route continues northwest crossing Boundary Ridge and proceeding from 

29 Lincoln County, Wyoming, into Bear Lake County, Idaho, at MP 130.0. From the county line, 

30 the Proposed Route continues to parallel the north side of the existing 345-kV corridor crossing 

31 the Bear River at MP 134.3 before deviating slightly across Sheep Creek and the Sheep Creek 

32 Hills. The Proposed Route then continues west to cross US 30 about 2.8 miles south of the 

33 community of Montpelier.

34 The Proposed Route remains parallel and offset about 1,500 feet northeast of the existing 345-

35 kV corridor crossing Bear Lake Valley, US 89, and the Bear River before proceeding to the 

36 eastern boundary of the Caribou-Targhee National Forest (NF) at MP 161.1. The Proposed 

37 Route crosses about 9.2 miles within the NF boundary on a new ROW north of, but offset from, 

38 the existing 345-kV line. The route then rejoins the existing corridor on the west side of SR 34 

39 crossing Mound Valley and the Bear River for a fourth time.

40 At MP 180.0, the Proposed Route leaves the existing 345-kV corridor and proceeds west 

41 passing along the north side of Dry Hollow Mountain and angling northwest toward the 

42 community of Downey. About 2 miles south of Downey, the Proposed Route crosses US 91 

43 and the Marsh Valley. It then continues northwest to the existing Populus Substation located 

44 about 1.3 miles west of Downey. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-19

1 3.1.9 Segment 5 – Populus to Borah

2 One single-circuit 500-kV line is proposed between the existing Populus Substation and the 

3 existing Borah Substation in Power County, Idaho. This line will be constructed with 500-kV 

4 single-circuit lattice steel towers between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). 

5 Appendix A, Figure A-7 shows the Proposed Route for Segment 5. Segment 5 is 55.7 miles 

6 long and therefore will not need optical signal regeneration sites. 

7 The proposed single-circuit 500-kV segment is approximately 55.7 miles long between points 5 

8 and 6. Two existing 345-kV transmission lines extend between the Populus and Borah 

9 Substations. The Proposed Route follows the existing lines from the existing Populus 

10 Substation northwest for approximately 12 miles, crossing the existing lines just north of 

11 Hawkins Reservoir and south of Hawkins Basin, at which point the Proposed Route follows a 

12 Greenfield alignment for the remainder of the route, extending northwest along the foothills to 

13 the west of Hawkins Basin before turning west, south of the Fort Hall Indian Reservation, 

14 crossing the Arbon Valley and the Deep Creek Mountains and then turning north east of 

15 Rockland and on to the existing Borah Substation. The first part of Segment 5 crosses I-15 

16 about 2.0 miles northwest of the Populus Substation. At MP 12.4, the Proposed Route turns 

17 west crossing the existing 345-kV corridor and then the Bannock County/Power County line at 

18 MP 18.2. The route continues west, parallel to the proposed Populus – Cedar Hill line 

19 (Segment 7) crossing the Arbon Valley and the Deep Creek Mountains south of the Fort Hall 

20 Reservation. At the west side of these mountains, the Proposed Route turns northerly between 

21 the Deep Creek Mountains and SR 37.

22 Proceeding north along the western foothills of the Deep Creek Mountains, the route crosses 

23 several drainages, particularly the East Fork of Rock Creek, generally avoiding farm land 

24 located west of the route. The route crosses Visual Resource Management (VRM) Class II land 

25 at several points, but avoids the Bowen Canyon Bald Eagle Sanctuary in the mountains to the 

26 east. At MP 49.9 the route proceeds west, again parallel to the existing 345-kV corridor,

27 crossing I-86, SR 37, and US 30 before crossing the Snake River and entering the existing 

28 Borah Substation.

29 From MP 36.0 north to the existing Borah Substation, the current Proposed Route is about 1 to 

30 2 miles east of the Companies’ original Proposed Route. Meetings with local landowners and 

31 Power County representatives identified a more acceptable route that was subsequently 

32 adopted by the Companies. As a result, the current Proposed Route is located more on public 

33 land. 

34 The Segment 5 Proposed Route is mostly adjacent to, but offset approximately 1,500 feet from, 

35 the Segment 7 Proposed Route for approximately 30 miles. Of its total length, the Proposed 

36 Route will be Greenfield for 39.7 miles and parallel to existing transmission lines for 16.0 miles.

37 3.1.10 Segment 6 – Borah to Midpoint 

38 In Segment 6, from the existing Borah Substation to the existing Midpoint Substation located 

39 approximately 9 miles south of Shoshone, Idaho, the voltage will be increased to 500 kV on the 

40 existing Midpoint – Kinport 345-kV transmission line. The line will be routed into the proposed 

41 500-kV yard at the Borah Substation requiring approximately five structure replacements in the 

42 immediate vicinity of the Borah and Midpoint Substations but requiring no other transmission 

43 line construction. The remaining line from Borah to Kinport terminates in the existing 345-kV 

44 yard at the Borah Substation and will remain in operation at 345 kV. The structures utilized for 

45 the reroutes on each end of this line segment are 500-kV single-circuit lattice steel towers 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-20

1 between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Appendix A, Figure A-8 shows the 

2 locations of the Borah and Midpoint Substations and the existing 345-kV line.

3 The line segment between the Borah and Midpoint Substations, Segment 6, is part of the 

4 existing 345-kV transmission line that was constructed to 500-kV design standards although 

5 currently operated at 345 kV. No new transmission line construction will be required along 

6 Segment 6 to operate this line segment at 500 kV, except in the vicinity of the Borah and 

7 Midpoint Substations. At the Borah and Midpoint Substations, the line will be rerouted and re8 terminated from the existing 345-kV line bays into the new 500-kV line bays at each substation. 

9 Several new structures and conductors will be needed adjacent the Midpoint Substation to 

10 reroute the existing 345-kV line from its termination on the north side of the existing station to the 

11 proposed 500-kV yard expansion on the south side. Several new structures and conductors will 

12 also be needed at the Borah Substation to reroute the line from the northeast side of the existing 

13 station to the proposed 500-kV yard addition on the south side. A new structure will be needed to 

14 route the 345-kV line between Borah and Kinport into the existing 345-kV yard on the east side. 

15 The line between Borah and Midpoint will then be energized at 500 kV. 

16 3.1.11 Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill

17 One 118.2 mile single-circuit 500-kV transmission line is proposed between the existing Populus 

18 Substation and the proposed Cedar Hill Substation near the Cassia County/Twin Falls County 

19 approximately 14 miles southeast of Twin Falls. The line will be constructed utilizing 500-kV 

20 single-circuit lattice steel towers between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). 

21 Appendix A, Figure A-9 shows the Proposed Route for Segment 7. Because Segment 7 is 

22 118.2 miles long, it will need two optical signal regeneration sites along its route. Final locations 

23 for regeneration stations will be determined after detailed design engineering is completed.

24 The proposed single-circuit 500-kV line route (points 5, 9) will extend from the expanded 

25 Populus Substation about 9.0 miles along the east side of the existing 345-kV lines before 

26 turning west and crossing the existing lines south of Cedar Mountain and Hawkins Reservoir. 

27 The route turns northwest along the foothills west of Hawkins Basin before turning west and 

28 passing south of Pauline. From there, the Proposed Route continues west across the Arbon 

29 Valley and the Deep Creek Mountains before crossing SR 37 less than 1 mile south of Rockland 

30 at MP 41.0. This segment continues west another 7 miles across the northern foot of the 

31 Sublett Range. 

32 From this point it crosses into Cassia County and then proceeds across the Raft River Valley, 

33 where it turns southwest along the northern toe of the Cotterel and Albion Mountains before 

34 turning west for approximately 22 miles across an area of extensive irrigated cropland and dairy 

35 operations, entering the proposed Cedar Hill Substation at MP 118.2. Of its 118.2 mile length, 

36 the Proposed Route will be Greenfield for 107 miles and parallel existing transmission lines for 

37 11.2 miles.

38 3.1.12 Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway

39 One single-circuit 500-kV transmission line is proposed between the existing Midpoint 

40 Substation and the existing Hemingway Substation, located approximately 30 miles southwest 

41 of Boise, Idaho. The line will be constructed using steel lattice towers between 145 and 180 

42 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Appendix A, Figure A-10 shows the proposed Segment 8 

43 route. The Proposed Route is about 131.5 miles long and therefore two optical signal 

44 regeneration sites, about 40 to 50 miles apart, will be needed along the route. Final locations 

45 for regeneration stations will be determined after detailed design engineering is completed.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-21

1 The 131.5 mile-long Proposed Route (points 8, 11) proceeds west-northwest, parallel to an 

2 existing 230-kV line, passing just north of the juncture of the Jerome, Lincoln, and Gooding 

3 County lines near MP 9. This route continues in the same direction, passing between Gooding 

4 and Wendell before crossing the Malad River at MP 19.3. Southwest of Pioneer Reservoir, the 

5 route angles northwest away from the existing 230-kV corridor to avoid impacts to an identified 

6 residence, crossing the Gooding County/Elmore County line at MP 36.9. At MP 42.0 the route 

7 rejoins the existing 230-kV corridor. Between MP 45.8 to MP 48.1 and MP 50.2 to MP 51.1, the 

8 Proposed Route crosses VRM Class I in an area of multiple transmission lines, entering the 

9 WWE corridor at MP 52.0. At MP 58, the route parallels south and west of the existing 

10 PacifiCorp 500-kV line offset 1,500 feet for reliability reasons. The route crosses US 20 at MP 

11 68.5 approximately 3.8 miles northeast of Mountain Home and turns west at MP 86.2,, crossing 

12 I-84 at MP 90.2 and the Elmore County/Ada County line at MP 90.9. Continuing west, the 

13 Proposed Route is located approximately 1,500 feet south of the existing Summer Lake to 

14 Midpoint 500-kV transmission line through the Morley Nelson Snake River Birds of Prey 

15 National Conservation Area (SRBOP). 

16 The route enters the SRBOP at MP 98.8 and continues to the west, then southwest through Ada 

17 County. A 4.7-mile segment of the route passes through a portion of the Alpha Maneuver 

18 Sector for the Idaho Army National Guard (IDANG), which is located in the SRBOP. At MP 116, 

19 the route turns more to the south, crossing the Snake River, the Halverson and Wees Bar non20 motorized areas (NMA) and the Guffey Butte-Black Butte Archaeological District between MP 

21 117 and MP 120. The Snake River in this area forms the Ada County/Owyhee County line. The 

22 route continues southwest and then west around Guffey Butte before intercepting a WWE 

23 corridor and turning northwest at MP 124.2, approximately 3.5 mile north of Murphy. The route 

24 leaves the SRBOP at MP 126.7 before ending at the existing Hemingway Substation. Of its 

25 131.5 mile length, approximately 15.4 miles are Greenfield and 116.1 miles parallel existing 

26 transmission lines.

27 3.1.13 Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway

28 One single-circuit 500-kV transmission line is proposed between the proposed Cedar Hill and 

29 the existing Hemingway Substations. The line will be constructed using 500-kV single-circuit 

30 lattice steel structures between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Appendix A, 

31 Figure A-11 provides details on the transmission line route between the Cedar Hill and 

32 Hemingway Substations. 

33 Segment 9 is 162.2 miles long and therefore will need two optical signal regeneration sites 

34 along its route. Final locations for regeneration stations will be determined after detailed design 

35 engineering is completed.

36 The 162.2 mile long Proposed Route (points 9, 11) for the single-circuit 500-kV line proceeds 

37 generally west through public and private rangeland. The route continues west about one mile 

38 south of Twin Falls Military Reservation, and crosses US 93 at MP 17.7. At MP 27.9 the route 

39 turns northwest to parallel the east side of Salmon Falls Creek adjacent to an existing 138-kV 

40 transmission line for about 5.0 miles. At MP 33 the Proposed Route crosses the Salmon Falls 

41 Creek at the north end of Lilly Grade adjacent to an existing single-phase 34.5-kV distribution 

42 line just north of the Salmon Falls Creek WSA and a VRM I designated viewshed. The area 

43 crossed is still part of an Area of Critical Environmental Concern (ACEC) and eligible Wild and 

44 Scenic River (WSR). Several raptor nest buffers are crossed as the route continues northwest 

45 through the Bruneau Desert. At MP 46.6, the route enters Owyhee County and turns to the 

46 north along the Twin Falls County/Owyhee County line for about 10 miles before turning to the 

47 northwest at MP 56.5, then into Elmore County at MP 63.4. Between MP 46.6 and MP 63.4 the 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-22

1 Proposed Route will be just inside the east boundary of the general Jarbidge Military Operating 

2 Area (MOA). Within the MOA, the height of the transmission structures normally cannot extend 

3 more than 100 feet above ground level. Consultation between Twin Falls County and the U.S. 

4 Air Force has determined that this height restriction would not apply and this minor 

5 encroachment is acceptable (Postema 2010). 

6 AT MP 79.0, the Proposed Route joins the designated WWE corridor northwest of Deadman 

7 Flat, entering the SRBOP at MP 88.0. The Proposed Route passes through the Saylor Creek 

8 Air Force Range restricted area and to the south of Bruneau Dunes State Park in the between 

9 MP 91 to MP 95.6. Consultation between representatives of the BLM, U.S. Air Force, Idaho 

10 Department of Parks and Recreation, and the Companies has determined that the location of 

11 the Proposed Route within the restricted Military Operating Area and just to the south of 

12 Bruneau Dunes State Park is acceptable with micro-siting . From this point, the Proposed 

13 Route proceeds generally southwest, crossing the Bruneau River and the Bruneau Valley near 

14 MP 99.0.

15 On the west side of this valley the route turns northwest, crosses SR 51, and then continues 

16 northwesterly on the southwest side of the Bruneau River, then the Snake River and SR 78. In 

17 this portion, the Proposed Route follows the WWE corridor on BLM-managed land but 

18 frequently changes direction on private segments to avoid rural residences, the small 

19 communities of Murphy and Oreana and, as much as possible, cultivated lands. The route 

20 reenters the SRBOP between MP 142.4 to MP 146.2 and again between MP 151.5 to MP 

21 152.6, mainly within the WWE corridor on BLM-managed land, and continues north and west 

22 into the Hemingway Substation at MP 162.2. 

23 3.1.14 Segment 10 – Midpoint to Cedar Hill

24 One single-circuit 500-kV transmission line is proposed between the existing Midpoint and 

25 proposed Cedar Hill Substations. The line will be constructed using 500-kV single-circuit lattice 

26 steel structures between 145 and 180 feet tall (Appendix B, Figure B-3). Appendix A, Figure A27 12 shows the proposed Segment 10 route between Midpoint and Cedar Hill. The Midpoint 

28 Substation is described under Segment 8 and the Cedar Hill Substation is described under 

29 Segment 9. Segment 10 will not need an optical signal regeneration site along its route. 

30 The 34.4 mile-long Proposed Route (8, 9) exits the existing Midpoint Substation parallel to an 

31 existing 345-kV line and within the designated WWE corridor in a southeasterly direction for 11 

32 miles. At this point, the route turns south crossing the North Side Main Canal, and angles 

33 southeast again before turning south again at MP 18.8. From MP 20.5 to the proposed Cedar 

34 Hill Substation the Proposed Route again parallels the existing 345-kV line. The route 

35 continues south across Goose Lake west of the community of Eden and then crosses I-84 to the 

36 west of Skeleton Butte at MP 23.0, the Snake River(Jerome County/Twin Falls County line) at 

37 MP 24.3, and US 30 at MP 26.1, before entering the proposed Cedar Hill Substation at MP 

38 34.4. The Proposed Route follows the alignment of the planned Southwest Intertie Project. If 

39 that project is constructed, it will serve in place of the Gateway West Segment 10 Proposed 

40 Route. Only one transmission line will be constructed under any circumstances. 

41 3.2 Substations

42 The Project includes three proposed substations and expansions or modifications at nine

43 existing substations. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-23

1 3.2.1 Proposed Substations

2 3.2.1.1 Aeolus Substation

3 The Aeolus Substation site is located in Carbon County approximately 10 miles west of 

4 Medicine Bow, Wyoming, on private land as shown in Appendix A, Figure A-13. The substation 

5 is the southern terminus of Segment 1 and the eastern terminus of Segment 2. The Aeolus 

6 Substation is proposed to electrically terminate the new 230-kV line 1W(a), the reconstructed 

7 portion of the Dave Johnston – Rock Springs 230-kV line 1W(c) looped in and out of the Aeolus 

8 Substation, and the new transmission lines that will extend west to the Anticline Substation 

9 (Segments 2 and 3). 

10 Equipment to be installed includes 500-kV and 230-kV circuit breakers, high-voltage switches, bus 

11 supports, transmission line termination structures, and other equipment for each transmission line. 

12 The 500-kV transmission line termination structures are approximately 125 to 135 feet tall. Additional 

13 equipment including 500/230-kV transformers, 500-kV capacitors and 500-kV shunt reactors (which 

14 resemble a transformer in appearance) will be installed. In addition, a Static Var Compensator will be 

15 installed for system reliability. This equipment will occupy about 10 to 15 acres within the overall 

16 substation fenced area. New control houses will be added to accommodate the necessary system 

17 communications and control equipment. Site development will disturb approximately 120 acres and 

18 100 acres will be required for operations. (Appendix A, Figure A-13).

19 The Aeolus Substation 500-kV transformers weigh approximately 600,000 pounds during 

20 shipment. They will be transported to the Project vicinity, offloaded to a heavy haul transporter, 

21 and then transported over the highway to the Aeolus site. The heavy haul transporter is 

22 approximately 190 feet long, has 35 axles, and weighs 300,000 to 325,000 pounds. Due to the 

23 size of the vehicle, a route with minimal grade and large turning radii is necessary. CR 121 will 

24 be upgraded to provide the required access.

25 The Aeolus Substation will require development of a distribution line to provide electrical power 

26 during construction and operation. The 11 mile distribution line will be located within or adjacent 

27 to the CR 121 ROW between U.S. 30 and the site. Figure 3.2-1 shows the location of CR 121 

28 and access routes to the Aeolus site. 

29
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-24

1

2 Figure 3.2-1. CR 121 Access to Aeolus Substation 

3 CR 121 Improvements

4 Existing Conditions: CR 121 is currently a single-lane road, about 20 feet wide and about 11 

5 miles long, from U.S. Hwy 30 to the Aeolus Substation. It is in poor condition with a thin layer of 

6 gravel over a clay base and without turnouts. It includes a single-lane bridge over the Medicine 

7 Bow River built in 1914 and refurbished with a metal deck around 1972 (see Figure 3.2-2). The 

8 bridge was recently inspected by the Wyoming Department of Transportation and found to be in 

9 poor structural condition. Its current weight limitations include a 10-ton weight limit for single 

10 axle trucks and 13-ton limit for multiple axle trucks, which will not accommodate the heavy haul 

11 transporters.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-25

1

2 Figure 3.2-2. Looking Westerly Toward the Existing CR 121 Bridge

3 Needed Improvements: CR 121 will be reconstructed from U.S. Hwy 30 to the immediate 

4 vicinity of the Aeolus Substation. Reconstruction will result in approximately 64 acres of 

5 construction disturbance and 33 acres of new permanent roadway. Reconstruction includes the 

6 following:

7 • Realignment of the roadway to improve negotiability, visibility, and safety;

8 • Addition of turnouts, expanding the roadway to 30 feet wide for up to 100 feet along the 

9 roadway every mile or where existing terrain and alignment will not accommodate the 

10 heavy haul transporter or sight distances are inadequate;

11 • Improved roadway, likely to include subgrade improvement and application of a 

12 geotextile fabric covered by 6 to 8 inches of compacted aggregate base;

13 • Inspection of all culverts for adequacy and replacement of up to 16;

14 • Inspection of all cattle guards for adequacy and replacement of up to 6;

15 • Replacement of the bridge with one that meets Wyoming Department of Transportation 

standards for HS-20 loading3 16 . Based on preliminary engineering, the new bridge 

17 requires an approximate span of 125 to 150 feet and a 24-foot travelway width. The new 

18 bridge will be installed just downstream (south) of the existing bridge; and

19 • After the new bridge is completed, removal of the old bridge and its approaches.

20 Prior to conducting any work, the existing bridge will be evaluated for eligibility for listing on the 

21 National Register of Historic Places and any required mitigation, including photographic 

22 recordation, will be completed.

23 3.2.1.2 Anticline Substation

24 The proposed Anticline Substation is located about 2.5 miles southeast of the Jim Bridger 

25 Power Plant, along the east side of Deadman Draw, approximately 30 miles east of Rock 

 

3 Loading is either H-20 or HS-20 based on an axle load of 32 kilo-pounds. This load is divided by the number of 

tires on each axle.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-26

1 Springs, Wyoming, as shown on Appendix A, Figure A-4. The proposed substation will consist 

2 of a new 500-kV yard constructed southeast of the power plant occupying a fenced area of 

3 about 125 acres on private land (Appendix A, Figure A-14). Equipment to be installed within the 

4 fenced area includes 500-kV and 345-kV circuit breaker bays and associated equipment, bus 

5 supports, high-voltage switches, transmission line termination structures, 500/345-kV 

6 transformers, 345-kV phase shifting transformer, 500-kV reactors, 500-kV capacitors, and a new 

7 control building to house communications and control equipment. Access to the new 500-kV 

8 yard requires improving about 0.5-mile of existing dirt road to a 20- to 24-foot all-weather 

9 surface road between the existing Jim Bridger Power Plant access road and proposed Anticline 

10 Substation fenceline, improved highway access approaches, and a Union Pacific Railroad 

11 crossing. Within the substation site, approximately 0.4 mile of intermittent stream channel will 

12 be realigned to provide site drainage. Site development will disturb approximately 150 acres 

13 and 140 acres would be required for operations. 

14 The new 500-kV line from the interconnection with Segment 2 (part of Segment 3), the new 500-

15 kV line going to Populus Substation (Segment 4), and the new 345-kV line going to the Jim 

16 Bridger 345-kV Substation (Segment 3A) will connect into the Anticline Substation yard.

17 3.2.1.3 Cedar Hill Substation

18 The proposed Cedar Hill Substation will be located on public and private land approximately 20 

19 miles southeast of Twin Falls, Idaho, as shown on Appendix A, Figure A-15 as the western 

20 terminus of Segment 7. The Cedar Hill Substation is the interconnection point for three new 

21 Gateway 500-kV transmission lines. The three lines include the 500-kV line from the Populus 

22 Substation (Segment 7), the 500-kV line from the Hemingway Substation (Segment 9), and the 

23 500-kV line from the Midpoint Substation (Segment 10). 

24 Each of the transmission line bays contain high-voltage circuit breakers and switches, bus 

25 supports, and control equipment. New 500-kV reactors and 500-kV capacitors will be installed 

26 within the fenced area. Transmission line termination structures, approximately 125 to 135 feet 

27 tall, will be installed to terminate the 500-kV conductors. A new control building will be 

28 constructed to house the 500-kV communications and control equipment for the proposed 

29 Gateway 500-kV transmission lines. Approximately 1,000 feet of new access road will be 

30 required between the existing county line road and the substation.

31 Site development will disturb approximately 65 acres and 54 acres will be required for 

32 operations. 

33 3.2.2 Existing Substations

34 The substations described in this section are already operational. Alternative locations for these 

35 substations were not considered. The following describes their locations and the modifications 

36 proposed as part of the Gateway West Project.

37 3.2.2.1 Windstar Substation

38 The Windstar Substation is located on private lands approximately 3.5 miles east of Glenrock, 

39 Wyoming, and approximately 1 mile north of the Dave Johnston Power Plant (Appendix A, 

40 Figure A-16). 

41 For the Gateway West Project, one expanded 230-kV line bay, including 230-kV circuit breakers 

42 and associated equipment, bus supports, high-voltage switches, and transmission line 

43 termination structure, will be added to the Windstar Substation to electrically terminate the new 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-27

1 transmission line from the Aeolus Substation (Segment 1W[a]). Site development will disturb 

2 approximately 5 acres within the existing substation fenceline.

3 A new control house will be added or the existing control house will be expanded and/or added 

4 to accommodate the necessary system communications and control equipment. The existing 

5 access road will be used to reach the site.

6 3.2.2.2 Dave Johnston Substation 

7 The existing Dave Johnston Substation 230-kV yard (Segment 1W[c]) will be modified to match 

8 the proposed capacity of the transmission configuration, Replacement of existing 230-kV circuit 

9 breakers, high-voltage switches, tubular and wire bus, bus supports, and transmission line 

10 termination structures is required. No expansion of Dave Johnston Substation is proposed and 

11 all construction will take place within the existing substation fence. (Appendix A, Figure A-17). 

12 3.2.2.3 Heward Substation

13 The Heward Substation will be developed on BLM land immediately adjacent to the existing 

14 Difficulty Substation, which is located about 45 miles from Bessemer Bend and approximately 

15 34 miles north of Medicine Bow, Wyoming, as shown on Appendix A, Figure A-18. Although 

16 operationally independent of the Difficulty Substation, it is in effect an expansion of an existing 

17 use. Heward comprises a new 230-kV yard to the west and immediately adjacent to the existing 

18 substation fenced area. The Heward 230-kV yard will be required because the existing 230-kV 

19 bus and other equipment within the Difficulty Substation is under-rated for accommodating the 

20 additional electrical capacity that will be added by rebuilding and reconductoring a portion of the 

21 existing Dave Johnston – Rock Springs 230-kV line between the Dave Johnston Power Plant 

22 and the planned Aeolus Substation (Proposed Route 1W(c). Adding the new 230-kV yard will 

23 increase the flow through capacity of the 230-kV bus and also facilitate maintaining power to 

24 Difficulty Substation customers during construction.

25 Site development will disturb approximately 7 acres and 5 acres will be required for operations. 

26 The new 230-kV yard includes 230-kV circuit breakers, high-voltage switches, bus supports, 

27 and transmission line termination structures. The 230-kV transmission line termination 

28 structures will be approximately 70 feet tall. A new control house will be constructed within the 

29 fenced area to accommodate the necessary system communications and control equipment in 

30 the new 230-kV yard. The 230-kV bus will be extended to interconnect to the existing Difficulty 

31 Substation 230-kV bus. The existing Difficulty Substation access road will be utilized on the 

32 current alignment and state highway entrance. Approximately 500 feet of additional roadway 

33 will be developed adjacent to the northern substation fence line to provide alternative equipment 

34 access to the Difficulty Substation. The rebuilt Dave Johnston – Heward and Heward – Aeolus 

35 230-kV lines will enter and exit the new substation yard from the north and south as shown in 

36 Appendix A, Figure A-19.

37 3.2.2.4 Shirley Basin Substation 

38 The existing Shirley Basin 230-kV Substation will require the addition of control, protection, and 

39 communications equipment to the existing control building. No expansion of Shirley Basin 

40 Substation is proposed and all construction will take place within the existing substation fence

41 (Appendix A, Figure A-19). 

42 3.2.2.5 Jim Bridger 345-kV Substation

43 The existing Jim Bridger Power Plant has a separate 345-kV substation yard located east of the 

44 plant (Appendix A, Figure A-20). A 5.5-mile interconnecting 345-kV transmission line between 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-28

1 the new Anticline Substation 500-kV yard and the existing Jim Bridger Substation 345-kV yard 

2 (Segment 3A) will be required to electrically connect the two substations. The Jim Bridger 345-

3 kV yard will be expanded by about 10 acres to accommodate the line termination position.

4 Equipment to be installed within the fenced area includes 345-kV circuit breaker bays and 

5 associated equipment, bus supports, high-voltage switches, transmission line termination 

6 structures and relocated 345-kV capacitors.

7 3.2.2.6 Populus Substation

8 The existing Populus Substation (Figure A-21), located near the town of Downey, Idaho, will be 

9 expanded to accommodate the addition of the Gateway West 500-kV transmission lines 

10 (Appendix A, Figure A-1). A new 500-kV yard will be constructed in the expansion area north of 

11 the existing 345-kV substation yard and interconnected to the existing 345-kV station equipment 

12 through a new 500/345-kV transformer bank. Site development will disturb approximately 90 

13 acres and 80 acres will be required for expansion of the existing fence line for operations. 

14 (Appendix A, Figure A-21). 500–kV transmission line bays will be installed for connection to the 

15 transformer bank and the termination of the three 500-kV line positions for lines to Anticline 

16 Substation (Segment 4), Borah Substation (Segment 5), and Cedar Hill Substation (Segment 7). 

17 Each of the transformer and line bays contains high-voltage circuit breakers and switches, bus 

18 supports, and control equipment. A new 500/345-kV transformer bank, 500-kV reactors, and 

19 500-kV capacitors will be installed within the fenced area. Transmission line termination 

20 structures, approximately 125 to 135 feet tall, will be installed to physically terminate the 500-kV 

21 conductors. A new control building will be constructed to house the 500-kV communications 

22 and control equipment. The existing access road will be used to reach the site. 

23 3.2.2.7 Borah Substation

24 The existing Borah Substation is located near American Falls, Idaho (Appendix A, Figure A-8). 

25 Expansion of the existing substation requires expansion of the fenced area on private land to 

26 accommodate the new 500-kV facilities. Site development will disturb approximately 40 acres 

27 and 35 acres will be required for expansion of the existing fence line for operations. The 

28 existing Midpoint – Kinport 345-kV line, which currently bypasses the Borah Substation, will be 

29 reconnected into an existing 345-kV line bay at this substation and the remaining line segment 

30 to Midpoint Substation (Segment 6 – upgrade to 500 kV) and the 500-kV line from Populus 

31 Substation (Segment 5) will terminate in the new expansion area. The new 500-kV facilities will 

32 be connected to the existing station by the addition of a 500/345-kV transformer bank (Appendix 

33 A, Figure A-22).

34 Each of the transformer and line bays contains high-voltage circuit breakers and switches, bus 

35 supports, and control equipment. The new 500/345-kV transformer bank, 500-kV reactors, and 

36 500-kV capacitors will be installed within the fenced area. Transmission line termination 

37 structures, approximately 125 to 135 feet tall, will be installed to physically terminate the 500-kV 

38 conductors. The existing control building will be enlarged and/or a new control building will be 

39 added to house the new 500-kV communications and control equipment. The existing access 

40 road will be used to reach the site.

41 3.2.2.8 Midpoint Substation

42 The existing Midpoint Substation is approximately 9 miles south of Shoshone, Idaho, on 

43 Highway 93 (Appendix A, Figure A-10). The Midpoint Substation will be expanded by 40 acres 

44 on private land to accommodate the new Gateway West 500-kV lines. The three 500-kV 

45 transmission lines from Hemingway Substation (Segment 8), Cedar Hill Substation (Segment 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-29

1 10), and Borah Substation (Segment 6) will terminate in the expansion area (Appendix A, Figure 

2 A-23). 

3 Each of the transmission line bays contains high-voltage circuit breakers and switches, bus 

4 supports, and control equipment. New 500-kV reactors and 500-kV capacitors will be installed 

5 within the fenced area. Transmission line termination structures, approximately 125 to 135 feet 

6 tall, will be installed to physically terminate the 500-kV conductors. The existing control building 

7 will be enlarged and/or a new control building will be added to house the 500-kV 

8 communications and control equipment for the new Gateway West 500-kV transmission lines. 

9 The existing access road will be used to reach the site.

10 3.2.2.9 Hemingway Substation

11 The existing Hemingway Substation is located approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, 

12 Idaho, just off of Highway 78 near Wilson Creek Cemetery, shown on Appendix A, Figure A-10 

13 as the western terminus of Segment 8. 

14 The Hemingway Substation has sufficient space planned within the existing fenced area to

15 accommodate the two new 500-kV transmission line bays for Gateway West (Appendix A, 

16 Figure A-24). One bay will be for the 500-kV line from the Midpoint Substation (Segment 8) and 

17 one for the 500-kV line from the Cedar Hill Substation (Segment 9). Each of the transmission 

18 line bays contains high-voltage circuit breakers and switches, bus supports, and control 

19 equipment. 

20 New 500-kV reactors and 500-kV capacitors will be installed within the fenced area. 

21 Transmission line termination structures, approximately 125 to 135 feet tall, will be installed to 

22 physically terminate the 500-kV conductors. The communications and control equipment for the 

23 Gateway 500-kV transmission lines will be housed within the existing control building. The 

24 existing access road will be used to reach the site. 

25 3.3 Transmission Line Components

26 Regardless of the route or the structure type chosen, the construction, operation, maintenance, 

27 and decommissioning of the transmission line will be conducted as specified in this section. 

28 This section provides a general outline of the construction, operations, maintenance, and 

29 decommissioning of the transmission line, and references portions of Appendix B, which 

30 provides details on each component. Both this section and Appendix B are organized into four 

31 parts. The first part describes the components of the transmission line system, including the 

32 transmission line itself and its supporting structures, substations, and the communication 

33 system. The second part describes the construction techniques and addresses both the 

34 permanent alterations and the temporary disturbances needed as well as providing a 

35 description of the construction workforce, equipment, and traffic. The third part describes the 

36 operations and maintenance of the new system, while the fourth part discusses 

37 decommissioning and restoration of the ROW. 

38 3.3.1 System Components

39 The new transmission system is composed of the transmission structures themselves, the 

40 conductors, other hardware, the communications system, access roads, and substations. Each 

41 is summarized below and detailed in Appendix B.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-30

1 3.3.1.1 Construction Disturbance and Land Requirements 

2 Appendix B, Section 3.1.1 details the typical ROW land areas needed for the various 

3 components during construction and over the operational life of the Project. 

4 3.3.1.2 Transmission Line System

5 Appendix B, Section 2.1.1 describes transmission structures, including their types and sizes, the 

6 clearances needed between phases of the system and between the lowest conductor and the 

7 ground surface, and their foundations. It goes on to describe the conductor types and the other 

8 hardware used. Both steel H-frames and lattice steel towers are detailed. 

9 3.3.1.3 Communication System

10 To control the transmission line and manage the flow of electricity, a sophisticated 

11 communication system is required. This communication system’s backbone is a fiber optic 

12 system contained within one of the overhead ground wires carried along the length of the 

13 transmission system. The fiber optic signal needs to be “boosted” or regenerated about every 

14 55 miles along the system, requiring optical signal regeneration stations. These stations consist 

15 of a building 12 by 32 by 9 feet tall, a fenced yard, access road, and distribution power supply 

16 from the local distribution system. They are typically built close to the transmission line as land 

17 use and physical features allow. Details are found in Appendix B, Section 2.4.2. 

18 3.3.1.4 Access Roads 

19 During construction vehicular access will be required to each structure. Appendix B, Section 

20 2.5.1 specifies the typical access roads. New access roads will be constructed and existing 

21 roads widened as needed to provide a 14-foot-wide travel way. Roads not required for 

22 operations will be restored to their original condition or left as is, depending on landowner/land 

23 management agency requirements. Exact locations for roads will be developed during the 

24 detailed design phase. Preliminary design has provided indicative locations for roads and 

25 laydown yards along the entire ROW. These indicative locations have been used in geographic 

26 information system (GIS) analysis to develop the “disturbance footprint” of the Project. While 

27 the vast majority of the access roads to be used by the Project will be within the ROW 

28 requested, some access roads will be outside the ROW. 

29 Access roads are necessary for access to, and maintenance of, transmission lines, structures 

30 or ancillary facilities, but they are not part of the public or federal network of roads. They are 

31 generally closed to the public and will be maintained by the Companies and are detailed in 

32 Appendix B, Section 2.5.2. With few exceptions, construction access roads become roads 

33 needed for operations, although most will be used only infrequently to meet maintenance 

34 requirements. Access roads needed for operations and structure construction pads will be 

35 revegetated but not recontoured. 

36 3.3.1.5 Multi-Purpose Yards and Fly Yards 

37 Appendix B, Sections 3.2.3 and 3.2.4 provide a general description for multi-purpose yards and 

38 fly yards. Exact locations for yards will be developed during the detailed design phase, but 

39 preliminary design has provided indicative locations for roads and laydown yards along the 

40 entire ROW. These indicative locations have been used in GIS to develop the “disturbance 

41 footprint” of the Project. While the vast majority of the multi-purpose yards to be used by the 

42 Project would be within the ROW requested, some multi-purpose yards and most fly yards 

43 would be outside the ROW. Multi-purpose yards and fly yards are temporary disturbances or 

44 temporary uses of areas already developed for storage or other industrial uses. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-31

1 3.3.1.6 Substations

2 The description of substations includes their access roads, the types of buildings, transformers, 

3 and other infrastructure needed to convert incoming voltage to either another long-distance 

4 transmission voltage or to a lower voltage appropriate for distribution to load centers nearby. 

5 Details of substation contents are found in Appendix B, Section 2.6. 

6 3.3.2 System Construction

7 3.3.2.1 Transmission Line Construction

8 The installation of transmission structures requires preparation of each site where a structure 

9 will be installed, including vegetation removal and grading to obtain a relatively flat surface for 

10 the operation of the large cranes used to install the structures. Then, either the directly 

11 embedded H-frame structure holes need to be drilled or excavated to accept the two poles of 

12 each structure, drilled concrete piers are developed for each of three poles for angle structures 

13 for the 345-kV structures, or else four foundations for each of the four legs of the lattice steel 

14 towers must be established. Appendix B, Table B-2 describes in detail the ranges of foundation 

15 sizes, depths, and amounts of concrete needed for each. In addition to the general description 

16 of foundation installation, Section 3.5.1 of Appendix B discusses the procedures if rock is 

17 encountered and blasting is needed. After the holes are dug for H-frame installation or the 

18 foundations completed for the lattice steel towers, the structures are brought in either by truck or 

19 by helicopter. If ground transportation is used, cranes will be employed for lifting and installing 

20 the structures. Structures are assembled at fly yards if helicopters are used (see also Section 

21 3.5.2 of Appendix B specifying helicopter use procedures). 

22 After the structures are assembled and in place, the conductors and the overhead ground wires 

23 will be strung from tower to tower. This is generally accomplished using a helicopter but may be 

24 conducted from the ground if the access road travels directly between towers. Details are found 

25 in Section 3.2.8 of Appendix B.

26 3.3.2.2 Communication Systems

27 Construction of the fiber optic “backbone” of the communication system will be accomplished at 

28 the same time as the conductors are strung. Regeneration station construction is also detailed 

29 in Section 3.3.1 of Appendix B. 

30 3.3.2.3 Substation Construction

31 Appendix B, Section 3.4 provides details of substation construction, including development of

32 all-weather access roads, staging areas, clearing and grading of the site, establishment of 

33 grounding mats and systems, fencing, foundation excavation, structure and equipment 

34 installation, oil containment system installation, control building installation, and finally cleanup 

35 and landscaping. 

36 3.3.2.4 Construction Elements

37 Section 3.6 in Appendix B concludes by providing details of the construction workforce to be 

38 employed, the construction equipment and likely daily traffic patterns during the peak of 

39 construction, and the proposed construction schedule. Removal of temporary facilities and 

40 waste disposal are also discussed. 

41 3.3.3 Operations and Maintenance

42 The Companies have prepared Project-specific operations and maintenance policies and 

43 procedures designed to meet the requirements of the NERC, WECC, and the state public utility 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 3-32

1 commissions, while remaining in compliance with the applicable codes and standards with 

2 respect to maintaining the reliability of the electrical system. Operations and maintenance 

3 activities include transmission line patrols, climbing inspections, tower and wire maintenance, 

4 insulator washing in selected areas as needed, service roads repairs. Periodic inspection and 

5 maintenance is also a key part of operating and maintaining the electrical system. The following 

6 key topics are described in detail in Appendix B, Section 4.0:

7 • Routine system inspection, maintenance, and repair;

8 • Transmission line maintenance;

9 • Hardware maintenance and repairs;

10 • Service road and work area repair;

11 • Vegetation management; and

12 • Substation and regeneration site maintenance.

13 3.3.4 Decommissioning

14 The projected life of the Gateway West Project is 50 years. Typically, transmission lines that 

15 have been maintained through that period will continue to provide service for a much longer 

16 lifetime. At the end of the service life of the Project, assuming that it is not upgraded or 

17 otherwise kept in service, the structures and conductors would be removed. The substations 

18 and regeneration stations, if not needed for other existing transmission line projects, would also 

19 be removed. Appendix B, Section 5.0 provides information regarding the removal of materials 

20 and the restoration of the sites. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 4-1

1 4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLANS 

2 This section describes the framework plans included as appendices to this POD that the 

3 Companies will use to ensure environmental protection during construction, operation, and 

4 maintenance. Each plan will include environmental protection measures (EPMs). These 

5 measures have been developed by the Companies to maintain environmental quality and meet 

6 requirements of various agencies. For the purposes of ongoing review and discussion with 

7 agencies, the measures are included herein as Appendix Z. Once the measures are finalized, 

8 they will be incorporated into individual plans. The Companies will be responsible to ensure 

9 their contractors and employees will implement these measures. Table 4-1 describes the 

10 framework environmental protection plans (EPPs). 

11 The process leading to a set of Final plans is an iterative one that started with initial siting and 

12 will end with the submittal of final Plans for protection of resources during construction and 

13 restoration details for the permitted route. Framework Plans are an intermediate step to provide 

14 each Plan’s structure and as much detail as is available at this stage of project development. 

15 Framework Plans 

16 To support the Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) analysis of the Gateway West Project, 

17 the Companies developed an indicative layout of centerline location, access roads, 

18 multipurpose areas, fly yards and pulling and tensioning sites at a desktop level for the 

19 Proposed Route and alternative routes identified by the agencies and other stakeholders that 

20 the BLM determined should be analyzed in detail in the EIS. Section 3.1 of the Draft EIS 

21 describes that process. Concurrently the Companies developed a series of Framework EPPs. 

22 Appendix C of the POD, the Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan, 

23 provides details of how the Companies will uphold, document, and manage compliance with the 

24 requirements of all federal, state, and local permits and landowner agreements. This plan 

25 provides a complete approach to third-party monitoring, reporting, and management of 

26 construction compliance with the terms and conditions of permits and agreements controlling 

27 the Project. 

28 The remaining Framework Plans (Appendices D through R of the POD and summarized in 

29 Table 4-1) and the Environmental Protection Measures (EPMs, found in Appendix Z) have been 

30 developed as much as possible given the lack of certainty of the approval and permitting 

31 process. Note that for the purposes of the May 2012 POD and its September 2012 supplement, 

32 Appendix Z represents the Companies’ environmental protection measures, including those 

33 measures proposed by agencies which the Companies have agreed to incorporate in their 

34 project description. 

35 Schedule and Procedure for Final Plan Development

36 The BLM and other agencies have taken the Project description, including the EPMs listed in 

37 Appendix Z of the POD, into consideration during their environmental analysis of the impacts of 

38 the project. When the BLM and other agencies have completed that analysis and published it 

39 as the Final EIS, the Companies expect that there will be additional requirements imposed 

40 beyond those found in the EPMs. Those requirements will be incorporated, together with those 

41 EPMs found to be adequate by the agencies, into each of the Final Plans. 

42 Step 1: Additional Engineering Design

43 The Companies have taken the initiative to move the process of determining the site-specific 

44 details forward even before the agencies have issued permits. This at-risk work has been 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 4-2

1 limited to Phase 1 of the project (Segments 1 through 4) where the Companies feel that there is 

2 a strong agreement among federal, state, and local permitting agencies regarding the location 

3 of the Preferred Route. In that case, the Companies have invested in additional design 

4 engineering, in which the initial desktop design is verified in the field and provided with 

5 additional detail through engineering modeling to resolve angle structure locations, clearances 

6 and road alignments and grades. In addition, engineering design has taken into account 

7 information developed during the environmental analysis and has avoided where feasible such 

8 resources as wetlands, sensitive plants, raptor nesting areas, other wildlife sensitive areas, and 

9 cultural resources. 

10 The Companies intend to present the results of this at-risk engineering design work to the land 

11 managing agencies including the BLM, the USFS, and the BOR as well as to private 

12 landowners in a series of meetings covering Segments 1 – 4. The objectives of these meetings 

13 are to explain deviations from the centerline as analyzed in the EIS, solicit input on locally 

14 known resource issues, and request review and approval of associated facility locations such as 

15 access roads, multipurpose yards, regeneration stations, and fly yards. These review meetings 

16 will be concluded before the BLM issues the Record of Decision on the environmental analysis 

17 and the BLM and other agencies issue their right-of-way grants, special use permits, and other 

18 permitting documents. 

19 Step 2: Development, Review, and Approval of Final Plans 

20 The results of these meetings and any revisions requested in the design engineering will 

21 provide the basis for the second step for acquiring sufficient site-specific information to finalize 

22 each plan. This step will occur after the issuance of a right-of-way grant from the BLM and 

23 other permits from other agencies in Wyoming and Idaho. At that time the engineering, 

24 procurement, and construction (EPC) contractor will be on board and will complete both the 

25 engineering design and the details of each plan for review and approval by the BLM and other 

26 permitting agencies. 

27 The chief environmental protection advantage of the EPC process is that the contractor who will 

28 be responsible for day to day construction will have been integrally involved in development of

29 the Final EPPs. This ensures that the planning and construction process are synchronized and 

30 incorporate feasible solutions. 

31 The Companies, through their EPC contractor, will submit each plan to the agencies for review 

32 and approval. When the plans have all been reviewed and revised if needed, they will be 

33 incorporated into the Construction POD. The Construction POD will be submitted with site34 specific information for each Notice to Proceed (NTP) to Construction. The Companies and the 

35 BLM have agreed that the Project will receive a single ROD but a series of NTPs that reflect the 

36 Companies’ construction priorities. The Companies expect that each NTP will be issued only 

37 when the BLM and other agencies are satisfied that the Construction POD for that portion of the 

38 Project contains sufficient detail to adequately protect environmental resources and restore the 

39 area after construction. 

40 Plan Implementation

41 The Companies will ensure that their contractors and employees implement these measures 

42 following the procedures in the Environmental Compliance Management Plan. The Companies 

43 and BLM have agreed on the use of a third-party Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC) to 

44 act on the behalf of land managing and other regulatory agencies and provide environmental 

45 compliance oversight during construction. The CIC will be selected by the BLM and other 

46 agencies but paid for by the Companies. The Companies anticipate that the CIC will be 

47 selected and hired prior to issuance of requested the right-of-way grants and special use 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 4-3

1 authorizations, respectively, to allow adequate time for the CIC to review documents and 

2 develop on-the-ground familiarity with the Project. The CIC will be authorized to enforce the 

3 POD on BLM- and USFS-administered lands. The CIC will also ensure BLM and USFS 

4 responsibilities under the NHPA and ESA are met on non-federal lands and disturbance on non5 federal lands is consistent with the analysis in the EIS.

6 Table 4-1. Environmental Protection Plans

Framework Plan 

Preliminary Plan or 

Environmental 

Protection Measures Final Plan

The Environmental Compliance Management Plan will be the 

primary guidance document that states how the Companies will 

uphold, document, and manage compliance with the right-of-way 

grant, the POD, landowner agreements, and all federal, state, and 

local permits. It is a centralized Project environmental compliance 

reference and is thereby intended to facilitate environmental 

compliance across the entire Project.

Included in POD as 

Appendix C. 

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Reclamation Plan will include site-specific 

construction mitigation, reclamation, and revegetation measures for 

each land management area crossed by the ROW within BLMmanaged and National Forest lands. It will combine the Companies’ 

BMPs with site-specific mitigation developed in consultation with 

agencies. Some measures will apply Project-wide, while others will 

be designed for specific areas.

Included in POD as 

Appendix D. 

Environmental protection 

measures (EPMs) 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan 

The Framework Noxious Weed Plan will provide methods to control 

the potential occurrence/infestation of noxious and invasive weeds 

during and following construction of the Project. The purpose of the 

plan is to ensure noxious weeds are identified and controlled during 

the construction of project facilities and all federal, state, county, and 

other local requirements are satisfied. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix E. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan will include 

measures for temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control 

that will be used during construction, operation, and maintenance of 

the transmission line and ancillary facilities.

Included in POD as 

Appendix F. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Spill Prevention, Containment, and 

Countermeasures Plan will include measures for spill prevention 

practices, requirements for refueling and equipment operation near 

waterbodies, procedures for emergency response and incident 

reporting, and training requirements.

Included in POD as 

Appendix G. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan

will present the measures proposed by the Companies for avoidance 

and minimization of impacts to special status plant and wildlife 

species as related to construction activities for the Project and 

outlines specific conservation measures to be implemented in the 

event that state or Federally listed species, BLM sensitive species, or 

Forest Service special status species or their habitats are identified 

within or adjacent to the Project right-of-way. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix H. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Compensatory mitigation 

plan for impacts to sagegrouse habitat submitted 

to the BLM under separate 

cover. 

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan

will provide measures to protect these resources from potential 

impacts during construction, operation, and maintenance activities. 

The goals of this plan are to control Project-related erosion and 

sedimentation into streams and wetlands and minimize disturbance 

and erosion of streambeds and banks and protect springs and wells in 

the Project area from impacts due to blasting and hazardous 

materials contamination. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix I. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z. 

Compensatory mitigation 

plan for impacts to Waters 

of the U.S. submitted to 

the BLM under separate 

cover. 

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan will 

identify the mitigation measures needed to avoid or reduce projectrelated impacts to paleontological resources, wherever feasible. This 

plan provides important background and contextual information useful 

for the paleontological resources mitigation program. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix J. EPMs in 

Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

7
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 4-4

1 Table 4-1. Environmental Protection Plans (continued)

Framework Plan 

Preliminary Plan or 

Environmental 

Protection Measures Final Plan

The Framework Agricultural Protection Plan will include measures 

intended to mitigate or provide compensation for agricultural impacts 

that may occur due to construction of the Project. The measures will 

be intended to be implemented on partially or wholly owned private 

agricultural land unless directed otherwise by the landowner. 

Agricultural land will be defined to include that which is annually 

cultivated or rotated cropland; land in perennial field crops, improved 

pasture; hayfields; and land in the Conservation Reserve Program.

Included in POD as 

Appendix K. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan will

include measures that require compliance with federal policies and 

standards relative to planning, siting, improvement, maintenance, and 

operation of roads for the Project.

Included in POD as 

Appendix L. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Blasting Plan will outline methods to prevent 

adverse impacts to human health and safety, property, and the 

environment that could potentially result from the use of explosives 

during project construction and mitigate risks and potential impacts 

associated with blasting procedures that may be required for 

construction. The plan will provide all levels of construction personnel 

project-specific information concerning blasting procedures, including 

the safe use and storage of explosives.

Included in POD as 

Appendix M. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan will provide 

measures to ensure protection of the air quality that will be affected by 

the Project. This plan is to be implemented during the construction, 

operation, and maintenance phases of the Project. These measures 

are intended to minimize dust and emissions from constructionrelated activities.

Included in POD as 

Appendix N. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan will include 

measures to be taken by the Companies and its contractors to ensure 

that fire prevention and suppression measures are carried out in 

accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. The plan will 

address the specific requirements of the Forest Service and BLM 

handbooks and provide BMPs for fire management on privately 

owned lands..

Included in POD as 

Appendix O. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan will reduce 

the risks associated with the use, storage, transportation, production, 

and disposal of hazardous materials (including hazardous substances 

and wastes). This Plan will identify Project-specific mitigation 

measures and other specific stipulations and methods to address spill 

prevention, response, and cleanup procedures for the Project. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix P. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Construction Emergency Preparedness and 

Response Plan will provide an overview of methods to be 

implemented if the need for emergency management is imminent. 

This document will the existing support structure, chain of command, 

and emergency communications protocols to be used as a guide for 

an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan to be completed by 

the Construction Contractor

Included in POD as 

Appendix Q. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

The Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response 

Plan will include measures to be employed while conducting routine, 

corrective, and emergency operations and maintenance activities. 

Measures identified will be in compliance with applicable state and 

federal laws and policies; ensure consistency across and within 

federal jurisdictions; and allow for the Companies to access the 

transmission line and ancillary facilities in a timely, cost effective, and 

safe manner. 

Included in POD as 

Appendix R. EPMs 

provided in Appendix Z.

Construction 

POD and 

COM Plan

2
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 4-5

1 Table 4-1. Environmental Protection Plans (continued)

Framework Plan 

Preliminary Plan or 

Environmental 

Protection Measures Final Plan

The Cultural Resources Protection and Management Measures 

will include the procedures undertaken to inventory, evaluate, and 

protect cultural resources. It describes the treatment of any eligible or 

listed resource that cannot be avoided, and procedures for handling 

inadvertent discoveries during construction, operation, and 

maintenance.

General EPMs provided in 

Appendix Z. Final 

measures will be based on 

the Programmatic 

Agreement and the 

Historic Properties 

Treatment Plan. Draft 

HPTP with framework 

compensatory mitigation 

plan for impacts to historic 

trails submitted under 

separate cover to the 

BLM. 

Construction 

POD and

COM Plan 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 5-1

1 5.0 LITERATURE CITED 

2 BLM. 1983. Bruneau Management Framework Plan, Step 3 – Decisions.

3 BLM. 1984. Platte River Resource Management Plan, Wyoming.

4 BLM. 1985 (1988). Cassia Resource Management Plan (and Amendment), Burley District, 

5 Idaho.

6 BLM. 1986. Lander Resource Management Plan, Wyoming.

7 BLM. 1986. Shoshone Monument Resource Management Plan, Shoshone District, Idaho.

8 BLM. 1987. Cascade Proposed Resource Management Plan and Final Environmental Impact 

9 Statement, Boise District, Idaho.

10 BLM. 1987. Jarbidge Resource Management Plan, Boise District, Idaho.

11 BLM. 1990. Great Divide Resource Management Plan, Wyoming.

12 BLM. 1990. Kuna Management Framework Plan, Idaho.

13 BLM. 1997. Green River Resource Management Plan. Rock Springs Field Office, Wyoming. 

14 BLM. 1999. Owyhee Resource Management Plan, Lower Snake River District, Boise Field 

15 Office, Idaho.

16 BLM. 2004. Fire, Fuels, and Related Vegetation Management Direction Plan Amendment and 

17 Environmental Impact Statement, Upper Snake River District, Idaho.

18 BLM. 2006, Birds of Prey Resource Management Plan, Boise District Office, Idaho.

19 BLM. 2006. Pocatello Resource Management Plan and Environmental Impact Statement. 

20 Pocatello Field Office, Idaho. 

21 BLM. 2007. Kemmerer Resource Management Plan. Kemmerer Field Office, Wyoming. 

22 BLM. 2007. Overland Pass Natural Gas Liquids Pipeline Environmental Impact Statement. 

23 BLM/WY/PL-07/026+5101 AS-06-01095. Wyoming State Office and Rawlins Field 

24 Office, Wyoming. 

25 BLM. 2007. Record of Decision and Approved Casper Resource Management Plan, Casper 

26 Field Office, Wyoming.

27 BLM. 2007. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and 

28 Development. BLM/WO/ST-06/021+3071/REV 07. Denver, Colorado. 84 pp.

29 BLM. 2008. Rawlins Resource Management Plan and Environmental Impact Statement. 

30 Rawlins Field Office, Wyoming. 

31 BLM 2011. Draft Environmental Impact Statement for the Gateway West Transmission Line 

32 Project. Wyoming State Office, Cheyenne, WY. 

33 BPA. 2012. Letter requesting comments on options for service to Southeast Idaho. 

34 http://transmission.bpa.gov/Customer_Forums/se_idaho/docs/SILS-
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 5-2

1 CommentPeriodLetter_20120806.pdf and

2 http://transmission.bpa.gov/Customer_Forums/se_idaho/docs/SILS-CommentPeriod3 SupportingDocumentation%20_20120806.pdf 

4 BPA. 2012a. Letter announcing selection of priority project for service to Southeast Idaho. 

5 http://transmission.bpa.gov/Customer_Forums/se_idaho/docs/SILS_Prioritization_Letter

6 _10-01-12.pdf

7 DOE (United States Department of Energy) and BLM. 2008. West-wide Energy Corridor 

8 Programmatic Environmental Impact Statement (Energy Corridor PEIS). Available 

9 online at http://corridoreis.anl.gov/index.cfm.

10 DOE. 2006. National Electric Transmission Congestion Study. Available online at 

11 http://www.oe.energy.gov/DocumentsandMedia/Congestion_Study_2006-10.3.pdf

12 DOI (U.S. Department of the Interior) and BLM 2004. Craters of the Moon National Monument 

13 and Preserve Idaho Draft Management Plan/Environmental Impact Statement.

14 DOI and BLM 2007. Craters of the Moon National Monument and Preserve Management Plan.

15 FAA (Federal Aviation Administration). 2000. Advisory Circular AC 70/7460-1k Obstruction 

16 Marking and Lighting. August 1.

17 FERC (Federal Energy Regulatory Commission). 2008. Order-890. Pro Forma Open Access 

18 Transmission Tariff, Appendix C.

19 Forest Service (U.S. Department of Agriculture Forest Service) 2003. Caribou Targhee National 

20 Forest Revised Forest Plant and Final Environmental Impact Statement, Idaho.

21 Forest Service 2003. Medicine Bow National Forest Revised Land and Resource Management 

22 Plan, Rocky Mountain Region, Wyoming.

23 Gerrard, Darrell T. 2010. Affidavit. Testimony before the Utah Facility Review Board. Rocky 

24 Mountain Power v. Tooele County. August 4. Available online at: 

25 http://psc.utah.gov/utilities/electric/elecindx/2010/1003539indx.html

26 Idaho Power Company and PacifiCorp. 2008. Gateway West Transmission Line Project Siting 

27 Study.

28 Idaho Power. 2008a. 2008 Integrated Resource Plan Update. Available online at 

29 http://www.idahopower.com/energycenter/irp/2006/2006IRPFinal.htm.

30 Idaho Power. 2008. Open Access Transmission Tariff. Available on Open Access Same Time 

31 Information System (OASIS) Web site at 

32 http://www.oatioasis.com/IPCO/IPCOdocs/IPC_OATT_Vol_6_Issued_2007-12-14.pdf

33 Idaho Power. 2008. Transmission Line Clearing Specifications. February.

34 Idaho Power. 2008. Avian protection plan.

35 IPC. 2009. 2009 Integrated Resource Plan. Boise, Idaho. December. Available online at 

36 http://www.idahopower.com/pdfs/AboutUs/PlanningForFuture/irp/2009/2009IntegratedR

37 esourcePlan.pdf
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013 5-3

1 IPC. 2011. 2011 Integrated Resource Plan. Boise, Idaho. June. Available online at 

2 http://www.idahopower.com/pdfs/AboutUs/PlanningForFuture/irp/2011/2011IRPFINAL.p

3 df

4 IDEQ (Idaho Department of Environmental Quality). 2008. Accessed online at 

5 http://www.deq.state.id.us/. February 2008.

6 IEEE. (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 2007. National Electrical Safety Code. 

7 New York, NY. 

8 NACE International. 2003. Mitigation of Alternating Current and Lightning Effects on Metallic 

9 Structures and Corrosion Control Systems.

10 NERC (North American Electrical Reliability Corporation). 2012. NERC: About NERC 

11 [Internet]. Available online at: http://www.nerc.com/page.php?cid=1

12 NTTG (Northern Tier Transmission Group). 2007. Fast Track Study. Available online at

13 http://nttg.biz/site/index.php?option=com_frontpage&Itemid=1

14 PacifiCorp. 2007. Integrated Resource Plan. Available online at 

15 http://www.pacificorp.com/Navigation/Navigation23807.html

16 PacifiCorp. 2007. Preliminary Plan of Development for Bureau of Land Management, Wyoming 

17 State Office. Jim Bridger to Crystal 500kV Transmission Project.

18 PacifiCorp. 2007. Preliminary Plan of Development for Bureau of Land Management, Wyoming 

19 State Office. Dave Johnston to Melba 500-kV and 345-kV Transmission Project.

20 PacifiCorp. 2007. Transmission and Distribution Vegetation Management Program, 

21 Specification Manual. June 1.

22 PacifiCorp. 2008. Open Access Transmission Tariff. Available on Open Access Same Time 

23 Information System (OASIS) Web site at 

24 http://www.oasis.pacificorp.com/oasis/ppw/SEVENTHREVISEDVOLUME11.PDF

25 PacifiCorp. 2011. 2011 Integrated Resources Plan. Volumes I and II. Filed March 31, 2011, 

26 with Idaho, Oregon, Utah, Washington and Wyoming public utilities commissions. 

27 Portland, OR. Available online at http://www.rockymountainpower.net/about/irp.html

28 RMATS (Rocky Mountain Area Transmission Study). 2004. Phase 1 Report. Available online 

29 at http://psc.state.wy.us/htdocs/subregional/FinalReport/rmatsfinalreport.htm.

30 WECC (Western Electricity Coordinating Council) Seams Steering Group-Western 

31 Interconnection (SSG-WI). 2005. Available online at 

32 http://wecc.biz/modules.php?op=modload&name=Downloads&file=index&req=viewsdow

33 nload&sid=179

34 WECC (Western Electricity Coordinating Council). 2011. About WECC [Internet]. Available 

35 online at: http://www.wecc.biz/About/Pages/default.aspx

36 WECC. 2008. Available online at 

37 http://www.wecc.biz/documents/library/Standards/Criteria/TPLstd001-004_4-28-

38 08%20clean.pdf. Accessed May 1, 2008.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX A

2 PROPOSED ROUTE AND SUBSTATION MAPS AND FIGURES

3
!H

!H

!H

!H

!

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!

!H

!

!H

!H

!H

!H

!

!H

!H

!H !H

!H

!H

!H !H

!H

!H

!

!H

!H !H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!

!H

!

!H

!H

!H

!(^

!H

!(^

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

!H

#0

#0

#0

#0#0

#0

#0

#0

#0

#0

#0

#0

IDAHO

OREGON

MONTANA

WYOMING

CRATERS OF

THE MOON

NAT'L MONUMENT

& PRESERVE

FT HALL

RESERVATION

DUCK VALLEY

RESERVATION

MILITARY OP ERATIONS AREAS

2!

1Wa

!

1Wc

!

3! 4!

4! 5! 7!

8!

9!

10

!

6!

3A

!

RAWLINS

CASPER

FOUR RIVERS

POCATELLO

SHOSHONE

BURLEY

KEMMERER

ROCK SPRINGS

OWYHEE

BRUNEAU

JARBIDGE

BORAH

AEOLUS

HEWARD

POPULUS

MIDPOINT WINDSTAR

ANTICLINE

JIM

BRIDGER

SHIRLEY

BASIN

DAVE

JOHNSTON

HEMINGWAY

CEDAR

HILL

BOISE

SALT LAKE CITY

Elko

Cody

Arco Rigby

Logan

Ogden

Basin

Paris

Vernal

Driggs

Dubois

Burley

Casper

Manila

Tooele

Morgan

Lander

Weiser

Rupert

Murphy

Jerome

Hailey

Emmett

Buffalo

Douglas

Rexburg

Challis

Rawlins

Laramie

Preston

Worland

Jackson

Council

Cascade

Payette

Gooding

Sheridan

Kemmerer

Evanston

Randolph

Pinedale

Gillette

Shoshone

Caldwell

Pocatello

Coalville

Fairfield

Blackfoot

Heber City

Farmington

Twin Falls

Malad City

Idaho City

Idaho Falls

Green River

Thermopolis

Brigham City

Soda Springs

Mountain

Home

American

Falls

Kuna

Rockland

Montpelier

Rock Springs

Medicine Bow

Glenrock

UTAH

IDAHO

IDAHO

NEVADA

IDAHO

WYOMING WYOMING

UTAH

WYOMING

COLORADO

Downey

Wheatland Cokeville

15

§ ̈¦

25

§ ̈¦

84

§ ̈¦

86

§ ̈¦

15

§ ̈¦

26 £¤

287

£¤

14 £¤

20 £¤

95 £¤

191

£¤

189

£¤

40 £¤

30 £¤

89 £¤

91 £¤

310

£¤

189

£¤

40 £¤

93 £¤

26 £¤

20 £¤

26 £¤

16 £¤

89 £¤

191

£¤

14 £¤

89 £¤

20 £¤

20 £¤

30 £¤

30 £¤ 220

£¤

26 £¤

89 £¤

26 £¤

89 £¤

30 £¤

20 £¤

191

£¤

89 £¤

95 £¤

84

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦ 15

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

93 £¤

ELKO

PARK

FREMONT

CARBON

OWYHEE

SWEETWATER

TETON

CUSTER

BOX ELDER

NATRONA

TOOELE

ALBANY

MOF FAT

SUBLETTE

LINCOLN

JOHNSON

CAMPBELL

ELMORE

BLAINE

LEMHI

BUTTE

CASSIA

UINTA

CONVERSE

BOISE

VALLEY

BIG HORN

CLARK

ADA

ROUTT

SUMMIT

BINGHAM

RICH

WASHAKIE

POWER

CARIBOU

UINTAH

CACHE

SHERIDAN

JACKSON EUREKA

BEAVERHEAD

CAMAS

LARIMER

TWIN FALLS

ONEIDA

BONNEVILLE

HOT SPRINGS

GEM

DUCHESNE

BANNOCK

WASHINGTON

DAVIS

JEFFERSON

WEBER

BEAR LAKE

DAGGETT

GOODING

SALT LAKE

ADAMS

CANYON

MORGAN

FRANKLIN

MADISON

WASATCH

PAYETTE

LINCOLN

Enlarged Area

Above

!

I

0 40

Miles

Route Features

Proposed RouteEnergize Existing 345-kV to500-kV

#0 Substation

2! Segment Number

Other Features

!(^ State Capital

!H County Seat

! Other City/Town

CountyBLM Field OfficeMorley Nelson Snake RiverBirds of Prey NCAWest Wide Energy Corridor(WWEC)

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

Project Overview

Figure A-1

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

SF299_POD FIG A-1 Project Overview_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

Highlighted areas indicate BLMfield offices crossed by Project

Highlighted areas indicate BLMfield offices crossed by Project
1W(c)

1W(a)

121 UV

487

UV

201

UV

212

UV

321

UV

BATES HOLE

MANAGEMENT AREA

Wheatland

Reservoir

Old Fort Fetterman Rd

Shirley Basin

# Ice Cave Mountain

Bates Creek

Reservoir

Glendo

Reservoir

" DAVE JOHNSTON POWER PLANT

SOLDIER CREEK

ROADLESS AREA (USFS)

GUNNYSACK

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

BUFFALO PEAK

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

LABONTE CANYON

ROADLESS AREA (USFS)

LARAMIE PEAK

ROADLESS AREA (USFS)

COW CREEK MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA (USFS)

#

Freezeout Mountains

" GLENROCK

OIL FIELD

" BIG MUDDY EAST

OIL FIELD

1W(c)

1W(a)

E m i g r a n t G a p R i d g e

Banner Mountain#

L a r a m i e M o u n t a i n s

G r e a s e w o o d F l a t s

h T n u e d r B a s ni F al t s

S h i r l e y M o u n t a i n s

S e m i n o e M o u n t a i n s

SEMINOE SP

Seminoe

Reservoir

Pathfinder

Reservoir

PATHFINDER NWR

BLOWOUT

PENSTEMON

ACEC

!Ï

D e e r C r e e k R a n g e

![

"

L

SEVEN MILE HILL WIND ENERGY PROJECT

i t t l e B a s i n

25

§ ̈¦

25

§ ̈¦

287

£¤

20 £¤

220

£¤

30 £¤

18 £¤

20 £¤

91 UV

94 UV

77 UV

256

UV

95 UV

251

UV

59 UV

319

UV

220

UV

MEDICINE BOW

NATIONAL FOREST

FOXLEY

ELLIS RANCH

MEDICINE BOW

HARFORD FIELD

CASPER-NATRONA

COUNTY INTERNATIONAL

AEOLUS

HEWARD

WINDSTAR

SHIRLEY BASIN

DAVE JOHNSTON

70

!(

60

!(

!(

50

!(

40

30

!(

20

!(

10

!(

70

!(

Elmo

Mills

Hanna

Glendo

Casper

Garrett

Douglas

Bairoil

Guernsey

Glenrock

Bar Nunn

Wheatland

Hartville

Careyhurst

Evansville

Medicine Bow

Lost Springs

Rolling Hills

Mountain View

CARBON COUNTY

NATRONA COUNTY CONVERSE COUNTY

PLATTE COUNTY

ALBANY COUNTY

CASPER

FIELD OFFICE

RAWLINS

FIELD OFFICE

LANDER

FIELD OFFICE

North Pla tt Re vi er

Laram ei River

Dry Creek

ree D r C ee k

Horseshoe Creek

M uddy Creek

B ates Creek

Sweetwater River

North Laramie River

Sybille Creek

B ig Ditc h

Cottonwood Creek

Poison Spider Creek

La Bo t n Ce eer k

Lost Cree k

Fish Creek

S tinking Creek

Iron Creek

South Fork Casp er Creek

Buck Draw

La Pre el Creek

Wallace Cree k

gaS e Hen Creek

u A ts ni Cr

tl o B no er C ke

Lan ec Cre ke

Sage Creek

C hugwater Creek

Duck Creek

Sand Creek

Arka nsas Creek

Muskrat Creek

Rock Creek

Willow Cre ke

Elk horn Creek

M di d el Fork Casper Creek

Broom Creek

Casper Creek

Horse Cre ek

Walker Cree k

Sevenmile Creek

Sepa ration Creek

Smith Cr eek

Twen yt mi el Creek

r B u hs eer C k

Bluegrass Creek

Wagonho nu d Cre ek

Dry Laramie River

u M el Creek

Richeau Creek

N Platte R

Canyon Cree k

i D ma ond Spr ni gs D ar w

Foote Cr

W Fork La Bonte Cr

ae D hd ead r C eek

South Hunton Creek Hunton Creek

Saint Marys Creek

No r ht Pla t et R

West Fork Shawnee Creek

Shee p Cre ek

Sugar Creek

Willow Cre ek

Muddy Creek

Mu ddy Creek

Sand Creek

North Platte River

Duck Creek

keer Cr ee D

North P latte River

Sage Creek

Dry Creek Sand Creek

Rock Creek

2!

1!

1b

!

1c

!

1y

!

1x

!

R65W

R65W

R66W

R66W

R67W

R67W

R68W

R68W

R69W

R69W

R70W

R70W

R71W

R71W

R72W

R72W

R73W

R73W

R74W

R74W

R75W

R75W

R76W

R76W

R77W

R77W

R78W

R78W

R79W

R79W

R80W

R80W

R81W

R81W

R82W

R82W

R83W

R83W

R84W

R84W

R85W

R85W

R86W

R86W

R87W

R87W

R88W

R88W

R89W

R89W

R90W

R90W

R91W

R91W

T21N

T22N

T22N

T23N

T23N

T24N

T24N

T25N

T25N

T26N

T26N

T27N

T27N

T28N

T28N

T29N

T29N

T30N

T30N

T31N

T31N

T32N

T32N

T33N

T33N

T34N

T34N

T35N

T35N

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Enlarged Area

Above

Segment 1W(a) / 1W(c)

Windstar/Johnston to Aeolus

Figure A-2

I

0 10

Miles

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-2 Segment 1W_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!

1, 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d, 1e, 21x, 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d, 1e, 1y, 2

Route Reference PointsSegment 1W(a) ProposedSegment 1W(c) Rebuild

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
MEDI

NATION

121

UV

")

HANNA JUNCTION

SeminoeReservoir

S h i r l e y M o u n t a i n s

S e m i n o e M o u n t a i n s

SEMINOE SP

!Ï

BLOWOUT

PENSTEMON

ACEC

h T n u e d r a B s ni F al ts

Greas ew oo d Fl a ts

W a m s u t t e r R i m

D e l a n e y R i m

PathfinderReservoir

FT STEELE STATE

HISTORIC SITE

"

!Ï

2

#

DETAIL LEFT

# Hanna Draw

MEDICINE BOW

NATIONAL

FOREST

N F

287

£¤

30 £¤

487

UV

77 UV

130

UV

789

UV

72 UV

13 UV

220

UV

71 UV

73 UV

135

UV

130

UV

80

§ ̈¦

D a n a R i d g e

S a n d H i l l s

S e v e r s o n F l a t s

C o a l M i n e R i d g e

H o g b a c k R i d g e

R e d R mi

G r e a t D i v i d e B a s i n

Wamsutter Rd

FOXLEY

ROBBINS

ELLIS RANCH

MEDICINE BOW

RAWLINS MUNICIPAL

(HARVEY FIELD)

2

"

Freezeout Mountains #

CITY OF RAWLINS WATER

TREATMENT FACILITY

SEVEN MILE HILL WIND ENERGY PROJECT "

" ECHO SPRINGSGAS FIELD

SEMINOE-TO-ALCOVA

BACK COUNTRY BYWAY

CRESTON

(FORMER LOCATION)

WAMSUTTER GAS FIELD "

RAWLINS

FIELD OFFICE

LANDER

FIELD OFFICE

SWEETWATER COUNTY

ALBANY COUNTY

FREMONT COUNTY

CARBON COUNTY

CONVERSE COUNT

Elmo

Hanna

Walcott

Rawlins

Bairoil

Sinclair

Saratoga

Wamsutter

Rock River

Medicine Bow

Elk Mountain

LANDER

FIELD OFFICE

ROCK SPRINGS

FIELD OFFICE

90

!(

80

!(

60

!(

50

!(

20

!(

10

!(

70

!(

2!

2g

!

2f

!

2a

!

3!

Rock Creek

Red Cree k

Pass Creek

North Platte River

M uddy Creek

Foote Cr

Sage Creek

Swee wt at er River

aL ramie R vi re

Separation Creek

Bu sh Creek

B ig Ditch

Jack Creek

Bear Cre ek

Bitter Creek

Osborne Draw

Lost C r ee k

Buck Dr wa

Dutton Creek

Little Medicine Bow R

u A ts ni r C

Cooper Creek

Dry Creek

Saint Marys Creek

Creston Draw

Arkansas Creek

Sand Creek

Fourmile Creek

Coal Gulch

i F l ml ore Creek

Little Sage Creek

Beaver Creek

Willow Cre ek

tt art S Dno r wa

Croo ks Cre ek

it S i kn gn C er ke

Barrel Springs Draw

Sevenmile Creek

oB otl Cn reek

North Barrel Springs Draw

Little Laramie River

Coal Creek

Mule C reek

Black Rock Creek

West A kl ali La ek

Alkali Draw

Alkali Lake

Cow Creek

Arapahoe Cre ek

N Platte R

Canyon Cree k

North Spring Creek

Fivemile Ditch

N oF kr Little Medicine Bow R

No r ht Pla tt e R

La Bonte C reek

Threemile Ditch

Laramie River

Willow Creek Rock Creek

Sweetwater River

Sand Creek

Mu ddy Creek

Sage Creek

Dry Creek

Muddy Creek

S evenmile Cre ek

AEOLUS

HEWARD

SHIRLEY BASIN

R100W

R73W R74W

R74W

R75W

R75W

R76W

R76W

R77W

R77W

R78W

R78W

R79W

R79W

R80W

R80W

R81W

R81W

R82W

R82W

R83W

R83W

R84W

R84W

R85W

R85W

R86W

R86W

R87W

R87W

R88W

R88W

R89W

R89W

R90W

R90W

R91W

R91W

R92W

R92W

R93W

R93W

R94W

R94W

R95W

R95W

R96W

R96W

R97W

R97W

R98W

R98W

R99W

R99W

T16N

T16N

T17N

T17N

T18N

T18N

T19N

T19N

T20N

T20N

T21N

T21N

T22N

T22N

T23N

T23N

T24N

T24N

T25N

T25N

T26N

T26N

T27N

T27N

T28N

T28N

T29N

T29N

T30N

Segment 2

Aeolus to Creston

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-3

I

0 10

Miles

FT STEELE STATE HISTORIC SITE

!Ï

F o r t S t e e l e B r e a k s

S a i n t M

a r y ' s R i d g e

D a n a R i d g e

2

RAWLINS

FIELD OFFICE

CARBON

COUNTY

21N 85W 21N 84W 21N 83W

21N 86W

20N 84W 20N 85W

22N 85W 22N 84W

20N 86W

22N 83W

20N 83W

22N 86W

80

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

30 £¤

130

UV

Walcott

40

!(

30

!(

Saint Marys Creek

North Platte R iver

Pass Creek

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI SF299_POD FIG A-3 Segment 2_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!

0 1 2 Miles
Wamsutter Rd

G r e a t D i v i d e B a s i n

DETAIL LEFT

D e l a n e y R i m W a m s u t t e r R i m ECHO SPRINGSGAS FIELD "

WAMSUTTER GAS FIELD "

CRESTON

(FORMER LOCATION)

" BRIDGER COAL MINE

BLACK BUTTE COAL MINE "

"

PATRICK DRAW

GAS FIELD

3

DELANEY RIM GAS FIELD "

ASHLEY NF

80

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

287

£¤

191

£¤

30 £¤

191

£¤

530

UV

430

UV

789

UV

28 UV

372

UV

71 UV

371

UV

374

UV

220

UV

73 UV

28 UV

80

§ ̈¦

ROCK SPRINGS

FIELD OFFICE

RAWLINS

FIELD OFFICE

ANTICLINE

JIM BRIDGER

SWEETWATER COUNTY

CARBON COUNTY

FREMONT COUNTY SUBLETTE COUNTY

3! ROCK SPRINGS-SWEETWATER COUNTY

RAWLINS MUNICIPAL (HARVEY FIELD)

GREATER GREEN RIVER INTERGALACTIC SPACEPORT

Rawlins

Granger

Bairoil

Superior

Sinclair

Wamsutter

Green River

Rock Springs

North Rock Springs 40

!( 30

!(

20

!(

10

!(

B i t et r Creek

Gree n River

Black s Fork

Red Cree k

Pacific Creek

Bear Creek

B gi Sandy R vi re

Big Dry Creek

Salt Wells Creek

Separation Creek

Shute Creek

Bu sh Creek

Black Roc k Creek

Muddy Creek

Hams Fork

S gu ar C er ek

Kil pl ce ek Cr er ek

Sage Cr eek

Osborne Draw

Lost C r ee k

Buck Draw

Little Bitter Creek

Litt el San d R y vi r e

Swee wt ate r River

Blac k Butte Creek

Buckhorn Canyon

Creston Draw

Dry Sandy Creek

Fourmile Gulch

ao C r Cl

Alkali Creek

C wo Creek

Coal Gulch

Eden Canal

Fil ml ore Creek

Barrel Springs Draw

Sand Creek

Jack Morrow Creek

rt S a tt on Dr aw

Alkali Draw

Greasewood Wash

Meadow Springs Wash

Sevenmile Wash

Currant Creek

Stagecoach Draw

Littl e Dry Creek

North Barrel Springs Draw

Deadman Wash

Slate Creek

Cr ooks Cre ek

S mi pson Gulch

East Alkali Lake

Wild Cow Cree k

Little Sage Creek

West Alkali La ek

Arapahoe Cre ek

Wil ol w Creek

L aney Wash

Arkans s a r C ee k

Sevenmile Gulch

Wash ington Dr wa

Savery Creek

Dry Muddy Creek

Threemile Ditch

r G een R vi re

Alkali Creek

Muddy Creek

Sag Ce er e

S

k

and C er ek

Slate Creek

R100W

R100W

R101W

R101W

R102W

R102W

R103W

R103W

R104W

R104W

R105W

R105W

R106W

R106W

R107W

R107W

R108W

R108W

R109W

R109W

R110W

R110W

R111W

R111W

R112W

R112W R113W

R86W R87W

R87W

R88W

R88W

R89W

R89W

R90W

R90W

R91W

R91W

R92W

R92W

R93W

R93W

R94W

R94W

R95W

R95W

R96W

R96W

R97W

R97W

R98W

R98W

R99W

R99W

T14N

T14N

T15N

T15N

T16N

T16N

T17N

T17N

T18N

T18N

T19N

T19N

T20N

T20N

T21N

T21N

T22N

T22N

T23N

T23N

T24N

T24N

T25N

T25N

T26N

T26N

T27N

T27N

T28N

T28N

3

JIM BRIDGER

POWER PLANT

"

3A

BRIDGER COAL MINE

"

DEADMAN WASH

GAS FIELD "

aproximate substation disturbance

area (see Fig A-14 for more detail)

80

§ ̈¦

SWEETWATER

COUNTY

ROCK SPRINGS

FIELD OFFICE

20N 101W 20N 100W

21N 100W 21N 101W

Point of Rocks

Deadman Wash

Bitter Creek

ANTICLINE

JIM BRIDGER

4!

3c

!

3a

!

3b

!

Segment 3

Creston to Anticline/Bridger

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-4

I

0 10

Miles

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-4 Segment 3_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!

0 1 2 Miles
Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementBureau of ReclamationDepartment of EnergyIndian ReservationDepartment of DefenseUS Fish and WildlifeState LandsUS Forest ServiceNational Park ServicePrivate

Segment 4-WY

Anticline to Wyoming/Idaho

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-5

I

0 10

Miles

4

19 UV

N o r ht

s a B r e t x a B

ni

JIM BRIDGER POWER PLANT

SEEDSKADEE NWR

![

TRONA MINE "

CHEVRON COAL MINE "

Fontenelle

Reservoir

y O t s r e g di R e

Quealy

Reservoir "

South Fork Mountain #

a d n u o B e g di R y r

B e a r R i v e r V a l l e y

COKEVILLE MEADOWS NWR

![

Viva

Naughton

RAYMOND

MOUNTAIN WSA

C o m m i s s a y r e g d i R FOSSIL

BUTTE

NM

Dempsey

Basin

m e D s p y e g d i R eCoke Mountain #

TRONA MINING (ACTIVE)

Pomeroy

Basin

BearLake

UTAH

WYOMING

IDAHO

WYOMING

"

Flaming Gorge

Reservoir

FLAMING GORGE NAT'L

RECREATION AREA

Big Sandy

Reservoir

LAKE ALICECOMMISSARY RIDGE

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

TRONA MINING (ACTIVE)

SHUTE CREEK GAS FIELD "

NAUGHTON

POWER PLANT "

BLACK BUTTE COAL MINE "

BEAR RIVER SPECIAL

MANAGEMENT AREA

ROCK CREEK RIDGE

SPECIAL MANAGEMENT AREA

WHISKEY BUTTESEVEN MILE GULCH

GAS FIELDS

"

M o x a r A h c

BAXTER BASIN

NORTH GAS FIELD

"

Big Island # W h i s k e y B a s i n

Stevens Flat #

ASHLEY NF

80

§ ̈¦

80

§ ̈¦

189

£¤

191

£¤

89 £¤

191

£¤

189

£¤

530

UV

430

UV

28 UV

372

UV

30 UV

39 UV

412

UV

235

UV

371

UV

374

UV

410

UV

89 UV

240

UV

414

UV

61 UV

89 UV

28 UV

30 £¤

30 £¤

30 £¤

BRIDGER-TETON

NATIONAL FOREST

CARIBOUTARGHEE

NAT'L

FOREST

ANTICLINE

JIM BRIDGER

ROCK SPRINGS

FIELD OFFICE

KEMMERER

FIELD OFFICE

SWEETWATER COUNTY

LINCOLN

COUNTY

UINTA COUNTY

SUBLETTE COUNTY FREMONT COUNTY

90

!(

80

!(

70

!(

60

!(

50

!(

40

!(

30

!( 10

!(

150

!(

140

!(

130

!(

120

!(

110

!(

100

!(

20

!(

FORT BRIDGER

BEAR LAKE COUNTY

KEMMERER MUNICIPAL

COKEVILLE MUNICIPAL

ROCK SPRINGS-SWEETWATER COUNTY

GREATER GREEN RIVER INTERGALACTIC SPACEPORT

Opal

Lyman

Granger

Randolph

Superior

La Barge

Kemmerer

Cokeville

Evanston

Montpelier

Green River

Rock Springs

Diamondville

Mountain View

Point of Rocks

North Rock Springs

Bear River

Ham s Fo r k

B it et r Creek

Green River

B al cks Fork

Red Cree k

Muddy r C ee k

Shute Creek

Pacific Creek

Bear Creek

mS hti s o F kr

B gi Sandy R vi re

Big Dry Creek

Fontenelle Creek

Salt Wells Creek

Bu sh Creek

Little Mu d dy Cre ek

Black Roc k Creek

Sla te Creek

Sage Cr eek

Litt el Sand R y vi r e

Little Bitter Creek

Swee wt ater River

La Barge Creek

rebl A Ct er ke

Blac k Butte Creek

co R Ck er ke

Buckhorn Canyon

Otter Creek

Dry Sandy Creek

Fourmile Gulch

Alkali Creek

Big Creek

Eden Canal

aS el ar ut Cs er ek

Jack Morrow Cre ek

Alkali Draw

Dry Piney Cree k

Dry Mu ddy Creek

Bec wk i ht and u Q ni C n anal

Greasewood Wash

Meadow Springs Wash

Stagecoach Draw

Littl e Dry Creek

Deadman Wash

Currant Creek

S mi pson Gulch

Woodruff Cree k B al c sk Fork Canal

Dry Creek

L

Bear Lake Outlet

ost Creek

West Buckhorn Draw

West Alkali Lake

Yellow Creek

Lane y Wash

Wash ing ot n Dr wa

Sand Creek

Stacey Hollow

Garrett Creek

Green i R ev r

Rock Creek

Slate Creek

A l kali Creek

mS i ht oFs kr

4!

4b

!

4f

!

R100W

R100W

R101W

R101W

R102W

R102W

R103W

R103W

R104W

R104W

R105W

R105W

R106W

R106W

R107W

R107W

R108W

R108W

R109W

R109W

R110W

R110W

R111W

R111W

R112W

R112W

R113W

R113W

R114W

R114W

R115W

R115W

R116W

R116W

R117W

R117W

R118W

R118W

R119W

R119W R120W R121W

R44E R45E R46E

R5E R6E R7E R8E

R96W R97W

R97W

R98W

R98W

R99W

R99W

T12S T13S T13N T12N T11N T10N

T14N

T14S

T15N

T15S

T28N T27N T26N T25N T24N T23N T22N T21N T20N T19N T18N T17N T16N

T9N T8N T7N T6N

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-5 Segment 4-WY_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Exis ting Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30 £¤Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

! Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
4

CHEVRON COAL MINE "

Fontenelle

Reservoir

y O t s r e di R e g

Quealy

South Fork Mountain

d n u o B e g di R y r a

B e a r R i v e r V a l l e y

COKEVILLE MEADOWS NWR

![

Viva

Naughton

RAYMOND

MOUNTAIN WSA

C o m m i s a s y r e g d i R

FOSSIL

BUTTE

NM

Dempsey

Basin

m e D s p y e g d i R eCoke Mountain

#

TRONA MINING (ACTIVE)

Pomeroy

Basin

#

BearLake

"

BEAR LAKE NWR

![

B e a r L a k e V a l l e y Mound Valley Dry Hollow Mountain

#

M a r s h V a l l e y

IDAHO

UTAH

UTAH

WYOMING

IDAHO

WYOMING

SEEDSKADEE NWR

COKEVILLE MUNICIPAL AIRPORT

ELKHORN MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

OXFORD MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

LIBERTY/WILLIAMS CREEK

ROADLESS AREAS

(USFS)

SODA POINT/STAUFFER CREEK

ROADLESS AREAS

(USFS)

LAKE ALICECOMMISSARY RIDGE

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

![

SHUTE CREEK GAS FIELD "

BEAR RIVER SPECIAL

MANAGEMENT AREA

ROCK CREEK RIDGE

SPECIAL MANAGEMENT AREA

WHISKEY BUTTESEVEN MILE GULCH

GAS FIELDS

"

TRONA MINE "

TRONA MINING (ACTIVE)

Big Island # W h i s k e y B a s i n

Stevens Flat #

15

§ ̈¦

15

§ ̈¦

89 £¤

91 £¤

£¤

89 £¤

83 UV

36 UV

34 UV

142

UV

23 UV

101

UV

13 UV

218

UV

102

UV

61 UV

UV

165

UV

238

30 UV

165

UV

34 UV

61 UV

89 UV

36 UV

30 UV

89 £¤

30 £¤

30 £¤

30 £¤

WASATCH-CACHE

NATIONAL FOREST

CACHE

NATIONAL

FOREST

BRIDGER-TETON

NATIONAL FOREST

CARIBOU-TARGHEE

NATIONAL FOREST

CARIBOU NATIONAL

FOREST

POCATELLO

FIELD OFFICE

KEMMERER

FIELD OFFICE

SALT LAKE

FIELD OFFICE

ROCK SPRINGS

FIELD OFFICE

90

!(

80

!(

70

!(

60

!(

50

!(

190

!( 180

!(

170

!(

140

!(

130

!(

120

!(

110

!(

100

!(

160

!(

150

!(

SIMPSON

PRESTON

MALAD CITY

ALLEN H TIGERT

LAVA HOT SPRINGS

BEAR LAKE COUNTY

KEMMERER MUNICIPAL

DOWNEY (HYDE MEMORIAL)

Opal

Logan

Arbon

Afton

Paris

Arimo Grace

Weston

Dayton

Oxford

Downey

Granger

Preston

Clifton

Randolph

Thatcher

La Barge

Kemmerer

Franklin

McCammon

Bancroft

Marbleton

Cokeville

Big Piney

Malad City

Montpelier

Georgetown

St. Charles

Bloomington

Diamondville

Soda Springs

Lava Hot Springs

ae B Rr vi re

Hams Fork

Green River

Malad River

Smi ht s F kr o

ul B er Ce ke

Shute Creek

Blacks Fork

La Barg e Creek

bu C R vi er

Fontenelle Creek

Loga n River

Big Creek

North Piney Creek

L ittle Muddy Creek

South Piney Creek

Slate C reek

Salt River

W es Ct na l a

B lack smith Fork

A l kal i Cree k

Otter Creek

co R Ck er ke

Buckhorn Canyon

gi B Sandy River

Fourmile Gulch

Muddy Creek

Midd le Piney Cr e ek

Slug Creek

Twin Creek

Weston Cre ek

Sheep Creek

Dry Piney Cree k

Dry Mu ddy Creek

Preuss Creek

Bec wk i ht na Qd u ni n Can l a

Rattlesnake Cr

S mi pson Gulch

e B v a e Cr er ke

Dairy Creek

N we For R k iver

West Buckhorn Draw

Cr wo eer C k

Laketown C na yon

Cot ot nwo do a C . n

Clarkston Creek

Hawkins Creek

Wright Cr

Newton Creek

Bear R vi er

Muddy Creek

r G e ne i R ev r

Slate Creek

Bear River

Big Sandy River

4b

!

4i

!

4h

!

4f

!

5!

4g

!

R106W R107W R108W

R108W

R109W

R109W

R110W

R110W

R111W

R111W

R112W

R112W

R113W

R113W

R114W

R114W

R115W

R115W

R116W

R116W

R117W

R117W

R118W

R118W

R119W

R119W R120W R1E R1W R2E R2W

R33E R34E R35E R36E R37E R38E R39E

R3E R3W

R40E R41E R42E R43E R44E R45E R46E

R4E R5E R5W R6E R6W R7E R8E

T10S T11S T12S T13S T14S T15S T16S T14N T13N T12N T11N T10N

T32N T31N T30N T29N T28N T27N T26N T25N T24N T23N T22N T21N T20N T19N T18N

T8S T9S T9N

Segment 4-ID

Wyoming/Idaho to Populus

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-6

I

0 10

Miles

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-6 Segment 4-ID_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!
5

r A o b

y e l l a V n

R o c k l a n d V a l l e y

D e e p C r e e k M o u n t a i n s

P l e a s a n t v i e w H i l l s

#

Bradley

Mountain

# Cedar

Mountain

M a r s h V a l l e y

B anno c k R a n g e

FORT HALL

RESERVATION

CRATERS OF THE MOON

NATIONAL MONUMENT

AND PRESERVE

American Falls

Reservoir

# Houtz Canyon

S u b l e t t R a n g e

# Heglar Canyon

IDAHO

UTAH

ELKHORN MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

tt

MINIDOKA NWR

a R t f i R e v V r l l a y e CARIBOU- TARGHEE NAT'L FOREST

A

!Ï PARTING OF THE WAYS HISTORIC TRAIL ACEC

BOWEN CANYONBALD EAGLE SANCTUARY

OXFORD MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

BLACK PINE

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

Hawkins

Reservoir

East Fork of

Rock Creek

![ "

ROCKLAND WIND FARM

DETAIL LEFT

POWER COUNTY WIND FARM

"

15

§ ̈¦

84

§ ̈¦

15

§ ̈¦

86

§ ̈¦

91 £¤

30 £¤

91 £¤

37 UV

39 UV

81 UV

34 UV

SAWTOOTH

NAT'L FOREST

CURLEW NATIONAL

GRASSLANDS SAWTOOTH

NAT'L FOREST

CARIBOUTARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

CARIBOUTARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

POCATELL

FIELD OFF

UPPER SNAKE

FIELD OFFICE

10

!(

40

!(

30

!( 20

!(

10

!(

5!

5c

!

5b

! 5a

!

5d

!

Roy

Arbon

Arimo

Inkom

Weston

Dayton

Oxford

Downey

Prest

Clifton

Rockland

McCammon

Bancrof

Chubbuck

Aberdeen

Fort Hall

Pocatello

Malad City

American Falls

Lava Hot Springs

BORAH

POPULUS

PRESTON

MALAD CITY

INTERSTATE

AMERICAN FALLS

LAVA HOT SPRINGS

POCATELLO REGIONAL

ABERDEEN MUNICIPAL

DOWNEY (HYDE MEMORIAL)

Ross Fork

Portneuf River

b A dre ee n C na l a

Snake River

Clear Creek

e B Rr a evi r

S Fork Rock Cr

Malad River

Weston Cre e k

Little Malad River

Blackfoot River

Rattlesnake Cr

Rock Creek

C ottonwo od Cr

Wr gi ht Cr

Sn ake Riv er

Portneuf River

T10S

T10S

T11S

T11S

T12S

T12S

T13S

T13S

T14N

T14N

T14S

T14S

T15N

T15N

T15S

T15S

T16S

T16S

T3S

T3S

T4S

T4S

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

R10W R11W R12W R13W R1E R1W

R27E R28E R29E

R2W

R30E R31E R32E R33E R34E R35E R36E R37E R38E R39E

R3W

R40E

R4W R5W R6W R7W R8W R9W

Segment 5

Populus to Borah

Figure A-7

I

0 10

Miles

Enlarged Area

Above Right

#0

#0

#0

!Ï

PIPELINE

RECREATION AREA

5

"

ROCKLAND WIND FARM

" SUBDIVISION

POWER COUNTY

POCATELLO

FIELD OFFICE

BURLEY

FIELD OFFICE

50

!(

LAMB SUBSTATION

BRADY SUBSTATION

AMERICAN FALLS SUBSTATION

86

§ ̈¦

37 UV

39 UV

37 UV

Eagle Rock Rd

11

04

03

34

02 03

35

09

14 15

05

13 16

34

17

10

33

08

32

10

01

12

15

36

18

31

06

07

35

02

11

14

22 21 20 24 23 22 19

27 26 29 28 27 30 25 26

04

09

16

33

21

28

8S 31E 8S 30E

7S 31E 7S 30E

BORAH

6!

5f

! 5e

!

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

SF299_POD FIG A-7 Segment 5_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

0 1

Miles

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
American Falls

Reservoir

# Houtz Canyon

# Heglar Canyon

FORT HALL RESERVATION

CRATERS OF THE MOON

NATIONAL MONUMENT

AND PRESERVE

Wapi Flow

PARTING OF THE WAYS

HISTORIC TRAILS ACEC

MINIDOKA NWR

Lake Walcott

6

G r e a t R i f t

IDAHO NAT'L

LABORATORY

CARIBOU-TARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

MINIDOKA NHS

!Ï

![

!Ï

15

§ ̈¦

86

§ ̈¦

84

§ ̈¦

15

§ ̈¦

86

§ ̈¦

26 £¤

20 £¤

30 £¤

91 £¤

30 £¤

30 £¤

93 £¤

93 £¤

26 £¤

39 UV

46 UV

75 UV

79 UV

25 UV

24 UV

23 UV

74 UV

CARIBOU-TARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL FOREST

ZIGGY

FAIRBANKS

JEROME COUNTY

BUHL MUNICIPAL

AMERICAN FALLS

LAVA HOT SPRINGS

BURLEY MUNICIPAL

GOODING MUNICIPAL POCATELLO REGIONAL

HAZELTON MUNICIPAL

ABERDEEN MUNICIPAL

MAGIC VALLEY REGIONAL (JOSLIN FIELD)

Buhl Paul Eden

Iona

Ucon

Arco

Arbon

Declo

Filer Arimo

Inkom

Bliss

Carey Firth

Ammon

Hansen Burley

Rupert

Basalt

Hailey

Shelley

Heyburn

Acequia

Gooding

Wendell

Murtaugh

Kimberly

Rockland

Hazelton

McCammon

Minidoka

Hagerman

Dietrich

Chubbuck Shoshone Aberdeen

Bellevue

Fort Hall

Pocatello

Richfield

Blackfoot

Fairfield

Castleford

Twin Falls

Butte City

Atomic City

Idaho Falls

American Falls

Lava Hot Springs

Aberdeen Canal

L i tt el o W do vi R re

Camas Cr eek

Sand C er ke

Ross Fork

Portneuf River

Idaho Canal

Milne r Gooding Canal

H Canal

r a M hs Creek

Low Line Canal

Big Lost River

Big Wood R vi er

Rock Creek

High Line Canal

Soldier Cr eek

Dry Creek

Raf Rt vi er

Clover Creek

de C ar Creek

Blackfoot River

W illow Creek

U Canal

Ma ni Drain

X Canal

i F C hs er ek

aS ml F no l a sl r C ee k

Tho nr r C eek

S ilver Creek

Rattlesnake Cr

M u dl oo Cn er ek

An et ol pe Cr eek

Goose Creek

Dairy Creek

J mi Byrns Slough

Big Smoky Creek

Dry Fork Creek

Richfield Canal

Sout h Fork Boise River

Hawkins Creek

North Shoshon e Canal

ro N ht Go oding Main Canal

Weltti L doo i R ev r

Fish Creek

Rock Creek

r D y C er ke

Portneuf River

Big Wood River

Little Wood R iver

Ma rsh Creek

Blackfoot River

BORAH

MIDPOINT

8!

6!

R12E

R12E

R13E

R13E

R14E

R14E

R15E

R15E

R16E

R16E

R17E

R17E

R18E

R18E

R19E

R19E

R20E

R20E

R21E

R21E

R22E

R22E

R23E

R23E

R24E

R24E

R25E

R25E

R26E

R26E

R27E

R27E

R28E

R28E

R29E

R29E

R30E

R30E

R31E

R31E

R32E

R32E

R33E

R33E

R34E

R34E

R35E

R35E

R36E

R36E

R37E

R37E

R38E

R38E

T10S

T10S

T11S

T11S

T1N

T1N

T1S

T1S

T2N

T2N

T2S

T2S

T3N

T3N

T3S

T3S

T4N

T4N

T4S

T4S

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

Segment 6

Borah to Midpoint

Figure A-8

I

0 10

Miles

Enlarged Area

Above Energize Existing 345-kV to 500-kV

Route Features

Other Route

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-8 Segment 6_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!
r A o b

y e l l a V n

R o c k l a n d V a l l e y

D e e p C r e e k M o u n t a i n s Bradley Mountain Cedar Mountain

CRATERS OF THE MOON

NATIONAL MONUMENT

AND PRESERVE

American Falls

Reservoir

#

Houtz Canyon

S u b l e t t R a n g e

f a R R t e v i y e l l a V r

# Heglar Canyon

#

#

FORT HALL

RESERVATION

C e d a r R i d g e

MINIDOKA NWR

Lake Walcott

#

East Hills

A b l o i n M o u n t a i n s RAFT RIVER-CURLEW VALLEY IMPORTANT BIRD AREA

MAHOGANY BUTTE

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

CITY OF ROCKS

NATIONAL RESERVE

J u n c t i o n V a l l e y Granite Pass

#

IDAHO

UTAH

IDAHO

NEVADA

THOROBRED

ROADLESS

AREA (USFS)

CACHE ROADLESS

AREA (USFS)

MT HARRISON

ROADLESS

AREA (USFS)

JIM SAGE

NON-MOTORIZED

AREA (BLM)

!ÏPARTING OF THE WAYS

HISTORIC TRAILS ACEC

SalmonFalls Res

Goose Creek

Reservoir

MINIDOKA NATIONAL HISTORIC SITE 

!Ï

!ÏCASTLE ROCK SP

ELKHORN MOUNTAIN

ROADLESS AREA

(USFS)

![ COTTONWOOD CREEK WMA

Jim Sage Mountains #

![

Hawkins Basin

#

7

Murtaugh Lake

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL

FOREST

CURLEW NATIONAL

GRASSLANDS

SAWTOOTH

NAT'L FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NAT'L

FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL

FOREST

CARIBOU-TARGHEE

NATIONAL FOREST

CARIBOUTARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

CARIBOUTARGHEE

NAT'L FOREST

84

§ ̈¦

15

§ ̈¦ 86

§ ̈¦

0 £¤

93 £¤

91 £¤

26 £¤

30 £¤

37 UV

77 UV

81 UV

79 UV

25 UV

24 UV

39 UV

27 UV

74 UV

75 UV

25 UV

84

§ ̈¦

S h o s h o n e B a s i n

BURLEY

FIELD OFFICE

POCATELLO

FIELD OFFICE

SHOSHONE

FIELD OFFICE

SALT LAKE

FIELD OFFICE

UPPER SNAKE

FIELD OFFICE

5!

7d

! 7c

!

7a

!

7b

!

9!

60

!( 50

!( 40

!( 30

!( 20

!(

10

!(

Almo

Elba

Buhl Paul Eden

Arbon

Malta

Declo

Filer Arimo

Inkom

Weston

Dayton

Oakley

Oxford

Downey

Hansen Burley

Rupert

Jerome

Jackpot

Clifton

Heyburn

Acequia

Gooding

Wendell

Murtaugh

Kimberly

Rockland

Hazelton

McCammon

Bancroft

Dietrich

Chubbuck Shoshone Aberdeen

Hollister

Fort Hall

Pocatello

Richfield

Malad City

Castleford

Twin Falls

American Falls

Lava Hot Springs

Albion

ZIGGY

MASON

PRESTON

FAIRBANKS

MALAD CITY

INTERSTATE

JEROME COUNTY

LANDING STRIP

BUHL MUNICIPAL

AMERICAN FALLS

OAKLEY MUNICIPAL

LAVA HOT SPRINGS

BURLEY MUNICIPAL

ALBION MUNICIPAL

GOODING MUNICIPAL POCATELLO REGIONAL

HAZELTON MUNICIPAL

ABERDEEN MUNICIPAL

JACKPOT (HAYDEN FIELD)

DOWNEY (HYDE MEMORIAL)

LANDING STRIP

(PROPOSED)

MAGIC VALLEY REGIONAL (JOSLIN FIELD)

BORAH

POPULUS

MIDPOINT

CEDAR HILL

Snake River

Raft River

Rock Creek

Ross Fork

L itt el Wood River

Portneuf River

i B g Woo d Rive r

Be ar R vi er

Goos Ce er ke

Milner Gooding Canal

b A dre ee n C na l a

H Canal

Clear Creek

Low Line Canal

High Line Canal

Cassia Creek

Deep Cre ek

Mala d River

u C b R vi e r

Dry Creek Tr out Creek

U Canal

X C a nal

Weston Cre ek

Little Malad River

de C ar Creek

Salmon Falls Creek

Trapper Creek

Cottonwood Cr

Blackfoot R iver

N Cottonwood Cr

o C tt onwood Creek

Wright Cr

East Fork Dry Creek

Snake River

Goos e Creek

Rock Creek

Snake R vi er

Portneuf River

Salmon Falls Creek

R10W R11W R12W

R13E

R13W

R14E

R14W

R15E

R15W

R16E

R16W

R17E

R17W

R18E

R18W

R19E

R19W R1E R1W

R20E R21E R22E R23E R24E R25E R26E R27E R28E R29E

R2W

R30E R31E R32E R33E R34E R35E R36E R37E R38E R39E

R3W

R40E

R4W R5W R63E R64E R65E R66E R67E R68E R69E R6W R70E R7W R8W R9W

T10S

T10S

T11S

T11S

T12S

T12S

T13S

T13S T14N

T14S

T14S

T15S

T15S

T16S

T16S

T3S T4S T47N

T4S

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

Segment 7

Populus to Cedar Hill

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-9

I

0 10

Miles

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-9 Segment 7_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30 £¤Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

! Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
8

M

Hot Springs Res.

o u n t B e n n e t t H i l l s

Blair Trail Res.

KING HILL CREEK

WSA/ACEC

MORLEY NELSON SNAKE RIVER

BIRDS OF PREY NCA

IDAHO NATIONAL GUARD

ORCHARD TRAINING AREA AND

MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA

#

Kuna Butte

# McElroy Butte

#

Powers

Butte

# Guffey Butte

#

Sinker Butte

BRUNEAU DUNES SP

!Ï

CLASS D

RESTRICTED AIRSPACE

SAYLOR CREEK

AIR FORCE

RANGE

OWYHEE MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA (MOA)

B r u n e a u V a l l e y

C J Strike Res

HAGERMANFOSSIL BEDS NM

!Ï

MALAD GORGE SP

!Ï

Alpha

Sector

# Black Mesa

D e a d m a n F l a t

B r u n e a u D e s e r t

B l u e R i d g e

M e l o n V a l l e y

JARBIDGE MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA (MOA)

Pioneer Res

BALANCED ROCK CP

!Ï

HALVERSON/WEES BAR NMA (BLM) "

COVE NMA (BLM) "

IDAHO STATE

PENITENTIARY

"

GUFFEY/BLACK BUTTE ARCH DIST

WILSON CREEK

CEMETARY

"

FOSSIL GULCH

WIND FARM "

TUANA GULCH

WIND FARM

"

CASSIA GULCH

WIND FARM

"

TUANA SPRINGS

WIND FARM

" YAHOO CREEK WIND FARM

" SALMON FALLS

WIND FARM

"

PILGRIM STAGE STATION

WIND FARM

" CASSIA WIND FARM

"

SAWTOOTH

WIND FARM

" BENNETT CREEK WIND FARM

BOISE NATIONAL FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NAT'L FOREST

84

§ ̈¦

20 £¤

30 £¤

93 £¤

26 £¤

93 £¤

51 UV

78 UV

46 UV

75 UV

79 UV

67 UV

21 UV

74 UV

69 UV

24 UV

55 UV

78 UV

75

UV

90

!(

80

!(

70

!(

60

!(

50

!( 40

!(

30

!(

10

!(

130

!( 110

!(

100

!(

20

!(

120

!(

8!

8b

!

8a

!

11

! 8f

!

8h

!

8g

! 8d

!

8c

!

8i

!

8e

!

ZIGGY

MURPHY

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

Z X RANCH

FAIRBANKS

COYOTE RUN

P & R FIELD

GREEN ACRES

LARKIN FIELD

JEROME COUNTY

BUHL MUNICIPAL

SUNRISE SKYPARK

SKY RANCH SOUTH

NAMPA MUNICIPAL

BLACK'S AIRFIELD

GOODING MUNICIPAL

HAZELTON MUNICIPAL

CALDWELL INDUSTRIAL

GLENNS FERRY MUNICIPAL

MOUNTAIN HOME MUNICIPAL

RED BARON AIRPARK ULTRALIGHT

MOUNTAIN HOME AIR FORCE BASE

BOISE AIR TERMINAL (GOWEN FIELD)

MAGIC VALLEY REGIONAL (JOSLIN FIELD)

Buhl Eden

Kuna

Filer

Bliss

Carey

Melba

Nampa

Boise

Oreana

Murphy

Hansen

Jerome

Hailey

Hammett

Bruneau

Wendell

Gooding

Marsing

Murtaugh

Kimberly

Hazelton

Hagerman

Dietrich

Shoshone

Bellevue

Meridian

Homedale

Caldwell

King Hill

Richfield

Fairfield

Castleford

Twin Falls

Grand View

Silver City

Glenns Ferry

Mountain Home

Snake River

Camas Creek

Litt el o W do vi R r e

S a ilor Creek

In dia n Cr

Mor a Canal

Bruneau River

Pot Hole Creek

Mi nl er Gooding Canal

Ca ts el r C ee k

Birch C re ke

Low Line Canal

qS wau Creek

Big Wood R vi er

New York Canal

Rock Creek

Si nker Creek

Sol dier Cr eek

Dry Creek

H gi h Line Canal

Deadman Creek

onye R dl Cs er ke

Shoof ly Cr ee k

Battle Cr eek

Clover Cre ek

W illow Creek

Rabbit Creek

de C ar Creek

um J p Creek

C

el oP re ek

Jordan Creek

Pick et Creek

Smith r C ee k

X Cana l

Li tt el Jacks Creek

Th ro Cn reek

Canyon Creek

S ilver Creek

So uth Fork Boise River

J ca sk r C ee k

M u dl oo Cn er ek

B lacks Creek

Succor Creek

Lime Cr e ek

Cow Creek

Little Smoky Creek

J mi Byrns Slough

Fish Creek

Nor ht Bou Cr edl er ek

u D n ac n Creek

Big Smoky Creek

Blue Creek

Richfield Canal

H Canal

Wickahoney Creek

Big Boulder Creek

Sugar Valley Wash

North Fo r k Owyhee R vi er

North Shoshone Canal

South Fork L mi e Creek

Long Tom Cr eek

S nake Rive r

Little Wood R iver

li W wol Creek

Dry Creek

Clover Creek

Rock Creek

Weltti L doo vi R re

Low Line Canal

a C yn Cno reek

Rock Creek

Big Wood River

yr D C er ke

Squ wa Creek

Willow Creek

ht uoS Fork Boise River

MIDPOINT

HEMINGWAY

R10E

R10E

R11E

R11E

R12E

R12E

R13E

R13E

R14E

R14E

R15E

R15E

R16E

R16E

R17E

R17E

R18E

R18E

R19E

R19E

R1E

R1E

R1W

R1W

R20E

R20E

R21E

R21E

R22E

R22E

R2E

R2E

R2W

R2W

R3E

R3E

R3W

R3W

R4E

R4E

R4W

R4W

R5E

R5E

R5W

R5W

R6E

R6E

R7E

R7E

R8E

R8E

R9E

R9E

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

Segment 8

Midpoint to Hemingway

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-10

I

0 10

Miles

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-10 Segment 8_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

! Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
9

Hot Springs Res.

M o u n t B e n n e t t H i l l s

Blair Trail Res.

MORLEY NELSON SNAKE RIVER

BIRDS OF PREY NCA

IDAHO NATIONAL GUARD

ORCHARD TRAINING AREA AND

MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA

#

Kuna Butte

# McElroy Butte

#

Powers

Butte

#

Guffey Butte

#

Sinker Butte

BRUNEAU DUNES SP

!Ï

CLASS D

RESTRICTED AIRSPACE

SAYLOR CREEK

AIR FORCE

RANGE

OWYHEE MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA (MOA)

B r u n e a u V a l l e y

C J Strike Res

HAGERMANFOSSIL BEDS NM

!Ï

MALAD GORGE SP

!Ï

Alpha

Sector

# Black Mesa

D e a d m a n F l a t

B r u n e a u D e s e r

B

t l u e R i d g e

M e l o n V a l l e y

JARBIDGE MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA (MOA)

Pioneer Res

BALANCED ROCK CP

!Ï

GUFFEY/BLACK BUTTE

ARCHAEOLOGICAL DIST

"

COVE NMA (BLM)

IDAHO STATE PENITENTIARY "

JUNIPER BUTTE

AIR FORCE RANGE

# Lilly Grade

TWIN FALLS MILITARY

RESERVATION "

WILSON CREEK

CEMETARY

"

"

TUANA GULCH

WIND FARM

"

CASSIA GULCH

WIND FARM

"

TUANA SPRINGS

WIND FARM

" YAHOO CREEK WIND FARM

"

SALMON FALLS

WIND FARM "

PILGRIM STAGE STATION

WIND FARM

" CASSIA WIND FARM

" SAWTOOTH WIND FARM

" BENNETT CREEK

WIND FARM

FOSSIL GULCH

WIND FARM

"

HOT SPRINGS

WIND FARM

BOISE NATIONAL FOREST

84

§ ̈¦

20 £¤

30 £¤

93 £¤

26 £¤

93 £¤

51 UV

78 UV

46 UV

75 UV

79 UV

67 UV

74 UV

24 UV 78 UV

80

!( 90

!(

70

!(

50

!(

40

!(

30

!(

20

!(

10

!(

160

!(

130

!(

120

!(

110

!(

60

!(

100

!(

9!

9j

!

11

!

9g

!

9f

!

9d

!

9c

! 9a

!

9i

!

9l

!

9k

!

9h

!

9e

!

9b

!

Buhl

Eden

Kuna

Filer

Bliss

Carey

Melba

Oreana

Murphy

Hansen

Jerome

Hammett

Bruneau

Wendell

Gooding

Murtaugh

Kimberly

Hazelton

Hagerman

Dietrich

Shoshone

Bellevue

King Hill

Hollister

Richfield

Fairfield

Castleford

Twin Falls

Grand View

Silver City

Glenns Ferry

Mountain Home

MIDPOINT

HEMINGWAY

CEDAR HILL

ZIGGY

MASON

MURPHY

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

Z X RANCH

FAIRBANKS

COYOTE RUN

P & R FIELD

GREEN ACRES

LARKIN FIELD

JEROME COUNTY

BUHL MUNICIPAL

SUNRISE SKYPARK

SKY RANCH SOUTH

BLACK'S AIRFIELD

GOODING MUNICIPAL

HAZELTON MUNICIPAL

MOUNTAIN HOME MUNICIPAL

LANDING STRIP (PROPOSED)

RED BARON AIRPARK ULTRALIGHT

MOUNTAIN HOME AIR FORCE BASE

MAGIC VALLEY REGIONAL (JOSLIN FIELD)

Snake River

Camas Creek

Sailor Cr eek

L i tt el o W do vi R re

Bruneau River

India n Cr

Big Wood River

Pot Hole Creek

Clov er Cree k

Battle Creek

Mi nl er Gooding Canal

Cas elt r C ee k

Birch C r ee k

Low Line Canal

High Line Canal

qS wau C er ek

ml aS F no l a sl r C ee k

Blue Creek

Rock Creek

Sinker Creek

Dry Creek

Deadman Creek

onye R dl Cs eer k

Po Cel eer k

Shoofly Cr eek

Dev i Cl eer k

hS eep Creek

Soldier Creek

Sugar Creek

a R bb i Ct reek

Jordan Creek

Picket Creek

X Canal

Litt el Jacks Creek

Willow Creek

T oh nr r C eek

a C yn r Cno eek

S ilver Creek

Cow Creek

De ep Creek

J ca sk r C ee k

Succor Cree k

J mu p Creek

u D n ac n Creek

South Fork Boise River

Tenmile Creek

L mi e Cr e ek

Wickahoney Creek

J mi Byrns Slough

Nor ht Bou Cr edl er ek

North Fork O wyhee River

Richfield Canal

Big Boulder Creek

Sugar Valley Wash

North Shoshone Canal

South For k L mi e Cre ek

Hurry Back Creek

Goose Creek

Long Tom Cr eek

Marys Creek

East Fork Dry Creek

Sn ake River

Squ wa Creek

Dry Creek

Willow Creek

Big Woo R d revi

Deep Creek

Dry Creek

Rock Creek

Rock Cre ek

Little Wood R iver

Clover Creek

R10E

R10E

R11E

R11E

R12E

R12E

R13E

R13E

R14E

R14E

R15E

R15E

R16E

R16E

R17E

R17E

R18E

R18E

R19E

R19E

R1E

R1E

R1W

R1W

R20E

R20E

R21E

R21E

R22E R2E

R2E

R2W

R2W

R3E

R3E

R3W

R3W

R4E

R4E

R4W

R4W

R5E

R5E

R5W

R5W

R6E

R6E R6W

R7E

R7E

R8E

R8E

R9E

R9E

T10S

T10S

T11S

T11S

T12S

T12S T13S

T1N

T1N

T1S

T1S

T2N

T2N

T2S

T2S

T3S

T3S

T4S

T4S

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

Segment 9

Cedar Hill to Hemingway

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-11

I

0 10

Miles

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-11 Segment 9_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

! Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route
BRUNEAU DUNES SP

!Ï

SAYLOR CREEK

AIR FORCE

RANGE

HAGERMANFOSSIL BEDS NM

MALAD GORGE SP

D e a d m a n F l a t

B r u n e a u D e s e r t

B l u e R i d g e

R o s e v e a r G u l c h

BALANCED ROCK COUNTY PARK

!Ï

P l e a s a n t V a l l e y

!Ï

!Ï

MINIDOKA NATIONAL

HISTORIC SITE

Goose Lake

"

b l A n o i o M u n t a i n s

a R t f v i R y e l l a V r e

CRATERS OF THE MOON

NATIONAL MONUMENT

AND PRESERVE

10

JARBIDGE MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA

!Ï MINIDOKA NWR

Lake Walcott

CITY OF ROCKS NR

JUNIPER BUTTE

AIR FORCE RANGE

JARBIDGE FIELD OFFICE

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL

FOREST

![

BOISE NF

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL

FOREST

SAWTOOTH

NATIONAL

FOREST

84

§ ̈¦

86

§ ̈¦

26 £¤

30 £¤

93 £¤

20 £¤

93 £¤

77 UV

39 UV

81 UV

46 UV

75 UV

79 UV

25 UV

24 UV

78 UV

27 UV

50 UV

30 £¤

84

§ ̈¦

84

§ ̈¦

20

!(

30

!(

10

!(

BORAH

MIDPOINT

CEDAR HILL

ZIGGY

MASON

PRIVATE

PRIVATE

FAIRBANKS

INTERSTATE

COYOTE RUN

JEROME COUNTY

LANDING STRIP

BUHL MUNICIPAL

AMERICAN FALLS

OAKLEY MUNICIPAL

BURLEY MUNICIPAL

ALBION MUNICIPAL

GOODING MUNICIPAL

HAZELTON MUNICIPAL

ABERDEEN MUNICIPAL GLENNS FERRY MUNICIPAL

MOUNTAIN HOME MUNICIPAL

LANDING STRIP (PROPOSED)

MOUNTAIN HOME AIR FORCE BASE

MAGIC VALLEY REGIONAL (JOSLIN FIELD)

Roy

Almo

Elba

Buhl

Paul Eden

Malta

Declo

Filer

Bliss

Oakley

Albion

Hansen Burley

Rupert

Jerome

Hammett

Bruneau

Heyburn

Acequia

Gooding

Wendell

Murtaugh

Kimberly

Rockland Hazelton

Minidoka

Hagerman

Dietrich

Shoshone

Aberdeen

King Hill

Hollister

Richfield

Castleford

Twin Falls

Glenns Ferry

Mountain Home

Snake R iver

Raft River

Bruneau River

S a i lor Creek

i L tt Wel oo d R vi er

Clove r Cr eek

Rock Creek

eehS r C p ee k

Big Woo d River

Camas C reek

Pot Hol e Cree k

Goos e Cr e ke

Milner Gooding Canal H Canal

Salmon Falls Creek

D e i v Cl er ek

Low Line Canal

High Line Cana l

Bennett Creek

Cassia Cre ek

Deep Cre e k

b A r e ed ne a C an l

Dry Creek

Jarbidge River

S Fork Rock Cr

Deadman Creek

P oison Cre ek

de C r a r C eek

U Canal

X C anal

Little Canyon Creek

Squ wa r C ee k

Tho nr r C eek

Trapper Creek

Canyon Creek

Ma rsh Creek

Mary s Creek

Hou es Creek

Ja c sk C er ke

Cat Creek

Deadwood Creek

J mi Byrns Slough

Thre e Creek

Richfield Canal

Sugar Valley Wash

North Shosh one Canal

Snake River

Goose Creek

Rock Creek

Dry C er e k

Clover Creek

de C ar Creek

9!

8!

10a

!

10b

!

R10E

R10E

R11E

R11E

R12E

R12E

R13E

R13E

R14E

R14E

R15E

R15E

R16E

R16E

R17E

R17E

R18ER18E

R19E

R19E

R20E

R20E

R21E

R21E

R22E

R22E

R23E

R23E

R24E

R24E

R25E

R25E

R26E

R26E

R27E

R27E

R28E

R28E

R29E

R29E

R30E

R30E

R31E

R31E

R5E

R5E

R6E

R6E

R7E

R7E

R8E

R8E

R9E

R9E

T10S

T10S

T11S

T11S

T12S

T12S

T13S

T13S

T14S

T14S

T15S

T15S T16S

T2S

T2S

T3S

T3S

T4S

T4S

T5S

T5S

T6S

T6S

T7S

T7S

T8S

T8S

T9S

T9S

Segment 10

Midpoint to Cedar Hill

Enlarged Area

Above

Figure A-12

I

0 10

Miles

Route Features

Proposed RouteOther Route

Sources | BLM; USFS; ESRI

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Land Status

Bureau of Land ManagementNational ForestNational Park ServiceFish and Wildlife ServiceNational GrasslandBureau of ReclamationIndian Reservation

Military Reservation/Corps of EngineersOther FederalStateState Wildlife, Park, Recreation or OtherBankhead-Jones Land UsePrivate

SF299_POD FIG A-12 Segment 10_20120918 Saved | 9/18/2012

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

10

!( Mile

#0 Substation

!!! Existing Transmission Line (115kV greater)

West Wide Energy Corridor (WWEC)

Other Features

BLM Field OfficeNational ForestCountyRestricted Access

Railroad

!Ä Airport/Landing Strip!Ï Park/Recreation Area![ Wildlife Area

Stream/RiverWaterbody

Secondary State or County Road 30 STUS Highway 30

£¤

Interstate 84

§ ̈¦

Reference Point 1a

!
Area Developed for Gateway West: 100 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 100 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Aeolus

230/500-kV Substation

Figure A-13

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F13.mxd

State

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

WWE Corridor

Remove Existing Line
Area Developed for Gateway West: 140 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 140 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Anticline

345/500-kV Substation

Figure A-14

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F14.mxd
Area Developed for Gateway West: 54 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 54 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Cedar Hill

500-kV Substation

Figure A-15

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

WWE Corridor

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

Bureau of Land Management

Private

LAND OWNERSHIP

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F16.mxd
Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development

0 1,000

Feet

I

Windstar

230-kV Substation

Figure A-16

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

LAND OWNERSHIP

Private

State

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F16.mxd
Existing 230-kV Lines

Existing 230-kV Lines

Existing 115-kV Lines

Existing 230-kV

Substation

Dave Johnston

Power Plant Power Plant

Proposed SEGMENT 1W(c)

Proposed SEGMENT 1W(c)

Single Circuit 230-kV Line Rebuild

C O N V E R S E C O U N T Y

C A S P E R F I E L D O F F I C E

18

07

17

08

13

12

33N 74W

Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development

0 1,000

Feet

I

Dave Johnston

230-kV Substation

Figure A-17

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F17.mxd

LAND OWNERSHIP

Private
Proposed SEGMENT 1W(a) Proposed SEGMENT 1W(a)

Single Circuit 230-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 1W(c) Proposed SEGMENT 1W(c)

Single Circuit 230-kV Line Rebuild

Remove Existing

230-kV Line

Existing Difficulty Substation

Proposed 230-kV

Substation

5

32

R A W L I N S F I E L D O F F I C E

C A R B O N C O U N T Y

28N 78W

27N 78W

28N 79W

27N 79W

31

06

36

01

Area Developed for Gateway West: 5 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 5 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Heward

230-kV Substation

Figure A-18

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

State

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F18.mxd

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

Remove Existing Line

WWE Corridor
Existing 230-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 1W(c) Rebuild

Single Circuit 230-kV Line

C A R B O N C O U N T Y

R A W L I N S F I E L D O F F I C E

Existing 230-kV Substation

26N 78W

25N 78W

26N 79W

25N 79W

31

06

30

32

36

05

29

01

25

Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development

0 1,000

Feet

I

Shirley Basin

230-kV Substation

Figure A-19

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F19.mxd

State

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

Private ! ! Existing Transmission Line

WWE Corridor
Proposed SEGMENT 3A 345-kV Tie Line

to Anticline Substation

Jim Bridger Jim Bridger

Power Plant Power Plant

345-kV Substation Expansion

Existing 345-kV Lines

Existing 230-kV Lines

Existing 230-kV Lines

Existing 345-kV Substation Existing 230-kV Substation Nine Mile Rd

S W E E T W A T E R C O U N T Y

R O C K S P R I N G S F I E L D O F F I C E

10

03 04

09 10

36 31 35

20N 101W

21N 101W

21N 100W

Area Developed for Gateway West: 10 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 10 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Jim Bridger

345-kV Substation

Figure A-20

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

WWE Corridor

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F20.mxd
Proposed SEGMENT 7

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 5

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 4

Double Circuit 500kV Line

S Race Track Rd S Olson Rd

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Proposed 500-kV

Substation

Existing 230/345-kV

Substation

Existing 345-kV Line

4

B A N N O C K C O U N T Y

P O C A T E L L O F I E L D O F F I C E

11S 37E

12S 37E

32

33

29

05

28

04

Area Developed for Gateway West: 80 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 80 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

LAND OWNERSHIP

Private

Populus

500-kV Substation

Figure A-21

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F21.mxd
Union Pacific Railroad Union Pacific Railroad

Proposed SEGMENT 6 Existing 345-kv Line

to be Re-Energized to 500-kV Proposed SEGMENT 5

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

W Lake Channel Rd W Lake Channel Rd

S n a k e R i v e r S n a k e R i v e r

Existing 230-kV Line Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 138-kV Line Existing 138-kV Line

Existing 245-kV Line

Existing 230/345-kV

Substation

Proposed 500-kV

Substation

Re-Routed

345-kV Line

Remove Existing

345-kV Line

Re-Routed

345-kV Line

P O W E R C O U N T Y

B U R L E Y F I E L D O F F I C E

8S 30E

03

10

02

11 09

Area Developed for Gateway West: 35 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 35 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Borah

500-kV Substation

Figure A-22

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

DETAIL

I D A H O

W Y O M I N G

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F22.mxd

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

Remove Existing Line
E 750 N

Proposed SEGMENT 6 Proposed SEGMENT 6

Re-Routed 500-kV Line Re-Routed 500-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 10

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 138-kV Line

Existing 138-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 8

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Existing 500-kV

Substation

Proposed 500-kV

Substation

Existing 345-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 500-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

Existing 138-kV Line

Remove Existing

345-kV Line

Re-Routed

138-kV Line

Remove Existing

138-kV Line

Existing 230/345-kV

Substation

J E R O M E C O U N T Y

S H O S H O N E F I E L D O F F I C E

11 12

02 01

14 13

7S 17E

Area Developed for Gateway West: 40 acres Area Developed for Gateway West: 40 acres

0 1,000

Feet

I

Midpoint

500-kV Substation

Figure A-23

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F23.mxd

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

Remove Existing Line

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private
China Ditch Rd

Existing 500-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 9

Proposed SEGMENT 9

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Proposed SEGMENT 8

Single Circuit 500-kV Line

Existing 230-kV Line

RR

ee yy

nn

oo

ll dd ss

CC rr

ee

ee

kk

Cemetary Ln

Existing 500-kV

Substation

Re-Routed

500-kV Line

Re-Routed

500-kV Line

Remove Existing

500-kV Line

11

O W Y H E E F I E L D O F F I C E

O W Y H E E C O U N T Y

11

14

10

02

12

15

03

13

01

1S 3W

Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development Area Developed for Gateway West: No New Development

0 1,000

Feet

I

Hemingway

500-kV Substation

Figure A-24

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

DETAIL

AREA

Last Saved: May 3, 2012

File: ...\UtilServ\Gateway_West\Reports\SF299_POD\SF299_POD_2012\Appendix_A\Substations\SF299_AppendixA_F24.mxd

LAND OWNERSHIP

Bureau of Land Management

Private

PROJECT FEATURES

Proposed Route

! ! Existing Transmission Line

Remove Existing Line

WWE Corridor
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX B

2 TRANSMISSION LINE AND SUBSTATION COMPONENTS

3
Appendix B

Transmission Line and Substation 

Components 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-i 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. B-1

2.0 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................................... B-1

2.1 Transmission Structures............................................................................... B-1

2.1.1 Types of Transmission Line Support Structures ............................... B-1

2.1.2 Structure and Conductor Clearances ............................................. B-10

2.1.3 Structure Foundations .................................................................... B-10

2.2 Conductors ................................................................................................. B-11

2.3 Other Hardware .......................................................................................... B-12

2.3.1 Insulators ....................................................................................... B-12

2.3.2 Grounding Systems ........................................................................ B-12

2.3.3 Minor Additional Hardware ............................................................. B-14

2.4 Communication Systems............................................................................ B-14

2.4.1 Optical Ground Wire ....................................................................... B-14

2.4.2 Regeneration Stations .................................................................... B-15

2.5 Roads Used During Construction and Operation ....................................... B-16

2.5.1 Construction Access Roads ........................................................... B-17

2.5.2 Operations Access Roads .............................................................. B-23

2.5.3 Waterbody Crossings with Access Roads ...................................... B-23

2.5.4 Wetlands Crossings with Access Roads ........................................ B-27

2.6 Substations ................................................................................................ B-28

2.6.1 Substation Components ................................................................. B-28

2.6.2 Distribution Supply Lines ................................................................ B-30

3.0 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. B-31

3.1 Land Requirements and Disturbance ......................................................... B-31

3.1.1 Right-of-Way Width ........................................................................ B-31

3.1.2 Right-of-Way Acquisition ................................................................ B-31

3.1.3 Land Disturbance ........................................................................... B-35

3.2 Transmission Line Removal (Segment 1W(c) only) ................................... B-35

3.2.1 Access for Removal ....................................................................... B-35

3.2.2 Site Preparation ............................................................................. B-35

3.2.3 Remove Conductors ...................................................................... B-39

3.2.4 Remove Structures ........................................................................ B-39

3.2.5 Site Reclamation ............................................................................ B-39

3.3 Transmission Line Construction ................................................................. B-39

3.3.1 Transmission Line System Roads .................................................. B-40

3.3.2 Soil Borings .................................................................................... B-42

3.3.3 Multi-Purpose Yards ....................................................................... B-42

3.3.4 Fly Yards ........................................................................................ B-43

3.3.5 Site Preparation ............................................................................. B-44

3.3.6 Install Structure Foundations ......................................................... B-45

3.3.7 Erect Support Structures ................................................................ B-46

3.3.8 String Conductors, Shield Wire, and Fiber Optic Ground Wire ...... B-47

3.3.9 Cleanup and Site Reclamation ....................................................... B-49
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-ii 

3.4 Communication System ............................................................................. B-49

3.4.1 Regeneration Stations .................................................................... B-49

3.4.2 Access Road .................................................................................. B-49

3.5 Substation Construction ............................................................................. B-49

3.5.1 Substation Roads ........................................................................... B-50

3.5.2 Soil Boring ...................................................................................... B-50

3.5.3 Clearing and Grading ..................................................................... B-50

3.5.4 Multi-Purpose Yards ....................................................................... B-50

3.5.5 Grounding ...................................................................................... B-50

3.5.6 Fencing .......................................................................................... B-51

3.5.7 Foundation Installation ................................................................... B-51

3.5.8 Oil Containment ............................................................................. B-51

3.5.9 Structure and Equipment Installation ............................................. B-52

3.5.10 Control Building Construction ......................................................... B-52

3.5.11 Conductor Installation .................................................................... B-52

3.5.12 Conduit and Control Cable Installation ........................................... B-52

3.5.13 Construction Cleanup and Landscaping ........................................ B-52

3.6 Special Construction Techniques ............................................................... B-53

3.6.1 Blasting .......................................................................................... B-53

3.6.2 Helicopter Use ................................................................................ B-54

3.6.3 Water Use ...................................................................................... B-55

3.7 Construction Elements ............................................................................... B-57

3.7.1 Construction Workforce .................................................................. B-57

3.7.2 Construction Equipment and Traffic ............................................... B-58

3.7.3 Removal of Facilities and Waste Disposal ..................................... B-66

3.7.4 Construction Schedule ................................................................... B-68

4.0 SYSTEM OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ............................................... B-70

4.1 Routine System Operation and Maintenance ............................................. B-71

4.1.1 Routine System Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair ................... B-72

4.1.2 Transmission Line Maintenance ..................................................... B-72

4.1.3 Hardware Maintenance and Repairs .............................................. B-72

4.1.4 Access Road and Work Area Repair .............................................. B-73

4.1.5 Vegetation Management ................................................................ B-73

4.1.6 Substation and Regeneration Station Maintenance ....................... B-79

4.2 Emergency Response ................................................................................ B-79

4.2.1 Fire Protection ................................................................................ B-80

5.0 DECOMMISSIONING ....................................................................................... B-80
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-iii 

LIST OF TABLES 

Table B-1. Proposed Structure Configuration .................................................................... B-9

Table B-2. Foundation Excavation Dimensions ............................................................... B-10

Table B-3. Proposed Regeneration Station Locations..................................................... B-15

Table B-4. Typical Road Requirements for Transmission Line System .......................... B-17

Table B-5. Access Road Wetland Crossings in the Bear River Plain .............................. B-28

Table B-6. Summary of Land Required for Construction and Operations ....................... B-32

Table B-7. Summary of Land Disturbance Resulting from Construction and 

Operations ..................................................................................................... B-36

Table B-8. Slope Class and Estimated Average Road Width .......................................... B-41

Table B-9. Miles of New and Improved Access Roads1/.................................................. B-42

Table B-10. Construction Multi-purpose Yards and Helicopter Fly Yards ......................... B-44

Table B-11. Estimated Disturbance from Structure Pads by Slope Class ......................... B-44

Table B-12. Summary of Shallow Bedrock by Segment .................................................... B-53

Table B-13. Estimated Water Usage by Component, Segment, and Activity .................... B-56

Table B-14. Transmission Line Construction Equipment Requirements – Segments 

1–4 ................................................................................................................. B-59

Table B-15. Transmission Line Construction Equipment Requirements – Segments 

5-10 ................................................................................................................ B-60

Table B-16. Substation Equipment Requirements – Segments 1–4 ................................. B-61

Table B-17. Substation Equipment Requirements – Segments 5–10 ............................... B-62

Table B-18. Average and Peak Construction Traffic ......................................................... B-63

Table B-19. Solid Waste Generation from Construction Activities ..................................... B-67

Table B-20. Construction Schedule ................................................................................... B-69
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-iv 

LIST OF FIGURES 

Figure B-1. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 230-kV H-Frame Structure .......................... B-3

Figure B-2. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 345-kV H-Frame Structure .......................... B-4

Figure B-3. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 500-kV Lattice Steel Structure .................... B-5

Figure B-4. Proposed 500-kV and 345-kV Single-Circuit ROW Configurations .................. B-6

Figure B-5. Proposed 230-kV Single-Circuit ROW Configurations ..................................... B-7

Figure B-6. Single-Circuit 500-kV Guyed “Delta” and “V” Structure Types Considered 

but not Carried Forward ................................................................................... B-7

Figure B-7. 500-kV Monopole Structure Type Considered but not Carried Forward .......... B-8

Figure B-8. Typical Regeneration Station Site .................................................................. B-16

Figure B-9a. Typical Road Section for Different Terrains ................................................... B-19

Figure B-9b. Water Bars and Dips (TA 503, 1 of 3 pages) ................................................. B-20

Figure B-10. Access Road Dry Crossings .......................................................................... B-25

Figure B-11. Access Road Wet Crossings.......................................................................... B-26

Figure B-12. Typical 500-kV Substation ............................................................................. B-29

Figure B-13. Transmission Line Construction Sequence .................................................... B-40

Figure B-14. Conductor Installation .................................................................................... B-47

Figure B-15. Total Projected Labor Force by EPC Analysis Area and Week ..................... B-58

Figure B-16. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, 230 kV .................................... B-74

Figure B-17. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, 345 kV .................................... B-75

Figure B-18. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, Single-Circuit 500 kV .............. B-76

Figure B-19. Right-of-Way Vegetation Management .......................................................... B-77

Figure B-20. Right-of-Way Vegetation Management in Steep Terrain ............................... B-78
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION 

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 990 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV, and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system consisting of 10 segments 

5 between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway 

6 Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed 

7 transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve 

8 operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric 

9 transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional 

10 energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. 

11 The Project includes ground disturbing activities associated with the construction of 

12 above-ground, single-circuit transmission lines involving structures, access roads, multi13 purpose yards, fly yards, pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication 

14 sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public 

15 lands administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service 

16 (USFS), other federal agencies, and the states of Idaho and Wyoming. 

17 This appendix contains detailed information regarding the components of the 

18 transmission system evaluated in the Environmental Impact Statement (EIS), including 

19 the transmission structures, the communications system, and the substations. This 

20 appendix includes component descriptions (Section 1.0), provides details regarding 

21 construction of the system (Section 2.0), goes on to provide information regarding the 

22 operations and maintenance of the system (Section 3.0), and finally details the 

23 proposed abandonment and restoration techniques (Section 4.0). 

24 2.0 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

25 This section describes the various components of the transmission system for the 

26 Gateway West Project, including the structures themselves, the conductors used, other 

27 hardware needed, the communication system, the access roads, and finally the 

28 substations. Both the proposed and alternative structures are described here, and 

29 details are provided to support the discussion of transmission structure alternatives 

30 found in Section 2.7 of Chapter 2 of the EIS. 

31 2.1 Transmission Structures 

32 2.1.1 Types of Transmission Line Support Structures 

33 The proposed transmission line circuits typically will be supported by three types of 

34 structures: steel H-frame 230-kV and 345-kV structures and self-supporting singlecircuit 500-kV lattice steel towers1 35 . Figures B-1 through B-3 illustrate the typical tangent 

36 structure configurations, which will be the predominant types used for the Project. 

37 Tangent structures are designed to support the conductors where the line angle at the 

 

1

 A 5.1-mile interconnecting 345-kV transmission line (Segment 3A) will be constructed between the proposed 

Anticline Substation yard and the existing Jim Bridger Substation 345-kV yard to electrically connect the two 

substations. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-2

1 structure location is typically one degree or less, meaning the transmission line is 

2 essentially a straight line. Figures B-4 and B-5 illustrate the proposed and alternative 

3 ROW design configurations. 

4 In addition to the more typical tangent structure configurations, specialized structures 

5 are designed where the line must turn an angle. Each structure type is individually 

6 designed, depending on the line angle and the underlying soil and rock conditions, to 

7 withstand the pull of the wires in different directions. Angle structures are heavier and 

8 have deeper foundations. 230-kV angle structures are guyed. 

9 Figures B-6 and B-7 illustrate guyed and monopole structures considered during 

10 preliminary Project design but not carried forward as proposed by the Companies. 

11 230-kV Steel H-Frame Structures 

12 The proposed 230-kV single-circuit line between the Windstar and Aeolus Substations 

13 (Segments 1W[a]) uses steel H-frame structures (Figure B-1). The structures that will 

14 be replaced when reconstructing the existing 230-kV line between the Dave Johnston 

15 and Aeolus Substations (Segment 1W[c]) will also use steel H-frame structures. 

16 The 230-kV steel H-frames use either dulled galvanized or self-weathering steel. 

17 Weathering steel is manufactured from a group of steel alloys that were developed to 

18 eliminate the need for painting or other protective finish. This type of steel alloy forms a 

19 stable rust-like appearance if exposed to the weather for several years. The average 

20 distance between H-frame structures is approximately 800 feet. Structure heights vary 

21 depending on terrain and the requirement to maintain minimum conductor clearances 

22 from ground. Typically, the 230-kV single-circuit H-frame structures have pole lengths 

23 ranging between 70 and 100 feet. Embedment depths are typically 10 percent of the 

24 pole length plus 2 feet, which in the case of this Project is expected to range between 9 

25 and 12 feet. The typical structure heights above ground vary from 60 to 90 feet. 

26 345-kV Steel H-Frame Structures 

27 The proposed 345-kV single-circuit line between the Anticline and Jim Bridger 345-kV 

28 Substations (Segment 3A) uses steel H-frame structures (Figure B-2). The 345-kV 

29 steel H-frames use either dulled galvanized or self-weathering steel, similar to the 230-

30 kV structures. The average distance between H-frame structures is approximately 800 

31 feet. Structure heights vary depending on terrain and the requirement to maintain 

32 minimum conductor clearances from ground. Typically, the 345-kV single-circuit H33 frame structures have pole lengths ranging between 95 and 125 feet. Embedment 

34 depths are typically 10 percent of the pole length plus 5 feet, which for 345-kV 

35 structures will range between 14 and 18 feet. The structure heights above ground vary 

36 from 80 to 110 feet. Depending on underlying soil and rock conditions, the 345-kV H37 frames may be supported by steel-reinforced concrete drilled piers. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-3

1 

2 Figure B-1. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 230-kV H-Frame Structure 

3 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-4

1 

2 Figure B-2. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 345-kV H-Frame Structure 

3 

Detail of Conductor Bundle
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-5

1 

2 

3 Figure B-3. Proposed Tangent Single-Circuit 500-kV Lattice Steel Structure 

4 

5 

Detail of Conductor Bundle
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-6

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 Figure B-4. Proposed 500-kV and 345-kV Single-Circuit ROW Configurations 

8 

500-kV Proposed 

Design 

500-kV Alternative 

Design 

345-kV Proposed 

Design 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-7

1 

2 Figure B-5. Proposed 230-kV Single-Circuit ROW Configurations 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 Guyed “Delta 

8 

9 Guyed “V” 

10 Figure B-6. Single-Circuit 500-kV Guyed “Delta” and “V” Structure Types Considered but 

11 not Carried Forward 

12 

Structure Variation

230-kV Proposed 

Design 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-8

1 

2 

3 Figure B-7. 500-kV Monopole Structure Type Considered but not Carried Forward 

4 

5 500-kV Galvanized Lattice Steel Structures 

6 Lattice steel towers are fabricated with galvanized steel members treated to produce a 

7 dulled galvanized finish. The average distance between 500-kV towers is 1,200 to 1,300 

8 feet. Structure heights vary depending on terrain and the requirement to maintain 

9 minimum conductor clearances from ground. The 500-kV single-circuit towers vary in 

10 height from 145 to 180 feet. Table B-1 describes the approximate number and type of 

11 structures by segments, typical height, typical distances between structures, and 

12 temporary and permanent disturbance areas by structure. 

13 Transposition Structures 

14 At certain points along a line segment, it may be desirable to install a transposition 

15 structure. A transposition structure is used to “transpose” each of the three phases in 

16 the transmission circuit so that each phase occupies the same physical position on the 

17 tower for approximately equal distances along the line segment between substations. 

18 The need to install a transposition structure in a particular line segment is dependent on 

19 the electrical characteristics and length of the line and the need to balance the electrical 

20 impedance of the transmission line between substations. Typically, for line segments 

21 less than 50 miles long, transpositions would be accommodated at the substation 

22 locations. For line segments over 50 miles, there would be three transpositions installed 

23 —two at intermediate points along the segment and one near the substation to return 

24 phases to original positions. The need for transposition structures in a particular line 

25 segment would be determined during final design. The transposition structures will have 

26 the same access and ground disturbance requirements as the 500-kV lattice steel 

27 structures, and would be similar in appearance. 

28 

STRUCTURE 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-9

1 Table B-1. Proposed Structure Configuration Segment Transmission Line Length (miles) Structure Type Typical Height (feet) No. of Structures1/

Average Distance Between Structures1/

(feet)  Temporary Disturbance Area per structure (sq. feet.) Permanent Disturbance Area per structure (sq. feet.2/) 

1W(a) 73.8 230-kV Steel HFrame Structure 60–90 531 800 ROW Width 125 

feet x 150 feet = 

0.43 acre 

10 feet x 40 feet 

= 0.01 acre 

1W(c) 73.6 230-kV Steel HFrame Structure 60–90 547 existing span 

lengths 

assumed to 

be 800 

ROW Width 125 

feet x 150 feet = 

0.43 acre 

10 feet x 40 feet 

= 0.01 acre 

2 91.9 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

390 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

3 45.9 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

194 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

3A 5.1 345-kV SingleCircuit Tubular 

Steel H-Frame 

80-

110 

25 800 ROW Width 150 

feet x 150 feet = 

0.52 acres 

15 feet x 40 feet 

= 0.01 acre 

4 197.6 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

856 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

5 55.7 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

246 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

6 0.5 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

10 varies ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

7 118.2 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

523 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

8 131.5 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

575 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

9 162.2 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

708 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

10 34.4 500-kV SingleCircuit Lattice 

Tower 

145–

180 

157 1,200–1,300 ROW Width 250 

feet x 250 feet = 

1.43 acres 

50 feet x 50 feet 

= 0.06 acre 

1/ Reasonable estimate from preliminary engineering. In infrequent locations where spans between structures exceed 

typical span lengths anticipated (up to approximately 1,200 feet to 1,800 feet depending on voltage and ROW width), 

the right-of-way may need to be increased to provide clearance from conductors blown toward the right-of-way edge. 

2/ Permanent disturbance estimated based on size of structures and a reasonable distance around each to allow for 

annual ground inspection and the vegetation control needed to allow for safety and inspection. 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-10

1 2.1.2 Structure and Conductor Clearances 

2 Conductor phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground clearance parameters are determined 

3 in accordance with the NESC, ANSI C2, produced by the ANSI. This code provides for 

4 minimum distances between the conductors and ground, crossing points of other lines 

5 and the transmission support structure, and other conductors, and minimum working 

6 clearances for personnel during energized operation and maintenance activities (IEEE 

7 2007). Typically, the clearance of conductors above ground is 35 feet for 500 kV, 30 

8 feet for 345 kV, and 28 feet for 230 kV. During detailed design, clearances may be 

9 increased to account for localized conditions. 

10 2.1.3 Structure Foundations 

11 The 500-kV single -circuit lattice steel structures each require four foundations with one 

12 on each of the four corners of the lattice towers. The foundation diameter and depth will 

13 be determined during final design and are dependent on the structure type and type of 

14 soil or rock present at each specific site. Typically, the foundations for the single-circuit 

15 tangent lattice towers are composed of steel-reinforced concrete drilled piers with a 

16 typical diameter of 4 feet and a depth of approximately 22 feet. Typical foundation 

17 diameters and depths for the single -circuit structure families are shown in Table B-2. 

18 Table B-2. Foundation Excavation Dimensions 

Structure 

No. of 

Holes 

Depth 

(feet) 

Diameter 

(feet) 

Concrete 

(cubic 

yards) 

500-kV Single Circuit - Tangent Lattice Tower 4 22.0 4 41 

500-kV Single Circuit - Small Angle Lattice Tower 4 24.5 4 46 

500-kV Single Circuit - Medium Angle Lattice Tower 4 27.0 4 50 

500-kV Single Circuit - Medium Dead-End Lattice Tower1/ 4 29.5 5 86 

500-kV Single Circuit - Heavy Dead-End Lattice Tower 4 32.0 5 93 

19 1/ “Dead-end structure” typically refers to a structure that is placed at a point where the transmission line requires 

20 extra support due to a sharp change in vertical or horizontal direction. 

21 The 230-kV and 345kV single-circuit H-frame structures are directly embedded into the 

22 ground and do not require concrete foundations. The embedment depth is typically 

23 10 percent of the pole length plus 2 feet for 230-kV and 10 percent of the pole length 

24 plus 5 feet for 345-kV, which for the Project is expected to be between 9 and 12 feet 

25 (230-kV) and between 14 and 18 feet (345-kV) based on the structure heights proposed 

26 for the Project. The diameter of the hole excavated for embedment is typically the pole 

27 diameter plus 18 inches. When a pole is placed in a hole, native or select backfill will be 

28 used to fill the voids around the perimeter of the hole. 

29 Depending on underlying soil and rock conditions, the 345-kV H-frames may be 

30 supported by steel-reinforced concrete drilled piers. Additionally, all 345-kV angle 

31 structures will be self-supporting (i.e. no guys) such that they will require concrete drilled 

32 pier foundations. The foundation diameter and depth will be determined during final 

33 design and are dependent on the structure type and type of soil or rock present at each 

34 specific site. If required, each steel pole of a 345-kV structure will have its own drilled 

35 pier foundation. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-11

1 2.2 Conductors 

The proposed conductor for the 500-kV lines is 1,949.6 kcmil2 2 42/7 ACSR/TWD, 

“Athabaska/TW”3. Each phase of a 500-kV three-phase circuit4 3 is composed of three 

4 subconductors in a triple bundle configuration. The individual 1,949.6 kcmil conductors 

5 are bundled in a triangular configuration with spacing of 18 and 25 inches between 

6 subconductors (see Figure B-2). The triple-bundled configuration is proposed to 

7 provide adequate current carrying capacity and to provide for a reduction in audible 

8 noise and radio interference as compared to a single large-diameter conductor. Each 

9 500-kV subconductor has a 42/7 aluminum/steel stranding, with an overall conductor 

10 diameter of 1.504 inches and a weight of 2.199 pounds per foot and a non-specular 

finish5 11 . 

12 For the 5.0 miles of Segment 3A, the proposed conductor for the 345-kV lines is 1,272 

13 kcmil 45/7 ACSR "Bittern". Each phase of the 345-kV three-phase circuit is composed 

14 of three subconductors in a triple-bundle configuration. The individual 1,272 kcmil 

15 conductors are bundled in a triangular configuration with spacing of 18 and 25 inches 

16 between subconductors (see Figure B-3). The triple-bundle configuration is proposed to 

17 provide adequate current carrying capacity and to provide for a reduction in audible 

18 noise and radio interference when compared to a single large-diameter conductor. 

19 Each 345-kV conductor has a 45/7 aluminum/steel stranding, with an overall conductor 

20 diameter of 1.345 inches and a weight of 1.432 pounds per foot and a non-specular 

21 finish. 

22 At 500 kV and 345 kV, where multiple conductors are utilized in a bundle for each 

23 phase, the bundle spacing is maintained through the use of conductor spacers at 

24 intermediate points along the conductor bundle between each structure. The spacers 

25 serve a dual purpose: in addition to maintaining the correct bundle configuration and 

26 spacing, the spacers are also designed to damp out wind-induced vibration in the 

27 conductors. The number of spacers required in each span between towers is 

28 determined during the final design of the transmission line. 

29 The proposed conductor for the new 230-kV line and for reconstructing of the portion of 

30 the existing Dave Johnston – Rock Springs 230-kV line between the Dave Johnston 

31 Power Plant and existing Shirley Basin Substation is 1,272 kcmil 45/7 ACSR “Bittern.” 

32 Each phase of a 230-kV three-phase circuit is composed of two subconductors in a 

33 double-bundle configuration. The individual 1,272 kcmil conductors are bundled in a 

34 vertical configuration with a spacing of 18 inches. The double-bundle configuration is 

35 proposed to provide adequate current carrying capacity and to provide for a reduction in 

36 audible noise and radio interference when compared to a single large-diameter 

37 conductor. Each 230-kV conductor has a 45/7 aluminum/steel stranding, with an overall 

 

2

 Kcmil (1000 cmils) is a quantity of measure for the size of a conductor; kcmil wire size is the equivalent crosssectional area in thousands of circular mils. A circular mil (cmil) is the area of a circle with a diameter of one 

thousandth (0.001) of an inch. 

3

 Aluminum/steel refers to the conductor material composition. The preceding numbers indicate the number of 

strands of each material type present in the conductor (i.e., 42/7 aluminum/steel stranding has 42 aluminum strands 

wound around 7 steel strands). 

4

 For transmission lines, a circuit consists of three phases. A phase may consist of one conductor or multiple 

conductors (i.e., subconductors) bundled together. 

5

 Non-specular finish refers to a “dull” finish rather than a “shiny” finish. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-12

1 conductor diameter of 1.345 inches and a weight of 1.432 pounds per foot and a non2 specular finish. 

3 The proposed conductor for reconstructing the portion of the existing Dave Johnston – 

4 Rock Springs 230-kV line between the existing Shirley Basin Substation and the 

5 proposed Aeolus Substation is 1,557.4 kcmil 36/7 ACSS/TW “Potomac.” Each phase of 

6 a 230-kV three-phase circuit is composed of two subconductors in a double-bundle 

7 configuration. The individual 1,557.4 kcmil conductors are bundled in a vertical 

8 configuration with a spacing of 18 inches. The double-bundle configuration is proposed 

9 to provide adequate current carrying capacity and to provide for a reduction in audible 

10 noise and radio interference when compared to a single large-diameter conductor. 

11 Each 230-kV conductor has a 36/7 aluminum/steel stranding, with an overall conductor 

12 diameter of 1.345 inches and a weight of 1.755 pounds per foot and a non-specular 

13 finish. 

14 Vertical double bundle configuration does not use spacers. Spacers are required only 

15 in the last span into a substation where the bundle rolls from vertical to horizontal. 

16 2.3 Other Hardware 

17 2.3.1 Insulators 

18 As shown in Figure B-1, insulator assemblies for 230-kV H-frame tangent structures will 

19 consist of one insulator string hung vertically from the cross arm in the form of an “I.” As 

20 shown in Figures B-2 and B-3, insulator assemblies for 345-kV and 500-kV tangent 

21 structures will consist of two strings of insulators normally in the form of a “V.” These 

22 strings are used to suspend each conductor bundle (phase) from the structure, 

23 maintaining the appropriate electrical clearance between the conductors, the ground, 

24 and the structure. The V-shaped configuration of the 345-kV and 500-kV insulators also 

25 restrains the conductor so that it will not swing into the structure in high winds. Dead26 end insulator assemblies for 230-kV, 345-kV, and 500-kV lines will use an I-shaped 

27 configuration, which consists of insulators connected horizontally from either a tower 

28 dead-end arm or a dead-end pole in the form of an “I.” Insulators are composed of grey 

29 porcelain or green-tinted toughened glass or single unit polymer (non-ceramic 

30 insulators). Insulators will be made of materials that have reduced potential to reflect 

31 and refract light. 

32 2.3.2 Grounding Systems 

33 AC transmission lines such as the Gateway West transmission lines have the potential 

34 to induce currents on adjacent metallic structures such as transmission lines, railroads, 

35 pipelines, fences, or structures that are parallel to, cross, or are adjacent to the 

36 transmission line. Induced currents on these facilities occur to some degree during 

37 steady-state operating conditions and during a fault condition on the powerline. For 

38 example, during a lightning strike on the line, the insulators may flash over, causing a 

39 fault condition on the line and current flows down the structure through the grounding 

40 system (i.e., ground rod or counterpoise) and into the ground. The magnitude of the 

41 effects of the AC induced currents on adjacent facilities is highly dependent on the 

42 magnitude of the current flows in the transmission line, the proximity of the adjacent 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-13

1 facility to the line, and the distance (length) for which the two facilities parallel one 

2 another in proximity. 

3 The methods and equipment needed to mitigate these conditions will be determined 

4 through electrical studies of the specific situation. As standard practice and as part of the 

5 design of the Project, electrical equipment and fencing at the substation is grounded. All 

6 fences, metal gates, pipelines, metal buildings, and other metal structures adjacent to the 

7 ROW that cross or are within the transmission line ROW will be grounded. If applicable, 

8 grounding of metallic objects outside of the ROW may also occur, depending on the 

9 distance from the transmission line as determined through the electrical studies. These 

10 actions take care of the majority of induced current effects on metallic facilities adjacent to 

11 the line by shunting the induced currents to ground through ground rods, ground mats, and 

12 other grounding systems, thus reducing the effect that a person may experience when 

13 touching a metallic object near the line (i.e., reduce electric shock potential). In the case of 

14 a longer parallel facility, such as a pipeline parallel to the Project over many miles, 

15 additional electrical studies are undertaken to identify any additional mitigation measures 

16 (more than the standard grounding practices) that need to be implemented to prevent 

17 damaging currents from flowing onto the parallel facility, and to prevent electrical shock to a 

18 person that may come in contact with the parallel facility. Some of the typical measures 

19 that could be considered for implementation, depending on the degree of mitigation 

20 needed, could include (NACE International 2003): 

21  Fault Shields – shallow grounding conductors connected to the affected 

22 structure adjacent to overhead electrical transmission towers, poles, substations, 

23 etc. They are intended to provide localized protection to the structure and 

24 pipeline coating during a fault event from a nearby electric transmission power 

25 system. 

26  Lumped Grounding – localized conductor or conductors connected to the 

27 affected structure at strategic locations (e.g., at discontinuities). They are 

28 intended to protect the structure from both steady-state and fault AC conditions. 

29  Gradient Control Wires – a continuous and long grounding conductor or 

30 conductors installed horizontally and parallel to a structure (e.g., pipeline section) 

31 at strategic lengths and connected at regular intervals. These are intended to 

32 provide protection to the structure and pipeline coating during steady-state and 

33 fault AC conditions from nearby electric transmission power systems. 

34  Gradient Control Mats – typically used for above ground components of a 

35 pipeline system, these are buried ground mats bonded to the structure, and are 

36 used to reduce electrical step and touch voltages in areas where people may 

37 come in contact with a structure subject to hazardous potentials. Permanent 

38 mats bonded to the structure may be used at valves, metallic vents, cathodic 

39 protection test stations, and other aboveground metallic and nonmetallic 

40 appurtenances where electrical contact with the affected structure is possible. In 

41 these cases there is no “standard” solution that would solve these issues every 

42 time. Instead, each case must be studied to determine the magnitude of the 

43 induced currents and the most appropriate mitigation given the ground resistivity, 

44 distance paralleled, steady-state and fault currents, fault clearing times expected 

45 on the transmission line, and distance between the line and the pipeline, to name 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-14

1 a few of the parameters. If the electrical studies indicate a need to install 

2 cathodic protection devices on a parallel pipeline facility, a distribution supply line 

3 interconnection may be needed to provide power to the cathodic protection 

4 equipment. 

5 During final design of the transmission line segments, appropriate electrical studies will 

6 be conducted to identify the issues associated with paralleling other facilities and the 

7 types of equipment needed to be installed (if any) to mitigate the effects of the induced 

8 currents. 

9 2.3.3 Minor Additional Hardware 

10 In addition to the conductors, insulators, and overhead shield wires, other associated 

11 hardware will be installed on the tower as part of the insulator assembly to support the 

12 conductors and shield wires. This hardware includes clamps, shackles, links, plates, 

13 and various other pieces composed of galvanized steel and aluminum. 

14 A grounding system will be installed at the base of each transmission structure that 

15 consists of copper ground rods embedded into the ground in immediate proximity to the 

16 structure foundation and connected to the structure by a buried copper lead. When the 

17 resistance to ground for each transmission structure is greater than 25 ohms with the 

18 use of ground rods, counterpoise is installed to lower the resistance with the intent to 

19 achieve 25 ohms or less. Counterpoise consists of a bare copper-clad or galvanized20 steel cable buried a minimum of 12 inches deep, extending from structures (from one or 

21 more legs of structure) for approximately 200 feet within the ROW. 

22 Other hardware that is not associated with the transmission of electricity may be 

23 installed as part of the Project. This hardware may include aerial marker spheres or 

24 aircraft warning lighting as required for the conductors or structures per FAA 

regulations.6 25 Structure proximity to airports and structure height are the determinants of 

26 whether FAA regulations would apply based on an assessment of wire/tower strike risk. 

27 Structure lighting will not be required because proposed structures will be less than 200 

28 feet tall and will not be near airports that require structure lighting. Site-specific 

29 exceptions may be made to comply with US Air Force requirements in restricted air 

30 space near the Jarbidge Military Operations Area and the Saylor Creek Air Force 

31 Range, or to comply with FAA requirements where structure adjustments are not 

32 feasible near regulated airports. 

33 2.4 Communication Systems 

34 2.4.1 Optical Ground Wire 

35 Reliable and secure communications for system control and monitoring of Gateway 

36 West is very important to maintain the operational integrity of the Project and of the 

37 overall interconnected system. Primary communications for relaying and control is 

38 provided via the OPGW that will be installed on the transmission lines. For the 500-kV 

39 transmission lines, a secondary communications path is provided by the Companies’ 

40 existing microwave system, which is currently installed from the Central Wyoming area 

 

6

 U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Aviation Administration, Advisory Circular AC 70/7460-1K Obstruction 

Marking and Lighting, August 1, 2000; and Advisory Circular AC 70/7460-2K Proposed Construction or Alteration of 

Objects that May Affect the Navigable Airspace, March 1, 2000. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-15

1 near the Windstar Substation west to existing substations near Boise, Idaho. A 

2 secondary communication path may also be developed using a powerline carrier. No 

3 new microwave sites are anticipated for the Project. Updated microwave equipment 

4 may be installed at existing sites and at the substations. 

5 Each structure has two lightning protection shield wires installed. For the 500-kV single6 circuit lattice steel structures, shield wires are installed on the peaks of each of the 

7 structures (see Figure B-2). On the 230-kV and 345-kv H-frame structures (see Figure 

8 B-1) these lightning protection shield wires are installed near the top of each pole. On 

9 500-kV, 345-kV, and 230-kV lines where communication is required, one of the shield 

10 wires is composed of extra high strength steel wire with a diameter of 0.495 inch and a 

11 weight of 0.517 pound per foot. The second shield wire is an OPGW constructed of 

12 aluminum and steel, which carries 48 glass fibers within its core. On the 500-kV lines, 

13 the OPGW has a diameter of 0.637 inch and a weight of 0.375 pound per foot; on the 

14 345-kV lines, the OPGW has a diameter of 0.495 inch and a weight of 0.517 pound per 

15 foot. On the 230-kV lines, the OPGW has a diameter of 0.465 inch and a weight of 

16 0.270 pound per foot. The glass fibers inside the OPGW shield wire will provide optical 

17 data transfer capability among the Companies’ facilities along the fiber path. The data 

18 transferred are required for system control and monitoring. On lines where 

19 communication is not required, both of the shield wires are composed of extra high 

20 strength steel wires with a diameter of 0.495 inch and a weight of 0.517 pound per foot. 

21 For the Gateway Project, all 500-kV line segments are designed to carry an OPGW. 

22 For the 230-kV lines, Segment 1W(a) and a portion of 1W(c) are designed to carry an 

23 OPGW. Between the new Anticline Substation and the existing Jim Bridger Substation, 

24 two communication paths (underground or aerial) are required for redundancy. One 

25 path is carried by the 345-kV line (Segment 3A). The second path is carried on 

26 Segment 4 for a couple of miles from Anticline to a point where the segment crosses 

27 existing 230-kV lines. At this point, the OPGW is routed along the existing 230-kV lines 

28 either overhead on the existing structures by replacing an existing shield wire with an 

29 OPGW, or installing the communication wire underground within the existing 230-kV 

30 ROW to Jim Bridger Substation. 

31 2.4.2 Regeneration Stations 

32 As the data signal is passed through the optical fiber cable, the signal degrades with 

33 distance. Consequently, signal regeneration stations are required to amplify the signals 

34 if the distance between substations or regeneration stations exceeds 55 miles. As 

35 summarized in Table B-3, a total of 13 regeneration stations are required. 

36 Table B-3. Proposed Regeneration Station Locations 

Segment Number 

Total Construction 

Acres 

Total Operations 

Acres 

Segment 1W(a) – Windstar to Aeolus 1 1 0.5 

Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston 1 1 0.5 

Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline 1 1 0.5* 

Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus 3 3 1.5 

Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill 2 2 1 

Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway 2 2 1 

Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway 3 3 1.5 

37 * This regeneration station will be located in the vicinity of the Creston site. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-16

1 A regeneration station may be housed within a substation control house in those cases 

2 where a substation is located along or near the final transmission route at an 

3 appropriate milepost; otherwise, land must be obtained or additional area requested. 

4 Where a new site is required, the typical site is 100 feet by 100 feet, with a fenced area 

5 of 75 feet by 75 feet. A 12-foot- by 32-foot- by 9-foot-tall building or equipment shelter 

6 (metal or concrete) is placed on the site, and access roads to the site and power from 

7 the local electric distribution circuits are required. An emergency generator with a liquid 

8 petroleum gas fuel tank is installed at the site inside the fenced area. Two diverse cable 

9 routes (aerial and/or buried) from the transmission ROW to the equipment shelter are 

10 required. Figure B-8 illustrates the plan arrangement of a typical regeneration station. 

11 

12 Figure B-8. Typical Regeneration Station Site 

13 

14 2.5 Roads Used During Construction and Operation 

15 Access and service roads are an essential part of the construction and operation of the 

16 Gateway West transmission line. Large foundation auger equipment, heavily loaded 

17 trucks, cranes, and specialized line construction equipment will be required for 

18 construction, maintenance, and emergency restoration activities. Annual ground based 

19 inspections require vehicular access using 4x4 trucks or 4x4 all-terrain vehicles (ATVs) 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-17

1 to each structure site. Table B-4 summarizes the four types of roads needed for 

2 accessing the transmission line structures for the Project. 

3 The only temporary roads are those that are constructed to access temporary use 

4 areas, where needed, including multi-purpose yards and fly yards. 

5 Table B-4. Typical Road Requirements for Transmission Line System 

Road Type 

Access Roads for 

Construction 

Access Roads for 

Routine Operations 

Access Roads for NonRoutine 

Operations Use 

Existing roads 

requiring no 

improvement 

No change No change No change 

Existing roads 

requiring 

improvement 

Unsurfaced 14-foot-wide 

straight sections of road 

and 16- to 20-foot-wide 

sections at corners 

For routine activities, an 8-

foot portion of the road will 

be used and vehicles will 

drive over the vegetation 

(“two-track”). 

For non-routine 

maintenance requiring 

access by larger vehicles, 

the full width of the access 

road may be used. Roads 

will be repaired, as 

necessary, but will not be 

routinely graded. In order to 

preserve the ability to enter 

rapidly, the road structure 

(cuts and fills) will be left in 

place. 

New roads Unsurfaced 14-foot-wide 

straight sections of road 

and 16- to 20-foot-wide 

sections at corners 

For routine activities, an 8-

foot portion of the road will 

be used and vehicles will 

drive over the vegetation 

(“two-track”). 

Temporary 

roads 

Unsurfaced 14-foot-wide 

straight sections of road 

and 16- to 20-foot-wide 

sections at corners 

None—contours will be 

restored, and the road will 

be ripped and seeded. 

None 

6 2.5.1 Construction Access Roads 

7 During construction vehicular access will be required to each structure. New access 

8 roads will be constructed and existing roads widened as needed to provide a 14-foot9 wide travel way. Roads not required for operations will be restored to their original 

10 condition or left as is, depending on landowner/land management agency requirements. 

11 The largest of the heavy equipment needed, which dictates the minimum needed road 

12 dimensions, is a truck-mounted aerial lift crane, 100,000 pounds gross vehicle weight, 

13 8x8 drive, 210-foot telescoped boom. Vehicle width is 8’6” (102 inches) or less and 

14 wheelbase is around 25 feet. To accommodate this equipment, the road specifications 

15 require a 14-foot-wide road top (travel way) and 16- to 20-foot-wide road width in turns. 

16 The required road disturbance area and travel way in areas of rolling to hilly terrain will 

17 require a wider disturbance to account for cuts and fills, turning radii, and/or where 

18 vehicles are required to pass one another while traveling in opposite directions. 

19 Access road construction employs heavy equipment including bulldozers, front-end 

20 loaders, dump trucks, backhoes, excavators, both tracked and rubber-tired, and 

21 graders. Other specialized equipment, including boom trucks to install culverts in some 

22 areas, will be used where needed. Roads will be built to provide a stable, permanent 

23 14-foot-wide travel surface at straight sections and 16- to 20-foot wide travel surface at 

24 turns. Depending on the side slope, this can include cuts and fills, crowning and 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-18

1 ditching, at-grade water bars, and various kinds of waterbody crossings. Figures B-9a 

2 and B-9b show the typical cross-sections created during construction of access roads. 

3 Construction of new access roads begins with vegetation removal. Merchantable timber 

4 is cut and yarded to landings where the logs can be loaded on to trucks and hauled to 

5 market. Non-merchantable logs are stored along the edge of the ROW for later use in 

6 site restoration. Smaller vegetation will be lopped and scattered outside the road prism. 

7 Topsoil will be stripped from the road prism as required by federal land management 

8 agencies or landowners. Topsoil will be stored adjacent to the road or in a nearby 

9 workspace. Appropriate erosion control devices will be installed to prevent erosion or 

10 loss of the topsoil, including but not limited to tackifiers to prevent wind erosion and 

11 fugitive dust and silt fencing to prevent sediment runoff. Roads surfaces will be 

12 stabilized if needed with road base but will not be routinely paved with asphalt or 

13 concrete. Access roads will have either dirt surfaces or have road base as surfacing 

14 where needed. As needed, the construction pad and access road will be graded to 

15 allow for safe access and construction. The grading may include cut and fill as needed 

16 to achieve a workable safe surface. 

17 “New Roads” will receive one of the following treatments: 

18  In areas of rolling to hilly terrain, roads may require blading as shown on Figure 

19 B-9a, for ditches, realignment, widening, cut and fill, graveling, or installation of 

20 culverts.

21  In flatter areas overland travel may be used. Overland travel means following a 

22 staked road alignment, either cutting the vegetation and leaving the root crowns 

23 and then driving over it (clear and cut), or just driving over the vegetation if it is 

24 low enough (drive and crush). In either case, a blade may be used if needed to 

25 remove obstructions in limited places. 

26 

27 “Existing Roads Needing Improvement” will have varied conditions across the Project. 

28 These roads were classified as such to recognize that the Contractor MAY need to 

29 perform some level of improvement to provide the safe travel way required for 

30 construction. Based on the Contractor’s construction plan and the construction 

31 techniques employed, it is anticipated that sections of the access roads classified as 

32 “Existing Roads Needing Improvement” will receive one of the following treatments. 

33  The existing road will be sufficient and provide a safe travel way throughout the 

34 duration of line construction. 

35  The existing road will be sufficient and provide a safe travel way during a portion 

36 of the line construction period. Weather events, progressive damage due to 

37 heavy use and larger heavier equipment needed are examples of reasons that 

38 an existing road would need some level of construction at one or more 

39 intermediate points during line construction. 

40  The existing road at project initiation needs more extensive construction, 

41 including blading, prior to the start of line construction. 

42  Portions of these roads will involve clear and cut, or just drive and crush. 

43 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-19

1 

2 Figure B-9a. Typical Road Section for Different Terrains 

3 

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Idaho, Wyoming, Nevada
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-20

1 Figure B-9b. Water Bars and Dips (TA 503, 1 of 3 pages) 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-21

1 

2 Figure B-9b. Water Bars and Dips (TA 503, 2 of 3 pages) 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-22

1 

2 Figure B-9b. Water Bars and Dips (TA 503, 3 of 3 pages) 

3 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-23

1 2.5.2 Operations Access Roads 

2 Transmission line access roads are necessary for access to, and maintenance of, 

3 transmission lines, structures or ancillary facilities, but they are not part of the public or 

4 federal network of roads. They are generally closed to the public and will be maintained 

5 by the Companies. 

6 During routine operations, vehicular access will be needed to reach each structure for 

7 periodic inspections and maintenance and to areas of forest or tall shrubs to control 

8 vegetation in the ROW for safe operation. The Companies plan to employ live-line 

9 maintenance techniques on the transmission line (see Section 3.1.3 of this appendix). 

10 Live line maintenance and repair techniques require the utilization of high-reach bucket 

11 trucks and other trucks and equipment. Roads required as routine access roads for the 

12 operational life of the Project will be revegetated following construction but will not be 

13 recontoured; they will be maintained free of trees and shrubs for a minimum 8-foot width. 

14 For non-routine maintenance requiring access by larger vehicles, the full width of the 

15 access road may be used. Roads will be repaired, as necessary, but will not be 

16 routinely graded. In order to preserve the ability to enter rapidly, the road structure (cuts 

17 and fills) will be left in place. In an emergency (i.e., in the event of a tower or conductor 

18 failure) full emergency access, including cranes and other heavy equipment, will be 

19 needed. Based on historical reliability of H-frame and lattice structures, it is anticipated 

20 that only a small fraction of the tower sites will require emergency access over the life of 

21 the Project. 

22 Other roads may be travelled over by the Companies during operations. However, 

23 roads not classified as access roads will not be maintained by the Companies except as 

24 noted. 

25 Roads not classified as access roads include: 

26  Public roads, including state highways and county roads: These roads are for 

27 public use, and the appropriate state or county entity maintains them. 

28  Open roads on federal land: The appropriate federal agency (typically BLM or 

29 Forest Service) maintains these roads, which are open to the public. These 

30 roads, including drainage features, cuts, and fill slopes, will be repaired by the 

31 Companies if damaged during O&M activities but not maintained on a routine 

32 basis. 

33  Closed federal land roads: These roads are still needed for administrative or 

34 emergency functions, but they have been closed to the public because of 

35 management policies to protect natural resources or reduce maintenance costs. 

36 If utilized during O&M activities, the Companies would assume some 

37 maintenance responsibilities proportionate to their use for O&M purposes. 

38 2.5.3 Waterbody Crossings with Access Roads 

39 Access roads will be constructed to minimize disruption of natural drainage patterns. 

40 Estimates of relative frequencies of crossing types and disturbance estimates for each 

41 are based on local engineering experience in Wyoming and Idaho. Each crossing will 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-24

1 be designed with the roads as advanced engineering is completed, and crossing 

2 disturbance will vary. However, these estimates are conservative and consistent across 

3 all alternatives. On all federally managed lands, the Companies will consult with the 

4 managing agency regarding relevant standards and guidelines pertaining to road 

5 crossing methods at waterbodies. Consultation includes site assessment, design, 

6 installation, maintenance, and decommissioning. Appendix I, Stream, Wetlands, Well 

7 and Spring Protection Plan, describes waterbody crossing types that will be used as 

8 part of the construction specifications. For EIS analysis purposes, three types of 

9 waterbody crossings as well as avoidance are considered as part of the Project (see 

10 Figures B-10 and B-11). They are: 

11  Type 1—Drive through: Crossing of a channel with only minimal vegetation 

12 removal and no cut or fill needed. This is typical for much of the low-precipitation 

13 sagebrush country with rolling topography and streams that rarely flow with water. 

14  Type 2—Ford: Crossing of a channel that includes grading and stabilization. 

15 Stream banks and approaches will be graded to allow vehicle passage and 

16 stabilized with rock or other erosion control devices. The stream bed will in some 

17 areas be reinforced with coarse rock material, where approved by the land18 management agency, to support vehicle loads, prevent erosion and minimize 

19 sedimentation into the waterway. The rock will be installed in the stream bed such 

20 that it would not raise the level of the streambed, thus allowing continued movement 

21 of water, fish and debris. A ford crossing results in an average disturbance profile of 

22 25 feet wide (along the waterbody) and 50 feet long (along the roadway) for 1,250 

23 square feet or 0.03 acre at each crossing. Disturbance amount is estimated based 

24 on need to get equipment into the riparian area to build the 14-foot-wide travelway 

25 and protect it from erosion by adding armoring. 

26  Type 3—Culvert: Crossing of a waterbody that includes installation of a culvert and 

27 a stable road surface established over the culvert for vehicle passage. Culverts are 

28 designed and installed under the guidance of a qualified engineer who, in 

29 collaboration with a hydrologist and aquatic biologist where required by the land 

30 management agency, recommends placement locations; culvert gradient, height, 

31 and sizing; and proper construction methods. Culvert design considers bedload and 

32 debris size and volume. The disturbance footprint for culvert installation is estimated 

33 to be 50 feet wide (along the waterbody) and 150 feet long (along the road) for 7,500 

34 square feet or 0.17 acre at each crossing. Ground-disturbing activities will comply 

35 with Agency-approved BMPs. Construction will occur during periods of low water or 

36 normal flow. The use of equipment in streams will be minimized. All culverts will be 

37 designed and installed to meet desired riparian conditions, as identified in applicable 

38 unit management plans. Culvert slope will not exceed stream gradient. Typically, 

39 culverts are partially buried in the streambed to maintain streambed material in the 

40 culvert. Sandbags or other non-erosive material are placed around the culverts to 

41 prevent scour or water flow around the culvert. Adjacent sediment control structures 

42 such as silt fences, check dams, rock armoring, or riprap may be necessary to 

43 prevent erosion or sedimentation. Stream banks and approaches may be stabilized 

44 with rock or other erosion control devices. Culverts will be inspected and maintained 

45 annually for the life of the Project (estimated at 50 years or longer) for proper 

46 operation and to protect water quality. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-25

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 Figure B-10. Access Road Dry Crossings 

49 

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Idaho, Wyoming, Nevada
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-26

Gateway West

Transmission Line Project

Idaho, Wyoming, Nevada 

1 Figure B-11. Access Road Wet Crossings
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-27

1 

2  Avoid Crossing: Where constructing a new waterbody crossing is impractical or 

3 would require a bridge or a very large (>48-inch-diameter) culvert, existing 

4 waterbody crossings will be used and access redesigned to avoid a new 

5 crossing. All canals and ditches will be avoided by using existing crossings, as 

6 would all large perennial bodies like rivers. 

7 The performance of low water stream crossings will be monitored for the life of the 

8 access road, and maintained or repaired as necessary to protect water quality. 

9 2.5.4 Wetlands Crossings with Access Roads 

10 During construction and for routine and emergency operations, access across wetlands 

11 to each structure location is necessary. Two methods of minimizing impact to wetlands 

12 were evaluated but are not proposed: 

13  Constructing at-grade roads with geotextiles and road materials which allow for 

14 water through-flow. This type of road would be below water during certain times 

15 of the year which would make locating the roads difficult, and the depth of the 

16 water over the drivable surface may make travel over the submerged road 

17 surface impractical or not feasible. 

18  Constructing using helicopters in wetlands. The single-circuit 500kV towers will 

19 be designed such that they can be erected by helicopter if needed. In each case, 

20 the use of ground based vehicles is still required, thus not eliminating the need 

21 for an access road to each structure to complete construction or during 

22 inspections and live-line maintenance activities. 

23 A combination of methods for road construction in wetlands is proposed: 

24  Construction of permanent above-grade roads that will be utilized during 

25 construction, operation, and maintenance. This will typically entail placement of 

26 permanent fill in wetlands such that the travel surface would be higher in 

27 elevation than the ordinary high water level. The construction of above-grade 

28 access roads allows for the use of the types of equipment needed for 

29 construction, operation, maintenance; and for expedited access for emergency 

30 restoration throughout the year. 

31  Construction or use of temporary roads during construction, followed by 

32 restoration of the disturbance after construction. The Companies only propose 

33 this approach in the area of extensive wetlands in the Bear River Plain, in part 

34 because it is feasible to store the amount of matting needed for emergency 

35 access in the immediate vicinity. Smaller wetland and riparian area crossings will 

36 be constructed using permanent crossing methods because it would not be 

37 feasible to provide for temporary crossing materials for scattered crossings along 

38 a thousand miles of the Project. Where feasible in areas where temporary roads 

39 will be used, construction equipment may travel overland if the area is dry. If 

40 construction occurs when the ground is solidly frozen, ice roads could be 

41 constructed. 

42 If construction must occur when the ground is wet, temporary matting materials will be 

43 installed to allow access for heavy vehicles and equipment. The mats typically come in 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-28

1 the form of heavy timbers bolted together. They are often used over a geotextile that is 

2 applied directly over the wet soil surface. When construction use is complete, the mats 

3 are removed and the geotextile taken up. This approach will be used where feasible, 

4 since it further reduces vegetation damage and compaction and reduces the time for full 

5 restoration. Mats spread the concentrated axle loads from equipment over a much 

6 larger surface area than the tires alone, thereby reducing the bearing pressure on 

7 fragile soils. Matting has a limited service life before replacement is required and must 

8 be stored for maintenance and emergency restoration activities. Table B-5 shows an 

9 estimate of miles of temporary roads for construction access in the three largest wetland 

10 areas crossed by the Proposed Route. Though exact locations may change during final 

11 design, the Companies are committed to using temporary crossings wherever feasible 

12 in these three important wetland areas. 

13 Table B-5. Access Road Wetland Crossings in the Bear River Plain 

Location 

Segment 4 

Mileposts 

Approximate Miles 

Total New or 

Improved 

Access 

Roads 

New or 

Improved 

Access Road in 

Uplands 

Proposed for 

Permanent Fill 

in Wetlands 

Proposed for 

Temporary 

Access in 

Wetlands 

Cokeville 123.0-126.8 2.2 1.3 0.0 0.9 

Bear River 133.5-134.5 1.8 0.0 0.0 1.8 

Montpelier 148.0-153.6 7.9 5.1 0.0 2.8 

14 

15 Where temporary road access is utilized, road areas will be rehabilitated after 

16 construction. Any geotextiles and matting used will be removed and wetland vegetation 

17 allowed to return. No permanent roads will be available for routine operations 

18 inspections or repairs. Operational inspections and repairs will be scheduled for times 

19 when the ground is dry or frozen and access will be overland along the road alignment 

20 by ATV. Emergency repairs requiring heavy equipment will access the damaged area 

21 using matting if necessary. After emergency repairs are completed, matting will be 

22 removed and the wetland areas allowed to restore naturally. 

23 Waterbody and wetland disturbances will be conducted under the terms of a USACE 

24 CWA Section 404 permit, the NPDES Construction Stormwater Permit (CWA 402), and 

25 State 401 water quality certification requirements governing activities within waters of 

26 the United States. In Idaho, there is an additional requirement for a stream channel 

27 alteration permit for activities in stream beds. 

28 2.6 Substations 

29 The Project includes three proposed substations and expansion at nine existing 

30 substations.

31 2.6.1 Substation Components 

32 The following sections describe key components of substations.

33 2.6.1.1 Bay 

34 A substation “bay” is the physical location within a substation fenced area where the 

35 high-voltage circuit breakers and associated steel transmission line termination 

36 structures, high-voltage switches, bus supports, controls, and other equipment are 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-29

1 installed. For each transmission line, 500-kV, 345-kV, and 230-kV circuit breakers, 

2 high-voltage switches, bus supports, and transmission line termination structures are 

3 typically installed. The 500-kV transmission line termination structures are 

4 approximately 125 to 135 feet tall. Additional equipment including 500/230-kV or 

5 500/345-kV transformers and 500-kV shunt reactors (which resemble a transformer in 

6 appearance), and 230-kV shunt capacitor banks will be installed. 

7 The appearance of the new and expanded substations is similar to the appearance of 

8 the existing substations. The tallest structures in the substations are the 500-kV, 345-

9 kV, and 230-kV dead-end structures, which vary in height from approximately 70 feet 

10 (230 kV) to 125 to 135 feet (500 kV), and/or a microwave antenna tower, which would 

11 be in the range of 100 feet or more, depending on the height needed to maintain line of 

12 sight to the nearest microwave relay site. Figure B-12 includes a perspective sketch 

13 and an elevation view illustrating the appearance of a typical 500-kV substation with 

14 multiple line connections. 

15 

16 Figure B-12. Typical 500-kV Substation 

17 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-30

1 2.6.1.2 Access Road 

2 Permanent all-weather access roads are required at substation sites to provide access 

3 for personnel, material deliveries, vehicles, trucks, heavy equipment, low-boy tractor 

4 trailer rigs (used for moving large transformers), and ongoing maintenance activities at 

5 each site. Substation access roads are normally well-compacted, graded gravel roads 

6 approximately 20 feet in width with a minimum 110-foot turning radius to accommodate 

7 the delivery of large transformers to the site. A new access road of less than 1 mile will 

8 be developed from the public road to the Anticline Substation. Access to the Aeolus 

9 Substation requires an upgrade of a portion of CR 121. Access roads are in place for 

10 all other substation locations. 

11 2.6.1.3 Control Building 

12 One or more control buildings are required at each substation to house protective 

13 relays, control devices, battery banks for primary control power, and remote monitoring 

14 equipment. The size and construction of the building depends on individual substation 

15 requirements. Typically, the control building is constructed of concrete block, pre16 engineered metal sheathed, or composite surfaced materials. Special control buildings 

17 may be developed within the substation developments to house other control and 

18 protection equipment. For example, at Aeolus a static var compensation (SVC) building 

19 will be developed to protect power electronic equipment, controls, and cooling 

20 equipment. 

21 2.6.1.4 Fencing and Landscaping 

22 Security fencing will be installed around the entire perimeter of each new or expanded 

23 substation to protect sensitive equipment and prevent accidental contact with energized 

24 conductors by third parties. This 7-foot-high fence is constructed of chain link with steel 

25 posts, with one foot of barbed wire above the chain link, and with locked gates. If 

26 required by the landowner or permitting agency, landscaping will be established using 

27 drought-resistant vegetation where allowed. 

28 2.6.2 Distribution Supply Lines 

29 Station service power is required at each substation or regeneration station. Typically, 

30 station service power is provided from a local electric distribution line, located in 

31 proximity to the substation or regeneration station. The voltage of the distribution 

32 supply line is typically 34.5 kV or lower and carried on wood poles. For new sites, it will 

33 be necessary to extend the electric distribution line from a suitable take-off point on an 

34 existing distribution line to the new substation site. The location and routing of the 

35 existing distribution lines to the new substation sites is determined during the final 

36 design process. For Gateway West, new distribution line extensions to provide station 

37 service power are anticipated for the Anticline, Cedar Hill Substation and Aeolus 

38 substations. The distance between existing distribution supply and the substations 

39 ranges from 200 feet to 11 miles. The remaining substation locations are at existing 

40 station sites and new distribution line extensions to provide station service power will 

41 not be required. However, modifications to the existing distribution facilities may be 

42 necessary to provide increased capacity to support the expansions at the existing 

43 substation sites. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-31

1 3.0 SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION 

2 The following section and subsections detail construction activities for the Project, 

3 including transmission line, substation communication, and associated ancillary features.

4 3.1 Land Requirements and Disturbance 

5 3.1.1 Right-of-Way Width 

6 The Companies propose to acquire a permanent 250-foot-wide ROW for the 500-kV 

7 single-circuit sections of the Project, a 150-foot-wide ROW for 345-kV single-circuit 

8 sections of the Project, and a 125-foot-wide ROW for the 230-kV single-circuit sections 

9 of the Project. However, in the isolated situation where spans between structures 

10 significantly exceed the typical span lengths anticipated (up to 1,200 feet or 1,800 feet 

11 depending on voltage and standard ROW width), the ROW width may need to be 

12 increased to provide appropriate clearance from conductors blown toward the ROW 

13 edge. Figures B-4 through B-5 illustrate the ROW width requirements. The 

14 determination of these widths is based on two criteria: 

15  Sufficient clearance must be maintained during a high wind event when the 

16 conductors are blown towards the ROW edge. 

17  Sufficient room must be provided within the ROW to perform transmission line 

18 maintenance. See Section 3.1.2 of this appendix for details of maintenance 

19 requirements. 

20 During construction, temporary permission will be required from landowners and land 

21 management agencies for off-ROW access, multi-purpose yards, helicopter fly yards, and 

22 material storage. During operation, Project land requirements will be restricted to the 

23 ROW, including access roads, substations, and communication facilities. Access to the 

24 ROW (including off-ROW access roads) will be in accordance with the land rights obtained 

25 as part of the easement acquisition process. Off-ROW access roads will be used where 

26 permitted for operations as well as construction. As further details of the final Project 

27 design are engineered, the amount of land required may change. 

28 3.1.2 Right-of-Way Acquisition 

29 All segments must obtain new ROWs through a combination of ROW grants and 

30 easements negotiated between the Companies and various federal, state, and local 

31 governments; other companies (e.g., utilities and railroads); and private landowners. 

32 Close coordination with all property owners and land agencies during surveys and the 

33 construction phase of the Project is essential for successful completion of the Project. 

34 In the early stages of the Project, landowners were contacted to obtain right-of-entry for 

35 surveys and for geotechnical drilling at selected locations. Additional landowners will be 

36 contacted as needed throughout the project for additional surveys, including 

37 geotechnical work. Each landowner along the final centerline route will be contacted to 

38 explain the Project and to secure right-of-entry and access to the ROW. 

39 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-32

1 Table B-6. Summary of Land Required for Construction and Operations 

Segment 

Land Required for 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/

Land Required for 

Operations (acres) 1/

Segment 1W(a) – Windstar to Aeolus (230-kV Line)

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 1,168 1,117 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard – – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards – – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 352 107 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 1 1 0.5 

Windstar and portion of Aeolus Substations 35 35 

Segment Subtotal 1,556 1,260 

Segment 1W(c) – Dave Johnston to Aeolus (230-kV Reconstruction)

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 1,170 1,114 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 30 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 307 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 155 47 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 0 – – 

Heward and portion of Aeolus Substations 37 30 

Segment Subtotal 1,699 1,191 

Segment 2 – Aeolus to Creston 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 2,942 2,776 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 60 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 240 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 419 128 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 1 1 0.5 

Portion of Aeolus Substation 60 50 

Segment Subtotal 3,722 2,955 

Segment 3 – Creston to Anticline 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 1,459 1,392 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 40 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 112 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 143 44 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 1 1 0.5 

Portion of Anticline Substation 45 40 

Segment Subtotal 1,800 1,477 

Segment 3A – Anticline to Bridger 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 97 93 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard – – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 12 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 12 4 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 0 0 0 

Jim Bridger 345-kV and portion of Anticline 

Substations 40 40 

Segment Subtotal 161 137 2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-33

1 

Table B-6. Summary of Land Required for Construction and Operations (continued) 

Segment 

Land Required for 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/

Land Required for 

Operations (acres) 1/

Segment 4 – Anticline to Populus 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 6,325 5,983 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 120 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 554 

Off-ROW Access Roads 997 307 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 3 3 1.5 

Portions of Anticline and Populus Substations 105 97 

Segment Subtotal 8,104 6,389 

Segment 5 – Populus to Borah 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 1,799 1,682 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 40 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 171 

Off-ROW Access Roads 263 80 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 0 0 0 

Portions of Populus and Borah Substations 50 44 

Segment Subtotal 2,323 1,806 

Segment 6 – Borah to Midpoint 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 17 17 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 

Multi-purpose yards from 

adjacent segments will be 

used. 

– 

Off-ROW Fly Yards Fly yards from adjacent 

segments will be used. – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 

Minimal roads will be required 

around substations for 

required work. 

– 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 0 0 – 

Portions of Borah and Midpoint Substations 35 31 

Segment Subtotal 52 48

Segment 7 – Populus to Cedar Hill 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 3,795 3,571 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 56 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 398 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 367 112 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 2 2 1 

Portions of Populus and Cedar Hill Substations 52 45 

Segment Subtotal 4,670 3,729 

Segment 8 – Midpoint to Hemingway

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 4,230 3,982 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 100 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 487 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 323 99 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 2 2 1 

Portion of Midpoint Substation 15 13 

Segment Subtotal 5,157 4,095 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-34

Table B-6. Summary of Land Required for Construction and Operations (continued) 

Segment 

Land Required for 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/

Land Required for 

Operations (acres) 1/

Segment 9 – Cedar Hill to Hemingway

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 5,229 4,916 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 120 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 563 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 663 203 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 3 3 1.5 

Portion of Cedar Hill Substation 22 18 

Segment Subtotal 6,600 5,139 

Segment 10 – Midpoint to Cedar Hill 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 1,122 1,030 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 20 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 120 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 50 15 

Off-ROW Crossings – – 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 0 – – 

Portions of Midpoint and Cedar Hill Substations 36 31 

Segment Subtotal 1,348 1,076 

Total Project 

T-Line ROW (including Off ROW Wire Pulling/ 

Splicing Sites) 29,353 27,673 

Off-ROW Multi-purpose yard 586 – 

Off-ROW Fly Yards 2,964 – 

Off-ROW Access Roads 3,744 1,146 

OPGW Regeneration Station(s) - 13 13 6.5 

Substation 532 464 

Total Project 37,192 29,290 

1/ The exact land requirements will depend on the final detailed design of the transmission line, which is influenced by 

the terrain, land use, and economics. Alignment options may also slightly increase or decrease these values. 

2/ Acreages in table are rounded to the nearest acre; columns therefore may not sum exactly. 

3/ Values are given in 0.5-acre increments because regeneration sites are typically 0.5 acre each. 

Assumptions/Notes: 

1. ROW width for 500-kV single circuit segments is 250 feet. The ROW width for 230-kV H-frame segments is 125 feet

and for 345-kV H-frame on 3A is 150 feet. The dimensions of the tower construction pads and area permanently 

occupied by towers after restoration are based on the dimensions specified in Table B-1. 

2. The multi-purpose yards will serve as field offices, reporting locations for workers, parking space for vehicles and 

equipment, sites for material storage, fabrication assembly and stations for equipment maintenance, and concrete batch

plants. 

3. Multi-purpose yards will be approximately 20 acres for 500 kV and 10 acres for 230 kV. They will be located at each 

end of a segment, and every 20 to 30 miles along the line. 

4. Fly yards will be 10 to 15 acres located approximately every 5 miles. Values in table assume helicopter construction 

for all segments. The construction contractor may choose to construct using ground-based techniques, therefore not 

utilizing fly yards. 

5. For 500-kV, wiring pulling/splicing sites will be the ROW width x 700 feet located approximately every 9,200’; for 230-

kV and 345-kV, ROW width x 400 feet located every 9,200 feet. Typically, only sites that would be off of the ROW would

be at large angle dead-ends. It is estimated that one in four sites will be off of the ROW. 

6. Refer to Table B-9 for access road mileages for each segment. 

1 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-35

1 All negotiations with landowners are conducted in good faith, and the Project’s effect on 

2 the parcel or other concerns the landowner may have will be addressed. ROWs for 

3 transmission line facilities on private lands are obtained as perpetual easements. Land 

4 for substation or regeneration stations is obtained in fee simple where located on private 

5 land. A good faith effort will be made to purchase the land and/or obtain easements on 

6 private lands through reasonable negotiations with the landowners. 

7 Chapter 1, Section 1.3.3.3 describes NERC and WECC reliability standards and 

8 capacity needs for Gateway West. To receive a rating from WECC that allows for the 

9 capacity needed to serve present and future loads within the Companies’ service areas, 

10 the Gateway West transmission lines must be located at least 1,500 feet from the 

11 nearest existing 230 kV or higher-voltage transmission lines and is being designed to be 

12 located the maximum span distance away when adjacent to longer spans. Land 

13 between ROWs that are separated to meet reliability criteria would not be encumbered 

14 with an easement but could practically be limited in land uses due to the proximity of 

15 two or more large transmission lines. 

16 3.1.3 Land Disturbance 

17 Land disturbance as described in Table B-7 is the estimated amount of land that will be 

18 disturbed during construction or required to be permanently converted to operational 

19 uses. These uses are less than the amount of land for which operational controls are 

20 required over the life of the Project as described in Table B-6. 

21 Estimates for construction disturbances are based on best professional judgment and 

22 experience with this type of project. Estimates were made of disturbance areas resulting 

23 from each construction activity involving structure placement, access roads, yards, and 

24 new and expanded substations. Sections 2.2 through 2.4 of this appendix describe 

25 typical disturbance areas for each construction activity. 

26 3.2 Transmission Line Removal (Segment 1W(c) only) 

27 3.2.1 Access for Removal 

28 In order to construct Segment 1W(c), the existing 230kV transmission line must be 

29 removed between the existing Dave Johnston Power Plant substation and the proposed 

30 Aeolus Substation. This line will be replaced in its entirety, including structures. 

31 Section 3.3, below, details the construction of the new transmission line. 

32 Existing access roads or overland travel, including the roads and trails used for 

33 construction, maintenance and inspection of the line, will be used to remove the existing 

34 line. All roads or access ways or required disturbance areas utilized for line removal 

35 work will be surveyed, cleared and staked prior to any construction. On completion of 

36 line removal work, all access or spur roads shall be removed in their entirety and in 

37 accordance with project requirements and restrictions. 

38 3.2.2 Site Preparation 

39 In general, the existing pads surrounding existing structures are sufficient to allow 

40 access for the bucket trucks and small cranes needed to remove the structures. If 

41 needed, vegetation on the existing pads may be cut or crushed to allow safe equipment 

42 access. Grading will only be used if essential for worker safety. Erosion control 

43 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-36

1 Table B-7. Summary of Land Disturbance Resulting from Construction and Operations 

Segment/Project Component 

Land Affected During 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/ 

Land Affected During 

Operations (acres) 1/

Segment 1W(a) 

One Single-Circuit Tower 230-kV Pad 229 5 

Dead-end Angle 230-kV Pulling Sites 44 – 

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 288 89 

New Access Roads 177 63 

Fly Yards – – 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 1 1 0.5 

Single Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 230-kV 13 – 

Multi-Purpose Yards 230-kV – – 

Portion of Windstar and Aeolus Substations 35 25 

Segment 1W(a) Subtotal 787 182 

Segment 1W(c) 

One Single-Circuit Tower 230-kV Pad 236 5 

Dead-end Angle 230-kV Pulling Sites 50 

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 219 74 

New Access Roads 72 25 

Fly Yards 312 – 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 0 – – 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 230-kV 14 – 

Multi-Purpose Yards 230-kV 30 – 

Heward Substation & portion of Aeolus Substation 37 30 

Segment 1W(c) Subtotal 970 134 

Segment 2 

One Single--Circuit Tower 500k-V Pad 560 22 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single--Circuit 500-kV 200 – 

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 340 105 

New Access Roads 208 73 

Fly Yards 250 – 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 1 1 0.5 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 112 – 

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 60 – 

Portion of Aeolus Substation 60 50 

Segment 2 Subtotal 1,791 250 

Segment 3 

One Single--Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 278 11 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single--Circuit 500-kV 48 

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 65 20 

New Access Roads 136 46 

Fly Yards 112 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 1 1 0.5 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 85 

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 40 

Portion of Anticline Substation 45 40 

Segment 3 Subtotal 810 118 

Segment 3A 

One Single-Circuit Tower 345-kV Pad 13 – 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 345-kV 7 – 

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 1 – 

New Access Roads 16 5 

Fly Yards 12 – 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 0 – – 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 345-kV – – 

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV – – 2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-37

Table B-7. Summary of Land Disturbance Resulting from Construction and 

Operations (continued) 

Segment/Project Component 

Land Affected During 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/ Land Affected During 

Operations (acres)

Segment 3A (continued) 

Jim Bridger 345-kV and portion of Anticline 

Substations 40 40 

Segment 3A Subtotal 89 45 

Segment 4 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 1,229 49 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 324 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 663 204 

New Access Roads 550 186 

Fly Yards 562 – 

OPGW Regeneration Station – 3 3 1.5 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 346 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 120 –

Portion of Anticline and Populus Substations 105 97 

Segment 4 Subtotal 3,902 538

Segment 5 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 353 14 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 138 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 198 61 

New Access Roads 140 49 

Fly Yards 175 –

OPGW Regeneration Station – 0 – – 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 85 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 40 –

Portion of Populus and Borah Substations 50 44 

Segment 5 Subtotal 1,179 169 

Segment 6 

Portion of Borah and Midpoint Substations 35 31 

Substation Additional Disturbance 17 17 

Segment 6 Subtotal 52 48

Segment 7 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 751 30 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 227 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 270 85 

New Access Roads 300 107 

Fly Yards 400 –

OPGW Regeneration Station – 2 2 1 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 193 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 60 –

Portion of Populus and Cedar Hill Substation 52 45 

Segment 7 Subtotal 2,255 268

Segment 8 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 825 33 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 255 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 310 96 

New Access Roads 277 106 

Fly Yards 512 –

OPGW Regeneration Station – 2 2 1 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 221 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 100 –

Portion of Midpoint Substation 15 13 

Segment 8 Subtotal 2,517 249 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-38

Table B-7. Summary of Land Disturbance Resulting from Construction and 

Operations (continued) 

Segment/Project Component 

Land Affected During 

Construction (acres) 1/, 2/ Land Affected During 

Operations (acres)

Segment 9 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 1,016 41 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 337 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 562 175 

New Access Roads 355 128 

Fly Yards 612 –

OPGW Regeneration Station – 3 3 1.5 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 270 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 120 –

Portion of Cedar Hill Substation 22 18 

Segment 9 Subtotal 3,297 364

Segment 10 

One Single-Circuit Tower 500-kV Pad 225 9 

Dead-end Angle Pulling Single-Circuit 500-kV 117 –

Existing Roads, Needing Improvement 61 19 

New Access Roads 45 17 

Fly Yards 125 –

OPGW Regeneration Station – 0 – – 

Single-Circuit Pulling-Tensioning 500-kV 46 –

Multi-Purpose Yards 500-kV 20 –

Portion of Midpoint Substation and Cedar Hill 

Substations 

36 31 

Segment 10 Subtotal 675 76 

Project Totals

Pads (including Segment 6) 5,732 237 

Deadend Pulling 1,747 –

Existing Road - Improved 2,977 928 

New Road 2,276 805 

Fly Yard 3,072 

Regeneration Site – 13 13 6.5 

Pulling-Tensioning 1,385 

Multi-purpose yard 590 

Substations 532 464 

Grand Total 18,324 2,441 

1/ The exact land requirements will depend on the final detailed design of the transmission line, which is influenced by 

the terrain, land use, and economics. Alignment options may also slightly increase or decrease these values. 

2/ Acreages in table are rounded to the nearest acre; columns therefore may not sum exactly. 

3/ Values are given in 0.5-acre increments because regeneration sites are typically 0.5 acre each. 

Assumptions/Notes: 

1. ROW width for 500-kV single circuit segments is 250 feet, for the 345-kV H-Frame segment 150 feet, and for 230-kV

H-frame segments is 125 feet. 

2. The multi-purpose yards will serve as field offices, reporting locations for workers, parking space for vehicles and 

equipment, sites for material storage, fabrication assembly and stations for equipment maintenance, and concrete batc

plants. 

3. Multi-purpose yards will be approximately 20 acres for 500-kV and 10 acres for 230-kV. They will be located at each

end of a segment, and every 20 to 30 miles along the line. 

4. Fly yards will be 10 to 15 acres located every 5 miles. Values in table assume helicopter construction throughout al

single-circuit 500-kV and 230 kV-segments. The construction contractor may choose to construct using ground-based 

techniques, therefore not utilizing fly yards. 

5. For 500- kV, wiring pulling/splicing sites will be the ROW width x 700 feet located every 9,200 feet; for 230-kV and 

345-kV, ROW width x 400 feet located every reel length or approximately 9,200 feet. Typically, only sites that would be

off of the ROW would be at large angle dead-ends. It is estimated that one in four sites will be off of the ROW. 

6. Refer to Table B-9 for access road mileages for each segment. 1 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-39

1 measures as specified in the SWPPP and Appendix Z of this POD will be employed 

2 where needed. 

3 3.2.3 Remove Conductors 

4 The next step after establishment of access and a safe work area for the lineworkers is 

5 to remove the conductors and shield wire. To remove the conductors, the line is taken 

6 out of service. Bucket trucks are generally used to hoist the workers to the wire 

7 positions to allow workers to remove the hardware holding the wires in place, and drop 

8 the wires to the ground. In some cases workers may climb the structures to accomplish 

9 this. A wire spooling machine is attached to one end of each wire after the wires are all 

10 on the ground. Each wire is wound onto reels to be hauled to one of the designated 

11 multi use yards, or to an approved offsite disposal area. 

12 Where wires to be removed cross over other energized lines, guard equipment or 

13 structures are used to prevent the wires being removed from coming in contact with the 

14 energized wires (utilizing the same process as used when installing new wires). 

15 3.2.4 Remove Structures 

16 Structure removal follows wire removal. In most cases, a 20-30T lift capacity crane 

17 attaches to the structure upper section and holds it in place while the poles are cut off 

18 near ground and the structure is laid to the ground for disassembly. In a few instances, 

19 workers in bucket trucks or climbing remove the insulators, hardware, braces and 

20 crossarms in the air and lower them to the ground, leaving the poles standing. Once all 

21 the equipment has been removed, the poles are cut off near ground and allowed to fall 

22 (or may be supported by crane and lowered to ground).If there are any guy wires and 

23 anchors they will be removed at this time as well. All materials are loaded onto trucks 

24 and hauled to a multi-purpose yard or to a preapproved disposal site. Any treated wood 

25 that is or given away to an outside party will be accompanied by a Bill of Sale and 

26 Consumer Information Sheets that describe any health and environmental risks 

27 associated with different types of treated wood (i.e. proper and improper uses). 

28 3.2.5 Site Reclamation 

29 After conductors, structures, and associated hardware have been removed, workers dig 

30 out around the base of the remaining pole section and cut off the pole below ground. 

31 The resulting holes are filled and compacted with soils that have been approved for 

32 backfill and from approved sources if not available on-site. The final step is to remove 

33 and restore work areas, pads, and other disturbed areas to a condition agreed upon by 

34 the landowner, tenant or managing agency. Appendix D of this POD, the Reclamation 

35 Plan, and Appendix Z, Mitigation Measures, contain the plans and requirements for site 

36 restoration and reclamation. 

37 3.3 Transmission Line Construction 

38 The following sections detail the transmission line construction activities and procedures 

39 for Gateway West. Construction equipment and work force requirements are described 

40 in Section 2.6. Figure B-13 illustrates the transmission line construction sequence. 

41 Substation construction is described in Section 2.4 of this appendix. Various 

42 construction activities will occur during the process, with several crews operating 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-40

1 

2 Figure B-13. Transmission Line Construction Sequence 

3 simultaneously at different locations. The proposed construction schedule is described 

4 in Section 3.6.4 of this appendix. 

5 For the entire Proposed Route, 990 miles of transmission lines and associated support 

6 structures will be constructed, including 74 miles to be reconstructed. Of this total, 

7 837.9 miles will be constructed using 500-kV structures. Approximately 147.4 miles will 

8 be constructed using 230-kV steel H-frame structures and approximately 5.1 miles will 

9 be 345-kV construction between the proposed Anticline Substation and the expansion 

10 of the existing 345-kV substation at the Jim Bridger Power Plant. 

11 3.3.1 Transmission Line System Roads 

12 Construction of the new 230-kV, 345-kV, and 500-kV transmission lines will require 

13 vehicle, truck, and crane access to each new structure site for construction crews, 

14 materials, and equipment. Similarly, construction of other Project components such as 

15 yards and substation sites will require vehicle access. 

16 Transmission line ROW access will be a combination of new access roads, 

17 improvements to existing roads, and use of existing roads as is. New access roads or 

18 improvements to existing access roads will be constructed using a bulldozer or grader, 

19 followed by a roller to compact and smooth the ground. Front-end loaders will be used 

20 to move the soil locally or off site. Typically, access to the transmission line ROW and 

21 tower sites requires a 14-foot-wide travel way for straight sections of road and a 16- to 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-41

1 20-foot-wide travel way at corners to facilitate safe movement of equipment and 

2 vehicles. Wherever possible, new access roads will be constructed within the proposed 

3 transmission line ROW, or existing roads will be used. In other cases, access roads will 

4 be required between the proposed transmission line and existing roads. Erosion control 

5 and sedimentation measures such as at-grade water bars, culverts, sediment basins, or 

6 perimeter control will be installed as required to minimize erosion during and 

7 subsequent to construction of the Project. 

8 On level terrain where underlying soils conditions are suitable, road construction may 

9 only require back-dragging a blade to remove brush to facilitate construction. In the 

10 2010 POD, we estimated the average disturbance across the entire project due to 

11 access road construction to be 16 feet wide. Upon more careful evaluation of the side 

12 slopes these roads do or will cross, we have revised that estimate to 24 feet as an 

13 average across the approximately 1,000 miles of the proposed route. 

14 This average was estimated based on the assumption that the travelway will be 14 feet 

15 wide for straight segments of the road and 16 to 20 feet wide in turns. To achieve this 

16 travelway width, a variable amount of disturbance, including cuts and fills, ditching, and 

17 other drainage will occur. The steeper the side slope, the larger the disturbance width, 

18 because the cuts (into the bank above the road) and fills (compacted material forming 

19 the support for the travelway below the road) need to be sloped away from the road to 

20 be stable, depending on the parent material and soil type crossed. Where the road 

21 curves on steeper ground to follow topography or uses switchbacks to ascend a hill, the 

22 wider travelway (16 – 20’) is required to accommodate the heavy equipment used 

23 during construction. Table B-8, below, summarizes the assumed average road widths 

24 for various side slope classes. 

25 Table B-8. Slope Class and Estimated Average Road Width 

Slope Class (% 

slope) 

Average Estimated Road 

Disturbance for 

Construction (feet) 

% of Proposed Route 

that Crosses This 

Slope Class 

Weighted Relative Road 

Width (feet) 

0-5 18 53 9 

5-10 20 20 4 

10-20 30 15 4 

>20 50 12 6 

Average 24 

26 

27 After Project construction, existing and new permanent access roads will be used by 

28 maintenance crews and vehicles for inspection and maintenance activities. New roads 

29 created to access tower sites will be revegetated but not restored to original contours to 

30 allow for emergency access to the tower location and for periodic inspection and 

31 maintenance activities. Temporary construction roads not required for future 

32 maintenance access will be reclaimed and restored to as similar to original contours as 

33 practicable after completion of Project construction. For example, access roads to 

34 yards will not be required once the yard is regraded and vegetated. Gates will be 

35 installed as required to restrict unauthorized vehicular access to the ROW. Roads 

36 retained for operations will be seeded with a grass mix and allowed to revegetate. For 

37 normal maintenance activities, an 8-foot portion of the road will be used and vehicles 

38 would drive over the vegetation. For non-routine maintenance requiring access by 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-42

1 larger vehicles, the full width of the access road may be used. Access roads will be 

2 repaired, as necessary, but not be routinely graded. Vegetation (e.g., taller shrubs and 

3 trees) that may interfere with the safe operation of equipment will be managed on a 

4 cyclical basis. 

5 Table B-9 lists the estimated miles of proposed access roads by segment based on 

6 preliminary engineering. 

Table B-9. Miles of New and Improved Access Roads1/ 7 

Segment 

New Access Roads 

Existing Access Roads to 

be Improved Totals 

Miles Acres2/ Miles Acres2/ Miles Acres2/

Segment 1W(a) 64.8 177 91.6 288 156.4 465 

Segment 1W(c) 26.1 72 76.5 219 102.6 291 

Segment 2 75.6 208 107.7 340 183.3 548 

Segment 3 48.0 136 20.7 65 68.7 201 

Segment 3A 5.3 16 0.4 <1 5.7 17 

Segment 4 192.4 550 210.7 663 403.1 1,213 

Segment 5 51.8 140 63.1 198 114.9 338 

Segment 63/ – – – – – – 

Segment 7 113.2 300 87.6 270 200.8 570 

Segment 8 112.7 277 98.7 310 211.4 587 

Segment 9 135.5 355 180.1 562 315.6 917 

Segment 10 18.5 45 20.1 61 38.6 106 

Total 844 2,276 957 2,977 1,801 5,253 

1/ Includes on- and off-ROW access roads outside the disturbance of the tower pads, pulling and tensioning sites, and 

on-ROW fly yards. 

2/ Acreages in table are rounded to the nearest acre and were calculated based on an average 26-foot width; column 

therefore may not sum exactly. 

3/ The disturbance for new or improved access roads for Segment 6 is accounted for under tower disturbance 

calculation in Table B-7.

8 3.3.2 Soil Borings 

9 At the discretion of the Companies, soil borings will be completed along the route to 

10 determine depth to bedrock and the engineering properties of the soil. Based on the 

11 soil properties, foundation designs will be completed for transmission line towers and 

12 other structures. Borings will be made with truck- or track-mounted equipment. The 

13 borings are approximately 4 inches in diameter, range from 15 to over 60 feet deep, and 

14 be backfilled with the excavated material upon completion of soil sampling. 

15 3.3.3 Multi-Purpose Yards 

16 Construction of Gateway West will begin with the establishment of multi-purpose yards 

17 (yards). Yards, about 20 acres each for 500-kV construction and 10 acres each for 230-

18 kV construction, are typically located approximately every 20 to 30 miles along or in 

19 proximity to the route. Because Segment 3A, the only portion of 345kV line, is only 5.1 

20 miles long, it will utilize one of the substations or existing yards established for 

21 Segments 3 or 4. Where feasible, yards are located near a distribution power source, 

22 where public services such as water are available, along well-improved and maintained 

23 county roads, and near or on road types that can support the amount and type of traffic 

24 needed during the construction process. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-43

1 The yards serve the following functions: 

2  Material storage yards (sites for material and equipment storage) 

3  Structure work sites (where structures to be transported to their installation sites 

4 can be partially or completely assembled in advance) 

5  Concrete batch plant locations or sites 

6  Show up yards (reporting locations for workers and parking space for vehicles) 

7  Staging yards (locations where materials from larger storage areas can be 

8 assembled for a particular task) 

9  Laydown yards 

10  Temporary use yards 

11  Temporary work areas (including but not limited to vehicle and equipment 

12 maintenance) 

13 3.3.4 Fly Yards 

14 Helicopter Fly Yards (Fly Yards) may be located approximately every 5 miles along the 

15 route where helicopter construction is planned, and occupy approximately 10 to 15 

16 acres. These yards are generally more temporary in nature than multi-purpose yards 

17 and are located along the project ROW when feasible and terrain is suited. Generally 

18 the fly yard does not require the same level of access or services as the multi-purpose 

19 yard, as the bulk of their intended use is for temporary staging, assembling, and then 

20 flying out of products or completed assemblies. However, all activities listed above for 

21 multi-purpose yards may occur in a fly yard, but at a smaller scale in comparison. 

22 When necessary, multi-purpose yards and helicopter fly yards will be fenced and their 

23 gates locked. Security guards will be stationed where needed. Yard locations will be 

24 finalized following discussion with the land management agency or negotiations with 

25 landowners. In some areas, the yard may need to be scraped by a bulldozer and a 

26 temporary layer of rock laid to provide an all-weather surface. Unless otherwise 

27 directed by the landowner or land manager, the rock will be removed from the yard 

28 upon completion of construction and the area will be restored. 

29 Table B-10 lists the frequency and estimated acreage disturbance for multi-purpose 

30 yards and helicopter fly yards by segment based on preliminary engineering. In locating 

31 yards, the preference is for relatively flat areas with easy existing access to minimize 

32 site grading and new road construction. The multi-purpose yards will be located in 

33 previously disturbed sites or in areas of minimal vegetative cover where possible. 

34 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-44

1 Table B-10. Construction Multi-purpose Yards and Helicopter Fly Yards 

Proposed Segment 

Multi-Purpose Yards Fly Yards 

Quantity 

Approximate Acreage 

Quantity

Approximate Acreage 

Per Location Total Per Location Total 

Segment 1W(a)1/ – – – – – – 

Segment 1W(c) 3 10 30 25 12.5 312 

Segment 2 3 20 60 20 12.5 250 

Segment 3 2 20 40 9 12.5 112 

Segment 3A – – – 1 12.5 12.5 

Segment 4 6 20 120 45 12.5 562 

Segment 5 2 20 40 14 12.5 175 

Segment 62/ – – – – – – 

Segment 7 3 20 60 32 12.5 400 

Segment 8 5 20 100 41 12.5 512 

Segment 9 6 20 120 49 12.5 612 

Segment 10 1 20 20 10 12.5 125 

1/ Co-located with Segment 1W(c). 

2/ Multi-purpose yard and fly yard disturbance are accounted for in the substation calculation. 

2 3.3.5 Site Preparation 

3 Individual structure sites will be cleared to install the transmission line support structures 

4 and facilitate access for future transmission line and structure maintenance. Clearing 

5 individual structure sites will be done using a bulldozer to blade the required area. At 

6 each single-circuit 500-kV structure location, a flat area approximately 250 feet by 250 

7 feet will be needed for construction laydown, tower assembly, and erection at each 

8 tower site. An area approximately 150 feet by 125 feet is required for 230-kV structures 

9 and an area 150 feet by 150 feet for 345-kV structures. This flat area provides a safe 

10 working space for placing equipment, vehicles, and materials. The work area is cleared 

11 of vegetation only to the extent necessary. 

12 Where a structure is located on steep side slopes, a flat work area for structure 

13 installation and maintenance will require cutting into the side slope and using the cut 

14 material as fill to form part of the flat work area, or making a full bench cut and 

15 sidecasting the spoil below the pad. The actual dimensions of the flat work area 

16 disturbance may vary depending on factors such as terrain and vegetation. Total 

17 disturbance, including cuts and fills or spoils, will be larger than the flat work area and 

18 varies by side slope and soil type. Table B-11, below, provides rough estimates of the 

19 range of additional disturbance where structures must be installed on steep ground. 

20 The estimates include sidecast spoil as well as the amount of area needed for the cut 

21 and fill to create the pad itself. 

22 Table B-11. Estimated Disturbance from Structure Pads by Slope Class 

Slope class (% slope) Disturbance Dimension (ft) Acres of Total Disturbance Per Pad 

0-5 250 x 250 1.4 

5-10 375 x 300 2.6 

10-20 450 x 300 3.1 

>20 600 x 350 4.8 

23 Disturbed soil will be managed during construction to limit erosion and sedimentation as 

24 specified in the SWPPP. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-45

1 After line construction, all areas not needed for normal transmission line maintenance, 

2 including fire and personnel safety clearance areas, will be graded to blend as near as 

3 possible with the natural contours, then revegetated as required. Structure pads will be 

4 revegetated but not recontoured as the entire work area may be needed for 

5 maintenance. On steep slopes, the cuts and fills will be revegetated but not recontoured 

6 as the flat work area will be retained for safe live line maintenance (see Section 4.1.3 

7 and Figures B-16 through B-18, below) and emergency response. 

8 Additional equipment may be required if solid rock is encountered at a structure 

9 location. Rock-hauling, hammering, or blasting may be required to remove the rock. 

10 Excess rock that is too large in size or volume to be spread at the individual structure 

11 sites will be hauled away and disposed of at approved landfills or at a location specified 

12 by the landowner. 

13 3.3.6 Install Structure Foundations 

14 Table B-1 lists the number of 500-kV, 230-kV, and 345-kV support structures to be 

15 installed. Note that the short interconnection between the proposed Anticline 

16 Substation and the 345-kV yard at the existing Jim Bridger Substation is separately 

17 listed as Segment 3A. 

18 H-Frame Installation 

19 Each 230-kV and each 345-kV tangent H-frame would require the poles to be directly 

20 embedded in the ground. Holes are drilled in the ground using a truck- or track21 mounted auger. The diameter of the hole excavated for embedment is typically the pole 

22 diameter plus 18 inches. The depth is typically 10 percent of the pole length plus 2 feet 

23 for 230-kV and 10 percent of the pole length plus 5 feet for 345-kV; in the case of this 

24 Project, it will be between 9 and 12 feet for 230-kV and 14 to 18 feet for 345-kV. 

25 Depending on underlying soil and rock conditions, the 345-kV H-frames may be 

26 supported by steel-reinforced concrete drilled piers. 

27 When the pole is placed in the hole, native or select backfill is used to fill the voids 

28 around the perimeter of the hole. When backfill must be imported, material is obtained 

29 from commercial sources or from areas free of noxious weed species. See Section 

30 1.1.1 of this appendix for a description of an H-frame structure and Figure B-1 for an 

31 illustration. Similarly, where solid rock is encountered, blasting (see Section 2.5.1 of 

32 this appendix) may be required. 

33 Lattice Steel Tower Foundations 

34 Each 500-kV support structure requires the installation of foundations, which are 

35 typically drilled concrete piers. Each 345-kV angle structure (and possibly each 345-kV 

36 H-frame structure) also requires the installation of foundations, which are typically drilled 

37 concrete piers. First, holes are excavated for each structure depending on the structure 

38 type - 4 holes for lattice, 3 holes for 345-kV angle structures, and 2 holes for H-frames 

39 (if necessary). The holes are drilled using truck- or track-mounted augers of various 

40 sizes depending on the diameter and depth requirements of the hole to be drilled. 

41 Table B-2 provides the dimensions of each of the foundation holes required for each 

42 structure. See Section 1.1.1 of this appendix for a description of each structure type 

43 and Figures B-2 and B-3 for structure illustrations. Prior to excavation, topsoil is 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-46

1 stripped from the area around the tower and stockpiled to prevent contamination. 

2 Excavation spoils are spread around the tower pad upon completion of the foundations. 

3 As part of final restoration, the stockpiled topsoil is spread over the excavation spoils 

4 and revegetated. Each foundation extends approximately 1 foot above the ground 

5 level. 

6 Where solid rock is encountered, blasting (see Section 2.5.1 of this appendix), rock 

7 hauling, or the use of a rock anchoring or micropile system may be required. Micropiles 

8 are high capacity, small diameter (5-inch to 12-inch) drilled and grouted in-place piles 

9 designed with steel reinforcement to resist structural loading. The rock anchoring or 

10 micropile system will be used in areas where site access is limited or adjacent 

11 structures could be damaged as a result of blasting or rock hauling activities. 

12 In environmentally sensitive areas with very soft soils, a HydroVac, which uses water 

13 pressure and a vacuum, may be used to excavate material into a storage tank. 

14 Alternatively, a temporary casing may be used during drilling to hold the excavation 

15 open, after which the casing is withdrawn as the concrete is placed in the hole. 

16 Alternatively, in areas where soil conditions preclude temporary casing withdrawal, it 

17 may be abandoned in place. The steel is cut below grade and backfilled once the 

18 foundation reveal has cured. In areas where it is not possible to operate large drilling 

19 equipment due to access or environmental constraints, hand digging may be required. 

20 Reinforced-steel anchor bolt cages are installed after excavation and prior to structure 

21 installation. These cages are designed to strengthen the structural integrity of the 

22 foundations and are assembled at the nearest multi-purpose yard and delivered to the 

23 structure site via flatbed truck or helicopter. These cages are inserted in the holes prior 

24 to pouring concrete. The excavated holes containing the reinforcing anchor bolt cages 

25 are filled with concrete (Table B-2). 

26 Typically, and because of the remote location of much of the transmission line route, 

27 concrete will be provided from portable batch plants set up approximately every 

28 25 miles along the line route in one of the multi-purpose yards. Concrete will be 

29 delivered directly to the site in concrete trucks with a capacity of up to 10 cubic yards. 

30 In the more developed areas along the route and in proximity to the substations, the 

31 construction contractor may use local concrete providers to deliver concrete to the site 

32 when economically feasible. 

33 3.3.7 Erect Support Structures 

34 The 230-kV and 345-kV H-frame structures will be framed on site. Two methods of 

35 assembly can be used to accomplish this, the first of which is to assemble the poles, 

36 braces, cross arms, hardware, and insulators on the ground. A crane is then used to 

37 set the fully framed structure by placing the poles in the excavated holes. Alternatively, 

38 aerial framing can be used by setting the poles in the ground first and assembling the 

39 braces, cross arms, hardware, and insulators in the air. A crane moves along the ROW 

40 from structure to structure site setting the structures. 

41 The 500-kV lattice steel structures are assembled on site, except where helicopter 

42 delivery is employed, as described in Section 2.5.2 of this appendix. Steel members for 

43 each structure are delivered to the site by flatbed truck. Assembly is facilitated on site 

44 by a truck-mounted crane. Subsequent to assembly, the structures are lifted onto 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-47

1 foundations using a large crane designed for erecting towers. The crane moves along 

2 the ROW from structure to structure site erecting the towers. Figure B-13 illustrates the 

3 tower erection sequence. 

4 3.3.8 String Conductors, Shield Wire, and Fiber Optic Ground Wire 

5 Conductor, shield wire, and OPGW are placed on the transmission line support 

6 structures by a process called stringing. The first step to wire stringing is to install 

7 insulators (if not already installed on the structures during ground assembly) and 

8 stringing sheaves. Stringing sheaves are pulleys that are temporarily attached to the 

9 lower portion of the insulators at each transmission line support structure to allow 

10 conductors to be pulled along the line. Figure B-14 illustrates the sequence of steps in 

11 installing conductors. 

12 

13 Figure B-14. Conductor Installation 

14 Temporary clearance structures (also called guard structures) are erected where 

15 required prior to stringing any transmission lines. The temporary clearance structures 

16 are typically vertical wood poles with cross arms and are erected at road crossings or 

17 crossings with other energized electric and communication lines to prevent contact 

18 during stringing activities. Bucket trucks may also be used to provide temporary 

19 clearance. Bucket trucks are trucks fitted with a hinged arm ending in an enclosed 

20 platform called a bucket, which can be raised to let the worker in the bucket service 

21 portions of the transmission structure as well as the insulators and conductors without 

22 climbing the structure. 

23 Once the stringing sheaves and temporary clearance structures are in place, the initial 

24 stringing operation commences with the pulling of a lighter weight sock line through the 

25 sheaves along the same path the transmission line follows. Typically the sock line is 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-48

1 pulled in via helicopter. The sock line is attached to the hard line, which follows the 

2 sock line as it is pulled through the sheaves. The hard line is then attached to the 

3 conductor, shield wire, or OPGW to pull them through the sheaves into their final 

4 location. Pulling the lines may be accomplished by attaching them to a specialized wire 

5 stringing vehicle. Following the initial stringing operation, pulling and tensioning the line 

6 is required to achieve the correct sagging of the transmission lines between support 

7 structures. 

8 Pulling and tensioning sites for 500-kV construction are required approximately every 3 

9 miles along the ROW and are approximately 4 acres each to accommodate required 

10 equipment. Pulling and tensioning sites for 230-kV and 345-kV construction are 

11 required for each reel length (9,250 feet or approximately every 2 miles) along the ROW 

12 and are approximately 1.2 acres each to accommodate required equipment. Equipment 

13 at sites required for pulling and tensioning activities includes tractors and trailers with 

14 spooled reels that hold the conductors and trucks with the tensioning equipment. To the 

15 extent practicable, pulling and tensioning sites are located within the ROW. Depending 

16 on topography, minor grading may be required at some sites to create level pads for 

17 equipment. Finally, the tension and sag of conductors and wires are fine-tuned, 

18 stringing sheaves are removed, and the conductors are permanently attached to the 

19 insulators at the support structures. 

20 At the tangent and small angle structures, the conductors are attached to the insulators 

21 using clamps to “suspend” the conductors from the bottom of the insulators. At the 

22 larger angle dead-end structures, the conductors cannot be pulled through and so are 

23 cut and attached to the insulator assemblies at the structure “dead ending” the 

24 conductors. There are two primary methods to attach the conductor to the insulator 

25 assembly at the dead-end structure. The first method, hydraulic compression fittings, 

26 uses a large press and pump that closes a metal clamp or sleeve onto the conductor. 

27 This method requires heavy equipment and is time consuming. The second method, 

28 implosive fittings, uses explosives to compress the metal together. Implosive fittings do 

29 not require heavy equipment, but do create noise similar to a gunshot when the primer 

30 is struck. Implosive sleeves may be set off either one at a time or in groups. The 

31 implosive type sleeve is faster to install and results in a secure connection between the 

32 conductor and the sleeve. Implosive sleeves are planned for the Project. 

33 The 500-kV and 345-kV single-circuit lines use a three conductor bundle for each 

34 phase. At each single-circuit 500-kV or 345-kV dead-end structure, 18 implosive dead35 end sleeves (six per phase, one for each of the three subconductors on each of the 

36 three phases, and on each side of the structure) will be required. Additionally, 18 

37 compression or implosive sleeves will be required to fabricate and install the jumpers 

38 that connect the conductors from one side of the dead-end structure to the other, for a 

39 total of 36 sleeves for each single-circuit dead-end structure. 

40 The 230-kV single-circuit lines use a two-conductor bundle for each phase. Each 230-

41 kV dead-end structure requires 12 implosive or compression type sleeves to dead-end 

42 the conductors and 12 sleeves to fabricate the jumpers, for a total of 24 sleeves at each 

43 dead-end structure. For the overall Project, approximately 16,000 to 18,000 

44 compression or implosive fittings will be used. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-49

1 3.3.9 Cleanup and Site Reclamation 

2 Construction sites, yards, and access roads will be kept in an orderly condition 

3 throughout the construction period. Approved enclosed refuse containers will be used 

4 throughout the Project. Refuse and trash will be removed from the sites and disposed 

5 of in an approved manner. Oils or chemicals will be hauled to a disposal facility 

6 authorized to accept such materials. Open burning of construction trash will not be 

7 allowed. 

8 Disturbed areas not required for access roads and maintenance areas around 

9 structures will be restored and revegetated, as required by the property owner or land 

10 management agency. Service roads will be decompacted and the topsoil replaced. 

11 The road prism will not be restored to original contours so that a stable road base is 

12 present if equipment is needed to access a tower during operation. The landowner, 

13 land-management agency, or local Natural Resources Conservation Service will be 

14 consulted regarding the appropriate seed mix and rate to revegetate the road surface. 

15 Vegetation on an 8-foot width of road surface may be periodically managed to allow 

16 equipment travel if necessary. Temporary culverts will be removed. Drivable at-grade 

17 waterbars will be installed where needed with frequency proportional to road slope to 

18 prevent erosion of the roadbed. Applicable agency BMPs and unit management plan 

19 requirements will be implemented. All practical means will be applied to restore the 

20 land outside the minimum areas needed for safe operation to its original contour and to 

21 restore natural drainage patterns along the ROW. 

22 3.4 Communication System 

23 OPGW for the communication system will be installed at the same time as the 

24 conductors on each of the transmission line structures. It will be spliced and tensioned 

25 in the same way. 

26 3.4.1 Regeneration Stations 

27 Similar to the substations, the selected area is graded, vegetation is removed, and a 

28 layer of crushed rock is installed. Typically, a 12-foot by 32-foot by 9-foot tall building or 

29 equipment shelter (metal or concrete) is constructed on the site. An emergency 

30 generator with a liquid petroleum gas fuel tank is installed at the site inside the fenced 

31 area. Two diverse cable routes (aerial and/or buried) from the transmission ROW to the 

32 equipment shelter are installed. 

33 3.4.2 Access Road 

34 Regeneration station roads are constructed using a bulldozer or grader, followed by a 

35 roller to compact and smooth the ground. Front-end loaders are used to move the soil 

36 locally or off site. Either gravel or asphalt is applied to the prepared base layer for the 

37 access road into all regeneration stations. 

38 3.5 Substation Construction 

39 There will be substation construction activities at 12 locations for the Project. A 

40 summary of construction equipment to be used at each substation is included in Section 

41 2.6 of this appendix. The proposed Heward, Aeolus, Anticline, and Cedar Hill 

42 Substations are needed to electrically connect the new transmission line segments. In 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-50

1 addition, expansion of the substation yards at the existing Windstar, Jim Bridger (345-

2 kV yard), Populus, Borah, and Midpoint Substations would be required. Additional work 

3 within the existing substation yard perimeter would be needed at Dave Johnston, 

4 Shirley Basin, and Hemingway Substations. 

5 3.5.1 Substation Roads 

6 Substation roads are constructed using a bulldozer or grader, followed by a roller to 

7 compact and smooth the ground. Front-end loaders are used to move the soil locally or 

8 offsite. Either gravel or asphalt is applied to the prepared base layer. 

9 3.5.2 Soil Boring 

10 Typically, soil borings are made on a 600-foot grid spacing within the substation, 

11 particularly at the approximate location of large structures and equipment such as 

12 transmission line dead ends and transformers, to determine the engineering properties 

13 of the soil. Borings are made with truck- or track-mounted equipment. The borings are 

14 approximately 4 inches in diameter, range from 15 to over 60 feet deep, and are 

15 backfilled with the excavated material upon completion of soil sampling. 

16 3.5.3 Clearing and Grading 

17 Clearing of all vegetation is required for the entire substation area, including a distance 

18 of about 10 feet outside the fence. This is required for personnel safety due to 

19 grounding concerns and because of lower clearances to energized conductors within 

20 the substations as compared to transmission lines. These lower clearances are allowed 

21 by the NESC because the entire substation is fenced. 

22 An insulating layer on the surface of the substation is required to protect personnel from 

23 high currents and voltages during electrical fault conditions. Typically, vegetation is 

24 removed and a 4- to 6-inch layer of crushed rock is applied to the finished surface of the 

25 substation. Then the substation is usually treated with a soil sterilizer to prevent 

26 vegetation growth because the vegetation would degrade the insulating qualities of the 

27 crushed rock. The entire substation area will be graded essentially flat, with just enough 

28 slope to provide for runoff of precipitation. The substation is graded to use existing 

29 drainage patterns to the extent possible. In some cases, drainage structures, such as 

30 ditches or culverts, may be required. Clearing and grading material will be disposed of 

31 in compliance with local ordinances. Material from off site is obtained at existing borrow 

32 or commercial sites and is trucked to the substation using existing roads and the 

33 substation access road. 

34 3.5.4 Multi-Purpose Yards 

35 Construction multi-purpose yards may be located outside the substation-fenced area 

36 near the substation. These yards may be part of the substation property or leased by 

37 the contractor. After construction is completed, all debris and unused materials will be 

38 removed and the yards returned to preconstruction conditions by the construction 

39 contractor. 

40 3.5.5 Grounding 

41 A grounding system is required in each substation for detection of faults and for 

42 personnel safety. The grounding system typically consists of buried copper conductor 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-51

1 arranged in a grid system and driven ground rods, typically 8 to 10 feet long. The 

2 ground rods and any equipment and structures are connected to the grounding 

3 conductor. The amount of conductor and length and number of ground rods required 

4 are calculated based on fault current and soil characteristics. 

5 3.5.6 Fencing 

6 Security fencing is installed around the entire perimeter of each new or expanded 

7 substation to protect sensitive equipment and prevent accidental contact with energized 

8 conductors by third parties. This 7-foot-high fence is constructed of chain link with steel 

9 posts. One foot of barbed wire or other similar material is installed on top of the chain 

10 link yielding a total fence height of 8 feet. Locked gates are installed at appropriate 

11 locations for authorized vehicle and personnel access. 

12 3.5.7 Foundation Installation 

13 Foundations for supporting structures are of two types—spread footings or drilled piers. 

14 Spread footings are placed by excavating the foundation area, placing forms and 

15 reinforcing steel and anchor bolts, and pouring concrete into the forms. After the 

16 foundation has been poured, the forms are removed, and the surface of the foundation 

17 dressed. Pier foundations are placed in a hole generally made by a track- or truck18 mounted auger. Reinforcing steel and anchor bolts are placed into the hole using a 

19 track- or truck-mounted crane. The portion of the foundation above ground is formed. 

20 The portion below ground uses the undisturbed earth of the augered hole as the form. 

21 After the foundation has been poured, the forms are removed, the excavation backfilled, 

22 and the surface of the foundation dressed. 

23 Equipment foundations for circuit breakers and transformers will be slab-on-grade type. 

24 These foundations are placed by excavating the foundation area; placing forms, 

25 reinforcing steel, and anchor bolts (if required); and placing concrete into the forms. 

26 After the foundations have been poured, the forms are removed, and the surface of the 

27 foundation dressed. Where necessary, provision is made in the design of the 

28 foundations to mitigate potential problems due to frost. Reinforcing steel and anchor 

29 bolts are transported to each site by truck, either as a prefabricated cage or loose 

30 pieces, which is then fabricated into cages on the site. Concrete is hauled to the site in 

31 concrete trucks. Excavated material is spread at the site or disposed of in accordance 

32 with local ordinances. Structures and equipment are attached to the foundations by 

33 means of threaded anchor bolts embedded in the concrete. Some equipment such as 

34 transformers and reactors may not require anchor bolts. 

35 3.5.8 Oil Containment 

36 Some types of electrical equipment, such as transformers and some types of reactors 

37 and circuit breakers, are filled with an insulating mineral oil. Containment structures are 

38 required to prevent equipment oil from getting into the ground or waterbodies in the 

39 event of a rupture or leak. These structures take many forms depending on site 

40 requirements, environmental conditions, and regulatory restrictions. The simplest type 

41 of oil containment is a pit, of a calculated capacity, under the oil-filled equipment that 

42 has an oil-impervious liner. The pit is filled with rock to grade level. In case of an oil 

43 leak or rupture, the oil captured in the containment pit is pumped into tanks or barrels 

44 and transported to a disposal facility. If required, more elaborate oil containment 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-52

1 systems can be installed. This may take the form of an on- or off-site storage tank 

2 and/or oil-water separator equipment depending on site requirements. 

3 3.5.9 Structure and Equipment Installation 

4 Supporting steel structures are erected on concrete foundations as noted above. These 

5 are set with a track- or truck-mounted crane and attached to the foundation anchor bolts 

6 by means of a steel base plate. These structures are used to support the energized 

7 conductors and certain types of equipment. This equipment is lifted onto the structure 

8 by means of a truck-mounted crane and bolted to the structures; electrical connections 

9 are then made. Some equipment, such as transformers, reactors, and circuit breakers, 

10 are mounted directly to the foundations without supporting structures. These are set in 

11 place by means of a truck-mounted crane. Some of this equipment requires assembly 

12 and testing on the pad. Electrical connections to the equipment are then made. 

13 3.5.10 Control Building Construction 

14 One or more control buildings are required at each substation to house protective 

15 relays, control devices, battery banks for primary control power, and remote monitoring 

16 equipment. The size and construction of the building depends on individual substation 

17 requirements. Typically, the control building is constructed of concrete block, pre18 engineered metal sheathed, or composite surfaced materials. Once the control house 

19 is erected, equipment is mounted and wired inside. Typically an emergency generator 

20 will be located near the control house within the substation fenced area. 

21 3.5.11 Conductor Installation 

22 The two main types of high voltage conductors used in substations are tubular 

23 aluminum for rigid bus sections and/or stranded aluminum conductor for strain bus and 

24 connections to equipment. Rigid bus is be a minimum of 4 inches in diameter for this 

25 Project and is supported on porcelain or polymer insulators on steel supports. The bus 

26 sections are welded together and attached to special fittings for connection to 

27 equipment. Stranded aluminum conductors are used as flexible connectors between 

28 the rigid bus and the station equipment. 

29 3.5.12 Conduit and Control Cable Installation 

30 Most substation equipment requires low-voltage connections to protect relaying and 

31 control circuits. These circuits allow metering, protective functions, and control (both 

32 remote and local) of the power system. Connections are made from the control building 

33 to the equipment through multi-conductor control cables installed in conduits and/or pre34 cast concrete cable trench system. 

35 3.5.13 Construction Cleanup and Landscaping 

36 The cleanup operation will be performed after construction activities are completed. All 

37 waste and scrap material will be removed from the site and deposited in local permitted 

38 landfills in accordance with local ordinances. Ruts and holes outside the substation 

39 fence due to construction activities will be regraded. Revegetation and restoration will 

40 be conducted as required. Landscaping required by the permitting agency will use 

41 drought-tolerant plant materials 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-53

1 3.6 Special Construction Techniques 

2 3.6.1 Blasting 

3 As described in Section 2.2.5 of this appendix, 500-kV lattice tower foundations are 

4 normally installed using drilled shafts or piers and 230-kV and 345-kV H-frame 

5 structures are normally directly embedded. If hard rock is encountered within the 

6 planned drilling depth, blasting may be required to loosen or fracture the rock in order to 

7 reach the required depth to install the structure foundations. Areas where blasting will 

8 likely occur have been identified based on the geologic setting of the proposed 

9 alignment. Table B-12 summarizes the shallow bed rock conditions within each 

10 segment. More precise locations where blasting is expected will be identified based on 

11 a site-specific geotechnical study carried out as part of detailed design. 

12 Table B-12. Summary of Shallow Bedrock by Segment 

Segment Number 

Depth to Bedrock (feet) by Percent of Analysis Area 

1 to 4 4 to 8 8 to 12 

Total Percent of 

Analysis Area 

1 7 <1 14 21 

2 – – – – 

3 66 6 – 72 

4 40 1 3 44 

5 8 25 – 33 

6 47 29 – 75 

7 15 23 8 46 

8 16 51 14 81 

9 42 21 15 78 

10 20 2 2 24 

13 The construction contractor will be required to prepare an overall Blasting Plan as 

14 outlined in Appendix M of the POD for the Project, subject to the approval of the 

15 Companies. The Blasting Plan would detail the contractor’s proposals for compliance 

16 with the Companies’ blasting specifications and details the general concepts proposed 

17 to achieve the desired excavations using individual shot plans. In addition, the plan will 

18 address proposed methods for controlling fly rock, for blasting warnings, and for use of 

19 non-electrical blasting systems. The contractor will be required to provide data to 

20 support the adequacy of the proposed efforts regarding the safety of structures and 

21 slopes and to ensure that an adequate foundation is obtained. When utilized, blasting 

22 will take place between sunrise and sunset. 

23 The shot plans will detail, including sketches, the drilling and blasting procedures; the 

24 number, location, diameter, and inclination of drill holes; the amount, type, and 

25 distribution of explosive per hole and delay; and pounds of explosive per square foot for 

26 presplitting and smooth blasting. The contractor would be required to maintain 

27 explosives logs. 

28 Blasting near buildings, structures, and other facilities susceptible to vibration or air 

29 blast damage will be carefully planned by the contractor and the Companies and 

30 controlled to eliminate the possibility of damage to such facilities and structures. The 

31 Blasting Plan will include provisions for control to eliminate vibration, fly rock, and air 

32 blast damage. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-54

1 Blasting will be very brief in duration (milliseconds), and the noise dissipates with 

2 distance. Blasting produces less noise and vibration than comparable non-blasting 

3 methods to remove hard rock. Non-blasting methods include track drill rigs, rock 

4 breakers, jack hammers, rotary percussion drills, core barrels, and rotary rock drills with 

5 rock bits, each of which takes substantially longer to excavate approximately the same 

6 amount of rock as blasting. 

7 No readily available data were found to evaluate depth to bedrock at depths greater than 

8 12 feet. In 2010, drilling began in some areas of Segments 1 through 4 to support 

9 geotechnical evaluations for transmission line structures. The drilling was conducted on 

10 public land and private land where landowner permission was obtained. The drilling 

11 data indicate that several borings contained bedrock at depths less than 20 feet. 

12 Therefore, it is assumed that shallow bedrock could be encountered in any of the 

13 segments. As a conservative measure, it was assumed that all shallow bedrock that will 

14 need to be removed will require blasting. 

15 Due to the lack of depth to bedrock data deeper than 12 feet, the amount of shallow 

16 bedrock presented in Table B-9 likely underestimates the amount of shallow bedrock 

17 that will be intercepted during construction. 

18 3.6.2 Helicopter Use 

19 Access roads are required to each tower site for construction and for operation and 

20 maintenance activities. Helicopters may be used to support these activities. Project 

21 construction activities potentially facilitated by helicopters may include delivery of 

22 construction laborers, equipment, and materials to structure sites; structure placement; 

23 hardware installation; and wire stringing operations. Helicopters may also be used to 

24 support the administration and management of the Project by the Companies. The use 

25 of helicopter construction methods for this Project will not change the length of the 

26 access road system required for operating the Project because vehicle access is 

27 required to each tower site regardless of the construction method employed. 

28 In some cases it may be desirable to employ heavy lift helicopters in the single-circuit 

500-kV tower erection process7 29 . To allow the construction contractor flexibility in what 

30 construction methods can be used, the construction specification will be written to allow 

31 the contractor the option of using ground-based or helicopter construction methods, or a 

32 combination thereof. Use of a helicopter for structure erection may be driven by various 

33 factors, including access to the structure locations, construction schedule, and/or 

34 construction economics. 

35 When helicopter construction methods are employed, helicopter construction activities 

36 are based at a fly yard. The fly yards will be sited at locations to permit a maximum fly 

37 time of 4 to 8 minutes to reach structure locations, typically at about 5-mile intervals. 

38 Fly yards are used for material storage and erection of structure sections prior to 

39 transport to the final structure locations for installation. Additionally, fueling trucks, 

40 maintenance trucks, and operations crews are based in the fly yards. Appropriate dust 

41 control measures will be implemented at these fly yard locations as well as the locations 

42 where helicopters are used along the route. 

 

7

 For the Gateway West Project, a typical 500-kV single-circuit tangent tower weighs approximately 46,000 pounds. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-55

1 Prior to installation, each tower structure is assembled in multiple sections at the fly 

2 yard. Tower sections or components are assembled by weight based on the lifting 

3 capacity of the helicopter in use. The lift capacity of helicopters is dependent on the 

4 elevation of the fly yard, the tower site, and the intervening terrain. The heavy lift 

5 helicopters that could be used to erect the single-circuit 500-kV tower sections are able 

6 to lift a maximum of 15,000 to 20,000 pounds per flight, depending on elevation. 

7 After assembly at the fly yard, the tower sections are attached by cables from the 

8 helicopter crane to the top four corners of the structure section and airlifted to the 

9 structure location. Upon arrival at the structure location, the section is placed directly on 

10 to the foundation or atop the previous structure section. Guide brackets attached on top 

11 of each section will assist in aligning the stacked sections. Once aligned correctly, line 

12 crews climb the structures to bolt the sections together permanently. 

13 It should be noted that the fly yard locations provided are considered approximate and 

14 subject to change, additions, or deletions upon acquisition of an installation contractor 

15 prior to the beginning of construction. Upon completion of field review, a final 

16 determination is made on the necessity of certain fly yards and the respective locations 

17 that provide the most efficient, economic, safest, and least impact use of the fly yards 

18 that are needed. 

19 3.6.3 Water Use 

20 Construction of the transmission lines and substations requires water. Major water uses 

21 are for transmission line structure and substation foundations, and dust control during 

22 ROW and substation grading and site work. A minor use of water during construction 

23 will include the establishment of substation landscaping where required. Table B-13 

24 lists the amount of water required for the Project. 

25 Transmission lines use water for two primary purposes: foundation construction and 

26 ROW dust control. The required water will be procured from municipal sources, from 

27 commercial sources, or under a temporary water use agreement with landowners 

28 holding existing water rights. No new water rights will be required. In the construction 

29 of foundations, water is transported to the batch plant site where it will be used to 

30 produce concrete. From the batch plant, the wet concrete is transported to the structure 

31 site in concrete trucks for use in foundation installation (refer to Section 2.2.4 of this 

32 appendix for more details on foundation installation). 

33 Construction of the transmission lines and related facilities generates a temporary 

34 increase in fugitive dust. If the level of fugitive dust is too high in specific Project areas, 

35 as determined in cooperation with the landowner or agency, water will be applied to 

36 disturbed areas to minimize dust. The construction contractor will be required to develop 

37 fugitive dust plan(s) as outlined in Appendix N of the POD. 

38 Water usage for substation construction is primarily for dust control during site 

39 preparation work. During this period, construction equipment will be cutting, moving, 

40 and compacting the subgrade surface. As a result, water trucks patrolling the site to 

41 control dust will make up to one pass per hour over the station site. Once site 

42 preparation work is complete, concrete for the placement of foundations becomes the 

43 largest user of water and dust control becomes minimal. 

44 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-56

1 Table B-13. Estimated Water Usage by Component, Segment, and Activity 

Transmission 

Line Segments 

Total 

Miles 

No of 

Structures1/

Foundation Gallons 

per Segment2/

Dust 

Control 

Gallons per 

Segment3/

Total Gallons per 

Segment 

1W(a) 73.8 531 – 1,726,656 1,726,656 

1W(c) 73.6 547 – 1,561,498 1,561,498 

2 91.9 390 1,174,149 1,553,990 2,728,139 

3 45.9 194 717,535 949,660.8 1,667,196 

3A 5.1 25 35,400 121,700 157,100 

4 197.6 856 2,532,644 3,351,965 5,884,609 

5 55.7 246 694,846 919,632 1,614,478 

6 0.5 10 28,361 37,536 65,897 

7 118.2 523 1,514,481 2,004,422 3,518,904 

8 131.5 575 1,636,434 2,165,827 3,802,261 

9 162.2 708 2,005,128 2,653,795 4,658,923 

10 34.4 157 439,597 581,808 1,021,405 

Total Transmission Line Water Usage (million gallons = MG) 28.4 

Substations 

Acres of 

Construction 

Disturbance 

Gallons for 

Concrete 

Gallons for 

Grading/Site Work/Dust 

Control3/

Gallons for 

Substation 

Landscaping 

Total Gallons per 

Substation 

Windstar 

Substation 

5 9,200 1,703,196 – 1,712,396 

Dave Johnston 

Substation 

– – – – – 

Heward 

Substation 

7 5,400 993,531 – 998,931 

Shirley Basin 

Substation 

- - - - - 

Aeolus 

Substation 

120 130,000 24,128,610 – 24,258,610 

Anticline 

Substation 

150 103,000 19,160,955 – 19,263,955 

Jim Bridger 345-

kV Substation 

10 7,700 1,419,330 – 1,427,030 

Populus 

Substation 

90 69,000 12,773,970 – 12,842,970 

Borah Substation 40 34,000 5,677,320 – 5,711,320 

Midpoint 44 34,000 5,677,320 – 5,711,320 

Cedar Hill 

Substation 

65 39,000 7,096,650 – 7,135,650 

Hemingway 

Substation 

– – – – – 

Total Substation Water Usage (MG) 79.1 

Regeneration 

Sites Number 

Gallons 

for all 

Activities 

Total Gallons 

Regen Sites 

Sites 13 800 10,400 

Total Project (MG) 107.5 

1/ Water usage per structure is used to make concrete at the batch plant site. 

2/ All 230-kV structures will be directly embedded. Concrete foundations are not required; therefore, no water is 

required. 

3/ The amount of water used for dust control varies significantly based on many conditions. Estimates are based on 

reasonable construction experience.
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-57

1 Once site grading is complete, the balance of the substation construction work will be 

2 performed on bare subgrade soil or subgrade with a thin layer of rock. Fire risk is 

3 minimal due to the bare ground or rock surface and will be contained within the confines 

4 of station fenced area. 

5 3.7 Construction Elements 

6 3.7.1 Construction Workforce 

7 The proposed Project will be constructed primarily by contract personnel, with the 

8 Companies responsible for Project administration and inspection. The construction 

9 workforce will consist of laborers, craftsmen, supervisory personnel, support personnel, 

10 and construction management personnel who will perform the construction tasks. 

Estimated construction workforce requirements are summarized by EPC8 11 contract in 

12 Figure B-15. These projections were developed for the various Project components by 

13 the Companies’ transmission engineering contractor using project planning computer 

14 software. Overall, Phase 1 Project construction is expected to occur between June 

15 2015 and December 2018, with multiple contractors working concurrently on the 

16 separate line segments and substations of Gateway West in order to meet the planned 

17 in-services dates. The first phase will extend from Windstar to Populus, and the second 

18 phase will extend from Populus to Hemingway, with the last segment being complete by 

19 the end of 2021. 

20 The Companies’ proposed schedule identifies general construction timeframes by 

21 segment and substation, generally 4 to 5 years (see Table B-20). Construction times by 

22 segment are, however, expected to range from about 8 months to 27 months; similarly, 

23 substation construction times range from 6 to 24 months. This construction will take 

24 place within the broader timeframes identified in Table B-20, but the exact timing is 

25 unknown. The combined labor requirements by EPC shown in Figure B-15 are, 

26 therefore, based on a representative Project schedule that is used in the EIS for the 

27 purposes of analysis. 

28 Project-wide, the Project workforce will reach a peak of 745 workers in weeks 58 and 

29 59. The construction personnel peak on site in any line segment will be when the wire 

30 stringing operations begin while several other operations are occurring at the same 

31 time, which will likely include excavating holes, installing foundations (500-kV), hauling 

32 materials, assembling structures, and erecting/setting structures. 

33 With respect to each substation, installation of the ground grid, installation of the conduit 

34 and cable trench system, assembly and erection of steel structures, construction of the 

35 control building, and installation of major equipment will start when the foundations are 

36 50 percent complete and will overlap with each other, resulting in the highest 

37 concentration of the work force on site. 

 

8

 EPC contract means that the final engineering, all or some of the procurement, and the construction are performed 

by one contractor. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-58

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

1 10 19 28 37 46 55 64 73 82 91 100 109 118 127 136 145 154 163 172 181 190 199 208 217 226 235 244 253 262 271 280

Week

Number of Jobs

EPC#1 EPC#2 EPC#3 1 

2 Figure B-15. Total Projected Labor Force by EPC Analysis Area and Week 

3 

4 The substation work is estimated to take between 40 and 60 personnel at each site. 

5 Site grading requires a small number of people including a surveyor, heavy equipment 

6 operators, foreman, and construction management personnel. Each station requires 

7 numerous concrete crews in order to complete the below grade construction and 

8 concrete placement on schedule. Concrete will be provided by a batch plant producing 

9 approximately 160 cubic yards per day delivered in 8 cubic yard trucks. Other below10 grade crews will be needed to install conduit, cable trench, and ground mat material. 

11 The below-grade crews will be on site overlapping the schedule of the concrete crew. 

12 Several three-person crews working with boom trucks and bucket trucks will erect the 

13 steel and install the physical equipment in the yard. Considering the size of the 

14 substation expansions, this requires approximately three fully equipped crews per 

15 station. Electrical installation will be handled by 20 people arranged into two-person 

16 teams alternating between indoor and outdoor activity. Construction will generally occur 

17 between 7 a.m. and 7 p.m., Monday through Saturday. Additional hours may be 

18 necessary to make up schedule deficiencies or to complete critical construction 

19 activities. 

20 3.7.2 Construction Equipment and Traffic 

21 Equipment required for construction of the Gateway West transmission lines and 

22 substations will include, but is not limited to, that listed in Tables B-14 through B-17. 

23 These tables also include the anticipated daily duration of equipment use for each 

24 segment for each type. Table B-18 provides an estimate of the average and peak 

25 construction traffic during the construction period. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components 

January 2013 

B-59 

1 Table B-14. Transmission Line Construction Equipment Requirements – Segments 1–4 

Equipment 

Segment 1W(a) Segment 1W(c) Segment 2 Segment 3 and 3

Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. hrs/ day

days/ 

wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. hrs/ day

da

w

Pickup 10 8 6 10 8 6 37 8 6 37 8 Bulldozer 3 4 6 3 4 6 6 4 6 6 4 Motor Grader 2 4 6 2 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 Water Truck 2 6 6 2 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 Hole Digger 2 8 6 2 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 Truck (2-ton) 3 5 6 3 5 6 5 5 6 5 5 Concrete Truck 0 6 6 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Carry All 12 6 6 12 6 6 26 6 6 26 6 Hydro Crane 0 7 6 0 7 6 1 7 6 1 7 Crane 7 7 6 7 7 6 22 7 6 22 7 Wagon Drill 0 5 6 0 5 6 1 5 6 1 5 Steel Haul Truck 2 7 6 2 7 6 4 7 6 4 7 Fork Lift 3 6 6 3 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 Wire Reel Trailer 6 7 6 6 7 6 12 7 6 12 7 Diesel Tractor 5 5 6 5 5 6 12 5 6 12 5 Boom Truck (5-ton) 3 6 6 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Splicing Truck 1 3 6 1 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 3-Drum Puller 2 4 6 2 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 Single Drum Puller 1 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 Tensioner 1 4 6 1 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 Sagging Dozer 2 3 6 2 3 6 4 3 6 4 3 Static Wire Reel Trailer 2 5 6 2 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 Dump Truck 2 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 Loader 3 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 Light Helicopter 1 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 Heavy Helicopter 0 6 6 0 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components 

January 2013 

B-60 

1 Table B-15. Transmission Line Construction Equipment Requirements – Segments 5-10 

Equipment 

Segment 5 Segment 61/ Segment 7 Segment 8 Segm

Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

days

/ wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

days

/ wk Qty.

hr

da

Pickup 30 8 6 10 8 6 30 8 6 30 8 6 30 8 Bulldozer 6 4 6 2 4 6 6 4 6 6 4 6 6 4 Motor Grader 4 4 6 2 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 Water Truck 3 6 6 1 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 Hole Digger 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 6 3 8 Truck (2-ton) 4 5 6 2 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 Concrete Truck 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Carry All 17 6 6 4 6 6 17 6 6 17 6 6 17 6 Hydro Crane 1 7 6 1 7 6 1 7 6 1 7 6 1 7 Crane 16 7 6 2 7 6 16 7 6 16 7 6 16 7 Wagon Drill 1 5 6 1 5 6 1 5 6 1 5 6 1 5 Steel Haul Truck 4 7 6 4 7 6 4 7 6 4 7 6 4 7 Fork Lift 5 6 6 3 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 Wire Reel Trailer 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 6 6 7 Diesel Tractor 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 6 6 5 Boom Truck (5-ton) 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 Splicing Truck 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 3-Drum Puller 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 Single Drum Puller 1 3 6 1 3 6 1 3 6 1 3 6 1 3 Tensioner 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 Sagging Dozer 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 3 Static Wire Reel Trailer 

2 5 6 2 5 6 2 5 6 2 5 6 2 5 

Dump Truck 3 4 6 1 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 Loader 3 4 6 1 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 6 3 4 

Light Helicopter 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 Heavy Helicopter 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6 1 6 1/ Construction work will involve approximately five transmission line structures at each end of Segment 6 to tie into new substation positions

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components 

January 2013 

B-61 

1 Table B-16. Substation Equipment Requirements – Segments 1–4 

Equipment 

Windstar Dave Johnston Heward Shirley Basin Ae

Qty

. 

hrs/ 

day 

day

s/w

k Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days

/ wk Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. 

Below Grade Auger 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 10 Backhoe 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 Front Loader 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Ditch Witch 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 Concrete Truck 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 10 Water Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Dump Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Trailer 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 Crew Truck/Car 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 Hauler 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Skid Steer Loader 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Batch Plant 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Drill Rig 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Truck with Trailer 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 Compressor 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 Construction Fork 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 980 Loader 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Vibrating Roller 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Inspection Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Above Grade Crane 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 Bucket Truck 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 Boom Truck 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 Fork Lift 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components 

January 2013 

B-62 

1 Table B-17. Substation Equipment Requirements – Segments 5–10 

Equipment 

Jim Bridger 345-

kV Yard Populus Borah Cedar Hill Midpoi

Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty. 

hrs/ 

day 

days/ 

wk Qty.

hrs/ 

day 

Below Grade Auger 2 10 6 10 10 6 10 10 6 20 10 6 10 10 Backhoe 1 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 10 6 2 10 Front Loader 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 Ditch Witch 1 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 10 6 2 10 Concrete Truck 2 10 6 10 10 6 10 10 6 20 10 6 10 10 Water Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 Dump Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 4 10 6 1 10 Trailer 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 Crew Truck/Car 2 10 6 4 10 6 4 10 6 8 10 6 4 10 Hauler 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 Skid Steer Loader 

1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 

Batch Plant 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 Drill Rig 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 Truck with Trailer 2 10 6 4 10 6 4 10 6 4 10 6 4 10 Compressor 1 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 10 6 2 10 Construction Fork 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 980 Loader 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 Vibrating Roller 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 Inspection Truck 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 Above Grade Crane 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 Bucket Truck 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 4 10 6 2 10 Boom Truck 2 10 6 2 10 6 2 10 6 3 10 6 2 10 Fork Lift 1 10 6 1 10 6 1 10 6 2 10 6 1 10 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-63

1 Table B-18. Average and Peak Construction Traffic 

Vehicle Type Average Daily Round Trips Peak Daily Round Trips 

Segment 1W(a) 

Construction Workers 13 20 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 7 11 

Water Trucks 2 4 

Total 24 39 

Segment 1W(c) 

Construction Workers 13 20 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 7 11 

Water Trucks 2 4 

Total 24 39 

Segment 2 

Construction Workers 35 50 

Delivery 5 8 

Heavy Trucks 18 27 

Water Trucks 5 8 

Total 63 93 

Segment 3 

Construction Workers 35 50 

Delivery 5 8 

Heavy Trucks 18 27 

Water Trucks 5 8 

Total 63 93 

Segment 3A 

Construction Workers 13 20 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 7 11 

Water Trucks 2 4 

Total 24 39 

Segment 4 

Construction Workers 35 50 

Delivery 5 8 

Heavy Trucks 18 27 

Water Trucks 5 8 

Total 63 93 

Segment 5 

Construction Workers 25 40 

Delivery 3 6 

Heavy Trucks 13 21 

Water Trucks 3 6 

Total 44 73 

Segment 6 

Construction Workers 18 30 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 9 15 

Water Trucks 2 4 

Total 31 53 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-64

1 Table B-18. Average and Peak Construction Traffic (continued)

Vehicle Type Average Daily Round Trips Peak Daily Round Trips 

Segment 7 

Construction Workers 25 40 

Delivery 3 6 

Heavy Trucks 13 21 

Water Trucks 3 6 

Total 44 73 

Segment 8 

Construction Workers 25 40 

Delivery 3 6 

Heavy Trucks 13 21 

Water Trucks 3 6 

Total 44 73 

Segment 9 

Construction Workers 25 40 

Delivery 3 6 

Heavy Trucks 13 21 

Water Trucks 3 6 

Total 44 73 

Segment 10 

Construction Workers 25 40 

Delivery 3 6 

Heavy Trucks 13 21 

Water Trucks 3 6 

Total 44 73 

Windstar Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Dave Johnston Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Heward Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10

Total 20 30 

Shirley Basin Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

2 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-65

1 Table B-18. Average and Peak Construction Traffic (continued) 

Vehicle Type Average Daily Round Trips Peak Daily Round Trips 

Aeolus Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Anticline Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Jim Bridger 345-kV Yard 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12

Water Trucks 8 10

Total 20 30 

Populus Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Borah Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Cedar Hill Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Midpoint Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

Hemingway Substation 

Construction Workers 2 4 

Delivery 2 4 

Heavy Trucks 8 12 

Water Trucks 8 10 

Total 20 30 

2 Construction access will occur at several locations along the transmission line route, 

3 resulting in dispersed construction traffic. The construction contractor will be required to 

4 develop traffic plan as outlined in Appendix L of the POD. The equipment required for 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-66

1 transmission line construction is similar for the 500-kV, 345-kV, and 230-kV lines, 

2 although the equipment needed for 345-kV and 230-kV line construction is generally 

3 smaller than for 500-kV construction. The following is a summary of anticipated 

4 equipment to be used for each construction activity. Survey work only requires the use 

5 of pickup trucks or ATVs. Road construction will utilize pickups, bulldozers, motor 

6 graders, and water trucks. To dig holes and directly embed the 230-kV and 345-kV H7 frame poles or install 500-kV foundations it is anticipated that pickup trucks, 2-ton 

8 trucks, hole diggers, bulldozers, concrete trucks, water trucks, carry alls, cranes, hydro 

9 crane, wagon drill, dump trucks, and front-end loaders will be used. Hauling steel, or 

10 poles, braces and hardware for the 230-kV and 345-kV lines to the structure sites 

11 requires the use of steel haul trucks, carry alls, cranes, and forklifts. For assembly and 

12 erection of structures it is anticipated that pickup trucks, 2-ton trucks, carry alls, cranes, 

13 and a heavy lift helicopter may be used. Wire installation requires the most equipment 

14 including pickups, wire reel trailers, diesel tractors, cranes, 5-ton boom trucks, splicing 

15 trucks, three drum pullers, single drum pullers, tensioners, sagging dozers, carry alls, 

16 static wire reel trailers, and a light helicopter. Final cleanup, reclamation, and 

17 restoration utilize pickups, 2-ton trucks, bulldozers, motor graders, dump trucks, front18 end loaders, and water trucks. The highest level of traffic will occur when the wire 

19 stringing operations begin while several other operations are occurring at the same time 

20 which will likely include excavating holes, installing foundations, hauling steel, 

21 assembling structures, and erecting structures. 

22 For the substation work, the highest level of traffic will be during site grading and 

23 foundation installation. As tabulated in Table B-19, varying amounts of solid waste and 

24 soil not suitable for re-use at each site will have to be disposed of off-site at a remote 

25 location. Dump trucks will be leaving and returning to the site on a constant basis each 

26 day for the duration of the site grading. The volume of concrete required at each site 

27 will vary in proportion to the size of the substation site, and may be up to 7,000 cubic 

28 yards of concrete at the very large substations. Delivering, placing, and finishing 

29 concrete is labor intensive. Once concrete placement is complete, traffic on the 

30 surrounding roads will subside. Workers arrive in the morning and leave at the end of 

31 the day. The balance of daily traffic is material deliveries from storerooms, which will 

32 probably be one or two trips per day. Each substation requires the delivery of permitted 

33 loads such as transformers and/or reactors. Each reactor or transformer bank delivered 

34 will require four large multiple-axle lowboy trucks. Delivery will be scheduled to match 

35 the completion of their respective foundations. 

36 3.7.3 Removal of Facilities and Waste Disposal 

37 Substation and ROW construction generate a variety of solid wastes including concrete, 

38 hardware, and wood debris. The solid wastes generated during construction will be 

39 recycled or hauled away for disposal. Excavation along the ROW and at substations 

40 generates solid wastes that could potentially be used as fill; however, some of the 

41 excavated material will be removed for disposal. Excavated material that is clean and 

42 dry will be spread along the ROW. The volumes shown in Table B-19 shows that no 

43 waste is expected to be hauled away and not disposed of in the ROW for each segment 

44 during construction of Gateway West. 

45 
Transmission Line and Substation Components 

January 2013 

B-67 

1 Table B-19. Solid Waste Generation from Construction Activities 

Activity 

Segment 1W(a) Segment 1W(c) Segment 2 Segment 3

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Othe

W

T

(ya

230-kV Structure Installation 

230-kV Sgl Ckt - H-frame Family (includes angle & dead-ends) 

0 163,500 0 160,100 - - - 

500-kV Structure Installation 500-kV Sgl Ckt - Tangent Lattice Tower - - - - 0 114,765 0 57500-kV Sgl Ckt - Small Angle Lattice Tower 

- - - - 0 16,395 0 8,

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Medium Angle Lattice Tower 

- - - - 0 8,197 0 4,

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Medium Dead-End Lattice Tower 

- - - - 0 16,395 0 8,

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Heavy Dead-End Lattice Tower 

- - - - 0 8,197 0 4,

Activity 

Segment 6 Segment 7 Segment 8 Segment 9 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Other Solid 

Waste 

Total 

(yard3) 

Excavation 

Removal 

Total 

(yard3) 

Othe

W

T

(ya

230-kV Structure Installation 230-kV Sgl Ckt - H-frame Family (includes angle & dead-ends) 

- - - - - - - 

500-kV Structure Installation 500-kV Sgl Ckt - Tangent Lattice Tower 0 2,933 0 147,530 0 164,248 0 198500-kV Sgl Ckt - Small Angle Lattice Tower 

0 419 0 21,076 0 23,464 0 28

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Medium Angle Lattice Tower 

0 210 0 10,538 0 11,732 0 14

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Medium Dead-End Lattice Tower 

0 419 0 21,076 0 23,464 0 28

500-kV Sgl Ckt - Heavy Dead-End Lattice Tower 

0 210 0 10,538 0 11,732 0 14

2 Total Solid Waste by Substation (cubic yards) 

Activity 

Windstar 

Substation 

Heward 

Substation 

Shirley 

Basin 

Substation 

Aeolus 

Substation 

Dave 

Johnston 

Substation 

Anticline 

Substation 

Jim Bridger 

345-kV Yard 

Populus 

Substation 

Borah 

Substation 

C

Su

Substation Grading/ Site Work 

250 250 250 8,700 50 16,200 250 2,500 1,400 

Substation Construction (Below Grade) 

65 65 65 474 18 1272 65 601 148 

Substation Construction (Above Grade) 

144 144 144 192 120 432 144 192 192 
Transmission Line and Substation Components

 January 2013 B-68

1 The majority of waste associated with substation construction results from spoils 

2 created during site grading. The values shown in Table B-19 reflect the amount of 

3 vegetation and rock larger than 6 inches in diameter that cannot be processed and 

4 converted into backfill for compaction. Very little of the soil excavated during foundation 

5 installation is waste product. Above-grade waste will be packing material such as 

6 crates, pallets, and paper wrapping to protect equipment during shipping. It is assumed 

7 a 12-yard dumpster will be filled once a week with waste material for the duration of 

8 each substation project. 

9 3.7.4 Construction Schedule 

10 The Companies intend to continue to refine the design of the Gateway West during the 

11 BLM approval process in order to immediately commence construction if the Project is 

12 approved. Final engineering surveys will determine the exact locations of towers, 

13 access roads, and other features prior to the start of construction and will be included in 

14 the Plan of Development. Due to the broad scope of construction, the varied nature of 

15 construction activities, and the geographic diversity of the Project area, the Companies 

16 intend to hire multiple contractors to complete Project work within the projected 

17 timeframe and in accordance with industry performance standards. The Project may 

18 involve up to three separate EPC contracts. Table B-20 shows the planned 

19 construction start and end dates for each phase. Multiple segments will be under 

20 construction at the same time. The Companies developed a Project construction 

21 schedule based on this strategy. 

22 Although the construction rate of progress is reduced in the winter, the Companies have 

23 planned an aggressive schedule and it is anticipated that construction will continue 

24 through the winter months in the lower-elevation areas of the Project, except during 

25 winter storms. In the higher-elevation areas of the Project, winter storms and snow will 

26 limit access to the ROW, for example in Segment 4 in western Wyoming and eastern 

27 Idaho. In these areas, it is expected that construction will be suspended on some 

28 portions of the ROW during the peak winter months and construction resources will 

29 either be demobilized or shifted to other segments of the Project. 

30 Transmission line construction commences with contractor mobilization. The contractor 

31 will mobilize equipment and personnel to the construction site at various stages in the 

32 Project schedule depending on operational requirements. This will cumulatively require 

33 approximately 6 weeks throughout the schedule for each segment. Construction 

34 management, engineering support, inspection, materials handling, and administration 

35 are required throughout the Project. First, surveyors start at one end of the segment 

36 and stake the locations of access roads. Road construction can start 1 to 2 weeks after 

37 the surveyors begin, which may require clearing in higher elevations where tree removal 

38 is required prior to road construction. After a couple of weeks of road construction 

39 another survey crew can begin staking the structure locations. A week or two after the 

40 survey crew starts staking structure locations, excavation of holes for foundations for 

41 500-kV towers, or for directly embedded poles for 230-kV or 345-kV structures, can 

42 begin. For 500-kV construction, the installation of the concrete pier foundations would 

43 begin within the next couple of weeks. The foundations need time to cure and develop 

44 to full structural strength (i.e., compression capacity) before lattice towers can be 

45 
Transmission Line and Substation Components

 January 2013 B-69

1 Table B-20. Construction Schedule 

Segment 

Number 

Segment or Substation 

Name 

Primarily Wyoming Idaho 

Start June 

2015 

End Dec 

2018 

Start June 

2017 

End Dec 

2021 

 Windstar Substation Windstar Expansion 

 Dave Johnston 230-kV 

Substation 

Dave Johnston 230-kV 

Substation 

 Heward Substation Heward Substation 

 Aeolus Substation Aeolus Substation 

 Populus Substation Populus Expansion 

 Anticline Substation Anticline Substation and 

345-kV bays at existing 

Jim Bridger Substation 

1W(a) Windstar – Aeolus #1 Single-Circuit 230-kV 

and rebuild a short 

section of the existing 

single-circuit 230-kV line 

1W(c) Dave Johnston – Heward 

–Aeolus 

Rebuild the existing 

single circuit 230-kV and 

build a short section a 

new single-circuit 230 

kV line 

2 Aeolus – Creston Single-Circuit 500-kV 

3 Creston – Anticline Single-Circuit 500-kV 

3A Anticline – Jim Bridger Single-Circuit 345-kV 

4 Anticline – Populus Single-Circuit 500-kV 

 Populus Substation Populus Expansion 

 Cedar Hill Substation Cedar Hill Substation 

 Hemingway Substation Hemingway Expansion 

7 Populus – Cedar Hill Single-Circuit 500-kV 

9 Cedar Hill – Hemingway Single-Circuit 500-kV 

10 Midpoint – Cedar Hill Single-Circuit 500-kV 

 Borah Substation Borah Expansion 

 Midpoint Substation Midpoint Expansion 

Hemingway Expansion 

Single-Circuit 500-kV 

Existing single-circuit 

Single-Circuit 500-kV 

 Hemingway Substation 

5 Populus – Borah 

6 Borah – Midpoint 1

8 Midpoint – Hemingway 

2 installed. Five to six weeks after foundation installation has begun, lattice tower 

3 assembly and erection can begin. For 230-kV and 345-kV construction, structure 

4 assembly and setting can begin immediately after the excavation of holes has begun. 

5 For 230-kV, 345-kV,and 500-kV construction, the wire installation crews start 

6 approximately 8 to 12 weeks after assembly and erection/setting begins. This is 

7 followed by final cleanup, reclamation, and restoration. 

8 Substation construction includes five activities: 1) site grading (grading and access road 

9 development), 2) below-grade construction (primarily the installation of foundations, 3) 

10 above-grade construction (steel erection and building construction), 4) electrical 

11 (installation and termination of control wiring), and 5) testing (functional testing of control 

12 and monitoring schemes). Typically, these activities overlap and complement each 

13 other, allowing the construction of a substation to proceed more quickly than line 

14 construction. It is estimated that the site grading activity and access road work for 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-70

1 Gateway West substations will take 4 to 8 weeks to complete, depending on the size of 

2 the site. 

3 Below-grade construction can be completed in 3 months or less for all substations that 

4 are expansions of existing substations. In these cases the basic infrastructure is already 

5 in place, having been installed with the initial substation and designed for the future 

6 expansion requirements. Only the new substations will take longer to complete. 

7 Above-grade construction duration is highly dependent on the level of construction force 

8 the contractor chooses. Due to the size of each station, many crews can work on steel 

9 erection and equipment assembly without interfering with each other. It is estimated that 

10 for the majority of the substations the erection of steel, bus assembly, and major 

11 equipment assembly can be completed in between 4 months for the smaller substations 

12 and 6 months for the larger substations. 

13 Electrical construction is a long and labor-intensive task. Although multiple crews can 

14 work in a yard at any given time, the space in a control building is very limited and will 

15 determine the length of this task. In the case of each of these stations, given the size 

16 and type of equipment to be installed, there will be miles of cable to be pulled into 

17 conduit and duct banks and thousands of connections to be made and double checked 

18 prior to the start of testing. New substations will take longer than existing substations 

19 that already have the basic infrastructure in place. 

20 Prior to starting construction, the Companies may be required to conduct on-site surveys 

21 in accordance with applicable protocols or mitigation measures adopted by BLM and 

22 other agencies as Project conditions. Accordingly, adjustments might occur to the Project 

23 schedule as necessary to avoid sensitive resources. Pre-construction activities, including 

24 pre-construction environmental surveys, materials procurement, design, contracting, 

25 ROW acquisition, and permitting efforts, are not shown in the summary schedule. 

26 The schedule is predicated upon the Companies’ ability to complete the following tasks 

27 in a timely manner: 

28  Secure all necessary permit approvals; 

29  Secure agency support; 

30  Complete biological and cultural survey work; 

31  Construct within environmental time constraints; 

32  Order and receive equipment; 

33  Secure construction contractor resources and associated construction 

34 equipment; and 

35  Maintain continuous construction activity with no delay due to environmental, 

36 administrative, or legal issues. 

37 4.0 SYSTEM OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 

38 The 500-kV transmission lines to be constructed as part of the Project will comprise 

39 critical infrastructure of the RMP and Idaho Power transmission systems, and of the 

40 western U.S. electrical grid. Limiting the duration of unplanned outages and planning 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-71

1 for the use of live-line maintenance techniques to minimize the requirement for any 

2 outages is an important part of the design, construction, and operations/maintenance 

3 requirements for this Project. 

4 4.1 Routine System Operation and Maintenance 

5 The goal of the Companies is to provide their customers with a reliable supply of 

6 electricity while maintaining the overall integrity of the regional electrical grid. The 

7 Companies’ obligation to maintain reliable operation of the electrical system is 

8 documented in the Companies’ agreements with the various states through the public 

9 service commissions and is directed through compliance with industry standard codes 

10 and practices such as the NESC (ANSI C2), which governs the design and operation of 

11 high-voltage electric utility systems. 

12 In 2005, Congress passed the Energy Policy Act of 2005, which provided a regulatory 

13 basis for the implementation of specific incentives (and penalties) for maintaining 

14 reliable service, among other issues. As a result of the passage of the Act, the FERC 

15 selected the NERC to act as the enforcement agency for compliance with electric utility 

16 reliability and operating standards, among other issues. The Companies are required to 

17 be in compliance with the various reliability standards promulgated through the 

18 implementation of the NERC policies and procedures. Additionally, PacifiCorp and 

19 Idaho Power are governed by the WECC standards that may be in addition to or more 

20 stringent than those currently required by NERC (see also Section 1.3.3.3 for further 

21 description of these regulatory agencies). In response, the Companies have prepared 

22 internal operation and maintenance policies and procedures designed to meet the 

23 requirements of the NERC, WECC, and the state public utility commissions, while 

24 remaining in compliance with the applicable codes and standards with respect to 

25 maintaining the reliability of the electrical system. 

26 Operations and maintenance activities include transmission line patrols, climbing 

27 inspections, structure and wire maintenance, insulator washing in selected areas as 

28 needed, and access roads repairs. The Companies will keep necessary work areas 

29 around structures clear of vegetation and will limit the height of vegetation along the 

30 ROW. Periodic inspection and maintenance of each of the substations and 

31 communications facilities is also a key part of operating and maintaining the electrical 

32 system. The following sections provide details on the anticipated operation and 

33 maintenance activities for Gateway West. 

34 After the transmission line has been energized, land uses that are compatible with 

35 safety regulations will be permitted in and adjacent to the ROW. Existing land uses 

36 such as agriculture and grazing are generally permitted within the ROW. Incompatible 

37 land uses within the ROW include construction and maintenance of inhabited dwellings 

38 and any use requiring changes in surface elevation that would affect electrical 

39 clearances of existing or planned facilities. 

40 Land uses that comply with local regulations will be permitted adjacent to the ROW. 

41 Compatible uses of the ROW on public lands would have to be approved by the 

42 appropriate agency. Permission to use the ROW on private lands will have to be 

43 obtained from the utility owning the transmission line. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-72

1 4.1.1 Routine System Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair 

2 Regular inspection of transmission lines, substations, and support systems is critical for 

3 safe, efficient, and economical operation of the Project. 

4 4.1.2 Transmission Line Maintenance 

5 Regular ground and aerial inspections will be performed in accordance with the 

6 Companies’ established policies and procedures for transmission line inspection and 

7 maintenance. The Companies’ transmission lines and substations will be inspected for 

8 corrosion, equipment misalignment, loose fittings, vandalism, and other mechanical 

9 problems. The need for vegetation management will also be determined during 

10 inspection patrols. 

11 Inspection of the entire transmission line system is conducted semi-annually. Aerial 

12 inspection is conducted by helicopter semi-annually and requires two or three crew 

13 members, including the pilot. Detailed ground inspections take place on an annual 

14 basis using access roads to each structure. Ground inspection uses 4x4 trucks or 4x4 

15 ATVs. The inspector assesses the condition of the transmission line and hardware to 

16 determine if any components need to be repaired or replaced, or if other conditions exist 

17 that require maintenance or modification activities. The inspector also notes any 

18 unauthorized encroachments and trash dumping on the ROW that could constitute a 

19 safety hazard. The inspector accesses each of the structure locations along each line 

20 and uses binoculars and spotting scopes to perform this inspection. 

21 4.1.3 Hardware Maintenance and Repairs 

22 Routine maintenance activities are ordinary maintenance tasks that have historically 

23 been performed and are regularly carried out on a routine basis. The work performed is 

24 typically repair or replacement of individual components (no new ground disturbance), 

25 performed by relatively small crews using a minimum of equipment, and usually is 

26 conducted within a period from a few hours up to a few days. Work requires access to 

27 the damaged portion of the line to allow for a safe and efficient repair of the facility. 

28 Equipment required for this work may include 4-wheel-drive trucks, material (flatbed) 

29 trucks, bucket trucks (low reach), boom trucks (high reach), or personnel lifts. This work 

30 is scheduled and is typically required due to issues found during inspections. Typical 

31 items that may require periodic replacement on a 500-kV tower include insulators, 

32 hardware or tower members. It is expected that these replacements will be required 

33 infrequently. 

34 The Companies plan to conduct maintenance on the critical 500-Kv, 345-kV and 230-kV 

35 system using live line maintenance techniques. Maintenance on the transmission lines 

36 can be completed safely using live line techniques thereby avoiding an outage to the 

37 critical transmission line infrastructure. High reach bucket trucks along with other 

38 equipment are used to conduct these activities. For the 500-kV lattice tower structures, 

39 this requires that adequate space be available at each structure site so that the high 

40 reach bucket truck can be positioned to one side or the other of the structure and reach 

41 up and over the lower phases to access the upper center phase for live-line 

42 maintenance procedures. For the 230-kV H-frame structures, this requires that 

43 adequate space be available at each structure site so that a bucket truck can be 

44 positioned to access the outside phases. To allow room at each structure for these 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-73

1 activities, in low slope areas a pad area is required with the structure in the center of 

2 250 feet (ROW width) by 100 feet for the single-circuit 500-kV structure, 150 feet by 50 

3 feet for the 345-kV H-frame structure, and 125 feet by 50 feet for the 230-kV H-frame 

4 structure. Figures B-16 through B-18 depict the space requirements for live-line 

5 maintenance. The size and location of these required pads near the structures may 

6 vary depending on the side slope and access road at each site. The work areas and 

7 pads are cleared to the extent needed to safely complete the work. These pads remain 

8 in place after construction, but are revegetated after the initial construction is completed. 

9 4.1.4 Access Road and Work Area Repair 

10 ROW repairs include grading or repair of existing maintenance access roads and work 

11 areas, and spot repair of sites subject to flooding or scouring. Required equipment may 

12 include a grader, backhoe, four-wheel-drive pickup truck, and a tracked-loader or 

13 bulldozer. The cat-loader has steel tracks whereas the grader, backhoe, and truck 

14 typically have rubber tires. Repairs to the ROW are scheduled as a result of line 

15 inspections, or occur in response to an emergency situation. 

16 4.1.5 Vegetation Management 

17 The Companies must maintain work areas adjacent to electrical transmission structures 

18 and along the ROW for vehicle and equipment access necessary for operations, 

19 maintenance, and repair, including for live-line maintenance activities as described in 

20 Section 3.1.3, under Hardware Maintenance and Repairs. Figures B-16 through B-19 

21 illustrate the typical equipment and space needed for live-line maintenance. During 

22 scheduled vegetation management activities, tall growing species, large shrubs and 

23 other obstructions are removed near structures to facilitate a safe working environment 

24 for inspection and maintenance of equipment and to ensure system reliability. At a 

25 minimum, trees and large brush are cleared within a 25-foot radius of the base or 

26 foundation of all electrical transmission structures, and to accommodate equipment 

27 pads to conduct live line maintenance operations as noted. 

28 Vegetation management practices along the ROW will be in accordance with the Idaho 

29 Power and PacifiCorp clearing specifications and vegetation management plans (Idaho 

30 Power 2008; PacifiCorp 2007c; and Appendix R). Much of the transmission line route 

31 traverses arid country characterized by low-growing vegetation, while higher elevations 

32 receive more precipitation and exhibit more vegetation. The wire-border zone method 

33 to controlling vegetation is an approach used by PacifiCorp (2007c). This method 

34 results in two zones of clearing and revegetation. The wire zone is the linear area along 

35 the ROW under the wires and extending 10 feet outside of the outermost phase 

36 conductor. After initial clearing, vegetation in the wire zone will be maintained to consist 

37 of native grasses, legumes, herbs, ferns, and other low-growing shrubs that remain 

38 under 5 feet tall at maturity. The border zone is the linear area along each side of the 

39 ROW extending from the wire zone to the edge of the ROW. Vegetation in the border 

40 zone will be maintained to consist of tall shrubs or short trees (up to 25 feet high at 

41 maturity), grasses, and forbs. These cover plants benefit the ROW by competing with 

42 and excluding undesirable plants. The width of the wire and border zones is depicted in 

43 Figure B-19 for the 230-kV and 345-kV H-frames and 500-kV single -circuit tower line 

44 segments. During operations, vegetation growth will be monitored and managed to 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-74

1 

2 Figure B-16. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, 230 kV 

3 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-75

1 

2 Figure B-17. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, 345 kV 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-76

1 

2 Figure B-18. Live-line Maintenance Space Requirements, Single-Circuit 500 kV
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-77

1 

2 

3 Single Circuit 230 kV

4 

5 Single-Circuit 345 kV 

6 

7 Single-Circuit 500 kV 

8 Figure B-19. Right-of-Way Vegetation Management 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-78

1 

2 Figure B-20. Right-of-Way Vegetation Management in Steep Terrain 

3 maintain the wire-border zone objectives. Idaho Power’s approach is to remove all tree 

4 species within the ROW where the conductor ground clearance is less than 50 feet, 

5 leaving grasses, legumes, herbs, ferns, and low-growing shrubs within the ROW. When 

6 conductor ground clearance is greater than 50 feet, for example a canyon or ravine, the 

7 Companies make provisions for allowing trees and shrubs to remain, provided they do 

8 not violate minimum clearance thresholds set forth by their respective companies. 

9 Vegetation will be removed using mechanical equipment such as chain saws, weed 

10 trimmers, rakes, shovels, mowers, and brush hooks. Clearing efforts in heavy growth 

11 areas will use equipment such as a Hydro-Ax or similar. The duration of activities and 

12 the size of crew and equipment required depends on the amount and size of the 

13 vegetation to be trimmed or removed. 

14 In selected areas, herbicides may be used to control noxious weeds and to meet 

15 vegetation management objectives. All herbicide applications will be performed in 

16 accordance with federal, state, and local regulations, and in compliance with managing 

17 land agency requirements. 

Zone Plant Species 

Zone A: Grasses, legumes, herbs, 

ferns and low growing shrubs. 

Zone B: all deciduous and conifer 

trees. 

Zone Definition

Zone A: When the conductor to ground clearance 

is less than 50’, all tree species should be 

removed. 

Zone B: When the conductor to ground clearance 

is greater than 50’, all tree species should be 

removed if they have less than 50’ of clearance, 

25’ minimum. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-79

1 4.1.6 Substation and Regeneration Station Maintenance 

2 Substation and regeneration station monitoring and control functions are performed 

3 remotely from the Companies’ central operations facilities located at PacifiCorp’s 

4 operation center in Portland, Oregon, and by Idaho Power from their operation center in 

5 Boise, Idaho. Unauthorized entry into substations or regeneration stations is prevented 

6 with the provision of fencing and locked gates. Warning signs will be posted and entry 

7 to the operating facilities will be restricted to authorized personnel. Gateway West 

8 substations and regeneration stations will not be staffed; however, a remotely monitored 

9 security system will be installed. Several forms of security are planned for each of the 

10 locations, although the security arrangements at each of the substations or regeneration 

11 stations may differ somewhat. Security measures may include fire detection in the 

12 control building via the remote monitoring system; alarming for forced entry; and a 

13 perimeter security system coupled with remote sensing infrared camera equipment in 

14 the fenced area of the station to provide visual observation/confirmation to the system 

15 operator of disturbances at the fence line. 

16 Maintenance activities include equipment testing, equipment monitoring and repair, and 

17 emergency and routine procedures for service continuity and preventive maintenance. 

18 It is anticipated that maintenance at each substation will require approximately six trips 

19 per year by a 2- to 4-person crew. Routine operations require one or two workers in a 

20 light utility truck to visit the substations monthly. Typically, once per year a major 

21 maintenance inspection takes place requiring up to 15 personnel for 1 to 3 weeks. 

22 Regeneration stations are visited every 2 to 3 months by one individual in a light truck to 

23 inspect the facilities. Annual maintenance is performed by a two man crew in a light 

24 truck over a 2- to 5-day period. If substation landscaping is required by the permitting 

25 agency, drought-tolerant plant materials will be used to minimize watering requirements 

26 after plant establishment. 

27 Safety lighting at the substations will be provided inside the substation fence for the 

28 purpose of emergency repair work. Because night activities are not expected to occur 

29 more than once per year, the safety lighting inside the substation fence will normally be 

30 turned off. One floodlight, mounted near the entry gate to safely illuminate the 

31 substation entry gate, may be left on during nighttime hours. 

32 4.2 Emergency Response 

33 The operation of the system is remotely managed and monitored from control rooms at 

34 PacifiCorp’s operation center in Portland, Oregon, and by Idaho Power from their 

35 operation center in Boise, Idaho. Electrical outages or variations from normal operating 

36 protocols are sensed and reported at these operation centers. As well, the substations 

37 are equipped with remote monitoring, proximity alarms, and in some cases video 

38 surveillance. 

39 The implementation of routine operation and maintenance activities on powerlines 

40 minimizes the need for most emergency repairs. Emergency maintenance activities are 

41 often those activities necessary to repair natural hazard, fire, or human-caused 

42 damages to a line. Such work is required to eliminate a safety hazard, prevent 

43 imminent damage to the powerline, or restore service if there is an outage. In an 

44 emergency, the Companies must respond as quickly as possible to restore power. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-80

1 The equipment necessary to carry out emergency repairs is similar to that necessary to 

2 conduct routine maintenance, in most cases. Emergency response to outages may 

3 require additional equipment to complete the repairs. For example, where the site of 

4 the outage is remote, helicopters may be used to respond quickly to emergencies. 

5 In practice, as soon as an incident is detected, the control room dispatchers notifies the 

6 responsible operations staff in the area(s) affected and crews and equipment are 

7 organized and dispatched to respond to the incident. 

8 4.2.1 Fire Protection 

9 All federal, state, and county laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations pertaining to fire 

10 prevention and suppression will be strictly adhered to. All personnel will be advised of 

11 their responsibilities under the applicable fire laws and regulations. 

12 When working on Public Lands, the Companies’ employees and contractors will carry 

13 required suppression tools and equipment. The Companies or their construction 

14 contractor will notify local fire authorities and the BLM or Forest Service (as appropriate) 

15 if a Project-related fire occurs within or adjacent to a construction area. 

16 If the Companies become aware of an emergency situation that is caused by a fire on or 

17 threatening BLM-managed or NFS lands and that could damage the transmission lines 

18 or their operation, they will notify the appropriate agency contact. Specific construction19 related activities and safety measures will be implemented during construction of the 

20 transmission line to prevent fires and to ensure quick response and suppression if a fire 

21 occurs. Typical practices to prevent fires during construction and maintenance/repair 

22 activities include brush clearing prior to work, stationing a water truck at the job site to 

23 keep the ground and vegetation moist in extreme fire conditions, enforcing red flag 

24 warnings, providing “fire behavior” training to all pertinent personnel, keeping vehicles 

25 on or within designated roads or work areas, and providing fire suppression equipment 

26 and emergency notification numbers at each construction site. 

27 5.0 DECOMMISSIONING 

28 The proposed transmission line has a projected operational life of 50 years or longer. 

29 At the end of the useful life of the Project and if the facility were no longer required, the 

30 transmission line would be removed from service. At such time, conductors, insulators, 

31 and hardware would be dismantled and removed from the ROW. Structures would be 

32 removed and foundations removed to below ground surface. 

33 Following abandonment and removal of the transmission line structures and equipment 

34 from the ROW, any areas disturbed during line dismantling would be restored and 

35 rehabilitated. In the same way, if a substation is no longer required, the substation 

36 structures and equipment would be dismantled and removed from the site. The station 

37 structures would be disassembled and either re-used at another station or sold for 

38 scrap. Major equipment such as breakers, transformers, and reactors would be 

39 removed, refurbished, and stored for use at another facility. Foundations would be 

40 either abandoned in-place or cut off below ground level and buried. 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-81

1 The Companies describe roads necessary for the operation and maintenance of 

2 transmission lines as either access roads or service roads. The sole purpose of service 

3 roads is to provide maintenance crews access to the transmission lines. These roads 

4 would not exist if the transmission lines did not exist. In contrast, access roads serve a 

5 broader purpose, such as contributing to the federal, county, or state road systems. 

6 Access roads provide direct or indirect access to the transmission lines, but that access 

7 is not their primary purpose. The Companies are responsible for the reclamation of 

8 service roads following abandonment and in accordance with the landowner’s direction, 

9 but are not responsible for reclamation of access roads unless mutually agreed upon by 

10 the Companies and the landowner or required by the land management agency. 

11 Service roads would be decommissioned following removal of the structures and lines 

12 and may be decommissioned while the lines are in-service if they are determined to no 

13 longer be necessary. 

14 The Companies may decommission service roads by 1) entering into an agreement with 

15 the BLM or Forest Service under which the agencies restore the road located on federal 

16 lands and are reimbursed for costs by the Companies, or 2) the Companies or their 

17 contractor implement restoration measures as described below. 

18 When a service road has been identified as no longer necessary, the road will be 

19 reclaimed and seeded as soon as possible during the optimal seeding season. In some 

20 cases, reseeding may not be necessary, given the existing amount of soil compaction 

21 and vegetation currently in place. Where required by the land management agency, 

22 compacted areas would be ripped and appropriate sediment control measures would be 

23 implemented. 

24 The seed mix used for any restoration and revegetation project would be determined in 

25 consultation with the landowner or land management agency. All seed and plant 

26 material used on federal lands would be approved by the land management agency. All 

27 seed would meet all of the requirements of the Federal Seed Act and applicable Idaho 

28 and Wyoming laws regarding seeds and noxious weeds. Only seed certified as 

29 “noxious weed free” would be used. If requested, the Companies or their contractor 

30 would provide the landowner with evidence of seed certification. Any seed mixture 

31 would not contain aggressive, non-native species that might invade the site. Where 

32 necessary, the surface of the ground would be prepared prior to seeding. Where 

33 practical, the Companies would follow these guidelines for preparing the seedbed: 

34 1. The road surface would be cleared of foreign materials, such as garbage, paper, 

35 and other materials, but all rocks, limbs, or minor woody debris would be left in 

36 place. The Companies or their contractor would prepare the seedbed 

37 immediately prior to seeding. 

38 2. Under favorable soil-moisture conditions, a standard disk or spring bar harrow 

39 would be used (where ripping is not required) to roughen the topsoil layer to 

40 create the desired surface texture before the seed is applied. Dirt clods and 

41 chiseled voids resulting from the roughening process increase the surface area 

42 for water collection and provide microsites for seed establishment. The soil 

43 should be disked or harrowed to no more than 2 inches deep at a time when soil 
Transmission Line and Substation Components Appendix B 

 January 2013 B-82

1 moisture allows the surface to remain rough, with clods approximately 2 to 

2 4 inches in diameter. 

3 3. Ripping, disking, or harrowing would be performed parallel to surface contours. 

4 In this way, downslope alignment of furrows can be avoided. In areas that 

5 already have the desired soil characteristics; the seedbed does not need to be 

6 prepared. 

7 After the seedbed has been prepared, the Companies or their contractor would 

8 broadcast the seed on the disturbed area, after which the seed would be lightly 

9 harrowed into the roadbed or raked into the ground. Mulch and fertilizers would be 

10 added if necessary. An area would not be seeded when wind velocities prohibit the 

11 seed mix from being applied evenly. If the seed does not germinate and establish to an 

12 agreed-upon level of vegetation cover (e.g., consistent with adjacent site conditions) 

13 after two growing seasons, the Companies or their contractor would reseed during a 

14 period acceptable to the landowner. On NFS lands, the Companies would be 

15 responsible for monitoring the effectiveness of soil protection and restoration measures 

16 and would take corrective measures as needed to ensure long-term soil protection. 

17 Other seeding methods, such as drilling, hydroseeding, or aerial application, may be 

18 used depending on the area that requires reclamation and site conditions. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX C

2 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MANAGEMENT PLAN

3
Appendix C

Framework Environmental Compliance 

Management Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................C-1

2.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MANAGEMENT PLAN ELEMENTS AND 

AUTHORITY ..................................................................................................................C-2

3.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES.................................................................................C-3

3.1 Companies ............................................................................................................C-3

3.1.1 Companies’ Project Sponsor......................................................................C-5

3.1.2 Companies’ Project Manager .....................................................................C-5

3.1.3 Environmental Compliance Manager..........................................................C-5

3.1.4 Companies’ Construction Inspector............................................................C-6

3.2 BLM and USFS......................................................................................................C-6

3.2.1 BLM and USFS Authorized Officers ...........................................................C-7

3.2.2 BLM and USFS Project Manager ...............................................................C-8

3.2.3 Compliance Inspection Contractor .............................................................C-8

3.2.4 Assistant Compliance Inspection Contractor ............................................C-10

3.3 Construction Contractor(s)...................................................................................C-11

3.3.1 Construction Contractor’s Project Sponsor...............................................C-12

3.3.2 Construction Contractor’s Project Manager..............................................C-12

3.3.3 Construction Contractor’s Superintendent(s)............................................C-13

3.3.4 Construction Contractor’s Civil Survey Supervisor ...................................C-14

3.3.5 Construction Contractor’s Lead Environmental Inspector.........................C-14

3.3.6 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspector..................................C-15

3.3.7 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator..............C-16

3.3.8 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Training Coordinator ................C-17

3.3.9 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Crew Foreman.........................C-18

4.0 PROCEDURES............................................................................................................C-18

4.1 Compliance Levels ..............................................................................................C-18

4.1.1 Acceptable ...............................................................................................C-18

4.1.2 Problem Area ...........................................................................................C-18

4.1.3 Noncompliance ........................................................................................C-19

4.1.4 Response to Noncompliant Activities .......................................................C-20

4.2 Variance Procedures (Unforeseen Circumstances) .............................................C-21

4.2.1 Level 1 Variance – Variances Accomplished through Field Resolution.....C-23

4.2.2 Level 2 Variance – Variances Beyond Field Resolution, Not Requiring 

an Amendment to the Right-of-way Grant or Special-use Authorization ...C-25

4.2.3 Level 3 Variance – Variances Requiring an Amendment to the Right-ofway Grant or Special-use Authorization ...................................................C-27

5.0 COMMUNICATIONS....................................................................................................C-28

5.1 Primary Inter-Party Communication Channels .....................................................C-28

5.2 Daily Communications .........................................................................................C-28

6.0 TRAINING....................................................................................................................C-29

6.1 Preconstruction....................................................................................................C-29

6.2 During Construction.............................................................................................C-29

7.0 REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................C-30

8.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT................................................................................................C-31
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-iv

8.1 Reclamation and Post Construction.....................................................................C-31

8.2 End of Construction Project Report......................................................................C-31

8.3 Construction Closeout Meeting............................................................................C-31

LIST OF TABLES

Table 4-1. Summary Of Variance Procedures on Private Lands.......................................C-23

Table 4-2. Summary Of Variance Procedures on Non-Private Lands ...............................C-23

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 3-1. ECMP Organization Chart.................................................................................C-4

Figure 4-1. Draft Variance Request Process .....................................................................C-22

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A Daily Inspection Report Form

Attachment B Variance Request Form

Attachment C Noncompliance Form
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single- circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 The BLM and USFS will be responsible for enforcement of the terms and conditions of 

19 the BLM’s right-of-way grant and USFS’s special use authorization on federal lands 

20 during the term of the grant/special-use authorization, respectively. As the lead federal 

21 agency, the BLM will engage a third-party Compliance Inspection Contractor (CIC) to 

22 act on behalf of the BLM and USFS to provide construction oversight and monitor 

23 compliance with the terms and conditions of the BLM’s right-of-way grant and the 

24 USFS’s special-use authorization. 

25 On federal lands, the CIC will inspect and monitor preconstruction and construction 

26 activities, as well as enforce the terms and conditions of the BLM’s right-of-way grant 

27 and the USFS’s special-use authorization. On non-federal lands, the CIC will inspect 

28 and monitor preconstruction and construction activities, document disturbance of the 

29 entire Project on all lands analyzed in the Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) and 

30 enforce requirements related to BLM and Forest Service responsibilities under the 

31 National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA) and the Endangered Species Act (ESA). 

32 In addition, the Project will require adherence to any federal, state, and local permits, as 

33 well as private landowner agreements (if applicable), that include conditions to 

34 construct. The responsibility of compliance monitoring and enforcement of non-federal 

35 conditions will be determined between the Companies and the landowner on a case-by36 case basis.

37 Because of the Project’s potential to impact sensitive environmental resources, 

38 environmental protection measures (EPMs) have been developed to minimize potential 

39 impacts on these resources (see Section 4 of the Plan of Development [POD]).
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-2

1 2.0 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

2 ELEMENTS AND AUTHORITY

3 This Environmental Compliance and Monitoring Plan (ECMP) is the primary guidance 

4 document that states how the Project participants will uphold, document, and manage 

5 compliance with the right-of-way grant/special-use permit; the POD; landowner

6 agreements, and all federal, state, and local permits. It is a centralized Project 

7 environmental compliance reference and is thereby intended to facilitate environmental 

8 compliance across the entire Project for all parties and describes the following essential 

9 elements:

10 • Roles and responsibilities of the participants

11 • Comprehensive inspection and monitoring program

12 • Corrective procedures in the event of noncompliance

13 • Standard protocol for variance requests, exceptions, and other deviations

14 • Communication plan 

15 • Reporting process 

16 • Comprehensive Project-specific environmental compliance training program

17 The Companies’ commitment to environmental compliance will be demonstrated by 

18 activities prior to, during, and following construction. The ECMP is intended to be a 

19 controlled document and may be revised as needed throughout the construction 

20 process. Because the Project will cross federal and state lands as well as lands owned 

21 privately and/or under the jurisdiction of multiple agencies, the ECMP will be applicable 

22 for multiple jurisdictional permitting entities and landowners.

23 Authority for implementation of this ECMP originates from the terms, conditions, and 

24 stipulations of the BLM’s right-of-way grant and the USFS’s special-use permit, the 

25 POD, the Final EIS, the Record of Decision (ROD), the Notice to Proceed (NTP), and 

26 other conditions associated with nonfederal agency permits. As part of the Companies’

27 environmental compliance commitment, the Construction Contractor(s) will be 

28 contractually bound to comply with all laws, regulations, and permit requirements, 

29 including the mitigation measures and other specific stipulations and methods set forth 

30 in the POD (within the bounds of construction activities and associated disturbance 

31 analyzed in the Final EIS).

32 Project specific permitting documents, including but not limited to those identified above, 

33 must be reviewed prior to any construction activities to identify all Project-wide and site 

34 specific requirements. These documents will be distributed by the CIC to the 

35 appropriate parties for their review prior to the initial construction kickoff meeting. At that 

36 time, a document control system to manage distribution of all documents and revisions 

37 will be presented and demonstrated. 

38 The Companies and BLM have agreed to use a third-party CIC to act on the BLM and 

39 USFS’s behalf to ensure adequate oversight during construction. The CIC will be hired 

40 by the Companies prior to the BLM and USFS offering the right-of-way grant and 

41 special use authorization, respectively, to allow adequate time for the CIC to review 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-3

1 documents and develop on-the-ground familiarity with the Project. The CIC will be 

2 authorized to enforce the POD on BLM- and USFS-administered lands. The CIC will 

3 also ensure BLM and USFS responsibilities under the NHPA and ESA are met on non4 federal lands and disturbance on non-federal lands is consistent with the analysis in the 

5 EIS.

6 Environmental Inspectors will be retained by the Construction Contractor(s) but will 

7 report to the Proponent who will then report to the BLM (as shown in the organizational 

8 chart in Figure 3-1 in Section 3.0 – Roles and Responsibilities). The Environmental 

9 Inspectors’ primary focus will be to make certain that all construction activities in all 

10 Project segments and phases are performed in accordance with the environmental 

11 commitments set forth in the POD, permits, and individual agreements. The 

12 Environmental Inspectors will be of particular importance on non-federal lands, where 

13 the CIC will have authority limited to NEPA and ESA responsibilities and in some cases, 

14 may not be allowed to access the Project right-of-way. In such cases, in addition to 

15 monitoring for environmental compliance with the POD, permits, and individual 

16 agreements, the Environmental Inspectors must document all construction activities and 

17 Project disturbance that occurs at each work area, which will be included in the total 

18 Project disturbance tracking maintained by the CIC (Section.2.3).

19 The BLM, through the CIC and the Companies will provide direct oversight of the 

20 Construction Contractor’s environmental compliance performance, with any specific 

21 work direction to the Construction Contractor(s) only coming from the Companies. 

22 Additional information about the Construction Contractor’s role in this ECMP is 

23 explained in Section 3 below.

24 3.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

25 The following section describes the responsibilities of each ECMP entity and describes 

26 their reporting relationships and roles in executing the ECMP (Figure 3-1). If other 

27 parties become engaged in this ECMP as additional participants, they would be 

28 responsible to function and abide by the protocols, terms, and conditions outlined in this 

29 ECMP and their reporting relationships would be case-specific according to their 

30 jurisdiction, expertise, and/or nature of their input. 

31 Section 3, Roles and Responsibilities, briefly discusses the variance process. However, 

32 a more detailed variance discussion is located in Section 4.2, Variances. 

33 3.1 Companies

34 The Companies will act as holder of all rights-of-way easements, public and private, and 

35 will be the grant holder for the BLM right-of-way and USFS special-use authorization. As 

36 such, the Companies is ultimately accountable for adherence to the environmental 

37 permit requirements specified in the terms of its agreements and is responsible for 

38 ensuring that environmental impacts do not exceed those analyzed in the Final EIS and 

39 approved in the POD. To facilitate this goal, the Companies will maintain regular and 

40 consistent communication with the Construction Contractor(s) to track the success of 

41 mitigation and compliance efforts prior to, during, and following construction. As the 

42 permit holder, the Companies are responsible for assuring that all instances of 

43 noncompliance are corrected. 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-4

1

2

3

4 Figure 3-1. ECMP Organization Chart

5
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-5

1 3.1.1 Companies’ Project Sponsor 

2 • Responsible for Project delivery. Ensures effective coordination occurs between 

3 the Companies Project Manager and Environmental Compliance Manager with 

4 the BLM’s Project Manager and CIC and the Construction Contractor’s Project 

5 Manager to verify environmental compliance meets the requirements of all 

6 applicable laws, permits, and agreements. 

7 • Informs the Construction Contractor(s) they are contractually bound to comply 

8 with all of the Project’s environmental requirements including the implementation 

9 of the ECMP.

10 3.1.2 Companies’ Project Manager

11 • Responsible for all aspects of Project execution and completion.

12 • Enforces Construction Contractor(s) compliance with all environmental laws and 

13 regulations, including the right-of-way grant, POD, permits (federal, state, and 

14 local) and landowner agreements, during the construction of the Project.

15 • Manages Companies’ Construction Inspector and Environmental Compliance 

16 Manager.

17 Reporting

18 • Reviews and evaluates weekly reports. 

19 • Reports environmental compliance violations to Companies’ Project Sponsor as 

20 needed.

21 Variances 

22 • Reviews and approves Construction Contractor’s written variance requests for 

23 submittal to the CIC.

24 • Delegates authority to approve submittal of Construction Contractor’s variance 

25 requests to the BLM as needed.

26 3.1.3 Environmental Compliance Manager

27 • Facilitates oversight and coordination of Construction Contractor’s compliance 

28 with all environmental laws and regulations, including the right-of-way 

29 grant/special use authorization, POD, permits (federal, state, and local) and 

30 landowner agreements, during the construction of the Project.

31 • Coordinates with Companies’ Project Manager and Construction Inspector (see 

32 Section 3.1.4 – Companies’ Construction Inspector), the Construction 

33 Contractor’s environmental inspection/compliance personnel (see Section 3.3.7-

34 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator, and the CIC 

35 (see Section 3.3.2- Compliance Inspection Contractor) on a regular basis to 

36 evaluate environmental compliance with the Project. 

37 • Monitors completion of all preconstruction and post-construction commitments.

38 • Serves as the primary Companies’ contact regarding environmental issues.

39 • Communicates environmental compliance issues to the CIC and tracks resolution 

40 of issues to completion.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-6

1 • Coordinates field inspection visits with Construction Contractor(s).

2 • Maintains coordination with the Companies’ environmental department 

3 throughout the life of the Project.

4 • Coordinates submittal of all Work Authorizations associated with the BLM NTP

5 Reporting

6 • Provides updates of environmental compliance, including corrective actions, to 

7 the Project Manager. 

8 • Compiles and distributes environmental permit and plan updates to Companies’

9 staff and the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Coordinator.

10 • Reviews all Construction Contractor(s) derived environmental documentation 

11 including, but not limited to, site specific environmental plans, environmental 

12 plans, variance requests, daily reports, and weekly reports. 

13 Variances 

14 • Provides review and comments of written variance requests from the 

15 Construction Contractor(s). 

16 • Submits completed variances to the Companies’ Project Manager for review, 

17 approval, and submission to the CIC. 

18 3.1.4 Companies’ Construction Inspector

19 • Observes, witnesses, and monitors the construction activities of the Construction 

20 Contractor(s) for compliance to the engineering contract documents, plans, 

21 standards, and specifications, to ensure construction quality.

22 • Understands the Project’s environmental requirements especially as they relate 

23 to specific construction activities. 

24 • Coordinates with Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager regarding 

25 specific work activities scheduled to occur in sensitive resource areas that may 

26 require additional environmental oversight.

27 • Provides technical explanations of construction processes to Companies’

28 Environmental Compliance Manager as needed. 

29 • Attends environmental training class. 

30 Reporting

31 • Reviews for accuracy and adequacy certain environmental compliance 

32 documents prepared by the Construction Contractor(s) that could include, but are 

33 not limited to, Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasures Plan, Stormwater 

34 Pollution Prevention Plan(s), and emergency communications contact list.

35 • Provides any observations regarding environmental compliance to Construction 

36 Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator.

37 3.2 BLM and USFS

38 The objective of the BLM and USFS is to ensure right-of-way grant and special-use 

39 permit compliance, respectively, during construction, operation, and maintenance 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-7

1 phases. The CIC shall represent the BLM and USFS during the construction and 

2 reclamation phases to help ensure right-of-way grant and special use authorization

3 compliance and ensure environmental impacts do not exceed those analyzed in the 

4 Final EIS, and approved in the POD. The CIC assists the BLM and USFS by providing 

5 regular and consistent field observations, documenting his/her findings, processing and 

6 approving Level 1 Variance requests and/or other deviations for which authority has 

7 been delegated to the CIC, and working with the Companies and Construction 

8 Contractor(s) to identify compliance issues and maintain compliance during construction 

9 of the Project.

10 The CIC shall work under the direct supervision and control of the BLM. No direction 

11 with respect to times, places or manner of conducting monitoring shall be taken from the 

12 Companies or Construction Contractor(s); provided, however, that the CIC and the 

13 Companies work together to support the Project’s timely and effective construction. If 

14 the CIC determines an action is in noncompliance, the CIC has the authority to issue an 

15 immediate temporary suspension or work stoppage order (WSO) for that specific work 

16 activity. However, all efforts shall be made to coordinate closely with the Companies

17 and Construction Contractor(s) to report and document compliance concerns not 

18 otherwise identified by these parties, giving them the opportunity to resolve the 

19 concerns. Every effort shall be made to limit any work stoppage to situations involving 

20 immediate threats to sensitive resources, or emergency situations. The CIC is not, at 

21 any time or way, otherwise authorized to direct work undertaken by the Construction 

22 Contractor(s), with the exception of a WSO. If any additional environmental compliance 

23 oversight representative is required by agencies other than the BLM and USFS, their 

24 responsibilities would be consistent with those outlined for the BLM and USFS and the 

25 CIC as described in this ECMP, although their authority and enforcement would be 

26 solely applicable in their respective agency’s area of jurisdiction. 

27 It is not the role of the CIC to direct the work of either the Companies or the 

28 Construction Contractor(s). Rather, the CIC’s primary role is to observe work activities, 

29 and bring noncompliant situations to the attention of the appropriate party and offer 

30 recommendations on how to prevent noncompliance. 

31 3.2.1 BLM and USFS Authorized Officers

32 • Ultimate authority and decision maker for issues pertaining to BLM’s right-of-way 

33 grant or USFS’ special-use authorization.

34 • Supervises BLM Project Manager to verify environmental compliance meets the 

35 requirements of all applicable laws, permits, and agreements.

36 • Determines, in coordination with others, if any environmental noncompliance 

37 events, for which the Companies is accountable, qualify as violations to the terms 

38 and conditions of the right-of-way grant or special use authorization. 

39 • In accordance with 43 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 2807 and CFR 36 

40 CFR 251.60, suspends or terminates the right-of-way grant or special use 

41 authorization if the Companies and/or its Construction Contractor(s) do not 

42 comply with applicable laws and regulations or any terms, conditions, or 

43 stipulations (e.g., excessive or continuous noncompliance activities that 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-8

1 demonstrate a willful disregard for right-of-way grant or special use authorization

2 terms and conditions).

3 • Issues BLM/USFS decisions unless otherwise delegated to the BLM Project 

4 Manager.

5 3.2.2 BLM and USFS Project Manager

6 • Enforces Companies’ compliance with all environmental laws and regulations, 

7 including the right-of-way grant/special use authorization,, POD, and federal 

8 permits during construction of the Project.

9 • Responsible for ensuring that right-of-way grant/special use authorization

10 compliance during construction is done in a manner which facilitates timely and 

11 efficient construction while protecting the public interests and the environment. 

12 • Responsible for ensuring that environmental impacts do not exceed those 

13 analyzed in the Final EIS and ROD.

14 • Manages third-party CIC 

15 • Coordinates with BLM or USFS resource specialists for their technical expertise 

16 and input.

17 • Informs the Companies of any right-of-way or special use authorization violations 

18 due to environmental noncompliance and enforces their remedy.

19 • Reports major environmental compliance violations to BLM/USFS Authorized 

20 Officer.

21 Reporting

22 • Responsible to ensure that the Project Administrative Record is maintained 

23 accurately.

24 Variances

25 • If delegated by the Authorized Officer authorizes approval of Level 2 Variances 

26 or designates authority to others.

27 3.2.3 Compliance Inspection Contractor 

28 • Represents the BLM/USFS in the field for compliance activities.

29 • Verifies and reports Construction Contractor’s compliance with all environmental 

30 requirements and tracks all reported noncompliance events and their resolution.

31 • Tracks all Project construction disturbance for inclusion in an End of Construction 

32 Project Report (Section 8.2)

33 • Reports directly to the BLM Project Manager (or designees). 

34 • Remains assigned to the Project through completion of reclamation and initial 

35 revegetation or termination of the Project unless otherwise directed by BLM. 

36 • Reviews and understands the right-of-way grant/special-use authorization, Final 

37 EIS, Record of Decision, POD, and all other Project-specific environmental 

38 documents.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-9

1 • Maintains copies of the right-of-way grant/special-use authorization and POD and 

2 possesses a copy while on the right-of-way. 

3 • Verifies construction occurs as outlined in the POD, Final EIS, Record of 

4 Decision, and right-of-way grant/special-use authorization and within the limits of 

5 disturbances analyzed in the EIS.

6 • Performs compliance monitoring work in the field and from the CIC’s office. At a 

7 minimum, CIC or designated monitors are required to be on the right-of-way 

8 when activities involving the use of construction equipment have the potential for 

9 significant surface disturbance or harm to sensitive resources. Exceptions can be 

10 made should the CIC, using professional judgment, determine that reductions in 

11 presence would not adversely impact compliance oversight (e.g., when Project 

12 phases have approached conclusion; when on-site activities are minimal).

13 • Responsible to gather the collective understanding of the intent and desired 

14 results of application of site specific mitigation measures and convey findings to 

15 all parties, if needed. If discrepancies are found between parties, CIC is 

16 responsible to collaborate with the Companies and Construction Contractor to 

17 work towards a resolution. In some cases, approval from the BLM Project 

18 manager may also be required.

19 • Coordinates regular compliance monitoring during construction. 

20 • Discusses any potential compliance issues with the Construction Contractor’s 

21 environmental inspection staff as soon as possible.

22 • Provides recommendations to the BLM/USFS Project Managers on ways to 

23 resolve or prevent noncompliance issues prior to the commencement of work.

24 • Manages and supports CIC Field Monitors and coordinates their daily activities.

25 • At a minimum, meets weekly with the BLM/USFS Project Managers (or 

26 designees), in person or by telephone, to review construction activities and the 

27 status of compliance. 

28 • Communicates and coordinates regularly with Companies’ Project Manager and 

29 Environmental Compliance Manager.

30 • Coordinates variance requests with the BLM/USFS Project Managers and 

31 Companies’ Project Manager and Environmental Compliance Manager.

32 • Participates in meetings with the BLM/USFS Project Managers and Companies’

33 Project Manager.

34 • Conducts the final route review and develops final report documenting the status 

35 of the right-of-way and the final amount of construction disturbance.

36 • Performs activities as instructed by BLM/USFS Project Managers.

37 • Responsible for tracking actual acres of disturbance through completion of 

38 construction and final reclamation.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-10

1 • Performs post-construction reclamation monitoring as described in the Final 

2 Reclamation Plan in the POD (potentially conducted by a separate third-party 

3 contractor as determined by the BLM/USFS and the Proponent).

4 Reporting

5 • Documents all instances of noncompliance, or other problems that would 

6 reasonably be expected to result in environmental impacts. This may include, 

7 staking, flagging, or photographing problem areas, verifying locations with a 

8 global positioning system, and comparing them to the right-of-way grant/special9 use authorization and POD maps as specified in the Compliance Plan.

10 • Provides weekly summary reports of compliance inspection to the BLM/USFS

11 and the Companies via a secure, but mutually exclusive, website, with reporting 

12 due by Tuesday of the following week. In the event the CIC, BLM, or USFS

13 temporarily cannot obtain reports through the secure website, reports will be 

14 transmitted by mail, e-mail, fax, or compact disk. Weekly reports shall summarize 

15 the prior week’s activities and include a brief description of construction activities, 

16 compliance issues, any additional acreage disturbed resulting from variances 

17 and corrective actions taken and any foreseeable issues. 

18 • Reviews CIC Field Monitor’s daily reports for completeness and accuracy.

19 • Participates in all preconstruction meetings, safety meetings, safety training, 

20 environmental training, and other meetings called by the BLM or USFS, 

21 Companies, or Construction Contractor(s) which involve environmental 

22 compliance aspects of the Project. The CIC is responsible for preparing meeting 

23 notes that highlight all decisions made during these meetings.

24 • Provides post-construction reclamation monitoring reports to the BLM/USFS and 

25 Companies throughout the post-construction period (potentially conducted by a 

26 separate third-party contractor as determined by the BLM/USFS and the 

27 Proponent). 

28 Variances

29 • Coordinates with BLM and USFS Project Managers to review and approve 

30 variance requests.

31 • Authorizes approval or denial of Level 1 variances involving minor field 

32 adjustments within approved right-of-way that conforms to the POD, or 

33 designates authority to others, as delegated and approved by BLM and USFS 

34 Project Managers.

35 3.2.4 Assistant Compliance Inspection Contractor

36 • Performs the same duties as the CIC in the event that the CIC is not available.

37 • Remains assigned to the Project through completion of construction or 

38 termination of the Project unless redirected by BLM or USFS. 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-11

1 3.2.4.1 Compliance Inspection Contractor Field Monitors

2 • Assists CIC in conducting monitoring of construction activities as needed for 

3 biological, cultural, paleontological, or other resources and according to 

4 scheduled construction activities within environmentally sensitive areas.

5 • Represents the BLM/USFS in the field for compliance activities.

6 • Verifies construction occurs as outlined in the POD, Final EIS, ROD, and/or right7 of-way grant/special-use authorization.

8 • Verifies construction crews are provided with proper environmental and 

9 compliance training.

10 • Discusses any potential compliance issues with the Construction Contractor’s 

11 environmental inspection staff (see Sections 3.3.5 - Construction Contractor’s 

12 Lead Environmental Inspector and _3.3.6 - Construction Contractor’s 

13 Environmental Inspector) as soon as possible.

14 • Coordinates with the Construction Contractor’s Lead Environmental Inspector 

15 (LEI) and the Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager as their primary 

16 points of contact.

17 • Coordinates solutions for corrective action on noncompliance activities. 

18 • Verifies corrective action is performed for noncompliance activities.

19 • May temporarily stop activities likely to damage protected or sensitive resources 

20 and/or where those resources were intended to be avoided or protected.

21 • May temporarily stop activities for noncompliance.

22 • Conducts daily compliance inspection activities and develops daily reports.

23 • Attends safety and environmental coordination meetings to understand planned 

24 construction activities and any safety or environmental concerns.

25 • Does not direct construction activities in any way.

26 Reporting

27 • Submit daily reports to the CIC to document compliance or noncompliance with 

28 the Project’s environmental requirements.

29 3.3 Construction Contractor(s)

30 The Construction Contractor(s) will be contractually bound to comply with all laws, 

31 regulations, and permit requirements, including the mitigation measures and other 

32 specific stipulations and methods set forth in the right-of-way grant/special-use 

33 authorization, POD, Final EIS, and ROD throughout all phases of the Project. All 

34 construction personnel will participate in environmental trainings and work with the 

35 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspectors and staff to build the Project safely 

36 and in compliance with all Project terms and conditions; federal, state, and local laws 

37 and regulations; and all landowner agreements. If a noncompliance occurs, the 

38 Construction Contractor(s) will cooperate and implement a solution as soon as possible 

39 to resolve the situation.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-12

1 3.3.1 Construction Contractor’s Project Sponsor

2 • Responsible for Project completion in accordance with all environmental laws 

3 and regulations, including the terms, conditions, stipulations, and/or work 

4 authorizations related to the right-of-way grant, special use authorization, POD, 

5 permits (federal, state, and local), and landowner agreements. 

6 • Ensures its Project Manager promptly addresses any environmental compliance 

7 issues.

8 • Ensures effective coordination between his/her Project Manager and/or LEI with 

9 the Companies’ Project Manager, and Environmental Compliance Manager, and 

10 the BLM and USFS Project Manager and/or CIC to verify environmental 

11 compliance meets the requirements of all applicable laws, permits, and 

12 agreements. 

13 • Ensures the immediate and timely remedy to any environmental noncompliance 

14 events to the satisfaction of the Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager 

15 and the CIC.

16 3.3.2 Construction Contractor’s Project Manager

17 • Responsible for all aspects of Project execution and completion.

18 • Requires all Construction Contractor’s and subcontractor(s) staff adhere to 

19 compliance with all environmental laws and regulations, including the right-of20 way grant/special use authorization, POD, permits (federal, state, and local), and 

21 landowner agreements during the construction of the Project. 

22 • Coordinates with his/her Superintendent(s), and optional LEI, as well as 

23 Companies’ Project Manager and Environmental Compliance Manager on a 

24 regular basis to stay updated regarding the Project’s compliance with 

25 environmental laws and regulations. 

26 • Requires all Superintendents and Foremen follow directions of the Construction 

27 Contractor’s environmental compliance staff regarding maintaining compliance 

28 with all environmental laws and regulations. 

29 • Ensures Superintendents and Foremen implement measures identified to resolve 

30 noncompliance issues in a timely manner.

31 • Designates the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Coordinator (if desired).

32 • Verifies construction personnel participate in the environmental training program.

33 • Responsible for removal of noncompliant personnel, as necessary.

34 • Manages Construction Contractor’s Superintendent(s), Foremen, Environmental 

35 Crew Foreman, and LEI.

36 • Develops and distributes weekly schedules of construction activities.

37 • Immediately informs Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager and CIC 

38 of any noncompliance.

39 • Responsible for resolving noncompliance situations.

40 • Responsible for environmental compliance of all subcontractors.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-13

1 • Determines the need for scope variances and works with staff and Construction 

2 Contractor’s Environmental Inspectors to develop a formal request.

3 • Receives and review daily environmental compliance inspection reports from 

4 Construction Contractor’s environmental staff.

5 Reporting

6 • Responsible for making sure Companies is provided with reports in a timely 

7 fashion.

8 • Reviews and approves compliance reports for submittal to Companies.

9 Variances

10 • Reviews and approves written variance requests for submittal to Companies, 

11 CIC, and BLM or USFS.

12 • Can delegate authority to submit written variance request to others.

13 3.3.3 Construction Contractor’s Superintendent(s) 

14 • Primarily situated in the field to manage construction activities.

15 • Responsible for a segment or portion of the overall Project.

16 • Requires all contractor personnel follow directions of the Construction 

17 Contractor’s environmental compliance staff regarding maintaining compliance 

18 with all environmental laws and regulations, including the right-of-way 

19 grant/special use authorization, POD, permits (federal, state, and local), and 

20 landowner agreements during the construction of the Project. 

21 • Coordinates with the LEI, and the Construction Contractor’s Environmental 

22 Training Coordinator and Environmental Inspectors to ensure all construction

23 personnel for which they are responsible abide by all applicable laws, permits, 

24 and agreements.

25 • Attends environmental training programs produced by the Construction 

26 Contractor(s).

27 • Conducts regular meetings and training with construction personnel to review 

28 safety and environmental compliance practices. 

29 • Ensures measures identified to resolve noncompliance issues are communicated 

30 to construction personnel and implemented in a timely manner.

31 • Immediately informs Construction Contractor’s Project Manager of any 

32 noncompliance.

33 • Evaluates all compliance issues and ensures all supervisee’s involved with any 

34 construction activities complete the environmental training program.

35 Reporting

36 • Prepares report regarding measures taken to resolve any noncompliance events 

37 and submits them to the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting 

38 Coordinator.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-14

1 Variances

2 • Prepares written variance requests for submittal to Companies, CIC, and BLM or 

3 USFS.

4 • Can delegate authority to prepare written variance request to others.

5 3.3.4 Construction Contractor’s Civil Survey Supervisor

6 • Sets initial and maintains right-of-way and easement boundary stakes and 

7 flagging with agreed on Project flagging scheme.

8 • Delegates survey crews when necessary to work with environmental inspectors 

9 to adjust work areas to comply with environmental constraints.

10 • Communicates with Companies’ Construction Inspector and Environmental 

11 Compliance Manager regarding changes to right-of-way boundaries.

12 • Maintains a master set of alignment sheets for each spread in the appropriate 

13 spread office. The alignment sheets should reflect all restricted areas due to 

14 easement status, environmental restrictions, etc.

15 • Places signs for roads approved for use on the Project and those not approved 

16 for use on the Project.

17 Reports and Variances 

18 • Provides data and/or supports development of maps and legal descriptions for 

19 Project reports, variance requests, and documentation in the Project Record. 

20 3.3.5 Construction Contractor’s Lead Environmental Inspector

21 • Regularly inspects or coordinates the inspection of all construction activities for 

22 compliance with all environmental laws and regulations, including the right-of23 way grant/special use authorization, POD, permits (federal, state, and local) and 

24 landowner agreements, during the construction life of the Project.

25 • Has the authority to stop work when construction activities violate environmental 

26 conditions of right-of-way grant/special use authorization, permits or landowner 

27 conditions.

28 • Identifies sensitive resources and areas of concern prior to upcoming 

29 construction activities and coordinates appropriate measures with construction 

30 personnel accordingly.

31 • Acts as a resource and technical lead to Environmental Inspectors.

32 • Acts as a resource to construction personnel and explains environmental laws 

33 and regulations and how they are applied in the field.

34 • Serve as the primary point of contact for the third-party CIC Field Monitors.

35 • Coordinates appropriate corrective actions to resolve noncompliance issues.

36 • Coordinates daily with Environmental Inspectors to discuss upcoming 

37 construction activities, potential problem areas, and areas of concern.

38 • Assigns field inspection responsibilities to Environmental Inspectors.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-15

1 • Coordinates with Environmental Inspectors and construction personnel to provide 

2 information and facilitate regular communication among all parties.

3 • Inspects areas of concern identified by Environmental Inspectors and makes 

4 appropriate recommendations to construction personnel.

5 • Inspects erosion control devices/measures to ensure functionality and 

6 communicates erosion control devices/measures maintenance needs to the 

7 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Crew Foreman.

8 • Communicates with and Environmental Crew Foreman on issues needing 

9 resolution in the field.

10 • Performs post-construction reclamation monitoring as described in the Final 

11 Reclamation Plan in the POD, and as directed by the BLM/USFS and/or 

12 Proponent.

13 Reporting

14 • Reviews daily reports from field inspectors for completeness and accuracy and 

15 communicates action items or follow-up items to appropriate parties

16 • Forwards all daily and weekly reports to Construction Contractor’s Environmental 

17 Reporting Coordinator for storage and potential agency distribution.

18 • Compiles daily reports into weekly summary report.

19 • Submits weekly summary documenting construction activities and compliance 

20 issues to the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator.

21 • Provides post-construction reclamation monitoring reports to the Companies 

22 throughout the post-construction reclamation monitoring period, as described in 

23 the Final Reclamation Plan in the POD. 

24 Variances

25 • Conducts primary reviews of written variance requests from the Construction 

26 Contractor(s). 

27 • Communicates variance status to Environmental Inspectors and construction 

28 personnel.

29 3.3.6 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspector

30 • Assists in inspection of construction activities for compliance with all 

31 environmental laws and regulations, including the right-of-way grant/special use 

32 authorization, POD, permits (federal, state, and local) and landowner

33 agreements, during the construction of the Project.

34 • Conducts daily inspections of construction activities.

35 • Identifies sensitive resources and areas of concern prior to upcoming 

36 construction activities and coordinates with construction personnel to discuss.

37 • Acts as a resource to construction personnel to explain environmental 

38 regulations and how they are applied in the field.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-16

1 • Verifies construction work areas, access roads, and features such as wetlands or 

2 sensitive habitat are properly marked and flagged before work is done in the 

3 area.

4 • Identifies erosion, sediment control, and soil stabilization needs to protect 

5 sensitive resources and communicates them to construction personnel.

6 • Ensures erosion control or other measures do not inadvertently cause impact to

7 other sensitive resources.

8 • Acts as a point of contact for the third-party CIC Field Monitors.

9 • Informs Construction Contractor(s) of all potential and existing compliance issues 

10 and coordinates with LEI to determine appropriate corrective actions.

11 • Has stop-work authority when construction activities violate the environmental 

12 conditions of the right-of-way grant/special use authorization, permits, or 

13 landowner conditions.

14 • Identifies, documents, and oversees corrective actions to resolve noncompliance 

15 issues.

16 • Inspects erosion control devices/measures to ensure functionality and 

17 communicates erosion control devices/measures maintenance needs to the 

18 Environmental Crew Foreman.

19 • Follows up on the repair and maintenance of erosion control devices/measures. 

20 • Inspect and document reclamation and revegetation activities.

21 Reporting

22 • Maintain and submit daily reports to the LEI that document construction activities 

23 and associated compliance status for that day.

24 • Document the resolution of any compliance issues in daily reports.

25 3.3.7 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator

26 • Assists in tracking Project compliance with all environmental laws and 

27 regulations, including the right-of-way grant/special use authorization, POD, 

28 permits (federal, state, and local) and landowner agreements, during the 

29 construction of the Project.

30 • Coordinates with Companies’ staff, the Construction Contractor(s), BLM, and 

31 other relevant agency contacts and field inspection personnel on a regular basis 

32 to manage and track Project activities and ensure consistent communications 

33 Project wide.

34 • Maintains consistent communication between the Companies and all federal, 

35 state, and local agencies.

36 Reporting

37 • Receives daily/weekly reports from Construction Contractor’s environmental 

38 inspectors and documents them accordingly.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-17

1 • Maintains centralized storage of daily/weekly Environmental Inspection reports 

2 and makes reports available at the request of the BLM Project Manager.

3 • Reviews field reports for consistency and accuracy.

4 • Responsible for tracking problem areas and noncompliance reports (including 

5 hazardous materials spill reports) and ensuring follow up and resolution reports 

6 are filed.

7 Variances

8 • Tracks variances and communicates variance status with Construction 

9 Contractor’s Project Manager, Superintendent(s), and LEI.

10 • Coordinates processing and archiving of variances.

11 • Tracks progress and completion of any required field surveys (biology, 

12 archaeology, etc.) and technical reports to support variances. 

13 • Ensures variance requests are complete and accurate prior to submitting to the 

14 BLM.

15 3.3.8 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Training Coordinator

16 • Develops training program to facilitate compliance with all environmental laws 

17 and regulations, including the right-of-way grant/special use authorization, POD, 

18 permits (federal, state, and local) and landowner agreements, during the 

19 construction of the Project.

20 • Provides CIC and Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager with a 

21 course outline and all training material at least 30 days prior to any training for 

22 approval.

23 • Provides consistent roll-out of all training to all required personnel.

24 • Supports Environmental Inspectors and other environmental staff in providing 

25 routine trainings in the field.

26 • Maintains records of training for all construction personnel and submits to 

27 Companies on a weekly basis.

28 • Updates training curriculum as needed.

29 • Facilitates compliance with all environmental laws and regulations, including the 

30 right-of-way grant, POD, permits (federal, state, and local) and landowner 

31 agreements, during the construction of the Project. 

32 • Conducts training session for Companies construction and contractor staff at 

33 least 30 days prior to construction.

34 • Conducts preconstruction, refresher, and remedial training for Project personnel.

35 • Provides environmental compliance training to new personnel as they join the 

36 Project.

37 • Provides field reference guides to Project personnel with photos and details of 

38 sensitive resources and methods for impact avoidance.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-18

1 • Updates Project training modules using feedback from environmental inspection 

2 team, construction personnel, and Environmental Compliance Manager.

3 • Maintains records of training for all personnel.

4 3.3.9 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Crew Foreman

5 • Supervise environmental crew in daily installation and maintenance of erosion 

6 control devices/measures and all other design features of the project for 

7 environmental protection.

8 • Follows up on the repair and maintenance of erosion control devices/measures. 

9 • Ensure all areas of the right-of-way are in compliance with all environmental 

10 requirements/ permits held by the Construction Contractor(s).

11 • Work with the Construction Contractor’s environmental inspection staff to remedy 

12 any problem areas and assure all areas are in compliance.

13 4.0 PROCEDURES

14 4.1 Compliance Levels

15 Each separate activity that is inspected and documented in a daily report will be 

16 assigned a compliance level as defined below. Environmental Inspectors will assess 

17 potential noncompliant activities based on the extent and nature of actual impacts on a 

18 resource, the potential for additional impacts on a resource, the intent behind the action,

19 and the history of the occurrence.

20 4.1.1 Acceptable

21 All activities that are in compliance with the Project’s environmental requirements will be 

22 documented as acceptable.

23 4.1.2 Problem Area

24 A problem area is a location or activity that does not meet the definition of acceptable 

25 but is not noncompliant (see Section 4.1.3 – Noncompliance). The problem area 

26 category can be used in a variety of situations, including the following:

27 • A minor incident that is accidental or unforeseeable and is repaired in a timely 

28 manner.

29 • A location where the Project is not in direct noncompliance but is one where the 

30 inspector or monitor determines damage to a resource could occur if corrective 

31 actions are not taken.

32 • An activity that is isolated and determined unintentional that causes no direct 

33 damage to a resource.

34 If a problem area is corrected in a timely manner it will not be considered a 

35 noncompliance. If a problem area is found to be a repeat situation or has happened in 

36 multiple locations or is not corrected within an agreed on timeframe, the Construction 

37 Contractor’s Environmental Inspector or CIC Field Monitor may document the situation 

38 as a noncompliance. The Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspector will inform 

39 the Construction Contractor’s Foreman onsite of the problem area before issuing a 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-19

1 problem area report and discuss and agree on an acceptable timeframe for its 

2 resolution. The Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspectors will document 

3 problem areas and their resolutions in daily reports. Problem areas documented by the 

4 CIC Field Monitors will be reported and discussed with the Environmental Inspectors. If 

5 the problem area is not corrected in the agreed on timeframe, resource damage occurs 

6 or similar activities occur repeatedly, a noncompliance report may be issued.

7 4.1.3 Noncompliance

8 A noncompliance report will be prepared and issued by the CIC when construction 

9 activities violate the Project’s environmental requirements, result in damage to a 

10 resource, or place sensitive resources at unnecessary risk. Factors that will contribute 

11 to a noncompliance will be the extent of damage to the resource, the intent of the action 

12 and the determination of the action being a repeat occurrence. A noncompliance report 

13 may also be issued for direct disregard for Project requirements that do not directly 

14 cause harm to sensitive resources. Examples include using an unapproved access road 

15 or construction activities that cause ground disturbance outside of established Project 

16 boundaries. 

17 If the CIC or CIC Field Monitor observes a noncompliant activity they will notify the 

18 Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager and the Construction Contractor’s LEI 

19 and Superintendent immediately to discuss the situation prior to issuing a 

20 noncompliance report. If a noncompliance report is issued, it will include the name of 

21 the Construction Contractor’s Superintendent contacted and the time of the notification. 

22 In addition, a follow up report will be filed documenting the resolution of the 

23 noncompliance. If the Construction Contractor’s Superintendent is not immediately 

24 available or the severity of the situation requires immediate action, the monitor will 

25 inform the Construction Contractor’s Project Manager and the Companies of the 

26 noncompliance. 

27 If the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspection staff observes a 

28 noncompliance, they will notify the superintendent or Foreman onsite immediately. The 

29 noncompliance will be resolved immediately or within an agreed on timeframe that has 

30 been established by the Environmental Inspector and the Superintendent or Foreman. 

31 The Construction Contractor’s Environmental Inspector will also notify the CIC Field 

32 Monitor and document the noncompliance in a daily report that will be filed with the 

33 Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator and Companies’

34 Environmental Compliance Manager. The CIC will submit all noncompliance reports and 

35 reports documenting their resolution to the BLM or USFS Project Managers, Companies 

36 and Construction Contractor(s). The Construction Contractor’s Environmental 

37 Inspectors and the Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager and the CIC will 

38 work together to establish the appropriate corrective actions and timeframes for the 

39 resolution of a noncompliance. The Construction Contractor(s) Environmental Inspector 

40 will be responsible for communicating the corrective actions to the Foreman onsite. If 

41 necessary, the Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager and the Construction 

42 Contractor’s LEI and Superintendent will determine the level of retraining for the crew 

43 involved. Following a serious or repeat noncompliance the CIC, the Construction 

44 Contractor’s Project Manager, LEI, Environmental Inspector, and Superintendent(s), 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-20

1 and the Companies’ Project Manager and Environmental Compliance Manager will 

2 discuss the situation and how best to implement measures to prevent it from 

3 reoccurring.

4 4.1.4 Response to Noncompliant Activities

5 If the resolution of a noncompliance is not achieved through the process described 

6 above the following may occur:

7 Temporary Suspension

8 For incidents of noncompliance by the Companies or the Construction Contractor(s), 

9 that remain unresolved after the notifications described under Section 4.1.3 -

10 “Noncompliance”, the CIC or Project Manager may issue a temporary suspension to 

11 halt specific activities or all activities in a localized work area. The temporary 

12 suspension shall be issued orally and in writing to the Companies’ Project Manager or 

13 designee, and the Companies shall immediately provide notice of the temporary 

14 suspension to the Construction Contractor’s Project Manager or designee. 

15 Work Stoppage Order

16 If necessary, a WSO to temporarily suspend all construction activities may be issued 

17 orally or in writing by the CIC or Project Manager to the Companies’ Project Manager. A 

18 WSO would be appropriate in the event of serious noncompliance that could reasonably 

19 be expected to result in a risk of death or harm to persons or repeated violations of 

20 environmental requirements that have a detrimental effect to sensitive resources.

21 A conference call will be held with the CIC and BLM or USFS Project Manager, the 

22 Companies’ Project Manager and Environmental Compliance Manager and the 

23 Construction Contractor’s Project Manager and LEI within 24 hours to discuss the 

24 noncompliance incident and to schedule a face-to-face meeting, if necessary. The face25 to-face meeting will be held with all parties to discuss the noncompliance resolution 

26 within 24 hours of the initial conference call (excluding weekends and federal holidays). 

27 After conclusion of the conference call, or meeting, the Companies and Construction 

28 Contractor(s) will need to resolve the issue(s) identified by the BLM. Once they have 

29 resolved the issue and documented the resolution method, the Companies may file a 

30 written request with the BLM to resume activities. No construction activities shall be 

31 undertaken (except emergency or safety-related) until formal approval is provided by 

32 the BLM’s CIC or Project Manager. The BLM shall review and respond to the 

33 Companies’ written request to resume activities within 24 hours after receipt. The BLM’s 

34 response shall either approve the request or provide additional criteria that must be met 

35 prior to resumption of activities. Any additional criteria must cite the applicable law(s), 

36 agreement (s), and/or permit requirements.

37 Grant Suspension or Termination

38 In accordance with 43 CFR 2807.17(a) and 36 CFR 251.60, BLM or USFS may 

39 suspend or terminate the right-of-way grant/special-use authorization if the Companies

40 and/or its Construction Contractor(s) does not comply with applicable laws and 

41 regulations or any terms, conditions, or stipulations of the grant/special-use 

42 authorization (e.g., excessive or continuous noncompliance activities that demonstrate a 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-21

1 willful disregard for the terms and conditions of right-of-way grant/special-use 

2 authorization). Prior to suspension or termination, the Companies will be notified in 

3 writing and allowed a reasonable opportunity to correct any noncompliance pursuant to 

4 43 CFR 2807.18(a), and, if applicable, provided a hearing pursuant to 43 CFR 

5 2807.18(b) and _36 CFR 251.60. 

6 4.2 Variance Procedures (Unforeseen Circumstances)

7 The intent of this section is to inform the Companies, BLM, USFS, Construction 

8 Contractor(s), and other Project personnel of the variance request process to minimize 

9 potential costly construction delays. It is understood by the BLM, USFS, and the 

10 Companies that unforeseen circumstances will occur during construction. The need for 

11 realignments to the proposed route, access roads, and/or work areas not within the 

12 permitted Project right-of-way grant/special use authorization and not analyzed in the 

13 EIS analysis may arise. In addition, the need to make changes to construction 

14 procedures, schedule, and/or approved mitigation measures and other specific 

15 stipulations and methods may be required. Under these or similar circumstances, a 

16 variance will need to be filed and approved by the BLM and/or USFS to stay in 

17 compliance. 

18 Where Project changes occur on private lands, the BLM and/or USFS will review all 

19 variance requests to ensure compliance with the EIS analysis, NHPA, and ESA (see 

20 Table 4-1). In addition, written approval of the Project change must be obtained from the 

21 affected landowner and provided to the Companies who will provide it to the CIC for 

22 inclusion in the Project record and End of Construction Project Report (Section 8.2 –

23 End of Construction Project Report). 

24 Variance requests will be generated by the Construction Contractor(s) and provided in 

25 writing to the Companies who will then review the request. The Companies will evaluate 

26 the variance request and submit it to the CIC to be processed according to the process 

27 outlined herein. 

28 The Companies will be required to submit the variance and supporting documentation to 

29 the CIC. The CIC is responsible for providing supporting documentation and an on-the30 ground perspective of the requested variance to the BLM or USFS Project Manager or 

31 designee. The CIC is given authority by the BLM to approve a Level 1 variance (see 

32 Section 4.2.1) in the field. If a Level 1 variance request is approved in the field, follow up 

33 documentation will be provided by the Construction Contractor(s) to the CIC and the 

34 Companies. On a case by case basis the CIC may be given authority by the BLM or 

35 USFS Project Manager to approve a level 2 variance (see Section 4.2.2). Authority to 

36 approve or deny Level 3 variances requests (see Section 4.2.3) is provided to the 

37 appropriate BLM or USFS Project Manager or designee. The Variance Request 

38 Process is shown in Figure 4-1.

39 A variance request form will be developed by the Construction Contractor(s), reviewed 

40 and approved by the Companies, and the CIC and then reviewed and approved by the 

41 BLM or USFS prior to the start of construction. The variance request form will be 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-22

Figure 4-1. Draft Variance Request Process

1
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-23

1 incorporated into the preconstruction environmental training program. The variance 

2 request form will describe the variance request in detail, provide justification and 

3 documentation for the variance (including maps and photos), calculate the proposed 

4 permanent or temporary acreage affected, describe the original disturbance acreage 

5 analyzed in the EIS, and show the difference in acreage between the proposed variance 

6 and the original disturbance. It will also describe any potentially impacted resources and 

7 identify if additional resource surveys will be required. An example variance request 

8 form is included as Attachment A of this appendix.

9 The variance request may be implemented in the field as soon as the approved 

10 variance is received by the Construction Contractor(s). The CIC is responsible for 

11 communicating with the Companies regarding variance status and the Companies is 

12 responsible for communicating with the Construction Contractor(s) prior to modifications 

13 being made on the ground. 

14 Tables 4-1 and 4-2 summarize the different variance levels, potential uses, and 

15 approvals required in order to obtain the Project variance.

Table 4-1. Summary Of Variance Procedures on Private Lands

Variance Level Potential Use Approval

Level 1 Minor field adjustments CIC

Level 2 Modify POD1 CIC w/concurrence of BLM Project Manager (delegated 

authority by BLM/USFS Authorized Officer)2

NOTE: 1To include maps, tables or text adequate to describe variance. 2

Related to compliance with NHPA and ESA and consistent with analysis in the EIS

16

Table 4-2. Summary Of Variance Procedures on Non-Private Lands

Variance Level Potential Use Approval

Level 1 Minor field adjustments CIC

Level 2 Modify POD CIC w/concurrence of BLM Project Manager (delegated 

authority by BLM/USFS Authorized Officer)

Level 3 Amend right-of-way 

grant/special use authorization

BLM/USFS Authorized Officer

17

18 4.2.1 Level 1 Variance – Variances Accomplished through Field Resolution

19 A Level 1 variance is a minor field adjustment within the approved BLM right-of-way 

20 grant or USFS special-use authorization. A level 1 variance must meet the following 

21 criteria. 

22 • The area of activity or change lies within the approved right-of-way area, 

23 including temporary use areas.

24 • The area of activity or change was previously identified and analyzed in the EIS.

25 • The area of activity or change does not result in an increase in disturbed acres 

26 than was estimated in the EIS.

27 • The variance creates equal to or less impact on resource values than the original 

28 location and activity (e.g., does not involve higher density wildlife habitat than the 

29 planned site or impacts on populations of sensitive plants or impacts on cultural 

30 sites, etc.)
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-24

1 A Level 1 variance request will be initiated by the Construction Contractor(s) and 

2 submitted to the Companies for review. The variance request form will include all 

3 attached supporting documentation. On the Companies review and approval, the 

4 Companies Environmental Compliance Manager will submit the variance request 

5 package to the CIC for their review. The CIC has been given authority by the BLM to 

6 approve these variances in the field in consultation with the Companies’ Environmental 

7 Compliance Manager. However, the desired adjustments or deviations would be 

8 documented in a variance request form for inclusion in the Project record. The CIC 

9 would inform the Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager and the BLM Project 

10 Manager of these minor changes by including them in that week’s progress report. 

11 Examples of minor field adjustments include, but are not limited, to the following:

12 • Relocation of erosion control devices (note this could also require a modification 

13 to the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP);

14 • Locating temporary fences inside authorized work areas;

15 • Permitting water bars to be extended, if applicable, off the area designated for 

16 the transmission line, and into native vegetation “one dozer length” (this includes 

17 providing permission for construction equipment to work outside designated work 

18 areas);

19 • Allowing rubber-tired vehicles to use additional designated access roads (in 

20 addition to those approved in BLM/USFS approval documents) where 

21 improvements to the road would not be necessary (Note: not intended for 

22 authorizing additional haul roads for equipment and materials); and

23 • Temporarily (for not more than seven days) placing parts or other assemblies 

24 outside areas designated in the POD but within the authorized Project area. This 

25 does not include any surface disturbance associated with temporary storage.

26 Level 1 Variance Approval or Denial

27 A CIC can approve or deny Level 1 variance requests in the field. In some cases the 

28 CIC may consult with the BLM Project Manager. Level 1 variance requests may be 

29 approved if the results of implementing the changes are not significant and will occur 

30 within the granted right-of-way. If a Level 1 request is approved in the field by the CIC, 

31 signatures on the variance request form (see Attachment A) also will be required from 

32 the Companies’ Project Manager or delegate. A Level 1 variance request can be 

33 implemented in the field as soon as it is approved and signed by the CIC. In some 

34 cases a verbal approval can be given, and followed up with a written, signed variance 

35 document. The CIC will document the approved variance in the daily reports. 

36 If a Level 1 variance is denied, the CIC will inform the Companies’ Project Manager 

37 within 24 hours. The Companies’ Project Manager may choose to resubmit the request 

38 as a Level 2 variance, or to discontinue pursuit of the request. 

39 Level 1 Variance Distribution 

40 The CIC will give/send the approved Level 1 variance request to the Companies’ Project 

41 Manager, who will then distribute the approved variance on the construction side of the 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-25

1 Project. The CIC will provide the BLM and/or USFS Project Manager and the 

2 Companies with copies of approved Level 1 variances on a daily basis. The CIC will 

3 generate a report at the end of each week identifying all Level 1 variances approved 

4 during the previous week. 

5 4.2.2 Level 2 Variance – Variances Beyond Field Resolution, Not Requiring an 

6 Amendment to the Right-of-way Grant or Special-use Authorization

7 Level 2 variances pertain to requests that exceed the field decision authority of the CIC. 

8 Level 2 variances require approval by the BLM or USFS Project Manager (delegated 

9 authority from the authorized officers) and may require agency resource staff review or 

10 field examinations. On a case by case basis the CIC may be given authority by the BLM 

11 or USFS Project Manager to approve a level 2 variance These alterations generally 

12 involve Project changes that would affect an area outside of the granted work area, but 

13 within the area previously surveyed and/or analyzed for cultural resources, Section 404 

14 of the Clean Water Act, paleontological resources, and biological resources. Such 

15 variance requests typically require review of supplemental documents, correspondence, 

16 and records to be provided with the request. Examples include, but are not limited, to 

17 the following:

18 • Shifting extra workspace outside the approved construction corridor a short 

19 distance but within the area previously surveyed where overall disturbance type 

20 and acreage remains approximately the same, and no additional cultural, 

21 paleontological, biological resources, or invasive weed populations could be 

22 affected;

23 • Using of additional extra workspace outside of the previously approved work 

24 areas (within or outside the Project or off-Project right-of-way);

25 • Shifting temporary workspace to previously disturbed areas;

26 • Moving proposed culvert location(s) to better accommodate natural drainages 

27 (Note: may also require a modification to the SWPPP);

28 • Providing extra work space for topsoil and spoil material storage to prevent 

29 mixing of soils;

30 • Moving a range fence a specified distance laterally and permanently installing it 

31 to avoid proposed construction;

32 • Modifying seed mixes specified in the POD, typically due to unavailability (this 

33 may also require a modification to Appendix D – Framework Reclamation Plan; 

34 and

35 • Modifying of an access road due to safety hazards.

36 Variance requests may also be submitted for minor changes that would extend beyond 

37 the previously surveyed work area and corridor for sensitive resources. In these 

38 situations, additional cultural, biological, and invasive weed surveys would be required. 

39 Documentation of the surveys and other applicable correspondence would need to be 

40 submitted with the variance request. If sensitive biological resources are encountered 

41 during the additional surveys, documentation of consultation with applicable agencies 

42 must be provided with the variance request. All BLM- and USFS-approved stipulations, 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-26

1 and if applicable, the Terms and Conditions of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service’s 

2 Biological Assessment/Opinion must be adhered to, for the variance to be approved. 

3 Requests for exceptions from closure periods and areas will be submitted as Level 2 

4 variances to the appropriate land management agency office in which the exception is 

5 requested. Established exception processes on BLM-managed lands will be followed.

6 The agency, the CIC, or a contractor approved by Companies and approved by the 

7 agency will conduct the surveys and coordinate with any other agencies as necessary. 

8 Factors considered in granting the exception include animal conditions, climate and 

9 weather conditions, habitat conditions and availability, spatial considerations (e.g., travel 

10 routes and landscape connectivity), breeding activity levels, incubation or nestling 

11 stage, and timing, intensity, and duration of the proposed action. Variances will be 

12 submitted in writing no more than two weeks prior to the proposed commencement of 

13 the construction activity, to ensure that conditions during construction are consistent 

14 with those evaluated. The authorized officer, or designated representative, on a case15 by-case basis, may grant exceptions to seasonal stipulations, and has the authority to 

16 cancel this exception at any time. A good faith effort will be made to act on exceptions 

17 within 5 business days of receiving a request to allow for orderly construction 

18 mobilization. The CIC will conduct any required site visit and report status to BLM for 

19 consideration of the decision to accept or deny the request. Appendix I of the EIS lists 

20 land management plan seasonal stipulations that are applicable to the extent such 

21 species are present. There is no exception process on USFS managed lands; all 

22 closure periods will be adhered to. Any proposed modifications to closure periods will be 

23 discussed on a case by case basis with the USFS. 

24 A Level 2 variance request will be initiated by the Construction Contractor(s) and 

25 submitted to the Companies for review. The variance request form will include all 

26 attached supporting documentation.

27 To initiate a Level 2 variance request, the Construction Contractor will submit the 

28 variance to the Companies. The variance request form will include attached supporting 

29 documents. On the Companies review and approval, the Companies’ Environmental 

30 Compliance Manager will submit the variance request package to the CIC for review. 

31 Following review, the CIC will submit the request form and attachments to the BLM and 

32 USFS Project Managers. 

33 Level 2 Variance Approval or Denial

34 The BLM or USFS Project Manager, after consulting with the BLM and USFS Resource 

35 specialists, will provide the Companies’ Project Manager through the CIC written 

36 approval or denial (including an explanation) of the request by using the spaces provide 

37 on the form. The BLM and USFS Project Manager or BLM/USFS representative may 

38 request additional information, or a modification of the request, before the variance can 

39 be approved. The BLM and USFS Project Managers will make a good faith effort to act 

40 on exceptions within 5 business days from receipt of a complete request and provide 

41 the Companies’ Project Manager written approval of the request by using the space 

42 provided on the form.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-27

1 If a Level 2 variance is denied, the BLM/USFS Project Manager will provide the 

2 Companies’ Project Manager a written denial (including an explanation) of the request 

3 by using the spaces provided on the form within five business days from receipt of a 

4 complete request. The Companies’ Project Manager may choose to resubmit the 

5 request as a Level 3 variance request, or to discontinue pursuit of the request. 

6 Level 2 Variance Distribution

7 The CIC will give/send the approved Level 2 variance request to the Companies’ Project 

8 Manager, who will then distribute the variance on the construction side of the Project. 

9 The CIC will provide the BLM/USFS Project Manager copies of approved Level 2 

10 variances daily. The CIC will generate a report at the end of each week identifying all 

11 Level 2 variances approved during the previous week.

12 4.2.3 Level 3 Variance – Variances Requiring an Amendment to the Right-of13 way Grant or Special-use Authorization

14 The BLM Project Manager will assist the CIC and Companies’ Environmental 

15 Compliance Manager in determining whether a significant proposed change, outside the 

16 approved BLM/USFS right-of-way grant/special use authorization, will necessitate 

17 submittal of an amendment, or whether the change can be handled with a Variance 

18 Request Form. 

19 Any proposed construction modification the BLM/USFS Project Manager and CIC have 

20 determined to involve substantial deviations from the right-of-way grant/special use 

21 authorization will require a grant amendment/special use authorization modification in 

22 accordance with 43 CFR 2807.20/36 CFR 251.61. A variance requiring an amendment 

23 to the right-of-way grant or modification to the special-use authorization requires 

24 completion of an application on a Standard Form 299 and a decision by the BLM/USFS 

25 Authorized Officer. The Companies’ Project Manager will prepare the Standard Form 

26 299 with supporting documentation, including but not be limited to, a POD and map of 

27 the variance area (1:24,000 scale), and will forward it to the appropriate BLM/USFS 

28 office. The BLM/USFS will process the amendment application pursuant to 43 CFR 

29 2800/36 CFR 251.61. The BLM/USFS may request additional information, or a 

30 modification of the request, before the amendment can be approved. 

31 Grant/special-use amendments and modifications will be reviewed by BLM/USFS staff 

32 who will consult with other federal, state, and local agencies as needed. Grant/special33 use amendment or modification approvals or denials will come directly from the BLM or 

34 USFS. Approval of the grant/special-use authorization amendment also requires 

35 issuance of a NTP addressing the amendment, if a NTP is a requirement of the original 

36 right-of-way grant or special-use authorization. Examples of grant amendment or 

37 modification requests include:

38 • Route realignments or facility relocations onto BLM/USFS land not analyzed in 

39 the EIS and included in the right-of-way grant/special-use authorization.

40 • Certain project-wide changes to mitigation measures or reclamation procedures.

41 • Expansion of the Project area defined in the right-of-way grant/special-use 

42 authorization and POD.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-28

1 • Requests affecting sites potentially eligible for the National Register of Historic 

2 Places or involving state or federally protected species or their habitat.

3 • Use of an existing access road that will need modification in order to be suitable 

4 for Project construction activities.

5 5.0 COMMUNICATIONS

6 Communication between all parties will be critical to maintain environmental compliance 

7 throughout the Project. Communication at the individual segment (spread) level and 

8 Project-wide will help maintain a consistent understanding of the Project’s 

9 environmental requirements throughout construction. As specified in Appendix L –

10 Framework Traffic and Transportation Monitoring Plan of the POD, the Construction 

11 Contractor(s), the CIC, and all Environmental Monitors will maintain a communications 

12 network that consists of one or both of the following devices: two-way radios or cellular 

13 phones. This will allow for immediate coordination between all parties, which will 

14 facilitate resolution of any questions and/or monitoring requirements prior to 

15 construction activities. Oral communication will not substitute for written approvals.

16 5.1 Primary Inter-Party Communication Channels

17 The following relationships are not intended to limit communication on the Project, but 

18 demonstrate the primary channels of routine communication between parties for 

19 compliance related issues.

20 • BLM/USFS Project Manager – Companies’ Project Manager and Environmental 

21 Compliance Manager 

22 • CIC – CIC Field Monitors, Companies’ Project Manager, Environmental 

23 Compliance Manager and Construction Contractor’s LEI

24 • Companies’ Project Manager – Construction Contractor’s Project Manager, 

25 CIC, and Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager

26 • Companies’ Environmental Compliance Manager – Construction Contractor’s 

27 LEI and the CIC

28 • Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator – CIC or 

29 designee and Construction Contractor’s LEI

30 • Construction Contractor’s LEI – CIC, Companies’ Environmental Compliance 

31 Manager and Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator

32 and Construction contractor’s Environmental Inspectors 

33 • Construction Contractor’s Project Manager – Companies’ Project Manager 

34 and Construction Contractor’s Superintendents

35 5.2 Daily Communications

36 The Construction Contractor(s) will schedule and host daily morning meetings to review 

37 the location and extent of each day’s construction activities. Discussion should highlight 

38 safety and environmental issues, including a summary of activities that require 

39 monitoring by Environmental Inspectors and coordination with the CIC. Evidence of 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-29

1 proper approvals must be furnished for any activities scheduled to occur outside 

2 designated areas. Attendees should include the CIC (or designee); the Construction 

3 Contractor’s LEI, Construction Inspector, and Environmental Compliance Manager (or 

4 designee); and the Construction Contractor’s Superintendent(s) and Foreman(s). 

5 Meeting topics should include:

6 • Safety review

7 • Planned work activities and locations for the day

8 • Right-of-way and landowner restrictions

9 • Available access roads

10 • Reminders of environmental requirements specific to the day’s construction 

11 activities

12 • A discussion of procedures required for work in proximity to sensitive resources

13 • Upcoming, potential environmental issues.

14 In addition to the morning meeting, Superintendents, Foremen and Environmental 

15 Inspector’s should evaluate the need for and conduct “tailgate” meetings in the field to 

16 address issues that come up during the day.

17 6.0 TRAINING

18 6.1 Preconstruction

19 All contractor construction personnel will receive environmental training prior to 

20 commencing work on the Project. Training will emphasize compliance with all 

21 environmental laws including the stipulations in the right-of-way grant/special-use 

22 authorization and POD. Project-specific requirements and local issues pertaining to 

23 variations on different spreads will be addressed as necessary. Roles of Environmental 

24 Inspectors and third-party CIC Field Monitors, civil survey flagging methodology, 

25 specific landowner issues, biological and cultural mitigation plans, and approved areas 

26 of disturbance will be some of the major topics covered in the training. The Construction 

27 Contractor’s Environmental Training Coordinator will maintain a master list of all Project 

28 personnel that have completed the training and provide it immediately to the Companies

29 or CIC upon request. Hard hat stickers demonstrating attendance of the training will be 

30 issued to attendees.

31 6.2 During Construction

32 All contractor personnel that arrive after construction has begun will attend new hire 

33 environmental awareness and compliance training. The Construction Contractor’s 

34 Environmental Training Coordinator will be responsible for documenting all employees 

35 that have attended the training by maintaining a master list and provide it immediately to 

36 the Companies or CIC on request. 

37 Trainings will be held in the field as needed to address specific and immediate issues 

38 that come up during the work day. These meetings will include Superintendents, 
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-30

1 Foremen, operators and laborers, Construction Inspectors, and Environmental 

2 Inspectors.

3 Remedial training will be given to individuals and crews who are involved in 

4 noncompliant activities. These trainings will focus on the requirements pertaining to the 

5 noncompliance as well as measures to follow to prevent further noncompliance 

6 situations. These may be performed in the field or in a more formal setting to be 

7 determined by the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Training Coordinator and 

8 the Construction Contractor’s personnel.

9 Training for visitors will be held as the need arises and as appropriate for the type of 

10 visit scheduled.

11 7.0 REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION

12 There will be multiple forms and reports completed on a regular basis during the course 

13 of construction. The reports and forms will include:

14 • Daily Inspection Reports. Environmental Inspectors and CIC Monitors will fill out 

15 daily reports to record site visits. The reports will document construction activities 

16 observed with respect to environmental compliance. Environmental Inspector 

17 reports will be submitted to the Companies and the CIC and will be available to the 

18 BLM or USFS on request. CIC Monitor reports will be submitted to the Lead CIC. 

19 • Weekly Compliance Reports. The Construction Contractor’s LEI will produce a 

20 weekly report documenting the week’s activities and compliance issues to be 

21 submitted to the Companies and the CIC and will be available to the BLM or USFS 

22 upon request. The CIC will submit a weekly compliance report to the BLM/USFS 

23 and the Companies to be delivered to a secure but mutually exclusive websites.

24 • Variance Request Forms. Variance requests will be produced by the Construction 

25 Contractor(s), reviewed by the Companies, and submitted to the CIC for review 

26 before submittal to BLM and USFS for approval. It is critical that these forms include 

27 the proper accompanying documentation (photos, maps, alignment sheet exerts, 

28 drawings, etc.). The Construction Contractor’s Environmental Reporting Coordinator 

29 will track, distribute and archive all approved and denied variances. 

30 • Problem Area Report Forms. This section of the daily report will capture all 

31 information pertaining to a problem area that was documented that day. Photo 

32 documentation is required. A separate resolved problem area report may be 

33 required if the problem area is not resolved on the same day.

34 • Noncompliance Report Form. This section of the daily report will capture all 

35 information pertaining to a noncompliance that was documented that day. Photo 

36 documentation is required. A separate resolved noncompliance report may be 

37 required if the noncompliance is not resolved on the same day. 

38 • Weekly Training Log. The Environmental Trainer will submit a weekly training log 

39 to the Construction Contractor’s Environmental Training Coordinator and 

40 Environmental Reporting Coordinator with the names and signatures of all 

41 employees that went through environmental training that week.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013 C-31

1 Forms and reports should be submitted with digital photographs and additional 

2 supporting documentation as necessary.

3 8.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

4 8.1 Reclamation and Post Construction

5 On notification of completion of work by the Companies and the Construction 

6 Contractor(s), the CIC will coordinate with the BLM and USFS Project Managers and 

7 resource staff to conduct final on-the-ground inspections. Inspections will take place 

8 within 30 days to assure work was completed in accordance with the right-of-way 

9 grant/special-use authorization and the right-of-way reclamation activities as described 

10 in the Final Reclamation Plan. The CIC will be retained until reclamation and initial 

11 revegetation efforts are complete.

12 After construction reclamation activities are complete, the BLM and USFS will meet with 

13 the CIC to determine if there is any further work required. If no further work is required, 

14 the post-construction reclamation monitoring period will begin, as described in the Final 

15 Reclamation Plan. The Companies will retain the third-party CIC for post-construction 

16 reclamation monitoring activities described in Final Reclamation Plan.

17 8.2 End of Construction Project Report

18 Within 60 days of construction completion, the CIC will submit a final summary report 

19 (electronically in pdf format on two CDs; as well as two hardcopies for each BLM Field 

20 Office and national forest) to document the number of special status animals or plants 

21 taken, including the capture, displacement, mortality, injury and/or harassment by other 

22 means, during Project activities. This report will include the amount of actual temporary 

23 and permanent acreage disturbed compared with the original temporary and permanent 

24 disturbance acreage (Final EIS/POD), an electronic and hard copy compilation of all 

25 daily compliance reports (including digital pictures), variance requests (including 

26 approval/denial), temporary suspensions, and WSOs (including documentation of 

27 resolution). The Construction Contractor(s) will coordinate with the CIC to provide all 

28 applicable documentation for inclusion in the End of Construction Project Report. 

29 Completeness of the End of Construction Project Report will be verified by the CIC.

30 8.3 Construction Closeout Meeting

31 As required by the BLM and USFS, the CIC will coordinate a construction closeout 

32 meeting with the BLM, USFS, Companies, Construction Contractor(s), other field 

33 monitors and affected agencies to document all agency requirements have been met, 

34 determine areas of improvement, and ensure all issues have been satisfactorily 

35 resolved. This may include any noncompliance items that are in process.
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013

ATTACHMENT A

DAILY INSPECTION REPORT FORM

(To be Included in Final POD)
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013

ATTACHMENT B

VARIANCE REQUEST FORM

(To be Included in Final POD)
Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan Appendix C

January 2013

ATTACHMENT C

NONCOMPLIANCE FORM

(To be included in Final POD)
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX D

2 FRAMEWORK RECLAMATION PLAN

3
Appendix D

Framework Reclamation Plan 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

Rocky Mountain Power

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

 January 2013 D-i 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. D-1 

1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................... D-1 

1.2 Reclamation Goals and Objectives ......................................................................... D-2 

2.0 TOPSOIL AND SPOIL TREATMENT ................................................................. D-3 

3.0 RIGHT-OF-WAY RECLAMATION ...................................................................... D-3 

3.1 Seedbed Preparation .............................................................................................. D-3 

3.1.1 Seeding Methods ......................................................................................... D-3 

3.1.2 Seed Mixes .................................................................................................. D-3 

4.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION MONITORING AND REPORTING ............................. D-4 

4.1 Monitoring Activities ................................................................................................ D-4 

4.2 Reporting ................................................................................................................. D-4 

5.0 PLAN UPDATES ................................................................................................ D-4 

6.0 LITERATURE CITED .......................................................................................... D-5 

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 

Attachment A Species Abundance Ratings
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013 D-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 It is the responsibility of the Companies and/or the Construction Contractor(s), working 

19 with the Compliance Inspection Contractor (CIC) and BLM Project Manager, to ensure 

20 appropriate reclamation activities are implemented during the construction of project 

21 facilities and all federal, state, county, and other local requirements are satisfied. This 

22 document provides a template for the detailed Final Reclamation Plan to be developed 

23 by the Construction Contractor. 

24 1.1 Purpose

25 This preliminary reclamation plan describes the framework for the development of the 

26 final Reclamation Plan. The focus of this framework and the final Reclamation Plan is to 

27 restore areas that have been impacted by construction activities. The framework and 

28 final Reclamation Plan are applicable Project-wide and will be modified as per 

29 agreements with federal land-managing agencies, states, counties, or individual 

30 landowners. The final Reclamation Plan will be based on the final selected location of all 

31 Project facilities and will be submitted to the BLM and Forest Service prior to the 

32 issuance of the construction Notice-to-Proceed. The final plan will be developed by the 

33 Construction Contractor.”

34 This framework and the final Reclamation Plan incorporate the Stormwater Pollution 

35 Prevention Plan (SWPPP) that will be developed to comply with Clean Water Act of 

36 1972 (CWA) requirements. The SWPPP includes measures to address erosion and 

37 sedimentation that could result from ground-disturbing activities. The SWPPP is

38 standalone document and is incorporated by reference into this document and the final 

39 Reclamation Plan. Environmental protection measures (EPMs) contained in Appendix Z

40 of the Plan of Development (POD) are currently being discussed with the Agencies. 

41 When these discussions are completed, finalized measures will be listed herein and in

42 the SWPPP. Measures to control noxious and invasive weeds are described in 

43 Appendix E – Framework Noxious Weed Plan.
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013 D-2

1 1.1.1 Reclamation Goals and Objectives

2 The primary goal of conducting reclamation activities is to restore temporarily disturbed 

3 areas to pre-construction conditions to the extent practical. BLM reclamation goals 

4 emphasize the stabilization and protection of existing vegetation; minimal disturbance of 

5 the environment; soil stabilization; and the establishment of vegetation consistent and 

6 compatible with adjacent land uses. The goal of this framework is to provide a structure 

7 for developing and implementing the reclamation process, which is designed to restore 

8 temporary impacts to vegetation and resident soils and meet the following goals and 

9 objectives:

10 • Noxious- and invasive-weed control,

11 • Topsoil segregation and stockpiling,

12 • ROW restoration,

13 • Seedbed preparation and re-seeding, and

14 • Road reclamation.

15 Reclamation goals can be achieved through short- and long-term objectives. The short16 term objectives for reclamation are to stabilize disturbed areas to minimize potential 

17 erosion and sedimentation, establish temporary vegetation cover, prevent or minimize 

18 the introduction and spread of noxious- and invasive-weed species, and conserve 

19 suitable topsoil for long-term reclamation activities. The long-term objective of 

20 reclamation is to establish permanent vegetation cover that is similar to pre-disturbance 

21 conditions, self-sustaining, and, where applicable, resistant to the introduction or spread 

22 of noxious- and invasive-weed species. 

23 Measures to achieve reclamation goals include the following:

24 • Use proper soil-management techniques, including stripping, stockpiling,

25 and re-applying topsoil material at temporarily disturbed areas to restore soil 

26 horizons, use the existing seedbank(s), and establish surface conditions that 

27 would allow for the rapid re-establishment of vegetative cover. 

28 • Establish stable soil surface and drainage conditions and use applicable

29 best-management practices (BMP) that would minimize surface erosion and 

30 sedimentation and facilitate plant establishment. 

31 • Conduct pre-construction weed surveys.

32 • Perform pre-construction weed-control treatments at locations identified by 

33 pre-construction weed surveys (areas with large weed infestations within or 

34 adjacent to the Project ROW).

35 • Conduct post-construction weed monitoring for 3 years.

36 • Perform post-construction weed treatment (e.g., re-seeding and/or site 

37 restoration) to pre-disturbance conditions as documented by pre-construction 

38 surveys.

39 • Re-establishing topography to pre-construction conditions to the extent 

40 practicable.
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013 D-3

1 2.0 TOPSOIL AND SPOIL TREATMENT

2 The Companies and/or their Construction Contractor will minimize ground disturbance 

3 where practical; however, there will still be extensive areas of soil disturbance due to 

4 the nature of the work and existing topography. The final Reclamation Plan will identify 

5 locations where the management of topsoil is warranted, such as areas where topsoil 

6 supports native plant species or is important to a private landowner (e.g., agricultural 

7 soils). Generally, topsoil is considered the upper 6 to 12 inches, but this can vary by soil 

8 type. EPMs developed for topsoil removal and replacement are contained in Appendix Z 

9 of the POD. 

10 3.0 RIGHT-OF-WAY RECLAMATION

11 Reclamation of temporarily disturbed areas will involve replacing stockpiled subsoil and 

12 topsoil (where applicable), restoring pre-existing contours, installing permanent erosion13 control structures (i.e., water bars), and re-establishing vegetation. 

14 Some areas may not have extensive vegetation before Project construction, such as 

15 areas of shallow bedrock, shallow topsoil, steep slopes, or dry desert soils. These areas 

16 will be identified during pre-construction surveys and will not be re-seeded. Where 

17 appropriate, other reclamation activities (e.g., restoring pre-construction contours) will 

18 be conducted.

19 3.1 Seedbed Preparation

20 As part of the reclamation process, the Companies will prepare the seedbed to facilitate 

21 the restoration of vegetation to pre-construction conditions. General measures are 

22 discussed as follows, and habitat-specific seedbed measures will be provided in the 

23 final Reclamation Plan. 

24 Soil amendments are intended to minimize soil erosion and subsequent sedimentation, 

25 conserve soil moisture, provide cover, and moderate temperatures to facilitate the 

26 germination of seeds. Measures regarding seedbed preparation are contained in 

27 Appendix Z of the POD.

28 3.1.1 Seeding Methods

29 Unless otherwise directed, following seedbed preparation, seed will be applied using a 

30 broadcast spreader, drill, and/or hydroseeder depending on site conditions and seed 

31 mix. Seeding will be done after ground-disturbing activities are complete and at the 

32 appropriate time of year (preferably in the fall or, if fall is not an option, the spring). If 

33 there is a lag time between the end of ground-disturbing activities and seeding, BMPs 

34 from the SWPPP will be implemented. Measures regarding seeding methods are

35 contained in Appendix Z of the POD.

36 3.1.2 Seed Mixes

37 The choice of seed mixtures will be dependent on the existing vegetation types, the 

38 availability of commercial, weed-free live seed at the time of seeding, and landowner 

39 approval. The final Reclamation Plan will identify proposed seed mixes based on 

40 specific vegetation communities (e.g., sagebrush, grassland, etc.) and will include the 

41 species, cultivar (if applicable), percent seed mix, pure live seeds per acre, and the 

42 application rate. Proposed mixes will not be applied prior to landowner notification. 
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013 D-4

1 The Companies will re-seed some permanently disturbed areas as well. Roads created 

2 for the Project that are necessary for the long-term operation and maintenance of the 

3 transmission line are considered a permanent impact; however, the Companies will re4 seed these areas as an EPM. The intent of this re-seeding differs from the long-term

5 objective of establishing plant communities and habitat. Therefore, the final Reclamation 

6 Plan will also include one or more seed mixes that will be used as a BMP for 

7 permanently disturbed areas.

8 4.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION MONITORING AND REPORTING

9 The Companies will conduct post-construction surveys for a 2-year period following the 

10 conclusion of ground-disturbing activities. 

11 4.1 Monitoring Activities

12 Successful revegetation will be determined by monitoring reclaimed areas against 

13 existing conditions. Species and relative density will be assessed annually and 

14 compared to baseline data collected prior to the start of ground-disturbing activities.

15 Reclamation will be determined successful if the seeded areas have germinated and 

16 are demonstrating that they will, over time, achieve a distribution and diversity similar to 

17 pre-construction conditions. If after a second growing season problem areas have been 

18 identified (e.g., seed germination is lower than expected; prevalence of noxious-weed 

19 species), the area will be treated and re-seeded. Treatment may include additional 

20 seedbed preparation, control of noxious weeds, use of soil amendments, and/or use of 

21 another appropriate seed mix. Monitoring reclamation activities and remedial measures 

22 on private lands will be up to the landowner and agreements they negotiate with the 

23 Companies.

24 4.2 Reporting

25 The Companies will document pre-construction observations, construction reclamation 

26 activities, and post-construction monitoring on federally and state-managed lands in an

27 annual report. Annual reports will be prepared for submittal to federal or state entities 

28 that administer public lands in the Project area. The reports will provide a summary of 

29 Project reclamation activities and observations and include recommendations for 

30 additional corrective actions if necessary.

31 5.0 PLAN UPDATES

32 The final Reclamation Plan will be prepared. prior to the start of construction. As the 

33 Companies better define the construction order and schedule, the final Reclamation

34 Plan will be updated to include the schedule for baseline vegetation and weed surveys

35 and identification of any areas for pre-construction noxious-weed treatment, and a more 

36 detailed reclamation schedule and plan. 

37
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013 D-5

1 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

2 Forest Service (U.S. Forest Service). 1990. FSM Chapter 2840—Reclamation. 

3 Available online at http://www.fs.fed.us/im/directives/fsm/2800/2840.txt

4 ISDA (Idaho State Department of Agriculture). 2011. Idaho’s 64 Noxious Weeds.

5 Available online at: 

6 http://www.agri.state.id.us/Categories/PlantsInsects/NoxiousWeeds/watchlist.php

7 National Invasive Species Information Center. 2011. Invasive Species. Available online 

8 at http://www.invasivespeciesinfo.gov/whatis.shtml. Modified February 8, 2011.

9 NRCS (National Resource Conservation Service). 2009. PLANTS Database. Available 

10 online at: http://plants.usda.gov/java/

11 Sheley, R.L., and J.K. Petroff. 1999. Biology and Management of Noxious Rangeland 

12 Weeds. Oregon State University. Corvallis, Oregon.

13 University of Montana-Missoula. 2009. INVADERS Database System. Available online 

14 at: http://invader.dbs.umt.edu/

15 Wyoming Weed and Pest. 2008a. Wyoming Weed and Pest Control Designated List. 

16 Available online at 

17 http://www.wyoweed.org/Documents/DocumentPage/WYOMINGWEEDList.pdf

18 Wyoming Weed and Pest. 2008b. Declared List of Weeds and Pests: Wyoming Weed 

19 and Pest Control Act of 1973.
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013

ATTACHMENT A

SPECIES ABUNDANCE RATINGS
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix D

January 2013

ABUNDANCE RATINGS

Rare: 

Difficult to find; limited to 1 or very few individuals or colonies; < 1 percent of the total 

sample unit area; found in more than 1 place along the sample unit.

Locally Rare: 

Difficult to find; limited to 1 or very few individuals or colonies; < 1 percent of the total 

sample unit area; found at only 1 site within the sample unit.

Occasional:

Widely scattered individuals or colonies but not difficult to find; 1–5 percent of the total 

sample unit area; found in more than 2 sites within the sample unit.

Locally Occasional:

Scattered individuals or colonies but not difficult to find; 1–5 percent of the total sample 

unit area; found in only 1 or 2 sites within the sample unit.

Frequent:

Easily found but not dominant in any one place; 5–25 percent of the total sample unit 

area; a moderate number of occurrences over a good portion of the sample unit.

Locally Frequent:

Easily found but not dominant in any one place; 5–25 percent of the total sample unit 

area; a moderate number of occurrences over a small portion of the sample unit.

Abundant:

Easily found; dominant or co-dominant in 1 or more areas; > 25 percent of the total 

sample unit; a high number of occurrences over most of the sample unit.

Locally Abundant:

Easily found; dominant or co-dominant in 1 or more areas; > 25 percent of the total 

sample unit; a high number of occurrences over a small portion of the sample unit.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX E

2 FRAMEWORK NOXIOUS WEED PLAN

3
Appendix E

Framework Noxious Weed Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................E-1

1.1 Background ...................................................................................................................E-1

1.2 Purpose.........................................................................................................................E-1

1.3 Goals and Objectives.....................................................................................................E-1

2.0 NOXIOUS WEED INVENTORY ........................................................................................E-2

2.1 State Listed Noxious Weeds..........................................................................................E-2

3.0 NOXIOUS WEED MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................E-8

3.1 Identification of Problem Areas and Education ..............................................................E-8

3.1.1 Weed Management Personnel Requirements .........................................................E-8

3.2 Other Specific Stipulations and Methods .......................................................................E-9

3.2.1 Preventive Measures ..............................................................................................E-9

3.2.2 Reclamation Actions ...............................................................................................E-9

3.3 Agency Requirements ...................................................................................................E-9

4.0 MONITORING...................................................................................................................E-9

4.1 Reclamation Monitoring...............................................................................................E-10

4.2 Ongoing Monitoring .....................................................................................................E-10

5.0 PESTICIDE APPLICATION, HANDLING, SPILLS, AND CLEANUP..............................E-10

5.1 Pesticide Application and Handling..............................................................................E-10

5.2 Pesticide Spills and Cleanup .......................................................................................E-10

6.0 LITERATURE CITED......................................................................................................E-11

LIST OF TABLES

Table E- 1. Invasive and Noxious Plant Species Potentially Present in the Gateway 

West Project Analysis Area ..................................................................................E-4

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A BLM-approved Pesticides
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 1.1 Background

3 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

4 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

5 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

6 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

7 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

8 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

9 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

10 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

11 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

12 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

13 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

14 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

15 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

16 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

17 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

18 Wyoming.

19 The format and content of this framework Noxious Weed Plan based on the principles 

20 and procedures outlined in the BLM Integrated Weed Management Manual 9015

21 (1992). This Plan includes a discussion on 1) the plan purpose and goals and 

22 objectives, 2) the noxious weed inventory, 3) management practices, 4) monitoring, and 

23 5) the use of pesticides/herbicides. This document provides a template for the detailed 

24 Final Noxious Weed Plan to be developed by the Construction Contractor.

25 1.2 Purpose

26 The Wyoming Weed and Pest Council and the Idaho State Department of Agriculture 

27 (ISDA) have identified noxious weeds that occur within the states of Wyoming and 

28 Idaho. Some of these noxious weeds have the potential to occur on the Project right-of29 way. This framework Noxious Weed Plan provides methods to control the potential 

30 occurrence/infestation of noxious weeds during and following construction of the

31 Project. It is the responsibility of the Companies and/or the Construction Contractor(s), 

32 working with the Compliance Inspection Contractor (CIC) and BLM Project Manager, to 

33 ensure noxious weeds are identified and controlled during the construction of project 

34 facilities and all federal, state, county, and other local requirements are satisfied. The 

35 control of invasive species is addressed in Appendix D – Framework Reclamation Plan.

36 1.3 Goals and Objectives

37 The goal of this framework Noxious Weed Plan is to implement early detection, 

38 containment, and control of noxious weeds during Project construction. Information 

39 gathered during pre-construction surveys and provided by the BLM will be used to 

40 monitor and control the spread of noxious weeds that may pose a potential infestation 

41 threat during the construction and operation of the transmission line in areas on or 

42 adjacent to the Project. General preventive and treatment measures are described in 

43 Section 3.0 of this plan. Weed management environmental protection measures (EPMs) 
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-2

1 are contained in Appendix Z of the Plan of Development (POD), currently being 

2 discussed with the Agencies. When these discussions are completed, finalized 

3 measures will be listed herein. An evaluation of the effectiveness of the prescribed 

4 control measures (Section 4.0) also will be implemented during the operational phase of 

5 the transmission line.

6 Noxious weed is a legal term meaning any plant officially designated by a federal, state, 

7 or local agency as injurious to public health, agriculture, recreation, wildlife, or property 

8 (Sheley and Petroff 1999). The more general term invasive species refers to species 

9 that are non-native to the ecosystem under consideration and whose introduction 

10 causes, or is likely to cause, economic or environmental harm or harm to human health 

11 (National Invasive Species Information Center 2011). Invasive plant species include 

12 those legally designated as noxious, as well as additional species that may be 

13 considered noxious in some areas but not others, and other species that are already 

14 widespread.

15 Soil disturbances, such as those caused by the construction of the Project, could result 

16 in the establishment of new populations and spread of existing populations of noxious 

17 and invasive weeds. This section of the framework describes the known status of 

18 noxious-weed species within the Project area, the regulatory agencies responsible for 

19 the control of noxious and invasive weeds, and steps the Companies will take in 

20 preventing the establishment and spread of noxious- and invasive-weed species that 

21 are the result of Project construction activities. In addition to providing updated 

22 information contained within this framework, the final Noxious Weed Plan will include 

23 information on locations of significant weed populations within the Project footprint and 

24 proposed treatment methods as applicable. 

25 The focus of the Companies’ noxious-weed control efforts will be to prevent the spread 

26 of new infestations resulting from the Companies’ activities. The Companies are only 

27 responsible for the control of noxious weeds and invasive species that are a result of 

28 their construction-related, surface-disturbing activities. The Companies are not 

29 responsible for noxious weeds and invasive species that occur adjacent to Project areas 

30 or for controlling or eradicating a species that was present prior to the Project. For 

31 example, cheatgrass (Bromus tectorum) is widespread across large portions of the 

32 Project area. Eradication of these infestations is not the responsibility of the Companies 

33 and would not be attempted. 

34 2.0 NOXIOUS WEED INVENTORY

35 The noxious weed inventory for the Project will include 1) the identification of weed 

36 species designated noxious by the States of Wyoming and Idaho and having the 

37 potential to occur within the area affected by the Project, and 2) the gathering of 

38 information to identify specific noxious weed populations in the Project area, including 

39 pre-construction surveys along the Project right-of-way.

40 2.1 State Listed Noxious Weeds

41 Table E-1 contains a list of the noxious-weed species known or expected to occur within 

42 the Project area based on their recorded presence in the counties where the Project is 

43 located. The BLM and Forest Service use the most current Idaho and Wyoming state 

44 noxious-weed lists for managing weeds on federal lands. The final Noxious Weed Plan 
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-3

1 will include the most current noxious-weed species lists produced by the two states just 

2 prior to construction.

3 The State of Wyoming has designated 25 plant species as noxious (Wyoming Weed 

4 and Pest Council 2012) and the ISDA has designated 64 plant species as noxious. 

5 Idaho’s noxious weeds are divided into three categories (ISDA 2011):

6 • Statewide Early Detection and Rapid Response (EDRR) List: If weeds on this list 

7 are identified, they will be reported to ISDA within 10 days, and eradicated in the 

8 same growing season as identified.

9 • Statewide Control List: This list contains species that are known to exist 

10 throughout the state. When identified, a control plan will be developed by the 

11 county, with active control methods to be employed in no more than 5 years.

12 • Statewide Containment List: Weed list: This list contains species that are known 

13 to exist throughout the state. Weed control efforts may be directed at reducing or 

14 eliminating new or expanding populations, while known populations may be 

15 managed by any approved weed control methodology, as determined by the 

16 county.

17
Framework Noxious Weed Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-4

1 Table E- 1. Invasive and Noxious Plant Species Potentially Present in the Gateway West Project Analysis Area

Common Name Scientific Name

Invasive 

Exotic 

Species?1

Listed as Noxious2

Segments in Which Known or 

Likely to Occur2,3

State of 

Wyoming 

(Designated)

Wyoming 

Counties 

(Declared) State of Idaho4 Wyoming Idaho

Species on Wyoming or Idaho Noxious Weed List

Black henbane Hyoscyamus niger Yes -- Albany, 

Converse, 

Lincoln, 

Natrona, 

Sweetwater

Control All All

Buffalobur Solanum rostratum Yes -- Converse, 

Natrona

Control All 8, 9

Canada thistle Cirsium arvense Yes X Containment All All

Common burdock Arctium minus Yes X -- -- , 1W, 2, 4 All

Common St. 

Johnswort

Hypericum 

perforatum

Yes X -- -- 4 8

Common Tansy Tanacetum vulgare Yes X -- -- All 5, 7

Dalmatian toadflax Linaria dalmatica Yes X -- Containment All All

Diffuse knapweed Centaurea diffusa Yes X -- Containment All All

Dyer’s woad Isatis tinctoria Yes X -- Control All All

Eurasian 

watermilfoil

Myriophyllum 

spicatum

Yes -- -- Control -- 8

Field bindweed Convolvulus arvensis Yes X -- Containment All All

Hairy whitetop, 

Hoary cress

Cardaria pubescens Yes X -- -- All All

Houndstongue Cynoglossum 

officinale

Yes X -- Containment , 1W, 2, 4 4, 5, 7

Johnsongrass Sorghum halepense Yes -- -- Control -- 5. 7, 8

Jointed goatgrass Aegilops cylindrica Yes -- Converse Containment , 1W All

Leafy spurge Euphorbia esula Yes X -- Containment All All

Matgrass Nardus stricta Yes -- -- Control -- 5

Musk thistle Carduus nutans Yes X -- Control All All

Orange hawkweed Hieracium 

aurantiacum

Yes -- Converse Control -- 5, 7, 8

Oxeye daisy Chrysanthemum 

leucanthemum

Yes X -- Containment , 1W, 2, 4 4, 7

Perennial 

pepperweed

Lepidium 

lapathifolium

Yes X -- Containment All All

Perennial 

sowthistle

Sonchus arvensis Yes X -- Control All All

2
Framework Noxious Weed Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-5

1 Table E-1: Invasive and Noxious Plant Species Potentially Present in the Gateway West Project Analysis Area (continued)

Common Name Scientific Name

Invasive 

exotic 

species?1

Listed as Noxious2

Segments in Which Known or 

Likely to Occur2,3

State of 

Wyoming 

(Designated)

Wyoming 

Counties 

(Declared) State of Idaho4 Wyoming Idaho

Meadow 

hawkweed, yellow 

hawkweed

Hieracium pretense, 

H. caespitosum

Yes -- -- Control -- 7

Plumeless thistle Carduus acanthoides Yes X -- Control , 1W --

Poison hemlock Conium maculatum Yes -- -- Containment , 1W, 2, 3 All

Puncture vine Tribulus terrestris Yes -- Natrona Containment , 1W, 2 All

Purple loosestrife Lythrum salicaria Yes X -- Containment -- All

Quackgrass Agropyron repens Yes X -- -- All All

Rush skeletonweed Chondrilla juncea Yes -- Converse Containment -- 5, 7, 8, 9, 10

Russian knapweed Acroptilon repens Yes X -- Control All All

Russian olive Elaeagnus 

angustifolia

Yes X -- -- , 1W All

Salt cedar, 

tamarisk

Tamarix spp. Yes X -- Containment All All

Scotch broom Cytisus scoparius Yes -- Converse Control -- 5, 9

Scotch thistle Onopordum 

acanthium

Yes X -- Containment , 1W, 4 All

Skeletonleaf 

bursage

Artemisia tomentosa Yes X -- Control All 5, 7, 8, 10

Spotted knapweed Centaurea maculosa Yes X -- Containment All All

Silverleaf 

nightshade

Solanum 

Elaeagnifolium

Yes -- -- Control -- 8, 10

Syrian beancaper Zygophyllum zabago Yes -- Converse EDRR -- 5

Tansy ragwort Senecio jacobaea Yes -- Converse Containment -- 5

Vipers blugloss Echium vulgare Yes -- -- Control -- 8

Whitetop, hoary 

cress

Cardaria draba Yes X -- Containment , 1W, 2, 4 All

Yellow starthistle Centaurea solstitialis Yes -- -- Containment -- All

Yellow toadflax Linaria vulgaris Yes X -- Containment , 1W, 2, 4 All

Absinth wormwood Artemisia absinthium Yes -- Converse -- , 1W 8

Baby’s breath Gypsophila 

paniculata

Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Bull thistle Cirsium vulgare Yes -- Converse, 

Lincoln

-- All All

Bur buttercup Ranunculus 

testiculatus

Yes -- Converse -- All All

2
Framework Noxious Weed Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-6

1 Table E-1: Invasive and Noxious Plant Species Potentially Present in the Gateway West Project Analysis Area (continued)

Common Name Scientific Name

Invasive 

exotic 

species?1

Listed as Noxious2

Segments in Which Known or 

Likely to Occur2,3

State of 

Wyoming 

(Designated)

Wyoming 

Counties 

(Declared) State of Idaho4 Wyoming Idaho

Other Species

Cheatgrass/downy 

brome

Bromus tectorum Yes -- Albany, 

Natrona

-- All All

Chicory Cichorium intybus Yes -- Converse -- , 1W All

Common cocklebur Xanthium strumarium Yes -- Converse -- All All

Common crupina Crupina vulgaris Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Common mullein Verbascum thapsus Yes -- Converse -- All All

Common sunflower Helianthus annuus Native -- Converse -- , 1W --

Curlycup gumweed Grindelia squarrosa Native -- Natrona -- 1W --

Curly dock Rumex crispus Yes -- Converse -- All All

Dames rocket Hersperis matronalis Yes Converse -- , 1W, 2, 4 4, 5, 7, 9

Foxtail barley Hordium jubatum Native -- Sweetwater -- 3, 4 --

Geyer larkspur Delphinium geyeri Native -- Albany, 

Carbon

-- , 1W, 2, 3 --

Goatsrue Galega officinalis Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Gorse Ulex europaeus Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Halogeton Halogeton glomeratus Yes -- Carbon, 

Converse, 

Natrona,

-- All 5, 7, 8, 9

Iberian starthistle Centaurea iberica Yes -- Converse -- , 1W --

Italian thistle Carduus 

pycnocephalus

Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Japanese brome Bromus japonicus Yes -- -- -- All All

Lady’s bedstraw Galium verum Yes -- Converse -- 2, 3, 4 7

Meadow knapweed Centaurea nigrescens Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Medusahead Taeniatherum caputmedusaeYes -- Converse -- -- 8

Mountain 

thermopsis

Thermopsis montana Native -- Sweetwater -- 3, 4 --

Musk mustard, blue 

mustard

Chorispora tenella Yes -- Converse -- All All

Plains pricklypear Opuntia polyacantha Native -- Carbon -- , 1W, 2, 3 --

Redstem filaree Erodium cicutarium Yes -- -- -- All

Russian thistle Salsola iberica Yes -- -- -- All All

2
Framework Noxious Weed Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-7

1 Table E-1: Invasive and Noxious Plant Species Potentially Present in the Gateway West Project Analysis Area (continued)

Common Name Scientific Name

Invasive 

exotic 

species?1

Listed as Noxious2

Segments in Which Known or 

Likely to Occur2,3

State of 

Wyoming 

(Designated)

Wyoming 

Counties 

(Declared) State of Idaho4 Wyoming Idaho

Sandbur Cenchrus incertus Native -- Converse -- -- --

Scentless 

chamomile

Tripleurospermum 

inodorum

Yes -- Converse -- All 8, 9

Showy milkweed Asclepias speciosa Native -- Converse -- , 1W --

Squarrose 

knapweed

Centaurea virgata Yes -- Converse -- -- --

Sulfur cinquefoil Potentilla recta Yes -- Converse -- -- 5, 7

Teasel Dipsacus fullonum Yes -- Converse -- All

Wild licorice Glycyrrhiza lepidota Native -- Converse, 

Natrona

-- , 1W --

Wild oats Avena fatua Yes -- Lincoln -- All All

Wyeth’s lupine Lupinus wyethii Native -- Converse -- , 1W -- 1 Included in INVADERS database (University of Montana-Missoula 2009). 2 Source for status: ISDA 2012; Wyoming Weed and Pest 2008. ”—“= not listed. 3 Distribution based on INVADERS database (University of Montana-Missoula 2009), PLANTS database (NRCS 2009), and ISDA (2008). Distribution of native 

species is only shown for Wyoming counties where listed as noxious. 4 Idaho listing categories are explained in text.

2
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-8

1 3.0 NOXIOUS WEED MANAGEMENT

2 Regulatory agencies along the proposed transmission alignment, and specifically the 

3 BLM, have varying requirements for weed management. A pre-construction survey for 

4 noxious weeds will be conducted using the protocol established by the BLM’s Integrated 

5 Weed Management Manual 9015 (BLM 1992) and as required by the US Forest Service 

6 (USFS),

7 The management of noxious weeds will be considered throughout all stages of the 

8 Project including:

9 • Educating all construction personnel regarding the identified problem areas and 

10 the importance of preventive measures and treatment methods.

11 • Specific preventive measures to prevent the spread of noxious weeds.

12 • Pre- and post-construction treatment methods to be applied to areas of noxious 

13 weed infestation.

14 Following is a description of the measures that may be required for noxious weed 

15 management as directed by the BLM or State Quarantine Officer. Applicable measures 

16 will be agreed upon prior to the onset of any ground-disturbing activities, and this 

17 Noxious Weed Plan will be modified accordingly.

18 3.1 Identification of Problem Areas and Education

19 Prior to the initiation of construction activities, all construction personnel will be 

20 instructed on the importance of controlling noxious weeds. As part of start-up activities, 

21 the Construction Contractor will provide information and training regarding noxious 

22 weed management. The importance of preventing the spread of noxious weeds in areas 

23 not infested and controlling the proliferation of weeds already present will be 

24 emphasized. Prior to construction, areas of concern previously identified during the 

25 Weed Survey will be flagged by the Construction Contractor and reviewed by the CIC. 

26 This flagging will alert construction personnel and prevent area access until noxious 

27 weed management control measures, as described below, have been implemented. 

28 3.1.1 Weed Management Personnel Requirements

29 Weed management actions shall be carried out by a weed management specialist with 

30 the following qualifications:

31 • Training and experience in native plant taxonomy/identification;

32 • Training and experience in field ecology and plant community mapping;

33 • Training in weed management or Integrated Pest Management with an emphasis 

34 in weeds;

35 • Experience in coordination with agency and private landowners; and,

36 • Recent attendance at a BLM-approved noxious weed training course
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-9

1 3.2 Other Specific Stipulations and Methods

2 3.2.1 Preventive Measures

3 Preventive measures will be implemented to prevent the spread of noxious weeds 

4 during the construction activities, as well as during reclamation and rehabilitation efforts. 

5 Detailed information regarding reclamation, along with the control of noxious plant 

6 species, is contained in Appendix Z of the POD. Prevention and control methods may 

7 include mechanical, cultural, biological, or chemical measures to prevent and control 

8 noxious weeds associated with Project activities. The weed specialist working in 

9 conjunction with the BLM and CIC will identify areas where noxious weed control

10 measures will be implemented.

11 3.2.2 Reclamation Actions

12 As specified in Appendix D of the POD, areas where weed control measures have been 

13 implemented and require post-construction reclamation actions (i.e., seeding) will follow 

14 the specific stipulations and methods presented as EPMs contained in Appendix Z of 

15 the POD.

16 3.3 Agency Requirements

17 Noxious weeds will be monitored and controlled during both construction and operation 

18 of the Project. Noxious weeds identified within the Project area will be reported to the 

19 applicable land-managing agency in whose jurisdiction the weeds occur. The 

20 appropriate weed control procedures, including target species, timing of control, and 

21 method of control, will be determined in consultation with the applicable land-managing 

22 agency. If herbicides are considered for use to control noxious weeds, the type of 

23 herbicide and methods of use would be approved by the applicable land-managing 

24 agency prior to their use. Monitoring surveys will be conducted following treatment of 

25 infected areas. These monitoring surveys are expected to occur in the fall (August–

26 September) and would be conducted following the same methods as the pre27 construction survey. Annual herbicide spraying would be planned and coordinated with 

28 the applicable agencies (based on the results of the prior years’ survey data) to ensure 

29 spraying is conducted only where necessary, in areas approved for herbicide use, at the 

30 proper growing period, during favorable environmental conditions, and using only the 

31 appropriate and agency approved chemicals to control targeted species. 

32 The Companies may be able to take advantage of any existing cooperative agreements 

33 between the land-managing agencies and the counties by providing the funds required 

34 for county personnel to implement the necessary weed control procedures. If not, the 

35 Companies will be responsible for providing the necessary personnel or hiring a 

36 Contractor to implement the weed control procedures with the qualifications as 

37 described in Section 3.1.

38 4.0 MONITORING

39 A weed management specialist, contracted by the Companies, will monitor the Project

40 and any other areas of disturbance associated with the Project for a period not to 

41 exceed 5 years. Monitoring will be conducted annually in the fall, more specifically 

42 during the life cycle of the species identified during pre-construction inventories. This 
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-10

1 monitoring may coincide with the reclamation monitoring identified and outlined in 

2 Appendix D of the POD. Growing seasons will vary from year to year, and consequently

3 the length of monitoring will vary as well.

4 4.1 Reclamation Monitoring

5 During reclamation monitoring, the Companies, or the representative contractor(s) for 

6 the Companies, will initiate monitoring of previously identified affected/disturbed areas 

7 during the first spring following construction and proceed with monitoring during 

8 subsequent intervals.

9 Noxious weed monitoring will occur annually for up to 3 years following completion of 

10 each segment of the Project. In addition, noxious weed conditions will be included in the 

11 evaluations of revegetation success as described in Appendix D of the POD. The 

12 Companies will document their observations following the above noted field inspections 

13 and make these monitoring reports available to the local, state and federal agencies, as 

14 required.

15 Areas where the spread of a noxious weed infestation is noted, particularly in previously 

16 unaffected locations, will be further evaluated to determine if these areas require 

17 remedial action and additional treatment. The Companies will identify such areas to the 

18 agencies by state, county, and milepost (or nearest transmission structure number) and 

19 will record any additional noxious weed control treatments. A report summarizing right20 of-way stability, revegetation progress, percent of cover, and weed infestation will be 

21 provided to the BLM as described in Appendix D of the POD.

22 4.2 Ongoing Monitoring

23 The Companies will consult with the agencies and counties should they have a concern 

24 pertaining to noxious weeds within their jurisdiction. The agencies may also contact the 

25 Companies to report on the presence of noxious weeds. The Companies will control 

26 weeds on a case-by-case basis, per previous agreements or contracts, the Companies 

27 will implement suitable and timely measures within the right-of-way to address the weed 

28 threat, as well as to suppress and help control new infestations that occur solely within 

29 the right-of-way, insofar as possible.

30 5.0 PESTICIDE APPLICATION, HANDLING, SPILLS, AND CLEANUP

31 5.1 Pesticide Application and Handling

32 The list of pesticides to be used (see Attachment A) will be reviewed and approved by 

33 the BLM and USFS, and pesticide application will be based on information gathered 

34 from the Weed Districts and agencies. Before application, all required permits from the 

35 local authorities will be obtained. Permits may contain additional terms and conditions 

36 that go beyond the scope of this management plan. Application of pesticides will follow 

37 the EPMs contained in Appendix Z of the POD. 

38 5.2 Pesticide Spills and Cleanup 

39 All reasonable precautions will be taken to avoid pesticide spills. EPMs describing 

40 pesticide spills and cleanup, worker safety, and spill reporting are presented in 

41 Appendix Z of the POD.
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-11

1 Additional information regarding the handling of hazardous materials may be found in 

2 Appendix P – Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan and Appendix G -

3 Framework Spill Prevention, Containment and Countermeasures Plan. 

4 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

5 BLM (Bureau of Land Management). 1992. Weed Management Manual (Manual 9015). 

6 Available online at: http://www.blm.gov/ca/st/en/prog/weeds/9015.html

7 BLM. 2007a. Final Vegetation Treatments Using Herbicides Programmatic 

8 Environmental Impact Statement. FES 07-21. USDI BLM. Available online at 

9 http://www.blm.gov/wo/st/en/prog/more/veg_eis.html

10 BLM. 2007b. Chemical Pest Control Manual (Manual 9011). Available online at: 

11 http://www.blm.gov/ca/st/en/prog/weeds/9011.html

12 ISDA (Idaho State Department of Agriculture). 2011. Idaho’s 64 Noxious Weeds. 

13 Available online at:

14 http://www.agri.state.id.us/Categories/PlantsInsects/NoxiousWeeds/watchlist.php

15 NRCS (National Resource Conservation Service). 2009. PLANTS Database. Available 

16 online at: http://plants.usda.gov/java/

17 University of Montana-Missoula. 2009. INVADERS Database System. Available online 

18 at: http://invader.dbs.umt.edu/

19 Wyoming Weed and Pest Council. 2008a. Wyoming Weed and Pest Control Designated 

20 List. Available online at 

21 http://www.wyoweed.org/Documents/DocumentPage/WYOMINGWEEDList.pdf

22 Wyoming Weed and Pest Council. 2008b. Declared List of Weeds and Pests: Wyoming 

23 Weed and Pest Control Act of 1973.
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013

ATTACHMENT A

BLM-APPROVED PESTICIDES
Framework Reclamation Plan Appendix E

January 2013 E-1

BLM-APPROVED PESTICIDES

• 2,4-D

• Bromacil

• Chlorsulfuron

• Clopyralid

• Dicamba

• Diuron

• Glyphosate

• Hexazinone

• Imazapyr

• Metsulfuron methyl

• Picloram

• Sulfometuron methyl

• Tebuthiuron

• Triclopyr
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX F

2 FRAMEWORK STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

3
Appendix F

Framework Stormwater Pollution 

Prevention Plan 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Appendix F

 January 2013 F-i 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... F-1 

2.0 PURPOSE ......................................................................................................................... F-1 

3.0 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS AND IMPLEMENTATION ......................................... F-2 

4.0 PROJECT MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... F-3 

5.0 OTHER SPECIFIC STIPULATIONS AND METHODS ..................................................... F-3 

6.0 MITIGATION MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, REPAIR, AND MONITORING ................ F-3 

7.0 TRAINING ......................................................................................................................... F-4 

8.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER MANAGEMENT ............................................ F-4 
Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Appendix F

January 2013 F-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project) consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 In compliance with criteria in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s (USEPA’s) 

19 Clean Water Act, all construction site operators engaged in clearing, grading, and 

20 excavating activities that disturb one acre or more must obtain a National Pollutant 

21 Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit for stormwater discharges (Code of 

22 Federal Regulations, Title 40, Parts 122 and 123). NPDES permits (also called 

23 Construction General Permits) are issued by EPA or similar authorized state entity 

24 following submittal of a Notice of Intent (NOI) for construction activities, and preparation 

25 of a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) that describes how erosion and 

26 sediment transport will be minimized to adjacent waterbodies. Measures to ensure that 

27 construction activities comply with state and EPA requirements for stormwater 

28 management to be incorporated into the SWPPP are outlined in this plan. This 

29 document provides a template for the detailed Final SWPPP Plan to be developed by 

30 the Construction Contractor.

31 2.0 PURPOSE

32 The purpose of a SWPPP is to identify and implement stormwater pollution prevention 

33 measures to reduce the quantity of impacted runoff, and to deal with runoff in a manner 

34 minimizing environmental impacts during construction, operation, and maintenance of 

35 the Project. 

36 A SWPPP is needed to minimize the volume of contaminated runoff, including sediment 

37 runoff, and to implement mitigation measures in a manner minimizing environmental 

38 impacts. Temporary stabilization methods (silt-fences, straw bales, etc.) are not 

39 guaranteed or fail-safe measures without regular maintenance and field inspection 

40 throughout construction activities. In addition to conventional methods of erosion control 

41 there are numerous new and improved products and the Construction Contractor is 

42 encouraged to review these progressive or improved materials in the development and 

43 implementation of a SWPPP.
Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Appendix F

January 2013 F-2

1 The proper implementation of mitigation measures associated with a SWPPP is 

2 imperative during all construction activities. These activities will be conducted in an 

3 environmentally sensitive and responsible manner so no discharge of sediment or 

4 contaminants may be conveyed as either direct or indirect discharge to wetlands, 

5 waters of the United States, or the States of Wyoming and Idaho Waters.

6 Development, implementation, and maintenance of the SWPPP will provide the 

7 Construction Contractor with the framework for reducing soil erosion and minimizing 

8 pollutants in stormwater during construction. The SWPPP will: 

9 • Define the characteristics of the site and the type of construction that will be 

10 occurring.

11 • Describe the practices that will be implemented to control erosion and the 

12 release of pollutants in stormwater.

13 • Create an implementation schedule to ensure the practices described in the 

14 SWPPP are in fact implemented, and to evaluate the plan’s effectiveness in 

15 reducing erosion, sediment, and pollutant levels in stormwater discharge from the 

16 site.

17 • Describe the final stabilization/termination design to minimize erosion and 

18 prevent stormwater impacts after construction is complete.

19 3.0 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS AND IMPLEMENTATION

20 Before construction begins, the Construction Contractor will be responsible for 

21 developing a SWPPP, and obtaining coverage under the NPDES General Permit by 

22 filing an NOI and appropriate fee with the USEPA Region 10 for Idaho and the Wyoming 

23 Department of Environmental Quality (WDEQ) in accordance with NOI instructions. The 

24 Construction Contractor will be responsible for implementing a site-specific SWPPP and 

25 is required to perform routine inspections throughout the duration of construction 

26 activities.

27 The primary intent of the erosion and sediment control measures is to control and 

28 minimize erosion at the source. For the Project, the main source of potential stormwater 

29 contamination will be erosion of soils from construction activities. It will be the 

30 responsibility of the Construction Contractor to implement erosion control measures 

31 where necessary, in order to minimize pollutants in stormwater, and to keep the Project

32 in compliance with USEPA, WDEQ, and Idaho Department of Environmental Quality

33 regulations.

34 A copy of the SWPPP shall remain with the Construction Manager on the construction 

35 site or at a staging area(s), and be readily available while the transmission line and 

36 substations are under construction, from the start of construction activities until 

37 completion of reclamation for the Project. 

38 The Construction Contractor must retain a set of construction site maps for the duration 

39 of the Project, and for 3 years after the Notice of Termination, that delineate the 

40 following items:

41 • Areas of soil disturbance that have been stabilized,
Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Appendix F

January 2013 F-3

1 • Areas to be graded along with a time schedule,

2 • Areas of potential soil erosion where control practices will be implemented,

3 • Types of control practices and time schedule for implementation,

4 • Locations of any post-construction projects, and

5 • Copies of all inspections performed over the duration of the Project.

6 4.0 PROJECT MODIFICATIONS

7 The Construction Contractor is responsible for maintaining an up-to-date SWPPP and 

8 shall amend the SWPPP whenever there is a change in construction or operations that 

9 may affect the discharge of pollutants to surface waters or groundwater. The SWPPP 

10 shall also be amended if it is in violation of the General Permit or has not achieved the 

11 general objective of eliminating pollutants in stormwater discharges. The SWPPP shall 

12 be amended and implemented in a timely manner, but in no case more than 14 days 

13 after it has been determined that the SWPPP is inadequate. All amendments should be 

14 dated and directly attached to the SWPPP. The USEPA or WDEQ may require the 

15 discharger to amend the SWPPP.

16 5.0 OTHER SPECIFIC STIPULATIONS AND METHODS

17 Environmental protection measures to ensure construction activities comply with state 

18 and USEPA requirements for stormwater management to be incorporated into the 

19 SWPPP are described in Appendix Z of the Plan of Development. 

20 6.0 MITIGATION MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION, REPAIR,

21 AND MONITORING

22 The Construction Contractor shall at all times properly operate and maintain any 

23 facilities and systems of treatment and control (and related appurtenances). Proper 

24 operation and maintenance also include appropriate quality assurance procedures. 

25 Proper operation and maintenance may require the operation of backup or auxiliary 

26 facilities or similar systems if construction takes place in an above average precipitation 

27 year. 

28 The Construction Contractor will be required to conduct routine maintenance and 

29 emergency repair on any structural controls, including the maintenance of erosion and 

30 sediment control measures and any required subsequent reporting. As part of the 

31 SWPPP, the Construction Contractor will be required to develop an inspection schedule 

32 and conduct routine inspections to identify conditions that could lead to discharges of 

33 chemicals or contact of stormwater with storm drainages or surface waters. Schedules 

34 will be established for regular inspections of equipment and areas. Inspections of the 

35 construction site shall occur In accordance with the General permit applicable to each 

36 state to identify areas contributing to a stormwater discharge and to evaluate whether 

37 industry standards are in place and functioning properly. For storm events with 

38 extended durations, observations shall be performed every 24 hours. During 

39 inspections, the Construction Contractor will also determine if the industry standards 
Framework Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Appendix F

January 2013 F-4

1 identified in the SWPPP are adequate and whether additional control practices are 

2 needed. All monitoring and inspection records which have been produced in association 

3 with this SWPPP will be retained for a period of at least 3 years.

4 To monitor the mitigation’s effectiveness and to evaluate whether additional mitigation 

5 measures are required, a monitoring program and reporting system will be followed. As 

6 part of this program, weather conditions should be monitored to prepare for precipitation 

7 events. It is recommended that weather forecasts be checked at least every week. 

8 7.0 TRAINING

9 The Construction Contractor will be responsible for the SWPPP implementation, 

10 amendments, and revisions. On-site construction personnel will be responsible for 

11 installation and maintenance of on-site mitigation measures.

12 Properly trained personnel are more capable of preventing spills, responding safely and 

13 effectively to accidents, and recognizing situations that could lead to stormwater 

14 contamination. The Construction Contractor will be responsible for familiarizing their 

15 personnel with the information contained within the SWPPP. Training meetings will 

16 need to be held for new personnel who join the Project after the initial training has been 

17 provided. The purpose of these meetings will be to review the proper installation 

18 methods and maintenance of all erosion control measures to be used for the Project. 

19 The monitoring/inspection program and all required maintenance and repair will be 

20 conducted by trained personnel.

21 8.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

22 Mitigation measures used to reduce pollutants in stormwater discharges after all 

23 construction phases have been completed at the sites should take into account local 

24 post-construction storm water management requirements, policies, and guidelines, as 

25 well as site-specific and seasonal conditions. Post-construction mitigation measures will 

26 be assessed during future line maintenance. During line maintenance, any areas 

27 disturbed by the line installation that are observed to be eroding sediment into 

28 drainages will be assessed for the appropriate permanent mitigation measure to control 

29 sediment movement off the disturbed area. Disturbed areas will also be reclaimed per 

30 Appendix D – Framework Reclamation Plan.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX G

2 FRAMEWORK CONSTRUCTION SPILL PREVENTION, CONTAINMENT, 

3 AND COUNTERMEASURES PLAN

4
Appendix G

Framework Construction Spill Prevention, 

Containment, and Countermeasures Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure Plan Appendix G

January 2013 G-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................. G-1

2.0 PURPOSE........................................................................................................... G-1

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY OF IMPLEMENTATION ....................................................... G-1

4.0 PREVENTIVE PROCEDURAL ACTIONS .......................................................... G-1

4.1 Storage, Refueling, and Lubrication Areas.................................................. G-1

4.2 General Petroleum Products, Quantities, and Storage ............................... G-2

4.2.1 Special Refueling Activities ............................................................. G-2

4.2.2 Waste Removal............................................................................... G-2

4.3 Spill and Emergency Response for Hazardous Substances ....................... G-3

5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .................................................................... G-4

6.0 EMERGENCY CONTACTS ................................................................................ G-4

LIST OF TABLES

Table G-1. Federal and State Emergency Contacts................................................................G-4
Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure Plan Appendix G

January 2013 G-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to construct and 

3 operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 500-kV alternating 

4 current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West Transmission Line Project 

5 (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, 

6 and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The 

7 proposed transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to 

8 relieve operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric 

9 transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the 

10 Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes 

11 ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit 

12 transmission lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as 

13 well as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. The 

14 Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land Management 

15 (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and Wyoming.

16 2.0 PURPOSE 

17 The Companies have developed this Framework Spill Prevention, Containment, and 

18 Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan for the Project to provide preventive procedural actions, 

19 standard mitigation measures, and other specific stipulations and methods to minimize the 

20 environmental impact associated with spills or releases of fuel, lubricant, or hazardous 

21 materials, during construction and refueling activities and during special refueling activities 

22 within 100 feet of waterbodies, wetland boundaries, or within municipal watersheds.

23 This document will provide a template for the development of a detailed SPCC Plan to be 

24 developed by the Construction Contractor which differs from the SPCC plans designed and 

25 developed for substations or areas where large volumes of materials (e.g. oils, fuels, etc.) are 

26 stored. 

27 3.0 RESPONSIBILITY OF IMPLEMENTATION

28 The Companies, through their Construction Contractor(s) and inspectors, shall be responsible 

29 for the implementation of the procedural actions, mitigation measures, and other specific 

30 stipulations and methods. The Construction Contractor will comply with applicable federal, state, 

31 and local regulations applicable to the location of refueling, storage, waste removal, and other 

32 activities involving fuels and hazardous materials.

33 4.0 PREVENTIVE PROCEDURAL ACTIONS

34 The following preventive actions and procedures shall be accomplished prior to construction.

35 4.1 Storage, Refueling, and Lubrication Areas

36 Prior to the start of construction in an area, the Construction Contractor shall designate 

37 locations for storage, refueling, and lubrication of equipment and materials, minimizing the 

38 environmental and safety impacts associated with releases of fuel, lubricants, or hazardous 

39 substances. These areas will be designated using the following actions.

40 • Storing of fuel, lubricant, or hazardous materials within 100 feet of a waterbody, wetland 

41 boundary, or within a designated municipal watershed shall be prohibited, unless the 
Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure Plan Appendix G

January 2013 G-2

1 location is designated for such use by an appropriate governmental authority. This 

2 applies to storage of these materials and does not apply to normal operation or use of 

3 equipment in these areas.

4 • No potentially hazardous materials, other than essential equipment fuels (e.g., gasoline, 

5 diesel, etc.) or standard lubricants (e.g., engine oils, grease, etc.) shall be transported 

6 onto the right-of-way or construction area without coordination and approval.

7 • Heavy equipment used in the Project area will be inspected daily for leaks.

8 • To prevent introduction of petrochemicals into the waters of Wyoming and Idaho, fuel, 

9 oil, hydraulic fluid, lubricants, and other petrochemicals stored within a floodplain must 

10 have an appropriately sized impervious secondary containment system to prevent spills. 

11 The permittee shall contain and remove any petrochemical spills, including contaminated 

12 soil, and dispose of these materials at an approved disposal site.

13 4.2 General Petroleum Products, Quantities, and Storage

14 Typical fuels used in the Project area include diesel and gasoline. Typical lubricants used 

15 include engine oil, transmission/drive train oil, hydraulic oil, gear oil, and general lubricating 

16 grease. Typical coolants used are glycols (anti-freeze). 

17 Quantity of fuel storage varies, but is usually approximately 6,000 to 12,000 gallons, stored in 

18 tanks or tankers at contractor yards. Smaller quantities are sometimes stored temporarily in the 

19 construction area along the right-of-way. Fuel transport is typically accomplished by the use of 

20 fuel trucks for larger quantities, and by pickup trucks transporting smaller quantities from 5 to 

21 100 gallons. Lubricants and coolants are generally stored in bulk or retail packaging at 

22 contractor yards in quantities typically less than 500 gallons and transported in trucks to the 

23 construction area as needed.

24 Fuel and lubricant containers of all volumes will be stored within secondary containment. 

25 Secondary containment will be able to hold the volume of the largest container stored within the 

26 containment structure.

27 4.2.1 Special Refueling Activities

28 When unique conditions require refueling within 100 feet of a waterbody, wetland boundary, or 

29 within any designated municipal watersheds, a determination of necessary emergency response 

30 actions shall be conducted prior to refueling activities. In addition, absorbent materials or other 

31 spill containment materials shall be available for immediate application prior to commencing 

32 refueling activities. Fuel trucks transporting fuel to on-site equipment will travel only on approved 

33 access roads.

34 Each construction crew shall have on hand sufficient supplies of absorbent, barrier materials, 

35 and U.S. Department of Transportation–approved containers to allow for rapid containment and 

36 recovery of any spill of hazardous material.

37 4.2.2 Waste Removal

38 Procedures and individual responsibilities regarding excavation, transportation, and off-site 

39 disposal of any soil-contaminated material from a spill of a hazardous material shall be 

40 established prior to construction.

41 Whenever any spill of a hazardous or potentially hazardous substance occurs, the Companies

42 shall be notified. The Companies will help direct further response actions in accordance with 

43 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and other regulatory requirements and assist throughout 

44 the cleanup and disposal of wastes. 
Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure Plan Appendix G

January 2013 G-3

1 4.3 Spill and Emergency Response for Hazardous Substances

2 Prior to construction, the contractor shall submit a hazardous material management and 

3 emergency preparedness and response plans (see Appendices P and Q) to the Companies for 

4 approval. The plans shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations and 

5 shall reference the applicable regulations. 

6 The plan shall include measures and procedures for characterizing, storing, handling, and 

7 disposing of hazardous substances and for emergency response operations.

8 The plan shall include, but not be limited to, spill control, cleanup, notification, characterization,

9 and disposal procedures. All contractor supervisors and personnel handling hazardous 

10 substances shall be familiar with these procedures.

11 • Spill Control: Following a spill, efforts shall be made to immediately control the source of 

12 the discharge and contain the spill. Absorbent materials shall be deployed with efforts 

13 directed to limiting the area of contamination. Every effort shall be made to prevent any 

14 spill from reaching wetlands or waterbodies. If a spill should reach surface waters, straw 

15 bales, booms, and absorbent materials shall be immediately deployed to contain and 

16 reduce downstream migration of the spilled material.

17 • Cleanup: Once a spill is contained, cleanup activities shall begin immediately. All spilled 

18 material, contaminated soil, and absorbent material shall be picked up and contained for 

19 disposal. In the event of a large spill or a spill that migrates into surface waters, waste 

20 cleanup specialists shall be called to assist in cleanup efforts. Prior to beginning 

21 construction the contractor shall be required to submit prior to beginning construction a 

22 list of cleanup contractors for approval.

23 • Spill Report Form: Following any spill, the contractor shall submit a spill report form for 

24 distribution to the Companies’ Environmental Coordinator.

25 • Disposal: The Companies will provide a list of commercial disposal facilities for 

26 contractor’s reference. The contractor is responsible for arranging disposal with these 

27 facilities or other approved facilities as appropriate.

28 • Waste Identification: All waste identification/characterization, handling, labeling, storage, 

29 manifesting, transportation, record-keeping, and disposal shall be in accordance with all 

30 applicable federal, state, and local regulations and ordinances and shall be the 

31 responsibility of the contractor.

32 • Documentation: The contractor will be required to provide the Companies with copies of 

33 sample results, shipping manifests, chain-of-custodies, and bill-of-lading for wastes 

34 transported for disposal upon request. The documentation will also describe the type 

35 and quantity of waste material disposed of.

36 • Material Safety Data Sheet: The contractor shall maintain Material Safety Data Sheets

37 for diesel fuel, gasoline, lubrication oil, and other hazardous materials used on the 

38 Project at each location where these materials are stored.

39 • Field Notification: As soon as possible after beginning spill control and cleanup activities, 

40 contractor shall notify the Companies, who will determine if the spill is reportable. 

41 Notification of appropriate agencies will be the responsibility of the Project Construction 

42 Contractor.

43 • Any amount of any material in such quantity as may, with reasonable probability, injure 

44 or be detrimental to human health, animal, plant life, property, or may unreasonably 

45 interfere with the public welfare or the use of property must be reported. This includes 

46 chemical, biohazardous, petroleum-product, and sewage spills and incidents. In addition 
Framework Construction Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure Plan Appendix G

January 2013 G-4

1 to recent spills, the discovery of evidence of previous unauthorized discharges, such as 

2 contaminated soil or groundwater, also must be reported.

3 • Agency Notification: Agency notification will be made of reportable spills. Written reports 

4 of the spills into state waters of oil or hazardous substances and materials will be 

5 provided as directed.

6 5.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

7 Environmental protection measures will be applied Project-wide and will address many of the 

8 concerns associated with spills. These measures are contained in Appendix Z of the Plan of 

9 Development currently being discussed with the Agencies. When these discussions are 

10 completed finalized measures will be listed herein. 

11 6.0 EMERGENCY CONTACTS

12 Table G-1 contains a list of federal and state contacts in the event of a hazardous chemical 

13 emergency.

14 Table G-1. Federal and State Emergency Contacts

Agency to be Contacted Contact Name Phone/Address

Federal

U.S. EPA Region 10 Emergency Response Center –* –*

U.S. EPA Region 8 Emergency Response Center –* –*

BLM, Casper Field Office –* –*

BLM, Rawlins Field Office –* –*

BLM, Rock Springs Field Office –* –*

BLM, Kemmerer Field Office –* –*

BLM, Pocatello Field Office –* –*

BLM, Burley Field Office –* –*

BLM, Shoshone Field Office –* –*

BLM, Jarbidge Field Office –* –*

BLM, Bruneau Field Office –* –*

BLM, Four Rivers Field Office –* –*

BLM, Owyhee Field Office –* –*

USFS, Caribou Targee National Forest -* -*

USFS, Medicine Bow National Forest -* -*

USFS, Sawtooth National Forest -* -*

State 

Wyoming Department of Environmental Quality –* –*

Idaho Department of Environmental Quality –* –*

15 * To be provided in final plan.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX H

2 FRAMEWORK PLANT AND WILDLIFE CONSERVATION MEASURES 

3 PLAN

4
Appendix H

Framework Plant and Wildlife 

Conservation Measures Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

and

Rocky Mountain Power

1407 W North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

January 2013
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................. H-1

1.1 Purpose....................................................................................................... H-1

1.2 Contents...................................................................................................... H-1

2.0 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................. H-2

3.0 SPECIES CONSIDERED FOR THE PLAN ........................................................ H-2

4.0 DEVELOPMENT OF CONSERVATION PLAN .................................................. H-6

4.1 Avoidance and Minimization Development and Implementation ................. H-6

4.1.1 Proposed Route and Substation Siting ........................................... H-6

4.1.2 Planned ROW Refinement.............................................................. H-8

4.1.3 Construction Scheduling and Monitoring......................................... H-8

4.2 Development of Conservation Measures .................................................... H-8

4.2.1 Land-Management Plans ................................................................ H-8

4.2.2 EPM Selection................................................................................. H-9

4.2.3 Applicability ................................................................................... H-10

5.0 PROPOSED PLANT AND WILDLIFE CONSERVATION PLAN...................... H-10

6.0 LITERATURE CITED........................................................................................ H-11

LIST OF TABLES

Table 3-1. Species Protected in the Plant and Wildlife Conservation Plan.......................H-3

Table 4-1. Land-Management Plans for the Project.........................................................H-9
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to construct and 

3 operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 500-kV alternating 

4 current (AC) electric transmission system consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

5 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 miles 

6 southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to supplement existing 

7 transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve 

8 reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 

9 megawatts (MW) of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other 

10 interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing activities associated with the 

11 construction of above-ground, single- circuit transmission lines involving towers, access roads, 

12 staging areas, fly yards, pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, 

13 and electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands 

14 administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), and the 

15 states of Idaho and Wyoming.

16 This document presents the plan proposed by the Companies for the avoidance and 

17 minimization of impacts to special-status plant (SSP) and wildlife species as related to 

18 construction activities for the Gateway West Transmission Line Project (Project). This plan 

19 summarizes the avoidance and minimization conducted during siting and routing of the Project 

20 components and outlines specific environmental protection measures (EPMs) to be 

21 implemented if state- or federally-listed species, Bureau of Land Management (BLM) sensitive 

22 species, or U.S. Forest Service (USFS) special-status species or their habitats are identified 

23 within, or adjacent to, the Project right-of-way (ROW). The Companies have prepared and 

24 submitted a separate plan that addresses avoidance and minimization measures related to 

25 operations, maintenance, and emergency activities. 

26 1.1 Purpose

27 The objectives of this plan are to recognize the substantial effort already invested by the 

28 Companies in avoiding and minimizing impacts on SSP and wildlife species and to present a 

29 comprehensive, Project-specific plant and wildlife conservation plan that does the following:

30 • Provides consistency across jurisdictions

31 • Meets the intent of the current BLM and USFS management guidance for federal lands

32 • Balances cost, practicality, and feasibility of Project implementation with avoiding or 

33 minimizing environmental impacts

34 1.2 Contents

35 The components of this plan include the following:

36 • Section 2: Brief background on the proposed transmission line and substation 

37 construction, operations, maintenance, and emergency response procedures 

38 (a complete description can be found in the Date Plan of Development [POD], of which 

39 this plan is a part).

40 • Section 3: A list of the special-status species that the Companies and the agencies 

41 (BLM, USFS, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service [FWS], Idaho Department of Fish and Game 

42 [IDFG], and Wyoming Game and Fish Department [WGFD]) have identified as occurring 
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-2

1 or potentially occurring within the Project area, and explanations of how the proposed 

2 measures are appropriate and will meet the intent of the BLM and USFS land3 management plan (LMP) restrictions.

4 • Section 4: A summary of the avoidance and minimization measures used by the 

5 Companies in conjunction with the agencies during corridor and ROW routing and 

6 substation siting, and the assumptions made during that process

7 • Section 5: Temporal and spatial restrictions the Companies propose to implement to 

8 avoid or minimize direct impacts to special-status species, together with the conditions 

9 under which the Companies propose that restrictions could be limited or lifted, including

10 the methods to be used to determine where and when the measures will apply across 

11 the Project. 

12 2.0 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

13 Appendix B of the POD provides detailed information regarding the components of the 

14 transmission system including the transmission structures, communications system, and the 

15 substations. It also provides detailed information on construction methods, construction 

16 schedule, operation and maintenance, and proposed decommissioning. 

17 3.0 SPECIES CONSIDERED FOR THE PLAN

18 The following steps were taken by the Companies to determine which species and habitats to 

19 consider for avoidance, minimization, and conservation measures:

20 • Identified potential habitats and special-status species that may occur along the 

21 proposed corridor using available data from federal and state wildlife agencies, the BLM,

22 and the USFS

23 • Discussed habitat types and special-status species at kickoff meetings with agency 

24 resource specialists to identify which species are of greatest concern in the Project area

25 • Refined the list of species and habitats to be addressed in Project plans through several 

26 subsequent meetings with state and federal agency resource specialists

27 Table 3-1 presents the special-status species discussed in this Plan. Conservation measures for 

28 construction activities for fish species are addressed Appendix Z of the POD. Several additional

29 species were analyzed, and some had protocol-level surveys conducted; however, these are 

30 not addressed further in this conservation plan because they are not expected to be adversely 

31 affected by the Project due to a lack of occurrence in the Project area, lack of direct impact to 

32 the species or its habitats from the Project, or a low level of anticipated impact at the population 

33 level. Other species not listed in this table will be analyzed in other Project documents but are 

34 not addressed further in this conservation plan because they were not identified as primary 

35 concerns for the Project. 

36
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-3

1 Table 3-1. Species Protected in the Plant and Wildlife Conservation Plan

Species

Regulatory Status within 

Project Area Analysis

Included in 

Conservation 

Plan?

Big Game

Bighorn sheep (Ovis canadensis) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID 

Sensitive 

BE Yes

Elk (Cervus elaphus) None EIS Yes

Moose (Alces alces) None EIS Yes

Mule deer (Odocoileus hemionus) None EIS Yes

Pronghorn (Antilocapra americana) None EIS Yes

Selkirk Mountains woodland caribou 

(Rangifer tarandus caribou)

USFWS ID Endangered BA

Other Mammals

American marten (Martes americana) USFS WY Sensitive and MIS BE and EIS

Black-footed ferret (Mustela nigripes) USFWS WY Endangered; USFWS 

Shirley Basin experimental 

population WY

BA and EIS Yes

Black-tailed prairie dog (Cynomys 

ludovicianus)

USFWS removed as Candidate, 

USFS WY Sensitive. BLM WY 

Sensitive

BE and EIS No 

Canada lynx (Lynx canadensis) USFWS WY and ID Threatened BA and EIS No

Fringed myotis (Myotis thysanodes) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitive

BE and EIS

Gray wolf (Canis lupus) USFWS WY Nonessential 

experimental population, USFWS 

ID De-listed; USFS ID sensitive

BE and EIS No

Grizzly bear (Ursus arctos) USFWS WY and ID Threatened, 

USFS WY Sensitive

BA and EIS

Kit fox (Vulpes macrotis) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID 

Sensitive

BE and EIS

Northern Idaho ground squirrel 

(Spermophilus brunneus)

BLM WY Sensitive EIS No 

Preble’s meadow jumping mouse (Zapus

hudsonius preblei)

USFWS WY Threatened, USFS 

WY Sensitive, BLM WY Sensitive

BA and EIS No

Pygmy rabbit (Brachylagus idahoensis) BLM WY and ID Sensitive; USFS 

ID Sensitive

EIS Yes

Southern Idaho ground squirrel 

(Spermophilus brunneus)

USFWS ID Candidate EIS No 

Spotted bat (Euderma maculatum) USFS WY and ID Sensitive, BLM 

ID and WY Sensitive

BE and EIS

Swift fox (Vulpes velox) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM WY 

Sensitive

BE and EIS

Townsend’s big-eared bat (Corynorhinus 

townsendii)

USFS WY and ID Sensitive, BLM 

WY Sensitive

BE and EIS

White-tailed prairie dog (Cynomys 

leucurus)

BLM WY Sensitive EIS Yes

Wolverine (Gulo gulo) USFWS Candidate, USFS WY and 

ID Sensitive; BLM ID Sensitive

BE and EIS No

Wyoming pocket gopher (Thomomys

clusius)

BLM WY Sensitive EIS No 

Raptors
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-4

Species

Regulatory Status within 

Project Area Analysis

Included in 

Conservation 

Plan?

Bald eagle (Haliaeetus leucocephalus) USFWS De-listed WY and ID 2007; 

USFS WY and ID Sensitive BLM 

WY Sensitive, MBTA; BGEPA

BE and EIS Yes

Boreal owl (Aegolius funereus) USFS ID Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

Burrowing owl (Athene cunicularia) BLM WY Sensitive; MBTA BE and EIS Yes

Ferruginous hawk (Buteo regalis) BLM WY and ID Sensitive; USFS 

WY Sensitive; MBTA

BE and EIS Yes

Flammulated owl (Otus flammeolus) USFS WY and ID Sensitive; BLM 

ID Sensitive; MBTA

BE and EIS Yes

Golden eagle (Aquila chrysaetos) MBTA; BGEPA EIS Yes

Great gray owl (Strix nebulosa) USFS ID Sensitive BE and EIS

Northern goshawk (Accipiter gentilis) BLM WY and ID Sensitive; USFS 

WY and ID Sensitive; WY and ID

USFS MIS; MBTA

BE and EIS Yes

Northern harrier (Circus cyaneus) USFS WY Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

Peregrine falcon (Falco peregrinus) USFS WY and ID Sensitive, BLM 

ID and WY Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS

Short-eared owl (Asio flammeus) USFS WY Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

All other raptors MBTA EIS Yes

Other Avian

Brewer’s sparrow (Spizella breweri) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitve, MBTA

BE and EIS

Chestnut-collared longspur (Calcarius 

ornatus)

USFS WY Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

Columbian sharp-tailed grouse 

(Tympanuchus phasianellus 

columbianus)

BLM WY and ID Sensitive; USFS 

WY and ID Sensitive; ID USFS MIS 

BE and EIS No

Grasshopper sparrow (Ammodramus 

savannarum)

USFS WY Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

Greater sage grouse (Centrocercus 

urophasianus)

USFWS WY and ID Candidate; 

BLM WY and ID Sensitive; USFS 

WY and ID Sensitive; ID USFS MIS

BE and EIS Yes

Greater sandhill crane (Grus canadensis) MBTA EIS Yes

Interior least tern (Sterna antillarum 

athalassos)

USFWS Endangered, MBTA BA and EIS

Lewis’s woodpecker (Melanerpes lewis) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID 

Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS

Loggerhead shrike (Lanius ludovicianus) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS

Long-billed curlew (Numenius 

americanus)

USFS WY Sensitive, BLM WY 

Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS Yes

McCown’s longspur (Calcarius mccownii) USFS WY Sensitive, MBTA BE and EIS

Mountain plover (Charadrius montanus) BLM WY Sensitive; MBTA BE and EIS Yes

Mountain quail (Oreortyx pictus) BLM ID Sensitive BE and EIS No

Olive-sided flycatcher (Contopus cooperi) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID 

Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS

Piping plover (Charadrius melodus) USFWS Threatened, MBTA BA and EIS

Sage sparrow (Amphispiza belli) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitive, MBTA

BE and EIS

Three-toed woodpecker (Picoides 

dorsalis)

WY USFS Sensitive, ID USFS 

Sensitive; MBTA

BE and EIS Yes
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-5

Species

Regulatory Status within 

Project Area Analysis

Included in 

Conservation 

Plan?

Trumpeter swan (Cygnus buccinator) USFS ID Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitive, MBTA

EIS

Western yellow-billed cuckoo (Coccyzus 

americanus)

USFWS WY and ID Candidate;

BLM WY Sensitive; MBTA

EIS No

Whooping crane (Grus americana) USFWS Endangered BA and EIS

Amphibians

Boreal toad (Bufo boreas boreas) USFS WY Sensitive, BLM WY and 

ID Sensitive; USFS ID Sensitive

EIS No

Columbia spotted frog (Rana luteiventris) USFWS WY and ID Candidate, 

USFS ID Sensitive, BLM WY 

Sensitive

EIS No 

Great Basin spadefoot toad (Spea 

intermontana)

BLM WY Sensitive BE and EIS No

Northern leopard frog (Rana pipiens) BLM WY Sensitive; USFS WY and 

ID Sensitive; BLM ID Sensitive

BE and EIS No

Wyoming toad (Bufo hemiophrys baxteri) USFWS WY Endangered BA and EIS No 

Fish

Bonneville cutthroat trout (Oncorhynchus 

clarki utah)

USFS ID Sensitive, BLM ID and 

WY Sensitive

BE and EIS No 

Bonytail (Gila elegans) USFWS Endangered BA and EIS No 

Bull trout (Salvelinus confluentus) USFWS ID Threatened BA and EIS No 

Chinook salmon (Oncorhynchus 

tschawytscha)

USFWS ID Threatened BA

Colorado pikeminnow (Ptychocheilus 

lucius)

USFWS Endangered BA and EIS No 

Humpback chub (Gila cypha) USFWS Endangered BA and EIS No

Kendall warm springs dace (Rhinichthys 

osculus thermalis)

USFWS WY Endangered BA and EIS

Pallid sturgeon (Scaphirhynchus albus) USFWS Endangered BA and EIS No

Razorback sucker (Xyrauchen texanus) USFWS Endangered BA and EIS No

Sockeye salmon (Oncorhynchus nerka) USFWS ID Endangered BA

Steelhead (Oncorhynchus mykiss) USFWS ID Threatened BA

White sturgeon (Acipenser 

transmontanus)

USFWS ID Endangered, BLM ID 

Sensitive

BA

Invertebrates

Banbury Springs limpet (Lanx sp.) USFWS ID Endangered BA and EIS

Bliss Rapids snail (Taylorconcha 

serpenticola)

USFWS ID Threatened BA and EIS

Bruneau Hot springsnail (Pyrgulopsis 

bruneauensis)

USFWS ID Endangered; BLM ID 

Sensitive

BA and EIS No

Snake River physa snail (Physa 

natricina)

USFWS ID Endangered BA

Plants

Blowout penstemon (Penstemon

haydenii)

USFWS WY Endangered BA and EIS Yes

Colorado butterfly plant (Gaura 

neomexicana coloradensis)

USFWS WY Threatened BA and EIS Yes

Desert yellowhead (Yermo 

xanthocephalus)

USFWS WY Threatened BA and EIS No

Dwarf raspberry (Rubus arcticus ssp. 

acaulis)

USFS WY Sensitive BE
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-6

Species

Regulatory Status within 

Project Area Analysis

Included in 

Conservation 

Plan?

Goose Creek milkvetch (Astragalus 

anserinus)

USFWS ID Candidate, BLM ID 

Sensitive

EIS No

Laramie columbine (Aquilegia 

laramiensis)

USFS WY Sensitive, BLM WY 

Sensitive

BE and EIS

Largeflower triteleia (Triteleia grandiflora) USFS WY Sensitive BE

MacFarlane’s four-o’clock (Mirabilis 

macfarlanei)

USFWS ID Threatened BA

Narrowleaf moonwort (Botrychium 

lineare)

USFS WY Sensitive, BLM WY 

Sensitive

BE

Slickspot peppergrass (Lepidium 

pappileferum)

USFWS ID Threatened BA and EIS Yes

Spalding’s catchfly (Silene spaldingii) USFWS ID Threatened BA

Ute ladies’-tresses orchid (Spiranthes

diluvialis)

USFWS Threatened WY BA and EIS Yes

Water howellia (Howellia aquatilis) USFWS ID Threatened BA

Western prairie fringed orchid 

(Platanthera praeclara)

USFWS Threatened BA and EIS

Notes:

BA = Biological Assessment

BE = Biological Evaluation 

BGEPA = Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act

EIS = Environmental Impact Statement

ID = Idaho

MBTA = Migratory Bird Treaty Act

WY = Wyoming

USFS = U. S. Forest Service

MIS = Management Indicator 

Species

1 4.0 DEVELOPMENT OF CONSERVATION PLAN

2 This section explains how the Companies approached avoidance and minimization of impacts 

3 through data collection and careful routing and siting of the proposed facilities. 

4 4.1 Avoidance and Minimization Development and Implementation

5 This section presents the avoidance of sensitive plant and wildlife resources and minimization of 

6 the Project footprint that have been and will be employed, data collection and analysis, and field 

7 surveys for the various stages of Project development. The stages of Project development 

8 addressed include the proposed route and substation siting process and 

9 construction scheduling.

10 4.1.1 Proposed Route and Substation Siting

11 Corridor evaluation was conducted in two phases. In the initial phase, the Companies reviewed 

12 maps of the area to identify significant constraints and opportunities for selecting corridors 

13 between the proposed, planned and existing substations between the planned Windstar 

14 Substation near Casper, Wyoming and the proposed Hemingway Substation in Owyhee County, 

15 Idaho. Constraints included a wide array of natural resources and man-made features such as 

16 the Oregon Trail, sage grouse leks, airports, urban areas, rural residences, agricultural features 

17 (center pivot irrigation, feedlots, dairies), visual resource management areas (VRMs), areas of 

18 critical environmental concern (ACECs), National Monuments and National Wildlife Refuges 

19 (NWR). Opportunities include existing transmission corridors, West-wide Energy (WWE) 

20 corridors, pipelines, a USFS utility corridor, and railroads. Using these factors, the Companies 

21 selected a proposed general corridor and then conducted a detailed evaluation of constraints to 
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-7

1 identify a proposed and alternate corridor between the above-referenced points of

2 interconnection. 

3 Corridors were identified with the goals of maximizing the use of opportunities and minimizing 

4 crossings of areas with higher-level constraints. This step took into account corridors defined by 

5 existing transmission lines and other linear facilities as well as any additional corridors identified 

6 to date by the BLM, the Companies, and the WWE Corridor study. The Companies evaluated 

7 each corridor for a variety of environmental and engineering factors to identify the proposed and 

8 alternate corridors. This approach included development and use of an attribute matrix, which 

9 established the relative importance of each attribute and, as appropriate, analysis tools. 

10 Analysis tools included GIS-based routing and weighting, aerial photography, topographic 

11 maps, and limited field reconnaissance. The proposed and alternative corridors were then 

12 presented at BLM sponsored scoping meetings. Following scoping, BLM Field Offices reviewed 

13 proposed and alternative routes to determine which should be carried forward for detailed 

14 analysis in the EIS. 

15 Specifically, the Companies acquired geographic information system (GIS) data and qualitative 

16 input from the USFWS, BLM, Forest Service, IDFG, and WGFD regarding known and potential 

17 locations of special status species and their habitats in the Project area. These data were used 

18 to develop the list of special status species of concern in the Project area. 

19 At the request of these agencies, the Companies conducted additional data collection in 2008 to 

20 fill certain data gaps in the Project area, including a sage grouse lek survey, a raptor nesting 

21 survey, and detailed habitat mapping. 

22 The datasets described above were used during routing of the proposed corridor and substation 

23 siting. Certain plant and wildlife resources were identified as constraints to be avoided, 

24 including:

25 • A 0.25-mile “no surface occupancy” buffer of all greater sage-grouse leks, regardless of 

26 recent occupancy, was entirely avoided during routing;

27 • A 0.65-mile buffer of greater sage-grouse leks was avoided unless there was a 

28 compelling reason not to (e.g., a non-wildlife resource such as a home to be avoided);

29 • A 0.50-mile buffer of raptor nests was avoided unless there was a compelling reason not 

30 to (e.g., a non-wildlife resource to be avoided); and

31 • Special management areas established for the protection of plant or wildlife species 

32 were avoided, where possible. 

33 Other plant and wildlife resources (such as big game winter range and calving and 

34 fawning areas) were not necessarily avoided during routing and siting but were 

35 considered a constraint and were taken into consideration during design of the 

36 proposed Project. Additionally, proximity of the corridor to urban areas, agricultural 

37 areas and rural residences were taken into consideration during the routing and siting.

38 The proposed and alternative routes are presented in the September 2008 Gateway 

39 West Transmission Line Project Siting Study (Idaho Power and Rocky Mountain Power, 

40 2008), and Supplement Siting memo dated October 23, 2008. As site-specific 

41 environmental and engineering analyses are conducted along these routes, the 

42 proposed transmission line ROW will be refined to further avoid resources or minimize 

43 impacts upon them.
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-8

1 4.1.2 Planned ROW Refinement

2 The Companies conducted a comprehensive Project-wide habitat mapping effort that identified

3 habitats in the Project area and assessed the quality of those habitats for selected special 

4 status species. The habitat mapping comprised two field components: aerial photography 

5 acquisition and field verification. Based on the results of the habitat mapping, the Companies 

6 identified areas within the corridor where species-specific surveys may be necessary to either 

7 inform ROW refinement or specify where and when conservation measures apply. 

8 In addition to the avoidance and minimization accomplished through routing, the Companies 

9 have developed additional conservation measures, which are presented in Appendix Z of this 

10 POD. Some involve seasonal restrictions on construction, discussed in general in Section 4.1.3 

11 and detailed by species in Section 5. Many of the measures require preconstruction surveys to 

12 determine if and when they apply.

13 4.1.3 Construction Scheduling and Monitoring

14 Avoidance can be spatial and/or temporal. Where disturbance during construction is of concern, 

15 construction is proposed to be limited to periods of species’ absence or reduced presence. 

16 In addition to limited operating seasons, which categorically restrict construction, 

17 environmental monitoring is also proposed where construction may be permitted, but its 

18 conformance with minimization measures would be monitored and enforced.

19 The details of the Companies’ environmental compliance program, including roles and 

20 responsibilities, pre-construction surveys, monitoring, and reporting, are detailed in Appendix 

21 C– Framework Environmental Compliance Management Plan.

22 4.2 Development of Conservation Measures

23 After taking into consideration wildlife and plant resources, as well as other important resources 

24 during siting and routing, the Companies recognized the need for additional measures to 

25 minimize the impact from construction of the Project. The Companies used the following steps 

26 to develop the measures found in Section 5:

27 • Identified and reviewed the BLM and USFS LMPs applicable to the Project area (Table 

28 4-1)

29 • For each LMP, recorded the surface-use stipulations specific to each species of concern

30 • Identified inconsistencies in requirements among jurisdictions

31 • Determined exception or waiver criteria if applicable

32 • Used FWS avoidance recommendations when applicable

33 • Incorporated IDFG and WGFD species-specific management recommendations

34 • Evaluated the stipulations on a resource-by-resource basis and developed the proposed 

35 Project-wide temporal and spatial restrictions and exception criteria

36 4.2.1 Land-Management Plans

37 Wyoming land management plans within the Project area are recent, and overall, the specific 

38 temporal and spatial restrictions for a given species are consistent across these jurisdictions

39 (Table 4-1). Most of the relevant Idaho plans within the Project area are outdated, and additional 

40 information provided by the agencies in Idaho is very limited. In addition, these plans tend to 

41 have information gaps, contain restrictions that are not consistent across jurisdictions, and 
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-9

1 contain stipulation language that is not specific and require interpretation. RMPs from both 

2 states have phrases such as “avoidance where possible”, “request”, “recommend” “review on a 

3 case by case basis”, and “exceptions may be made” indicating many of the stipulations and 

4 restrictions need to be reviewed on a species by species basis within each field office.

5 Table 4-1. Land-Management Plans for the Project

Segment/Alternative Administrative Unit Applicable Plan Name Plan Year

Wyoming

1W(a), 1W(c) Casper BLM Field Office Casper RMP 2007

1W(a), 1W(c) Medicine Bow-Routt National 

Forests

Medicine Bow National Forest 

Revised Forest Plan 

2003

1W(a), 1W(c), 2, Rawlins BLM Field Office Rawlins RMP 2009

3, 4 Rock Springs BLM Field 

Office

Green River RMP 1997

4, Kemmerer BLM Field Office Kemmerer RMP 2010

Idaho

4, 5, 7, Pocatello Field Office Pocatello RMP 2012

5, 7 Pocatello Field Office Malad MFP 1981

4 Caribou-Targhee National 

Forest

Revised Forest Plan for the 

Caribou National Forest

2003

6, 8, 10 Shoshone Field Office Monument RMP 1986

8 Shoshone Field Office Bennett Hills/Timmerman Hills 

MFP

1980

5 Burley Field Office Monument RMP 1985

5, 6, 7, 9, 10 Burley Field Office Cassia RMP 1985

9, 10 Burley Field Office Twin Falls MFP 1982

9 Jarbidge Field Office Jarbidge RMP 1987

8 Four Rivers Field Office Jarbidge RMP 1987

8 Four Rivers Field Office Kuna MFP 1983

8 Four Rivers Field Office Morley Nelson Snake River 

Birds of Prey National 

Conservation Area RMP

2008

9 Bruneau Field Office Bruneau MFP 1983

8 Owyhee Field Office Owyhee RMP 1999

6

7 4.2.2 EPM Selection

8 Many of the EPMs are designed to assume species presence and, in the case of seasonal 

9 restrictions, to broadly bracket the interval of time in which there could be adverse impacts. The 

10 Companies have proposed a process (Appendix C) to allow for flexibility on a case-by-case 

11 basis based on species’ occupancy and other local conditions. 

12 Finally, the Companies did not include all measures found in all LMPs. Measures not included 

13 are those which are not specific enough to define a measurable stipulation, measures that 

14 describe general goals for the federal lands but do not address new projects specifically, 

15 measures that address habitat management and treatment versus discrete temporal and spatial 

16 restrictions on project activities, cases in which the expectations of one LMP extend well beyond 

17 that of the other plans, and measures not practical from a project design and development 

18 perspective. 
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-10

1 4.2.3 Applicability 

2 The Companies plan to apply the plant and wildlife conservation EPMs as follows: 

3 • The Wyoming segments of the proposed Project cross a relatively large percentage of 

4 Federal land, and private lands tend to be unsigned and isolated sections of land in a 

5 checkerboard pattern. In Idaho, the proposed Project for Segments 6, 8, and 9 is largely 

6 on Federal land, with private and state land interspersed. Therefore, in Wyoming and 

7 Idaho Segments 6, 8, and 9, the EPMs will be applied to the entire segment (i.e., 

8 including the private and state land) except as follows:

9 o Proposed substation and regeneration sites located on private land unless they are 

10 standard EPMs of the Companies; 

11 o EPMs that are only applicable to a specific BLM Field Office;

12 o EPMs that are only applicable to National Forest System lands; and

13 o Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request of the 

14 property owner and don’t violate the law. 

15 • In Idaho, Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10 are predominantly private ownership in agriculture 

16 and other development, and for the most part, the Federal land in these segments is 

17 clustered. In these segments, plant and wildlife EPMs will be applied based on 

18 ownership as identified in the Table Z-1 of Appendix Z except as follows:

19 o Proposed substation and regeneration sites located on private land unless they are 

20 standard EPMs of the Companies; and

21 o Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request of the 

22 property owner and don’t violate the law.

23 5.0 PROPOSED PLANT AND WILDLIFE CONSERVATION 

24 PLAN 

25 The conservation measures that the Companies will implement to avoid or minimize impacts to 

26 special status species in the Project area are presented in Appendix Z of the POD. These 

27 measures will only be applied where applicable and where special status species have been 

28 identified by the Companies and the Agencies as occurring in the Project area

29 Pre-construction surveys would be conducted for TES wildlife species within suitable habitats 

30 during the appropriate seasonal timeframe, in order to determine activity levels prior to 

31 construction, as well as facilitate micro-siting of the Project outside of occupied areas when 

32 applicable and to the extent practical. The following survey protocols have been identified for 

33 use, as and where applicable, during these pre-construction surveys:

34 • Black-footed ferret non-block-cleared areas would be surveyed using the protocols found 

35 in the “Black-Footed Ferret Survey Guidelines for Compliance with the Endangered 

36 Species Act” (USFWS 1989).

37 • Burrowing owl pre-construction surveys would be conducted using the protocols found in 

38 the “Recommended Survey Protocol and Recommended Actions to Protect Burrowing 

39 Owls when Conducting Prairie Dog Control” (CDOW 2007).
Framework Plant and Wildlife Conservation Measures Plan Appendix H

January 2013 H-11

1 • Mountain Plover pre-construction surveys would be conducted using the protocols found 

2 in the “Birds of Conservation Concern 2002. Division of Migratory Bird Management” 

3 (USFWS 2002).

4 • Pygmy rabbit pre-construction surveys would be conducted within 300 feet of and 

5 including the Project’s ROW using the protocols found in the “Surveying for Pygmy 

6 Rabbits (Brachylagus idahoensis)” (Ulmshneider, 2004). The 300-foot distance beyond 

7 where most other pre-construction surveys would be conducted was chosen because 

8 burrow systems have been found to extend approximately 300 feet (Bradfield 1974).

9 • Wyoming pocket gopher pre-construction surveys would be conducted using the 

10 protocols found in the “Wyoming Pocket Gopher (Thomomys clusius): A Technical 

11 Conservation Assessment” (Keinath and Beauvias 2006).

12 • Flammulated owl and northern goshawk pre-construction surveys would be conducted 

13 using the protocols found in the “Rocky Mountain Region, Species Conservation 

14 Program: Species Conservation Assessments” (USFS 2008), and using the Payette 

15 National Forest Region 4 Sensitive Species Broadcast Vocalization Compact Disk 

16 (USFS 1993).

17 IPC and Rocky Mountain Power will work with the BLM and USFWS to identify any additional 

18 protocols that would need to be used during pre-construction surveys for TES species.

19 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

20 IPC (Idaho Power Company) and Rocky Mountain Power. 2009. Revised Siting Study. Gateway 

21 West Transmission Line Project. December. Available online at: 

22 http://www.wy.blm.gov/nepa/cfodocs/gateway_west/documents/siting/2009_1230_Revis

23 ed_Siting_Study.pdf
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX I

2 FRAMEWORK STREAM, WETLAND, WELL, AND SPRING 

3 PROTECTION PLAN

4
Appendix I

Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and 

Spring Protection Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................I-1

2.0 PURPOSE...........................................................................................................I-1

3.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW...............................................................................I-1

3.1 CWA - Section 303(d) List of Impaired Waters.................................................I-2

3.2 CWA - Section 130.7 Total Maximum Daily Load ............................................I-2

3.3 CWA - Section 401 Water Quality Certification ................................................I-3

3.4 CWA - Section 402 NPDES Permits ................................................................I-3

3.5 CWA - Section 404 Waters of the U.S. Permits ...............................................I-4

3.6 Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899, Sections 9 and 10.........................................I-5

3.7 Other Federal Permits and Programs ..............................................................I-6

3.8 Idaho Permit.....................................................................................................I-6

4.0 OVERVIEW OF STREAMS, WETLANDS, WELLS, AND SPRINGS .................I-6

4.1 Streams and Drainages ...................................................................................I-6

4.2 Wetlands ..........................................................................................................I-6

4.3 Wells and Springs ............................................................................................I-7

5.0 MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION ......I-7

5.1 Specific Stipulations and Methods for Streams and Wetlands .........................I-7

5.2 Stream Crossing Methods................................................................................I-7

5.3 Wetland Crossing Methods ..............................................................................I-8

5.4 Spill Prevention ................................................................................................I-9

5.5 Erosion and Sedimentation ..............................................................................I-9

5.6 Soil Storage near Streams ...............................................................................I-9

5.7 Stream Obstruction and Flash Flood Hazard ...................................................I-9

5.8 Protection of Wells and Springs .......................................................................I-9

6.0 LITERATURE CITED........................................................................................I-10
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION 

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 990 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional energy for the Companies’ larger 

11 service areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes 

12 ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single13 circuit transmission lines involving structures, access roads, multi-purpose yards, fly 

14 yards, and pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, and 

15 electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands 

16 administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest 

17 Service), other federal agencies, and the states of Idaho and Wyoming.

18 2.0 PURPOSE

19 The purpose of this Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan is to provide 

20 measures to protect these resources from potential impacts during construction, 

21 operation, and maintenance activities. This plan references and incorporates by 

22 reference those mitigation measures made part of the project description by the 

23 Companies and found in Appendix Z of this POD. The final plan will incorporate all 

24 mitigation measures, including those imposed by permitting agencies in addition to the 

25 project description. 

26 This plan is intended for use as a guide to determine the appropriate site-specific 

27 measures to be implemented during construction activities. The goals of this plan are to:

28 • Control Project-related erosion and sedimentation into streams and wetlands and 

29 minimize disturbance and erosion of streambeds and banks.

30 • Protect springs and wells in the Project area from impacts due to blasting and 

31 hazardous materials contamination.

32 This document provides a template for the detailed Final Stream, Wetland, Well, and 

33 Spring Protection Plan to be developed by the Construction Contractor and approved by 

34 the BLM and other permitting agencies prior to construction.

35 3.0 REGULATORY OVERVIEW

36 Construction, operation, and maintenance of the Project include ground disturbing 

37 activities that could impact aquatic resources. The following regulations and associated 

38 permits and authorizations would be required for the Project. 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-2

1 The CWA (33 USC Section 1251 et seq., formerly the Federal Water Pollution Control 

2 Act of 1972), was enacted with the intent of restoring and maintaining the chemical, 

3 physical, and biological integrity of the waters of the United States. The CWA requires 

4 states to set standards to protect, maintain, and restore water quality through the 

5 regulation of point source and certain non-point source discharges to surface water. 

6 The CWA also requires the USACE to administer permits for dredge or fill in waters of 

7 the U.S. Specific sections of the CWA that apply to the Project are described below, 

8 followed by a brief description of other aquatic resource permits required for the Project. 

9 3.1 CWA - Section 303(d) List of Impaired Waters

10 Section 303(d) of the CWA establishes requirements for states and tribes to identify and 

11 prioritize water bodies that do not meet water quality standards through current 

12 technology-based regulations and controls. A water quality standard defines the 

13 designated beneficial uses of a water segment and the water quality criteria necessary 

14 to support those uses. Currently, both Idaho Department of Environmental Quality

15 (IDEQ) and Wyoming Department of Environmental Quality (WDEQ) are required to 

16 conduct a comprehensive analysis of their respective state’s water bodies every two 

17 years to determine if they meet water quality standards and develop a list of impaired or 

18 threatened waters that require Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDLs). The Project would 

19 need to implement measures to avoid and / or reduce the potential that it would 

20 contribute to the listing of a water body as impaired or be inconsistent with an adopted 

21 TMDL.

22 3.2 CWA - Section 130.7 Total Maximum Daily Load

23 Section 130.7 of the CWA requires states to establish TMDL programs, which are 

24 approved by the USEPA for streams and lakes that do not meet adopted water quality 

25 standards. A TMDL includes a quantitative assessment of water quality problems, 

26 contributing sources, and load reductions or control actions needed to restore and 

27 protect water bodies. A TMDL budget takes into account loads from point, nonpoint, 

28 and natural background sources. National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System 

29 (NPDES) permits address point-source pollution to surface waters. Non-point source 

30 pollution is addressed by the application of Best Management Practices (BMPs) and 

31 mitigation measures found in Appendix Z of this POD. 

32 In compliance with the federal CWA, the IDEQ and the WDEQ have identified Section 

33 303(d) water quality limited streams and lakes for development of TMDL criteria. 

34 TMDLs have been established for surface waters in Idaho. WDEQ has developed few 

35 TMDLS at this time as they are just beginning to implement the TMDL program; they 

36 are currently working on eight TMDLs. WDEQ projects that from the time of listing a 

37 waterbody as impaired, a TMDL for that waterbody would be developed within 1-5 

38 years. 

39 Stream segments within the Project Area that have been identified on 303(d) lists as 

40 impaired due to either sedimentation (sediment-impaired streams) or high temperatures 

41 (temperature-impaired streams), were listed in Table D.16-13 of the Draft Environmental 

42 Impact Statement (Draft EIS) for the Project (BLM 2011) and will be found in a similar 

43 table for the Final EIS when published. 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-3

1 3.3 CWA - Section 401 Water Quality Certification

2 Pursuant to Section 401 of the federal CWA, any permit or license issued by a federal 

3 agency for an activity that may result in a discharge into waters of the U.S. requires 

4 certification from the state in which the discharge originates. This requirement allows 

5 each state to have input into federally approved projects that may affect its waters 

6 (rivers, streams, lakes, and wetlands) and to ensure the projects would comply with 

7 state water quality standards and any other water quality requirements of state law. 

8 State certification ensures that the project would not adversely impact impaired waters 

9 (waters that do not meet water quality standards) and that the project complies with 

10 applicable water quality improvement plans (TMDLs). The States must grant, deny, or 

11 waive Section 401 certification for a project before a federal permit or license can be 

12 issued.

13 The Departments of Environmental Quality for both Idaho and Wyoming must provide 

14 Section 401 Water Quality Certifications for the federally issued permits, including the 

15 404 permits in both states and 402 permits issued in Wyoming. The USEPA has 402 

16 jurisdiction in Idaho.

17 3.4 CWA - Section 402 NPDES Permits

18 The NPDES program requires facilities discharging from a point source into waters of 

19 the U.S. to obtain discharge permits. A point source is a conveyance such as a pipe, 

20 storm drain or other point. USEPA is responsible for permitting and enforcing all 

21 NPDES permits in Idaho. NPDES permits are administered by the WDEQ in Wyoming. 

22 Most storm water discharges are considered point sources and require coverage by a 

23 NPDES permit. The Project will need to obtain coverage under existing construction 

24 storm water programs in Idaho and Wyoming.

25 The NPDES Stormwater Program requires operators of construction sites that disturb 

26 one acre or more to obtain authorization to discharge stormwater under an NPDES 

27 construction stormwater permit. In Idaho and Wyoming, the EPA and WDEQ, 

28 respectively, have issued Construction General Permits (CGP). In order to be covered 

29 under the CGP, a site-specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) must 

30 be developed. The operator files a Notice of Intent which indicates the operator would 

31 comply with the CGP. The site operator must document the erosion, sediment, and 

32 pollution controls that would be used during construction and operation, inspect the 

33 controls periodically, and maintain the controls throughout the life of the project. If a 

34 TMDL has been established for the water body where a project would discharge, and 

35 the TMDL indicates that it applies to construction or stormwater discharges, then the 

36 SWPPP must be consistent with the requirements of that TMDL.

37 If hazardous materials, including fuels and lubricants, are used or stored in quantities 

38 exceeding certain quantities, a Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) 

39 Plan is required. Section 311(j)(1)(c) of the CWA contains the regulations preventing 

40 discharge of oil to surface water. The SWPPP also contains measures regarding the 

41 handling and storage of such materials. The Framework SWPPP and SPCC Plans are 

42 found in Appendix G of this POD. 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-4

1 3.5 CWA - Section 404 Waters of the U.S. Permits

2 Section 404 of the CWA authorizes the USACE to regulate the discharge of dredged or 

3 fill material to the waters of the United States. Discharges are authorized through 

4 issuance of nationwide permits or individual permits for specific activities. 

5 The USACE jurisdiction over non-tidal waters of the United States extends to the 

6 “ordinary high water mark provided the jurisdiction is not extended by the presence of 

7 wetlands” (33 CFR § 328.4); and under Title 40 CFR § 230.3 (s)(1). Waters of the 

8 United States are defined as:

9 “All waters which are currently used, or were used in the past, or may be susceptible to 

10 use in interstate or foreign commerce, including all waters which are subject to the ebb 

11 and flow of the tide, all interstate waters including interstate wetlands, all other waters 

12 such as intrastate lakes, rivers, streams (including intermittent streams), mudflats, 

13 sandflats, wetlands, sloughs, prairie potholes, wet meadows, playa lakes, or natural 

14 ponds, the use, degradation or destruction of which would affect interstate or foreign 

15 commerce, including such waters which are or could be used by interstate or foreign 

16 travelers for recreational or other purposes, or from which fish or shellfish are or could 

17 be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce, or which are used or could be used 

18 for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; all impoundment of waters 

19 otherwise defined as waters of the United States interstate commerce, tributaries of 

20 waters identified in paragraphs 1-4 of this section, the territorial seas; and wetlands 

21 adjacent to waters.”

22

23 Many wetlands are protected under the CWA as waters of the U.S. and special aquatic 

24 sites. Wetlands are defined by the USACE based on the presence of wetland 

25 vegetation, wetland hydrology, and hydric soils. In addition, Executive Order 11990, 

26 Protection of Wetlands (42 Federal Register 26961), directs all federal agencies to 

27 minimize the destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands, and to enhance the natural 

28 and beneficial values of wetlands. Federal regulation and management of wetlands 

29 follows a “no net loss” policy. Under Section 404, the USACE issues a number of 

30 nationwide permits for different types of activities that result in minimal individual and 

31 cumulative adverse effects on the aquatic environment and individual permits for larger 

32 and more complex impacts.

33 Nationwide permits. A nationwide permit is a general permit that authorizes a 

34 category of activities throughout the nation by streamlining the approval process for 

35 certain types of activities that have minimal impacts to aquatic resources. These 

36 permits are valid only if the conditions applicable to the permit are met. If the conditions 

37 cannot be met, a regional or individual permit would be required. Section 404 

38 Nationwide Permit 12 (77 Federal Register 10271-10272 February 2012) covers 

39 construction, maintenance, and repair of utility lines in all waters of the U.S. provided 

40 that there is no change in pre-construction contours. This nationwide permit also covers 

41 related facilities including substations, structure foundations, and roads; provided that 

42 these activities do not result in the loss of greater than 0.5 acre of waters of the U.S. 

43 Nationwide Permit 12 also authorizes temporary structures, fill, and work necessary to 

44 conduct utility line activities as long as (1) appropriate measures are taken to maintain 

45 normal downstream flows and minimize flooding, (2) structures and fill consist of 

46 materials that would not be eroded by high flows, and (3) structures and fill are removed 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-5

1 in their entirety and the affected areas are returned to pre-construction elevations and 

2 re-vegetated as appropriate upon project completion. Impact limitations for Nationwide 

3 Permit 12 cover all disturbances at a single crossing of a wetland or stream, or multiple 

4 crossings of the same wetland or stream. 

5 Any permanent impacts over 0.1 acres to waters of the U.S. require full mitigation, 

6 regardless of permit type. Permanent loss of more than 0.5 acres of a water of the U.S. 

7 requires an individual (General) permit rather than coverage under a Nationwide Permit. 

8 Nationwide Permits contain general conditions that address potential impacts to the 

9 environment that could result from dredge or fill of waters of the U.S., such as adverse 

10 effects to soils, migration and spawning habitats, endangered species, or historic 

11 properties. Supplemental documentation may be required as part of a pre-construction 

12 notification package (e.g. plant and wildlife survey reports, cultural resource survey 

13 reports) to support compliance with the general conditions of the Nationwide Permit. 

14 Compliance with the National Historic Preservation Act and the Endangered Species 

15 Act is being addressed in the Environmental Impact Statement currently being prepared 

16 for this Project.

17 Individual Permits. Individual Permits are issued following a full public notice interest 

18 review of an individual application for a Department of Army permit. A public notice is 

19 distributed to all known interested persons. After evaluating all comments and 

20 information received, a final decision on the application is made. The final decision is 

21 made on a case-by-case evaluation and is generally based on the outcome of the public 

22 notice process and a determination of project benefits versus detriments (losses). 

23 3.6 Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899, Sections 9 and 10 

24 Section 9 of the Rivers and Harbors Appropriation Act of 1899 (33 U.S.C. 403; Chapter 

25 425, March 3, 1899; 30 Stat. 1151) (Act) prohibits the construction of any bridge, dam, 

26 dike or causeway over or in navigable waterways of the U.S. without Congressional 

27 approval. Administration of section 9 has been delegated to the Coast Guard. 

28 Structures authorized by State legislatures may be built if the affected navigable waters 

29 are totally within one State, provided that the plan is approved by the Chief of Engineers 

30 and the Secretary of Army (33 U.S.C. 401). 

31 Under section 10 of the Act, the building of any wharfs, piers, jetties, and other 

32 structures is prohibited without Congressional approval, and excavation or fill within 

33 navigable waters requires the approval of the Chief of Engineers. Authority of the 

34 USACE to issue permits for the discharge of refuse matter into or affecting navigable 

35 waters under section 13 of the 1899 Act (33 U.S.C. 407; 30 Stat. 1152) was modified by 

36 title IV of P.L. 92-500, October 18, 1972, the Federal Water Pollution Control Act 

37 Amendments of 1972 (33 U.S.C. 1341-1345; 86 Stat. 877), as amended, which 

38 established the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permits. 

39 The Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act (16 U.S.C. 661-667e; 48 Stat. 401), as 

40 amended, provides authority for the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS) to review 

41 and comment on the effects on fish and wildlife of activities proposed to be undertaken 

42 or permitted by the USACE. USFWS concerns include contaminated sediments 

43 associated with dredge or fill projects in navigable waters. 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-6

1 3.7 Other Federal Permits and Programs

2 Executive Order 11988 requires federal agencies to avoid to the extent possible the 

3 long- and short-term adverse impacts associated with the occupancy and modification

4 of floodplains and to avoid direct and indirect support of floodplain development 

5 wherever there is a practicable alternative. In accomplishing this objective, “each 

6 agency shall provide leadership and shall take action to reduce the risk of flood loss, to 

7 minimize the impact of floods on human safety, health, and welfare, and to restore and 

8 preserve the natural and beneficial values served by flood plains in carrying out its 

9 responsibilities.”

10 3.8 Idaho Permit

11 An Idaho State Stream Alteration Permit must be obtained prior to altering any stream 

12 as defined by Idaho Administrative Code (37.03.07) which includes “... to obstruct, 

13 diminish, destroy, alter, modify, or change the natural existing shape of the channel or 

14 to change the direction of flow of water of any stream channel within or below the mean 

15 high water mark.”

16 4.0 OVERVIEW OF STREAMS, WETLANDS, WELLS, AND 

17 SPRINGS

18 4.1 Streams and Drainages

19 A review of the National Wetland Inventory and field surveys conducted in 2009 through 

20 2013 identified and will identify perennial, intermittent, and ephemeral streams and 

21 drainages that are either crossed by the Project centerline or by access roads or 

22 ancillary facilities. In addition, ephemeral streams, drainages, and irrigation ditches are 

23 crossed by the Project right-of-way, access roads, substations, and temporary work 

24 areas. Jurisdictional waters of the United States crossed by the Project are being 

25 delineated during pre-construction stream and wetland surveys and will be presented to 

26 the USACE for a jurisdictional determination.

27 4.2 Wetlands 

28 Wetlands are defined for regulatory purposes as “those areas that are inundated or 

29 saturated by surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, 

30 and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically 

31 adapted for life in saturated soil conditions” (33 CFR Part 328.3, 40 CFR Part 230.3). 

32 Wetlands are important ecological resources that perform many functions including 

33 groundwater recharge, flood flow attenuation and conveyance, erosion control, and 

34 water quality improvement. They also provide habitat for many plants and animals, 

35 including threatened or endangered species.

36 The initial wetland assessment was conducted during the development of the Draft 

37 Environmental Impact Statement (EIS). Wetland delineations that follow the USACE 

38 Wetland Delineation Manual (1987) and Arid West Regional Supplement (2008) will be 

39 conducted prior to construction. The USACE Wetland Delineation Manual provides 

40 technical guidelines and methods for a three-parameter approach to determine the 

41 location and boundaries of potentially jurisdictional wetlands. This approach requires
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-7

1 that an area support positive indicators of hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils, and 

2 wetland hydrology to be considered a wetland. Surveyors gathered wetland 

3 determination information on data forms in the field and mapped wetland boundaries 

4 using GPS technology. Wetlands that meet all three parameters will be presented to the 

5 USACE for a jurisdictional determination.

6 4.3 Wells and Springs

7 Wells and springs in known blasting zones will be identified prior to construction by the 

8 Construction Contractor. 

9 5.0 MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION AND 

10 OPERATION

11 The Companies and the Construction Contractor will adhere to the mitigation measures 

12 and other specific stipulations and methods discussed in the following sections and 

13 Appendix Z of the POD to minimize project impacts to jurisdictional waters of the United 

14 States, including wetlands, and wells and springs where they occur along the Project 

15 ROW, access roads, substations, and temporary work areas. Other specific stipulations 

16 and methods presented in Appendix D – Framework Reclamation Plan are designed to 

17 minimize the potential impacts to other non-jurisdictional drainages and dry swales 

18 found along the Project route.

19 However, it is expected the Construction Contractor will work cooperatively with the 

20 Compliance Inspection Contractor (CIC) and, as appropriate, USACE staff throughout 

21 construction to determine the most appropriate site-specific measures to be 

22 implemented based on a number of factors, including site characteristics, construction 

23 techniques to be used, anticipated weather conditions, mandatory permit requirements, 

24 and other variables. 

25 5.1 Specific Stipulations and Methods for Streams and Wetlands 

26 Specific measures will be followed as standard practices to protect and minimize 

27 impacts to streams and wetlands in the Project area. These measures are listed in 

28 Appendix Z of the POD.

29 5.2 Stream Crossing Methods

30 The transmission line centerline crosses streams and wetlands that will not be 

31 permanently impacted by the project because only the conductors will cross these water 

32 features. The process of stringing the conductors may bring the wires briefly into 

33 contact with the vegetation but there will be no damage to the vegetation. Where the 

34 line must cross forested riparian or wetland areas where the vegetation is now of a 

35 height to touch the conductors once strung and tensioned, or could grow into the 

36 conductors and create a safety hazard, the taller vegetation will be cut prior to 

37 construction. 

38 Operations and maintenance efforts will maintain the vegetation under the conductors at 

39 or below a height that prevents interaction with the conductors. See Appendix B of this 

40 POD, section 4.1.5, for a full description of vegetation management under conductors 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-8

1 throughout the Project. This ROW preparation and maintenance was taken into 

2 consideration when estimating total impact to wetland and riparian areas in the Final 

3 EIS (see Sections 3.9, Wetlands, and 3.16, Water Resources, of the Draft EIS (BLM 

4 2011)). 

5 With only a few exceptions, permanent, above-grade roads are needed to each 

6 structure and to each substation and regeneration station as part of the Project design. 

7 Where feasible, roads have been selected (if existing) or designed (if proposed) to avoid 

8 water and wetland crossings. Where such a crossing is not avoidable, several water or 

9 wetland crossing methods have been selected to minimize impact to waterbodies while 

10 allowing for safe and permanent access to each structure. Those methods, including 

11 avoidance of permanent roads in the important wetland area of the Bear River Plain 

12 near Cokeville, WY and Montpelier, ID, are detailed in Section 2.5 of Appendix B of this 

13 POD. 

14 Streams that the Project will impact will be identified in the Construction POD and 

15 Construction Operation and Maintenance Plan, submitted to the BLM, Forest Service, 

16 and other agencies as part of a request for a Notice to Proceed for a particular segment 

17 or work element. If a stream or wetland cannot be avoided during construction, the CIC 

18 and Construction Contractor will work together to identify the appropriate crossing 

19 strategy for vehicular access. The various types of crossing methods are discussed in 

20 detail in Appendix B of this POD, Section 2.5. 

21 When implemented, these crossing methods will help protect water quality by 

22 minimizing stream channel disturbance, erosion, and sedimentation due to Project 

23 activities. If the chosen crossing method is not adequately preventing and/or minimizing 

24 sedimentation and erosion, the CIC may require additional sediment controls when 

25 circumstances warrant. Streams crossed by the Project will be monitored by the CIC 

26 throughout construction for signs of bed and/or bank degradation. If disturbance 

27 resulting from installation of erosion control devices across shallow swales outweighs 

28 the benefits of having the devices in place, then the CIC, in consultation with the 

29 Construction Contractor, will have the option of not prescribing any temporary stream 

30 crossing or erosion control method. See Appendix C of this POD (Framework 

31 Environmental Compliance Management Plan).

32 Flow of sediment into the stream will be prevented by installing waterbars on the travel 

33 route at or near the top of bank (or other slope break) to redirect road runoff away from 

34 the stream. If necessary, downslope protection will be increased by extending silt fence 

35 from the down-gradient end of the waterbar. 

36 In cases where it is impractical and highly disruptive to the environment to construct 

37 temporary crossings, such as over very large watercourses or deep canyons, vehicles 

38 will not attempt to cross the watercourse. The conductor will be strung across these 

39 resources by hand or other method and construction equipment will be routed around. 

40 5.3 Wetland Crossing Methods

41 See Appendix B of this POD, Section 2.5.4, for a description of wetland crossing 

42 methods to be used for this project. Appendix B also specifies where permanent roads 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-9

1 will not be constructed in wetlands (Bear River Plain). See Section 6 for further details, 

2 below. 

3 If a wetland will be avoided, but a travel route will be bladed within 20 feet of the 

4 wetland edge, silt fence will be installed along the travel route on the wetland side 

5 unless the wetland is upgradient.

6 If removed during construction, wetland soil will be temporarily stored either within the 

7 wetland or in upland areas close to the wetland boundaries and will be used to restore 

8 the site to pre-construction contours. Silt fence will be installed around tower sites 

9 where necessary to minimize the potential for sediment discharge from excavated spoil 

10 into adjacent, undisturbed wetlands.

11 5.4 Spill Prevention 

12 To prevent potential spills or discharges from entering and impacting streams and 

13 wetlands, the measures listed in Appendix Z of the POD will be implemented:

14 5.5 Erosion and Sedimentation

15 To limit erosion and sedimentation from affecting streams and wetlands, the measures 

16 listed in Appendix Z of the POD will be implemented. In addition, please see Appendix 

17 G for framework SWPPP and SPCC Plans. 

18 5.6 Soil Storage near Streams

19 Any soil or other organic debris piled by bulldozers and grading equipment near the 

20 stream banks during construction will be stored a minimum of 100 feet from the banks 

21 and appropriately re-spread and stabilized to prevent sedimentation during rainfall 

22 events. The Construction Contractor will also adhere to any additional soil storage 

23 measures as required by applicable Project permits.

24 5.7 Stream Obstruction and Flash Flood Hazard 

25 The placement of transmission towers within the channel of a stream, drainage, or flash 

26 flood area will be avoided to the extent possible. If placement within these areas is 

27 unavoidable, the towers will be engineered to withstand the force of flood flows and will 

28 be constructed according to all applicable permits. Where placement of a transmission 

29 tower or road is unavoidable within a stream channel, permanent diversion structures, 

30 or culverts sufficient to carry the stream’s normal conveyance capacity at the site, or 

31 armoring for the pole foundations will be constructed. 

32 5.8 Protection of Wells and Springs

33 All applicable laws and regulations will be followed in respect to the protection for 

34 drinking water sources. Wells and springs in known blasting zones will be identified prior 

35 to construction by the Construction Contractor.

36 Refer to Appendix G – Framework Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure 

37 Plan; Appendix M – Framework Blasting Plan; and Appendix P – Framework Hazardous 

38 Materials Management Plan for additional measures pertaining to the protection of wells 

39 and springs. 
Framework Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan Appendix I

January 2013 I-10

1 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

2 BLM (Bureau of Land Management). 2011. Draft Environmental Impact Statement for 

3 the Gateway West Transmission Line Project. 

4 USACE (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers). 2008. Regional Supplement to the Corps of 

5 Engineers Wetland Delineation Manual: Arid West Region. Version 2.0. 

6 _______. 1987. Corps of Engineers Wetland Delineation Manual On-line Edition: 

7 Wetlands Research Program Technical Report Y-87-1. Vicksburg, MS: U.S. 

8 Army Corps of Engineer Waterways Experiment Station.

9
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX J

2 FRAMEWORK PALEONTOLOGICAL RESOURCES PROTECTION 

3 PLAN

4
Appendix J

Framework Paleontological Resources 

Protection Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ J-1

2.0 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK........................................................................... J-2

2.1 National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (P.L. 91-190, 83 Stat. 852, 42 

USC 4321-4327) ............................................................................................ J-2

2.2 Federal Land Policy and Management Act of 1976 (P.L. 94-579) ........................ J-2

2.3 Paleontological Resources Preservation, Omnibus Public Lands Act, Public 

Law 111-011, Title VI, Subtitle D 16 USC (OPLA-PRP 2009).............................. J-2

3.0 PALEONTOLOGICAL POTENTIAL......................................................................... J-2

3.1 Determination of Paleontological Potential ........................................................ J-2

3.2 Potential Fossil Yield Classification and Condition Classification ......................... J-5

4.0 PALEONTOLOGICAL STIPULATIONS AND METHODS.......................................... J-6

4.1 Stipulations and Methods ................................................................................ J-6

4.2 Construction Personnel Procedures ................................................................. J-7

4.3 Collection/Replication of Fossil Trackways ........................................................ J-7

4.4 Curation Plan ................................................................................................. J-7

5.0 LITERATURE CITED.............................................................................................. J-9

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A Bedrock and Fossil Potential Summary
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 Paleontological resources (i.e., fossils) are the remains or traces of ancient life (DOI 

19 2000). Fossil remains may include bones, teeth, shells, leaves, and wood found in 

20 geological deposits within which they were originally buried (DOI 2000). Paleontological 

21 resources include not only the actual fossils, but also the collecting localities and the 

22 geological deposits that contain the fossils (DOI 2000).

23 The purpose of the framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan (PRPP) is to 

24 assist the BLM in planning and design efforts for the proposed Project as it relates to 

25 paleontological resource issues. The framework PRPP identifies the mitigation 

26 measures needed to avoid or reduce project-related impacts to paleontological 

27 resources, wherever feasible. This plan provides important background and contextual 

28 information useful for the paleontological resources mitigation program. The logistics, 

29 procedures, and methods outlined in this framework PRPP ensure compliance with 

30 federal and state regulations (BLM 1998, 2008, 2009). 

31 The framework PRPP is a work plan for all of the paleontological-related activities that 

32 may ensue during the course of development of the Project. It is not the intent of the 

33 PRPP to present a comprehensive list of sites with discussions of all significant taxa 

34 found from the vicinity of the Project area. The PRPP offers a research-oriented 

35 framework and accompanying logistical guidelines to ensure significant non-renewable 

36 paleontological resources unearthed by development of the Project will be managed 

37 appropriately and in a timely manner, thereby effectively mitigating adverse impacts to 

38 these fossil resources.

39 As part of the environmental impact statement (EIS) process, a review was conducted 

40 of relevant published geological and paleontological reports, unpublished geological and 

41 paleontological reports, and museum paleontological site records. This approach was 

42 followed in recognition of the direct relationship that exists between paleontological 

43 resources and the geological units within which fossils are entombed. By knowing the 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-2

1 geology of a particular area and the fossil productivity of geological units that occur in 

2 the area, it is possible to predict where fossils will likely be found.

3 The proposed Project crosses bedrock units of varying fossil potential. Environmental 

4 protection measures (EPMs) to protect fossil resources are presented in Appendix Z of 

5 the Plan of Development (POD).

6 2.0 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

7 The following provides a brief overview of federal and state legislation, regulatory 

8 compliance, and professional standards applicable to paleontological resources in the 

9 Project area considered in the development of this Plan.

10 2.1 National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (P.L. 91-190, 83 Stat. 

11 852, 42 USC 4321-4327)

12 The National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) mandates policies to “preserve 

13 important historic, cultural, and natural aspects of our national heritage.” NEPA further 

14 provides for reports regarding the environmental impacts of federal actions on public 

15 lands.

16 2.2 Federal Land Policy and Management Act of 1976 (P.L. 94-579)

17 The Federal Land Policy and Management Act of 1976 (FLPMA) was enacted “to 

18 establish public land policy; to establish guidelines for its administration; to provide for 

19 the management, protection, development, and enhancement of the public lands; and 

20 for other purposes,” and requires that important historic, cultural, and natural aspects of 

21 our natural history be preserved. As such, paleontological resources on federal lands 

22 have been determined to be property of the United States and must be protected under 

23 FLPMA.

24 2.3 Paleontological Resources Preservation, Omnibus Public Lands 

25 Act, Public Law 111-011, Title VI, Subtitle D 16 USC (OPLA-PRP 

26 2009)

27 The purpose of the Paleontological Resources Preservation Act of 2009 is to “manage 

28 and protect paleontological resources on federal land using scientific principles and 

29 expertise.” It directs the DOI and the Forest Service to “develop appropriate plans for 

30 inventory, monitoring, and the scientific and educational use of paleontological 

31 resources, in accordance with applicable agency laws, regulations, and policies.”

32 3.0 PALEONTOLOGICAL POTENTIAL

33 3.1 Determination of Paleontological Potential

34 The Potential Fossil Yield Classification (PFYC) system is a measure of the likelihood of 

35 impacting fossil resources in a given area based on the occurrence of fossil-bearing 

36 geological units. This system predicts the probability of finding paleontological 

37 resources in a given area using geological maps of sufficient scale and detail. The 

38 numerical nature of the PFYC system also allows for ease of importation into a 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-3

1 geographic information system, further facilitating the planning and management 

2 decision-making process. The five-part PFYC system, as defined by the BLM (2008), is 

3 explained below:

4 Class 1 – Very low potential: Geological units not likely to contain recognizable fossil 

5 remains such as:

6 • Units that are igneous or metamorphic, excluding reworked volcanic-ash units

7 • Units that are Precambrian in age

8 The probability for impacting any fossils is negligible. Assessment or mitigation of 

9 paleontological resources is usually unnecessary. The occurrence of significant fossils 

10 is nonexistent or extremely rare.

11 Class 2 – Low potential: Sedimentary geological units not likely to contain vertebrate 

12 fossils or scientifically significant non-vertebrate fossils such as:

13 • Vertebrate or significant invertebrate or plant fossils not present or very rare

14 • Units that are generally younger than 10,000 years before present

15 • Recent eolian deposits

16 • Sediments that exhibit significant physical and chemical changes (i.e., diagenetic 

17 alteration)

18 The probability for the project toimpact vertebrate fossils or scientifically significant 

19 invertebrate or plant fossils is low. Assessment or mitigation of paleontological 

20 resources is not likely to be necessary. Localities containing important resources may 

21 exist, but would be rare and would not influence the classification. These important 

22 localities will be managed on a case-by-case basis and assessment or mitigation may 

23 be unnecessary except in rare or isolated circumstances.

24 Class 3 – Moderate or unknown potential: Fossiliferous sedimentary geological units 

25 where fossil content varies in significance, abundance, and predictable occurrence, or 

26 sedimentary units of unknown fossil potential such as:

27 • Often marine in origin with sporadic known occurrences of vertebrate fossils

28 • Vertebrate fossils and scientifically significant invertebrate and plant fossils 

29 known to occur intermittently and are predictably known to be low

30 • Poorly studied and/or poorly documented. Potential yield cannot be assigned 

31 without ground reconnaissance 

32 Class 3, 4, and 5 units are divided into subclasses, as described below.

33 Class 3a – Moderate potential: Units are known to contain vertebrate fossils or 

34 scientifically significant invertebrate or plant fossils, but these occurrences are widely 

35 scattered. Common invertebrate or plant fossils may be found in the area and 

36 opportunities may exist for hobby collecting. The potential for a project to be sited on or 

37 impact a significant fossil locality is low, but the potential is somewhat higher for 

38 common fossils.
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-4

1 Class 3b – Unknown potential: Units exhibit geological features and preservational 

2 conditions that suggest significant fossils could be present, but little information about 

3 the paleontological resources of the unit or the area is known. This may indicate the unit 

4 or area is poorly studied, and field surveys may uncover significant fossils. The units in 

5 this class may eventually be placed in another class when sufficient surveying and 

6 research is performed. The unknown potential of the units in this class should be 

7 carefully considered when developing any mitigation or management plans.

8 This classification includes a broad range of paleontological potential. It includes 

9 geological units of unknown potential, as well as units of moderate or infrequent 

10 occurrence of fossil resources. Management considerations cover a broad range of 

11 options as well and could include pre-disturbance surveys, monitoring, or avoidance. 

12 Ground-disturbing activities will require sufficient assessment to determine where 

13 significant paleontological resources occur in the area of the proposed action and 

14 whether the action could affect the paleontological resources. These units may contain 

15 areas that would be appropriate to designate as hobby-collecting areas due to the 

16 higher occurrence of common fossils and lower concern about affecting significant 

17 paleontological resources.

18 Class 4 – High potential: Geological units containing a high occurrence of significant 

19 fossils. Vertebrate fossils or scientifically significant invertebrate or plant fossils are 

20 known to occur and have been documented, but may vary in occurrence and 

21 predictability. Ground-disturbing activities may adversely affect paleontological 

22 resources in many cases.

23 Class 4a – High potential: Units exposed with little or no soil or vegetative cover. 

24 Outcrop areas are extensive, with exposed bedrock areas often larger than two acres. 

25 Paleontological resources may be susceptible to adverse impacts from ground26 disturbing actions. Illegal collecting activities may impact some areas. 

27 Class 4b – High potential: These are areas underlain by geological units with high 

28 potential, but have lowered risks of human-caused adverse impacts and/or lowered risk 

29 of natural degradation due to moderating circumstances. The bedrock unit has high 

30 potential, but a protective layer of soil, thin alluvial material, or other conditions may 

31 lessen or prevent potential impacts to the bedrock resulting from the activity There 

32 include areas such as:

33 • Extensive soil or vegetative cover; bedrock exposures are limited or not expected 

34 to be impacted

35 • Exposed outcrop are smaller than two contiguous acres

36 • Outcrops form cliffs of sufficient height and slope so impacts are minimized by 

37 topographic conditions

38 • Where other characteristics are present that lower the vulnerability of both known

39 and unidentified paleontological resources

40 The probability for impacting significant paleontological resources is moderate to high, 

41 and is dependent on the proposed action. Mitigation considerations must include 

42 assessment of the disturbance, which may include removal or penetration of the 

43 protective surface alluvium or soils, potential for future accelerated erosion, or increased 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-5

1 ease of access resulting in greater looting potential. If impacts to significant fossils can 

2 be anticipated, on-the-ground surveys prior to authorizing the ground-disturbing action 

3 usually will be necessary. On-site monitoring or spot-checking may be necessary during 

4 construction activities. Management prescriptions for resource preservation and 

5 conservation through controlled access or special management designation should be 

6 considered. Class 4 and 5 units may be combined as Class 5 for broad applications, 

7 such as planning efforts or preliminary assessments, when geological mapping at the 

8 appropriate scale is not available. Resource assessment, mitigation, and other 

9 management considerations are similar at this level of analysis, and impacts and 

10 alternatives can be addressed at a level appropriate to the application.

11 Class 5 – Very high potential: Highly fossiliferous geological units that consistently 

12 and predictably produce vertebrate fossils or scientifically significant invertebrate or 

13 plant fossils and are at risk of human-caused adverse impacts or natural degradation.

14 Class 5a – Very high potential: Units are exposed with little or no soil or vegetative 

15 cover. Outcrop areas are extensive with exposed bedrock areas often larger than two 

16 contiguous acres. Paleontological resources are highly susceptible to adverse impacts 

17 from ground-disturbing activities. Unit is frequently the focus of illegal collecting 

18 activities. 

19 Class 5b – Very high potential: These are areas underlain by geological units with very 

20 high potential but have lowered risks of human-caused adverse impacts and/or lowered 

21 risk of natural degradation due to moderating circumstances. The bedrock unit has very 

22 high potential, but a protective layer of soil, thin alluvial material, or other conditions may 

23 lessen or prevent potential impacts to the bedrock resulting from ground-disturbing 

24 activity. These include areas such as:

25 • Extensive soil or vegetative cover; bedrock exposures are limited or not expected 

26 to be impacted.

27 • Exposed outcrop are smaller than two contiguous acres.

28 • Outcrops form cliffs of sufficient height and slope so impacts are minimized by 

29 topographic conditions.

30 • Where characteristics are present that lower the vulnerability of both known and 

31 unidentified paleontological resources

32 The probability of impacting significant fossils is high to very high. Vertebrate fossils or 

33 scientifically significant invertebrate fossils are known or can be reasonably expected to 

34 occur in the impact area. On-the-ground surveys prior to authorizing any ground35 disturbing activities or land-use adjustments will usually be necessary. On-site 

36 monitoring may be necessary during construction activities. Mitigation will often be 

37 necessary before and/or during these actions. Official designation of areas of 

38 avoidance, special interest, and concern may be appropriate.

39 3.2 Potential Fossil Yield Classification and Condition Classification

40 The PFYC system replaces the Condition Classification system previously used by the 

41 BLM and defined in the Handbook for Paleontological Resource Management (BLM 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-6

1 1998). The three levels of the Condition Classification system correspond to the five 

2 levels of the PFYC as such:

3 • Class 1 – PFYC 4 or 5

4 • Class 2 – PFYC 3, 4, or 5 (based upon the geological unit)

5 • Class 3 – PFYC 1 or 2

6 The shift from the Condition Classification system to the PFYC is the result of an effort 

7 to increase interagency cooperation and consistency by bringing the methodologies of 

8 the BLM and Forest Service in line with one another. The five-part PFYC system is an 

9 excellent tool during the planning stages of a given project, whereas a three-part 

10 system, similar to the Condition Classification system, may be used both in the field and 

11 the office for the purpose of assigning placement of paleontology monitors along the 

12 project corridor. This system consists of high, moderate/unknown, and low sensitivities 

13 that determine areas that will require on-site paleontological monitors during 

14 construction activities. Construction activities impacting high and moderate/unknown 

15 potential geological units are generally assigned paleontology monitors; whereas low 

16 potential units will not be monitored, unless fossil resources are discovered during the 

17 course of construction activity.

18 The Companies will use the PFYC in assigning fossil potential to Project bedrock units. 

19 Attachment A presents a summary of bedrock units and estimates of PFYC for the 

20 Proposed Route. 

21 4.0 PALEONTOLOGICAL STIPULATIONS AND METHODS

22 The following stipulations and methods to be employed if paleontological resources are 

23 discovered during construction and development of the Project. The specifics of the 

24 efforts are described in greater detail in Appendix Z of the POD. 

25 4.1 Stipulations and Methods

26 Before Construction: An orientation workshop shall be prepared, reviewed by the BLM, 

27 and presented by a professional paleontologist to explain paleontological mitigation 

28 guidelines and procedures to the contractor and construction workers. This workshop 

29 can be presented in conjunction with any pre-construction meetings conducted prior to 

30 excavation. The workshop will review the PRTP and will endeavor to explain the nature, 

31 appearance, and importance of fossil vertebrates, invertebrates, and plants. The 

32 responsibilities of construction personnel in a paleontological mitigation context will also 

33 be explained. Construction workers shall not collect any fossils found during 

34 construction before their significance can be assessed by a qualified paleontologist.

35 During Construction: If paleontological resources (fossils) are found at any time during 

36 construction, work shall be redirected to another area nearby and the authorized BLM 

37 officer contacted so the scientific significance of the discovery may be assessed. If 

38 warranted, a qualified professional paleontologist with regional experience appointed by 

39 the BLM may then assess the significance of the discovery and recommend additional 

40 mitigation measures, as necessary. The paleontologist may be retained to perform 

41 inspection of the excavation and to salvage exposed fossils. A standard sample of 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-7

1 fossiliferous sediment may be collected for the collection and identification of terrestrial 

2 microvertebrates (e.g., rodents, birds, rabbits). The paleontologist may also determine 

3 whether the fossil is part of an archaeological deposit. If so, it shall then be considered a 

4 cultural resource discovery and treated according to the procedures specified in the 

5 Historic Properties Treatment Plan prepared prior to construction.

6 After Construction: For any fossils (vertebrate, invertebrate, and/or plant) collected 

7 during construction, a data collection program shall be undertaken that includes 

8 preparation of collected specimens to a point of identification and permanent 

9 preservation (including screen washing of fossiliferous sediment samples to collect 

10 small to microscopic vertebrate fossils); preparation of large vertebrate fossils collected 

11 in plaster jackets; long-term stabilization of all collected significant fossils; and analysis. 

12 The paleontological salvage team shall include an expert in vertebrate paleontology. A 

13 final report, including an itemized and accessioned inventory of collected specimens, 

14 shall be prepared by a professional vertebrate paleontologist and distributed to the 

15 BLM, Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries, and Idaho Geological 

16 Survey. All fossils collected during construction shall be curated at a qualified research 

17 facility, such as the paleontology museum at College of Idaho (Idaho) or Eastern 

18 Oregon College (Oregon). A repository agreement for curation would be reviewed and 

19 approved by the third-party contractor on behalf of the Companies, BLM, and the 

20 repository, which would provide guaranteed future research access to the fossils. 

21 Fossils discovered on private land would be considered property of the landowner. The 

22 landowner would have the option to keep the fossils or donate them to a federally 

23 approved, professional repository, preferably the same repository receiving fossils 

24 discovered on federal and state lands

25 4.2 Construction Personnel Procedures

26 Crews and supervisors should be on the lookout at all times for fossils, bones, animal 

27 trackways, charcoal, ash, or other paleontological resources exposed during excavation 

28 or ground-disturbing activities. Upon encountering an exposed fossil or other 

29 paleontological resource, the construction crew will stake-off and flag an area of 

30 approximately 2 meters on all sides of the discovery to alert equipment operators to the 

31 presence of the potential resource. Construction crews must avoid these staked32 off/flagged areas by a minimum of 6 meters until the authorized BLM officer has been 

33 contacted and has authorized continued excavation.

34 4.3 Collection/Replication of Fossil Trackways

35 Unique fossil trackways may occur within the area of potential effect of the Project, or 

36 adjacent to the Project area. Trackways are highly visible and are subject to removal by 

37 unauthorized collection. In the event that trackways cannot be avoided, overburden will 

38 be removed to expose the trackways, which will then either be removed (preferred) or 

39 replicated for curation. Collected specimens will be curated at an approved repository in 

40 accordance with appropriate federal, state, and county permits.

41 4.4 Curation Plan

42 Curation of fossil specimens collected during the paleontological mitigation program 

43 includes the preparation of collected specimens to a point of identification and 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-8

1 permanent preservation, including the screen washing of fossiliferous sediment samples 

2 to collect small to microscopic vertebrate fossils. Large specimens encased in plaster 

3 jackets taken from the site will be prepared in the paleontology laboratory.

4 The curation plan calls for laboratory preparation of collected fossil remains to a point of 

5 identification and permanent preservation (not exhibition). This preparation generally 

6 requires exposure of the collected resource(s) by removal of the surrounding 

7 sedimentary matrix from the jacket. This matrix may be saved for later microfossil 

8 processing. Once the matrix has been removed and the specimen has been cleaned, 

9 the fossil is hardened with Vinac, a modified polyvinyl acetate homopolymer, which has 

10 been thinned with acetone to enable the hardener to more fully penetrate the fossil. 

11 Vinac may be applied several times before the fossil is deemed to be sufficiently sturdy 

12 for permanent storage. Excess plaster from the jacket is then trimmed to reduce the 

13 amount of storage space required by the specimen.

14 The curation plan also includes the processing of standard samples of fossiliferous 

15 matrix. The sedimentary matrix will be washed with water through stacked sets of 20-

16 and 30-mesh screens and sun dried. Where appropriate, some sediment samples may 

17 be washed through more finely meshed screens to enable the collection of microscopic 

18 ostracodes or fossil pollen. To accelerate the breakdown of the fossiliferous matrix, 

19 sediments will be oven-roasted to promote drying and then re-submerged in water to 

20 facilitate disaggregation of clays and fine silts. Subsequent screen washing will remove 

21 these fine sediments and leave fossil specimens in a clean concentrate. This 

22 concentrate will be visually examined with a binocular microscope and hand-sorted to 

23 remove fossil specimens.

24 The curation plan further includes sampling for fossil pollen. In those cases where 

25 pollen is identified from bulk samples in the field, additional sampling should be initiated 

26 where warranted in a series of more precise (e.g., 2 centimeters) sampling horizons. 

27 This will potentially enable determination of changes in plant distributions and 

28 microclimate through time.

29 Should plant macrofossils be exposed or identified during a mitigation program, such 

30 fossils should be collected and prepared to a point of identification and permanent 

31 preservation (not exhibition). Preparation generally requires full exposure of the 

32 collected resource(s) by splitting of thin sedimentary layers along their bedding planes, 

33 followed by application of a hardening agent. Misting with a 10:1 water/white glue 

34 mixture is usually sufficient for preserving such fossils. Application of nitrocellulose 

35 thinned with acetone is also recommended in some instances (LePage and Basinger 

36 1993). In some cases, select rock slabs thought to contain fossilized plant remains will 

37 be left intact for future researchers.

38 Other curatorial tasks will include the identification, curation, and accessioning of all 

39 collected specimens into the retrievable storage collections of an approved, accredited 

40 curation facility. All data pertaining to the specimens will be recorded in the collections 

41 database of the repository. Resource locality information will also be plotted on 

42 topographic maps and entered into a computerized locality database. Card stock 

43 printouts of all pertinent faunal, floral, locational, and lithologic data pertaining to each 

44 resource locality will be produced and filed. Card stock files from the locality database 

45 will also be printed and kept on file.
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-9

1 Following preparation, fossils will be stored in steel cabinets with steel geological 

2 specimen trays. Accession and locality data will be printed in archival ink on acid-free 

3 paper tags associated with each specimen, generated from the specimen database. 

4 Accession numbers of large fossils will be written on the bone in permanent ink. Large 

5 fossils will be stored in their plaster jackets where necessary to help retain the integrity 

6 of the bone. Excess plaster will be cut away prior to storage to maximize storage space. 

7 Microfossils will be stored in glass vials with cork stoppers. Extremely small specimens 

8 (e.g., ostracodes) will be placed in gelatin capsules within the glass vials. Accession 

9 data slips, also generated from the computer database, will be placed inside each of the 

10 glass vials to prevent accidental shuffling of the collection, and provide a means of 

11 “earthquake-proofing” the collection. The glass vials will be placed in cardboard 

12 jewelers’ boxes with their data slips, then permanently stored in the geological 

13 specimen trays. Labels bearing accession number data will be glued to rock slabs 

14 bearing marine invertebrates or fossil plant remains, in such a manner so as not to 

15 damage or obscure the fossil(s).

16 Specimens collected during the course of the mitigation program will be identified by 

17 professional paleontologists who have appropriate expertise in vertebrate and 

18 invertebrate paleontology and paleobotany.

19 The fossils will be curated, stored, and accessioned into the permanent retrievable 

20 collections of a recognized, accredited repository. All paleontological resources will be 

21 catalogued and accessioned under a unique number, which will identify the appropriate 

22 property and/or development project as the source of the fossils.

23 A final report of methods and results of the paleontological mitigation plan will be 

24 provided at the cessation of the mitigation program. The report will include a detailed 

25 discussion of how the research goals of the project have been met, in addition to 

26 descriptions of significant discoveries, discussion of the curation of the resources, and 

27 results of sampling and analysis, as well as an itemized accession inventory of all 

28 specimens collected. A discussion of the significance of each taxon discovered will be 

29 provided, where feasible. All resource locality information will be presented as a 

30 confidential appendix and a printout of all locality data, as well as pull-out maps with all 

31 paleontological resource localities plotted.

32 5.0 LITERATURE CITED

33 BLM (Bureau of Land Management). 1998. General Procedural Guidance for 

34 Paleontological Resource Management. BLM Handbook H-8270-1.

35 ———. 2008. Potential Fossil Yield Classification (PFYC) System. Instruction 

36 Memorandum No. 2008-009. 

37 ——— 2009. Guidelines for Assessment and Mitigation of Potential Impacts to 

38 Paleontological Resources. Instruction Memorandum No. 2008-011-attach 1.

39 DOI (Department of Interior). 2000. Fossils on Federal and Indian Lands: Assessment 

40 of Fossil Management on Federal and Indian Lands: Report of the Secretary of 

41 the Interior (Bruce Babbitt).
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013 J-10

1 LePage, B.A., and J.F. Basinger. 1993. The Use of Lacquer (nitrocellulose) for the 

2 Coating and Preservation of Fossil Leaf Impressions. Journal of Paleontology 67:

3 128-134. 

4
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

January 2013

ATTACHMENT A 

BEDROCK AND FOSSIL POTENTIAL SUMMARY 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-1

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

1W(a) 76.5 

Chugwater Formation or group 5.3 3 

Goose egg Formation 5.5 2 

Cody shale 2.6 3 

Frontier Formation 0.4 3 

Fox Hills sandstone sandstone 1.1 3 

Cloverly, Morrison, and Sundance Formations 1.8 3 

Lance Formation 3.8 3 

Mowry and Thermopolis shales 0.9 3 

Mesaverde group 8.5 3 

Niobrara Formation 1.0 5 

Steele shale 3.1 3 

Casper Formation 2.4 3 

Tensleep sandstone and Amsden Formation 0.1 2 

Madison limestone, Darby Formation, Bighorn 

dolomite, Gallatin Limestone, GrosVentre Formation 

and Flathead sandstone 0.5 3 

Alluvium and colluvium 3.8 2 

Dune sand and loess 4.4 2 

Upper Miocene Rocks 3.3 5 

Wind River Formation - at base locally includes 

equivalent of Indian Meadows Formation 8.4 5 

White River Formation, upper conglomerate member 7.9 5 

Archean Granitic Rocks 5.2 1 

Granite Gneiss 2.1 1 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 250.8 

1W(c) 70.6 

Chugwater Formation or group 7.7 3 

Goose egg Formation 3.8 2 

Cody shale 4.0 3 

Frontier Formation 0.6 3 

Fox Hills sandstone 1.0 3 

Cloverly, Morrison, and Sundance Formations 0.5 3 

Lance Formation 5.0 3 

Mowry and Thermopolis shales 0.7 3 

Mesaverde group 0.6 3 

Niobrara Formation 1.2 5 

Steele shale 2.2 3 

Casper Formation 2.5 3 

Madison limestone, Darby Formation, Bighorn 

dolomite, Gallatin Limestone, GrosVentre Formation 

and Flathead sandstone 0.7 3 

Alluvium and colluvium 7.7 2 

Upper Miocene Rocks 2.5 5 

Wind River Formation - at base locally includes 

equivalent of Indian Meadows Formation 9.3 5 

White River Formation, upper conglomerate member 7.8 5 

Whiter River Formation 4.5 5 

Archean Granitic Rocks 5.9 1 

Granite Gneiss 2.3 1 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 234.2 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-2

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

2 96.7 

Lance Formation 4.2 3 

Lewis shale 4.4 3 

Medicine Bow Formation 0.8 3 

Mesaverde group 8.4 3 

Niobrara Formation 0.5 5 

Steele shale 2.9 3 

Steele shale and Niobrara Formation 8.5 5 

Alluvium and colluvium 8.1 2 

Playa lake and other lacustrine deposits 4.4 2 

Gravel, pediment, and fan deposits 0.7 2 

Fort Union Formation 12.5 3 

Hanna Formation 21.7 5 

Ferris Formation 1.1 5 

Miocene Rocks 8.5 3 

Wasatch Formation 10.0 5 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 360.3 

3 56.5 

Almond Formation 4.7 3 

Fox Hills sandstone and Lewis shale 7.6 3 

Lance Formation 2.3 3 

Alluvium and colluvium 1.9 2 

Playa lake and other lacustrine deposits 2.3 2 

Dune sand and loess 5.0 2 

Fort Union Formation 5.0 3 

Green River Formation 11.2 5 

Wasatch Formation 16.4 5 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 215.3 

4 203.0 

Ankareh Formation, Thaynes limestone, Woodside 

shale, and Dinwoody Formation 2.4 3 

Nugget sandstone 2.1 3 

Stump Formation, Preuss sandstone or redbeds, and 

Twin Creek limestone 5.3 3 

Aspen shale 0.6 3 

Almond Formation 4.7 3 

Baxter shale 3.2 3 

Blair Formation 4.0 3 

Bear River Formation 0.4 3 

Ericson sandstone 2.5 3 

Frontier Formation 0.8 3 

Fox Hills sandstone and Lewis shale 1.7 3 

Gannett group 0.7 3 

Hilliard shale 1.0 3 

Rock Springs Formation 8.5 3 

Sage Junction, Quely, Cokeville, Thomas Fork, and 

Smiths Formations 1.0 3 

Sage Junction, Quely, Cokeville, Thomas Fork, and 

Smiths Formations 0.2 3 

Wells and Amsden Formations 1.2 3 

Phosphoria Formation and related rocks 0.6 3 

Alluvium and colluvium 7.6 2 

Landslide deposits 0.2 1 

Dune sand and loess 2.9 2 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-3

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

Gravel, pediment, and fan deposits 6.6 2 

Terrace gravel (Pleistocene and/or Pliocene) 1.5 2 

Bridger Formation 34.5 5 

Fowkes Formation (Pliocene? and Eocene) 0.6 3 

Fort Union Formation 1.3 3 

Green River Formation 22.1 5 

Evanston Formation 0.3 3 

Salt Lake Formation 0.4 3 

Wasatch Formation 17.0 5 

Alluvium, Eolian Loess 11.6 3 

Alluvial-fan deposits 0.2 3 

Bonneville and Alpine Formations 

4.7 3 

Alluvium 

Main Canyon Formation of Bright 

Tufa and Travertine 

Salt Lake Formation 

Alluvium 1.1 3 Formation of Marsh Valley 

Salt Lake Formation 3.0 3 

Salt Lake Formation, Upper Conglomerate Unit 

17.4 5 Salt Lake Formation, Skyline Member 

Salt Lake Formation, Cache Valley Member 

Colluvium (Pleistocene) 

Eolian Loess 3.6 3 

Salt Lake Formation 0.2 3 Nugget Sandstone 

Thaynes Limestone 3.7 5 

Twin Creek Limestone 5.2 3 Alluvium 

Nugget Sandstone 0.5 3 

Swan Peak Quartzite 

Garden City Limestone 4.6 3 

St. Charles Limestone 

Nounan Limestone 

St. Charles Limestone 5.5 4 

Worm Creek Quartzite Member 

Brigham Quartzite 0.3 3 

Diamicton 5.7 3 Brigham Quartzite 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 785.1 

5 54.6 

Great Blue Limestone, lower limestone member 3.1 3 

Floodplain sediments 

Formation of Marsh Valley 1.9 3 

Loess 

Alluvial-fan deposits 

12.7 3 

Eolian Loess 

Alluvial deposits 

Loess 

Alluvial fan gravel 

Alluvial fan gravel 0.6 3 

Dune sand 0.0 3 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-4

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

Alluvial fan gravel 

Bonneville flood gravel 4.8 3 Formation of Marsh Valley 

Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, undifferentiated 0.7 4 

Sunbeam Formation 2.0 3 Alluvium 

Loess 1.8 4 Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, upper member 

Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, undifferentiated 2.2 4 Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, upper member 

Oquirrh Formation, Unit D 1.7 3 

Oquirrh Formation, Unit B 12.2 3 Oquirrh Formation, Unit A, lower limestone 

St. Charles Formation, upper member 0.8 3 Garden City Formation 

Garden City Formation 

4.4 3 Swan Peak Quartzite 

Fish Haven Dolomite 

St. Charles Formation, upper member 

Alluvium (Holocene and Pleistocene) 0.7 2 

American Falls Lake Beds (upper Pleistocene) 0.4 3 

Raft Formation (upper or middle Pleistocene) 0.7 2 

Dune sand and loess 0.4 2 

Sun Beam Formation (Upper Pleistocene) 2.8 2 

Terrace gravel (Pleistocene) 0.4 2 

Massacre Volcanics (Pliocene and upper Miocene) 0.1 3 

Walcott Tuff (upper Miocene) 0.0 3 

Water 0.2 0 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 162.9 

6 0.5 

Dune sand and loess 0.2 2 

Basalt of Notch Butte 

Mixed alluvial and lacustrine deposits 0.3 2 

Basalt of Bacon Butte 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 1.0 

7 118.1 

Floodplain sediments 

Formation of Marsh Valley 3.2 3 

Loess 

Alluvial-fan deposits 

40.1 3 

Eolian Loess 

Alluvial deposits 

Loess 

Alluvial fan gravel 

Alluvial fan gravel 13.3 3 

No detail 9.4 3 

Bonneville flood gravel 8.5 3 Formation of Marsh Valley 

Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, undifferentiated 12.5 4 

Sunbeam Formation 5.3 3 Alluvium 

Loess 2.2 4 Starlight and Salt Lake Formations, upper member 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-5

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

No detail - possilby rhyolite 2.0 3 

Salt Lake Formation, undifferentiated 2.1 3 

Oquirrh Formation, Unit D 5.8 3 

Oquirrh Formation, Unit B 6.4 3 Oquirrh Formation, Unit A, lower limestone 

St. Charles Formation, upper member 0.9 3 

No detail - Mississippian sedimentary units 0.9 3 

No detail - Devonian sedimentary units 0.4 3 

Garden City Formation 

Fish Haven Dolomite 5.0 3 

St. Charles Formation, upper member 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 368.9 

8 131.0 

Alluvium 3.1 3 

No-Detail gravel deposits 1.3 3 

Alluvium 1.3 3 

Cold Springs Creek lava flow 0.1 2 

Bonneville Flood Deposits 1.3 3 

Pebble gravel in conspicuous iron-stained beds as 

much as 25 feet thick in lake deposits 

1.4 

3 

Black Mesa Gravel 2.7 3 

Basalt of Higby Cave 4.1 2 

Basalt of Sand Creek 5.1 2 

Sedimentary material dominated by massive lake beds 

of white-weathering fine silt, clay, and diatom 

0.1 

3 

Dune Sand 0.2 3 

Upper Basalt of Halverson Lake 0.4 2 

Basalt of Initial Point 5.8 2 

Pleistocene waterlaid detritus; may be distal deposits of 

glacial floods and outwash 

14.7 

3 

Middle Pleistocene plateau and canyon-filling basalt in 

and near the Snake Plain 

20.6 

2 

Middle Pleistocene plateau and canyon-filling basalt in 

and near the Snake Plain 

3.9 

3 

Pleistocene outwash, fanglomerate, flood and terrace 

gravels 

2.5 

3 

Upper Pleistocene Snake Plain lava flows 2.7 2 

Upper Pleistocene Snake Plain lava flows 16.7 2 

Recent relatively un weathered Snake Plain Basalt 

flows and cinder cones 

8.2 

2 

Basalt of Swan Falls Road Hill 0.9 2 

Undifferentiated basalt flows on the periphyry of the 

Birds of Prey area whose sources are unknown 

0.8 

2 

Lower Pleistocene to Pliocene basalts with associated 

tuffs and volcanic detritus 

4.6 

3 

Glenns Ferry Formation of the Idaho Group, includes 

some younger lacustrine and fluvial sediments 

4.9 

5 

Gravel and associated clastic materials from southern 

sources, includes materials transported from the 

Owyhee Mountains 

3.3 

5 

Basalt of Orchard Ranch 2.6 2 

Basalt of the Tombstone Patch Rapids 1.4 2 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-6

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

Idaho Group and other fluvial, lacustrine, and eolian 

sediments in the northeast part of the Murphy 

Quadrangle 

12.9 

5 

Basalt flows associated with the Chalk Hills and Poison 

Creek Formations 

0.3 

5 

Poison Creek and Chalk Hill Formations, undivided 1.7 5 

Water 0.1 0 

Basaltic tuff of Waldvogel Canal 0.0 2 

Basaltic tuff of McDermott Road 0.0 2 

Middle basalt of Halverson Lake 0.1 2 

Chalky volcanic field 1.2 3 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 369.4 

9 162.2 

Fan alluvium 2 (upper Pleistocene) 0.1 3 

Colluvium derived from hard rocks (Holocene to Lower 

Pleistocene) 0.9 3 

Loess Unit 2: thin loess overlying basalt (Upper and 

Middle Pleistocene) 2.4 3 

Loess Unit 3, Moderately thick loess overlying basalt 

(upper to lower? Pleistocene) 22.8 3 

Deposits of Playas (Holocene and Upper Pleistocene) 0.4 3 

Alluvium 0.6 3 

Alluvium 7.1 3 

Alluvium of sidestreams (Holocene) 0.2 3 

 Deadman Canyon Lava flow 0.1 2 

Black Mesa Gravel 6.8 3 

Sedimentary material dominated by massive lake beds 

of white-weathering fine silt, clay, and diatom 6.1 3 

Basalt of Hub Butte (Pleistocene) 4.5 2 

Pleistocene outwash, fanglomerate, flood and terrace 

gravels 1.3 3 

Lower Pleistocene outwash, fanglomerate, flood and 

terrace gravels 8.2 3 

Middle Pleistocene plateau and canyon-filling basalt in 

and near the Snake Plain 0.3 2 

Middle Pleistocene plateau and canyon-filling basalt in 

and near the Snake Plain 5.2 3 

Tuana Gravel 0.6 3 

Glenns Ferry Formation 7.5 5 

Idaho Group and other fluvial, lacustrine, and eolian 

sediments in the northeast part of the Murphy 

Quadrangle 

5.8 5 

Rhyolite of castleford Crossing (Miocene) 3.5 2 

Basalt of Devil Creek Butte or Tuana Butte (Pliocene or 

Miocene) 0.6 2 

Pliocene silicic welded tuff, ash and flow rock; most 

common in southwestern Idaho 5.0 2 

Tuff of McMullen Creek 3.9 2 

Basalt of the Murphy Area 6.2 2 

Pliocene olivine basalt flows and associated tuff and 

detritus of southern Idaho 1.6 3 

Poison Creek and Chalk Hill Formations, undivided 6.0 5 
Framework Paleontological Resources Protection Plan Appendix J

 January 2013 J-A-7

Attachment A Paleontological Sensitivity Rankings for Proposed Routes

Segment 

Number 

Segment 

Length 

(miles) Formation Name 

Miles 

Crossed 

Sensitivity 

Rating 

Rhyolite lava flows of Reynolds Creek 0.4 2 

Teapot volcanic field 1.5 3 

Upper Member of Tuff of Wooden Shoe Butte 0.4 3 

Alluvial fan deposits (Holocene and Pleistocene) 3.8 3 

Landslide deposits (Holocene to Middle Pleistocene) 0.2 3 

Pebble gravel in conspicuous iron-stained beds as 

much as 25 feet thick in lake deposits 0.2 3 

Talus 0.1 3 

Gravel surface, abundant Eocene volcanics 

(Quaternary or Tertiary) 0.3 3 

Gravel surface, abundant quartzite (Quaternary and 

Tertiary) 0.7 3 

Gravel lens or surface, abundant quartzite (Tertiary) 1.1 3 

Clay to sand sized sediments (Miocene or Pliocene) 25.3 3 

Chalky volcanic field 0.7 3 

Basalt of Sinker Creek 0.4 2 

Glenns Ferry Formation of the Idaho Group, includes 

some younger lacustrine and fluvial sediments 10.0 5 

Idaho Group and other fluvial, lacustrine, and eolian 

sediments in the northeast part of the Murphy 

Quadrangle 

8.7 5 

Chalk Hills Formation of the Idaho Group 0.7 5 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 539.0 

10 33.6 

Open Water 0.3 N/A 

Alluvium of side streams 0.4 3 

Alluvial-fan deposits 1.7 3 

Basalt of Skelaton Butte 4.2 2 

Basalt of Rocky Butte 15.3 2 

Basalt of Wilson Butte 2 

Basalt of Notch Butte 

Mixed alluvial and lacustrine deposits 2.9 3 

Basalt of Bacon Butte 

Basalt of Hansen Butte 8.8 2 Younger Tertiary basalt flows, undivided 

Paleontological Sensitivity Ranking 71.5 

Note: Mileages have been rounded to the nearest tenth of a mile; therefore, numbers are inexact and 

columns/rows may not sum exactly 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX K

2 FRAMEWORK AGRICULTURAL PROTECTION PLAN

3
Appendix K

Framework Agricultural Protection Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Agricultural Protection Plan Appendix K

January 2013 K-iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................. K-1

2.0 CONDITIONS...................................................................................................... K-1

3.0 OTHER APPLICABLE PLANS........................................................................... K-2

4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES ............................................... K-2

5.0 PLAN UPDATES ................................................................................................ K-3
Framework Agricultural Protection Plan Appendix K

January 2013 K-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION 

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 This Framework Agricultural Protection Plan (Plan) describes the framework for the 

19 measures intended to mitigate or provide compensation for agricultural impacts that 

20 may occur due to the construction of the Project. A goal of this Plan is to provide a basis 

21 for the Companies’ discussions with owners of property where the final Project will be 

22 sited. This Plan shall not be construed as establishing any contractual obligations or 

23 representations between the Companies and any party and shall not create any third24 party beneficiary rights between the Companies and any party. Proposed agriculture 

25 protection measures that will be included in the final agricultural protection plan (Final 

26 Plan) are included in Appendix Z of the Plan of Development (POD). 

27 2.0 Conditions

28 For the purpose of the Plan, agricultural land is defined as annually cultivated or rotated 

29 cropland, land in perennial field crops, improved pasture, hayfields, and land in the 

30 conservation or grazing reserve programs.

31 Unless an easement agreement specifically provides to the contrary, the Companies will 

32 implement the protection measures described in the Final Plan in accordance with the 

33 following conditions: 

34 • The protection measures and conditions described in the Final Plan apply only to 

35 construction activities occurring partially or wholly on privately owned agricultural 

36 land. They do not apply to construction activities on public right-of-ways (ROW), 

37 railroad ROWs, public land, or private land that is not agricultural land, except 

38 where agricultural structures, such as drainage tile and irrigation systems 

39 associated with privately owned agricultural land, pass through or extend into 

40 these areas.
Framework Agricultural Protection Plan Appendix K

January 2013 K-2

1 • The Companies will provide a copy of the Final Plan to any landowner or 

2 landowner’s designate and tenant of agricultural land prior to obtaining an 

3 easement. 

4 • The Companies may negotiate with the landowner or landowner’s designate to 

5 carry out the protections that landowners wish to perform themselves. 

6 • The Companies will implement the protection measures contained in the Final

7 Plan to the extent that they do not conflict with the requirements of any applicable 

8 federal, state, and local rules and regulations and other permits and approvals 

9 obtained by the Companies for the Project. 

10 • The Companies will implement the protection measures contained in the Final

11 Plan to the extent that they are consistent with the protection measures approved 

12 by, or other requirements of, permits and approvals issued by governing 

13 agencies.

14 • Certain provisions of the Plan require that the Companies consult with and/or 

15 obtain agreement with the landowner and the tenant of a property. The 

16 Companies will make a good-faith effort to secure the agreement of both the 

17 landowner and tenant in such cases. If there is a disagreement between the 

18 landowner and tenant, the Companies will secure the landowner’s agreement 

19 unless the tenant can demonstrate a superior legal right in the matter. 

20 Nothing in this document is intended to grant or suggest jurisdiction by any agency over 

21 remedies for property compensation resolved in accordance with Wyoming or Idaho 

22 law.

23 3.0 Other Applicable Plans

24 Measures for erosion control, dust control, soil protection, weed control, and restoration 

25 that will reduce impacts on agriculture are contained in the following framework plans:

26 • Traffic and Transportation Management Plan (Appendix L of the POD)

27 • Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan (Appendix G 

28 of the POD)

29 • Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) (Appendix F of the POD)

30 • Reclamation Plan (Appendix D of the POD)

31 • Stream, Wetland, Well, and Spring Protection Plan (Appendix I of the POD)

32 4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION Measures

33 The Companies are committing to implementing the environmental protection measures 

34 contained in Appendix Z of the POD. 
Framework Agricultural Protection Plan Appendix K

January 2013 K-3

1 5.0 Plan Updates

2 When the preferred route is selected and final engineering is complete, the Final Plan 

3 will be prepared. The final Plan will be updated prior to the start of construction. As the 

4 Companies better define the construction order and schedule, the Final Plan will be 

5 updated to include the schedule for baseline inventories, negotiations, and road 

6 locations.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX L

2 FRAMEWORK TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT 

3 PLAN

4
Appendix L

Framework Traffic and Transportation 

Monitoring Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan Appendix L

January 2013 L-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................L-1

2.0 PURPOSE............................................................................................................L-1

3.0 REGULATORY....................................................................................................L-1

4.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PRACTICES .............................................................L-2

5.0 LEVELS OF RIGHT-OF-WAY ACCESS..............................................................L-3

5.1 Paved Roads................................................................................................L-3

5.2 Existing Unpaved Roads Not Requiring Improvements ...............................L-3

5.3 Existing Unpaved Roads Requiring Improvements......................................L-3

5.4 New Access Roads ......................................................................................L-3

5.5 Temporary Roads ........................................................................................L-4

6.0 MITIGATION MEASURES...................................................................................L-4
Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan Appendix L

January 2013 L-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current (AC) electric transmission system consisting of 10 segments 

5 between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway

6 Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed 

7 transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve 

8 operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric

9 transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional 

10 energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. 

11 The Project includes ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of 

12 above-ground, single-circuit transmission lines involving towers, access roads, staging 

13 areas, fly yards, pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, 

14 and electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands 

15 administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), 

16 and the states of Idaho and Wyoming.

17 This Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan addresses regulatory 

18 compliance, traffic management practices, levels of right-of-way access, and protection 

19 measures to help reduce impacts related to transportation and the construction of 

20 temporary and long-term access within the vicinity of the Gateway West Transmission 

21 Line Project (Project). This document provides a template for a detailed Traffic and 

22 Transportation Management Plan to be developed by the Construction Contractor.

23 2.0 PURPOSE

24 The purpose of this plan is to provide the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) and other 

25 public agencies and the Construction Contractor with a description of the type of access 

26 associated with the construction, operation, and maintenance of this Project, and to 

27 make evident the potential impacts which could be created by construction and 

28 operation of the Project. The goal of this plan is to ensure that impacts from construction 

29 of the transmission line and any associated access are kept to a minimum through the 

30 use of management practices and mitigation measures described throughout this 

31 appendix. These practices and measures are intended to mitigate the effects of 

32 transportation on environmental resources, roads, traffic, travel, and road safety.

33 3.0 REGULATORY

34 A number of agencies have jurisdiction over the transportation-related components of 

35 the Project. These include the BLM, the Wyoming Department of Transportation, Idaho 

36 Transportation Department, Federal Highway Administration, local law enforcement and 

37 road departments and local highway districts in the counties crossed by the Project. 

38 Encroachment permit applications will need to be filed with appropriate road agencies 

39 for those areas where the transmission line crosses public roads prior to construction. 

40 Other permits and approvals not directly related to transportation could affect the 

41 construction, use, and/or maintenance of roads in certain areas. Persons responsible 
Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan Appendix L

January 2013 L-2

1 for Project transportation activities must be familiar with all relevant sections of Project’s

2 Plan of Development (POD).

3 4.0 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

4 Ground travel will be the primary means of transporting construction and maintenance 

5 crews and equipment during Project construction. Helicopters will be used as deemed 

6 necessary. All vehicles will obey jurisdictional traffic speed regulations and the posted 

7 speed limit. Speeds along access roads and spur roads within the right-of-way may be 

8 limited to 15 mph in some areas to prevent excessive amounts of construction related 

9 dust, as necessary.

10 Before construction, authorized access routes will be clearly marked in the field with 

11 signs or flagging. The Construction Contractor will review the location of permitted 

12 access and will be responsible for ensuring construction travel is limited to designated 

13 areas that clearly identify the limits of disturbance.

14 All field personnel will attend an environmental training program. Through this program, 

15 field personnel will be instructed to use only approved access roads, drive within the 

16 delineated road limits, and obey jurisdictional and posted speed limits to minimize 

17 potential impacts to biological, paleontological, and cultural resources.

18 Every effort will be made to minimize the effects of the Project construction activities on 

19 public transportation and to provide for public safety. The Construction Contractor and 

20 all environmental monitors will maintain a communications network that consists of one 

21 or both of the following devices: two-way radios or cellular phones. This will allow for 

22 coordination of equipment traffic along existing access roads so public safety, traffic 

23 impacts, and resource impacts are minimized. In addition, any necessary permits for the 

24 movement of equipment and materials will be obtained and complied with. 

25 In general, the number of construction vehicles needed for the Project is not expected to 

26 substantially increase traffic volumes. Similarly, road and land closures are anticipated 

27 to be minimal, and will most likely occur during conductor stringing activities or during 

28 blasting. If road and lane closures are needed, the appropriate regulatory agencies, 

29 affected parties, and emergency service providers will be notified in advance. 

30 Although construction traffic is not expected to disrupt access to residences along the 

31 right-of-way, adjacent landowners will be notified of the construction schedule (where 

32 appropriate). Signs will be posted in the Project area to notify landowners and others of 

33 the construction activity. Flagging will be maintained until final cleanup and/or 

34 reclamation is completed, after which they will be removed.

35 • A flagging scheme will be included in the final plan covering:

36 • Project access road;

37 • Temporary work areas (pulling sites, material yards, etc.);

38 • Protected animals/plants or sensitive environmental areas;

39 • Invasive weed cleaning stations; 

40 • Proposed structure locations; 

41 • Structure offsets;
Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan Appendix L

January 2013 L-3

1 • Outside edge of permitted right-of-way or centerline; and 

2 • Cadastral survey monument

3 Construction crews will park only in designated areas and will be shuttled to the 

4 appropriate work sites if necessary.

5 5.0 LEVELS OF RIGHT-OF-WAY ACCESS

6 Access to the Project right-of-way and other areas (e.g., multi-purpose areas), will be 

7 needed for Project construction, operation, and maintenance activities. Listed below are 

8 five types of roadways that will be used for this transmission line. 

9 5.1 Paved Roads

10 These roads are typically highways and state routes and will be used for travel to 

11 existing and new dirt roads to access the right-of-way. No staking will be required for 

12 this type of access.

13 5.2 Existing Unpaved Roads Not Requiring Improvements

14 These are existing dirt or gravel roads that generally will not require any improvements 

15 to support construction vehicles to access the right-of-way. Regular maintenance for 

16 construction (regarding wash-out areas, graveling, and installation of gravel pads for 

17 controlling trackout) is allowed in these areas. The outer edge of existing dirt access 

18 roads that have been approved for the Project will be staked. If it is determined that one 

19 of these roads does need improvement, the Companies must be notified and any 

20 change approved through the variance process described the Environmental 

21 Compliance and Management Plan – Appendix C to this POD. 

22 5.3 Existing Unpaved Roads Requiring Improvements

23 These are existing dirt or gravel roads that may require improvements to support 

24 construction vehicles to access the right-of-way, and may be widened to a minimum of 

25 14 feet wide travel way and 16- to 20-foot-wide road width in turns. Improvements to 

26 these existing roads may include road widening, road straightening/realignment, 

27 mowing, blading, tree removal, and bridge/culvert construction. These roads will require 

28 reclamation to pre-construction condition if they are not identified as service roads for 

29 future operation and maintenance of the transmission line. The required road 

30 disturbance area and travel way in areas of rolling to hilly terrain will require a wider 

31 disturbance to account for cuts and fills, turning radii, and/or where vehicles are 

32 required to pass one another while traveling in opposite directions. The amount of

33 disturbance due to hilly terrain conditions is described in Transmission Line and 

34 Substation Components – Appendix B. 

35 5.4 New Access Roads

36 Development of new roads begins with tree removal and grading to create a horizontal 

37 and vertical alignment suitable for passage of construction vehicles. These are new 

38 roads are generally a minimum of 14 feet wide travel way and 16- to 20-foot-wide road 

39 width in turns and may bridge/culvert installation. These roads will require reclamation 

40 to pre-construction condition if they are not identified as service roads for future 

41 operation and maintenance of the transmission line. The required road disturbance area 
Framework Traffic and Transportation Management Plan Appendix L

January 2013 L-4

1 and travel way in areas of rolling to hilly terrain will require a wider disturbance to 

2 account for cuts and fills, turning radii, and/or where vehicles are required to pass one 

3 another while traveling in opposite directions. The amount of disturbance due to hilly 

4 terrain conditions is described in Transmission Line and Substation Components –

5 Appendix B.

6 5.5 Temporary Roads

7 Roads will be constructed to temporary facilities such as multi-purpose areas and fly 

8 yards. They may comprise existing or new roads. In either case these roads will require 

9 reclamation to pre-construction condition once construction is complete.

10 6.0 MITIGATION MEASURES

11 Protection measures to avoid or reduce impacts associated with access to and from the 

12 transmission line are listed in Appendix Z of the POD.

13
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX M

2 FRAMEWORK BLASTING PLAN

3
Appendix M

Framework Blasting Plan 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................M-1

2.0 PURPOSE...........................................................................................................M-1

3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE AND PROCEDURES .......................................M-1

4.0 BLASTING PLAN GUIDANCE...........................................................................M-2

4.1 Overview of Blasting Principles ...................................................................M-2

4.1.1 Locations.........................................................................................M-2

4.1.2 Materials .........................................................................................M-2

4.2 Blasting Plan Contents................................................................................M-2

5.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES....................................................................................M-4

5.1 Storage........................................................................................................M-4

5.2 Blasting Notification and Safety Procedures ...............................................M-4

5.3 Fire Safety...................................................................................................M-5

5.4 Transportation of Explosives .......................................................................M-5

5.5 Other Specific Stipulations and Methods ....................................................M-6

6.0 LITERATURE CITED..........................................................................................M-6
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 The Framework Blasting Plan outlines methods to mitigate risks and potential impacts 

19 associated with blasting procedures that may be required for construction of the Project. 

20 This document provides a template for the detailed Final Blasting Plan to be developed 

21 by the Construction Contractor.

22 2.0 PURPOSE

23 Once completed, the Blasting Plan will provide construction crews, the Compliance 

24 Inspection Contractor (CIC), and environmental monitors with project-specific 

25 information concerning blasting procedures, including the safe use and storage of 

26 explosives. The objective of the Blasting Plan is to prevent adverse impacts to human 

27 health and safety, property, and the environment that could potentially result from the 

28 use of explosives during project construction. 

29 Blasting may be needed in certain areas with rocky terrain to excavate tower footings, 

30 prepare substation pads, and for construction of access roads. Blasting will be used 

31 only in areas where traditional excavation and earth moving equipment and practices 

32 are unable to accomplish the excavation. In addition, the Construction Contractor may 

33 elect to utilize implosive sleeves during line stringing activities to fuse conductor wire 

34 together. Areas where blasting will likely occur will be identified based on the geologic 

35 setting of the proposed alignment, as identified in the geotechnical investigation for the 

36 Project.

37 3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE AND PROCEDURES 

38 The Blasting Contractor will be responsible for preparing and implementing the Blasting 

39 Plan and must comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations 

40 which pertain to explosives. No blasting operations will be undertaken until approval and 
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-2

1 appropriate permits have been obtained from the applicable agencies. Failure to comply 

2 with such laws could result in substantial financial penalty and/or imprisonment. 

3 The Construction Contractor will use a qualified, experienced, and licensed Blasting 

4 Contractor that will perform blasting using current and professionally accepted methods, 

5 products, and procedures to maximize safety during blasting operations. Blasting 

6 procedures will be carried out according to, and in compliance with, applicable laws and 

7 will be closely monitored by the CIC. 

8 4.0 BLASTING PLAN GUIDANCE 

9 Prior to blasting, the Blasting Contractor shall prepare a Blasting Plan for review and 

10 approval by the BLM, CIC, and any other relevant jurisdictional organization (i.e.,

11 School and Institutional Trust Lands Administration, county, city), as applicable. The 

12 plan will address safety as well as design for production and controlled blasting. The 

13 Blasting Plan also will contain the full details of the drilling and blasting patterns, as well 

14 as the controls the Blasting Contractor proposes to use for both controlled and 

15 production blasting. Review of the plan by the parties shall not relieve the Blasting 

16 Contractor of the responsibility for the accuracy and adequacy of the Blasting Plan 

17 when implemented in the field. A minimum of two weeks should be allowed for review 

18 and approval of the Blasting Plan by the BLM and appropriate agencies. If at any time

19 changes are proposed to the Blasting Plan, the Blasting Contractor shall submit them to 

20 the BLM and CIC for review and approval.

21 4.1 Overview of Blasting Principles

22 4.1.1 Locations

23 The Construction Contractor’s Blasting Contractor will avoid blasting in potential 

24 rockslide/landslide areas to the maximum extent possible and will consult with a 

25 geologist before blasting in such areas. A common practice for fusing conductor wire 

26 together is the use of implosive sleeves, which utilize explosive materials. The Blasting 

27 Contractor will be knowledgeable about this practice and will coordinate with the CIC, 

28 particularly with regard to the locations of these practices.

29 4.1.2 Materials

30 The Blasting Contractor will determine the specific materials needed for blasting 

31 operations. These materials will be included on the hazardous materials list for the 

32 Project, and their use and storage will comply with applicable federal, state, and local 

33 laws and regulations.

34 4.2 Blasting Plan Contents

35 The Blasting Plan prepared by the Blasting Contractor shall contain the following 

36 minimum information in the following format:

37 1. Purpose

38 2. Scope of the Blasting

39 3. Definitions

40 4. Responsibilities

41 a. Management Organization
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-3

1 b. Authority Responsibility

2 c. Blaster in Charge (licensed in Wyoming and Idaho)

3 5. Location of Blasting Area

4 a. Description of Blasting Area

5 b. Description of Bedrock and Geological Problems

6 c. Description of Adjacent Utility Facilities

7 6. Environmental Considerations

8 7. Safety Considerations

9 a. General

10 b. Warning Signs and Signals

11 c. Procedures around Adjacent Utility Facilities

12 d. Traffic Control

13 e. Emergency Blast Initiation

14 f. Safety Publications

15 g. Fire Prevention

16 h. Safety Hazards

17 i. Emergency Services and Communication

18 j. Minor or Non-Emergency Medical Care

19 k. First Aid

20 8. Risk Management

21 a. Protection of Adjacent Utility Facilities

22 b. Lightning

23 c. Flyrock (Note: Flyrock will be controlled with blasting mats.)

24 d. Carbon Monoxide

25 e. Ground Vibrations

26 f. Seismically Sensitive Receptors

27 g. Pre-blast Survey and Inspection

28 h. Blast Damage Complaints

29 i. Airblast

30 9. Blast Design Concept

31 a. Station limits of proposed shot

32 b. Plan and section views of proposed drill pattern, including free face, burden, 

33 blasthole spacing, blasthole diameter, blasthole angles, lift height, and sub34 drill depth

35 c. Loading diagram showing type and amount of explosives, primers, initiators, 

36 and location and depth of stemming

37 d. Initiation sequence of blastholes, including delay times and delay system

38 e. Manufacturers’ data sheets for all explosives, primers, and initiators to be 

39 employed

40 10.Procedures

41 a. Delivery of Explosives

42 b. Storage of Explosives and Blasting Agents

43 c. Blast Hole Drilling

44 d. General Handling of Explosives

45 e. Blast Hole Loading

46 f. Notification

47 g. Initiation of Blast

48 h. Misfire Management
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-4

1 i. Test Blasting

2 11.Records

3 12.Attachments

4 5.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES 

5 Safe storage and use of explosive materials will be a top priority during construction. 

6 The safety measures discussed in this section are intended to prevent theft and/or 

7 vandalism of the explosive materials, protect against fire, and prevent personal injury 

8 and property damage. These measures are intended as general guidelines.

9 5.1 Storage

10 Explosives must be stored in an approved structure (magazine) and kept cool, dry, and 

11 well-ventilated. The Companies’ Construction Contractor will provide the Bureau of 

12 Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (BATF) Cheyenne, Wyoming and Boise, 

13 Idaho Fields Offices with a list of dates and locations for the explosives and blasting 

14 agent storage facilities to be used on the Project at least 14 days before the 

15 establishment of such storage facilities. 

16 At a minimum, the following storage requirements will be implemented:

17 • Explosives must be stored in an approved structure (magazine), and storage 

18 facilities will be bullet-resistant, weather-resistant, theft-resistant, and fire19 resistant.

20 • Magazine sites will be located in remote (out-of-sight) areas with restricted 

21 access; kept cool, dry, and well ventilated; and will be properly labeled and 

22 signed.

23 • Detonators will be stored separately from other explosive materials.

24 • The most stringent spacing between individual magazines will be determined 

25 according to the guidelines contained in the BATF publication or state or local 

26 explosive storage regulations.

27 • Both the quantity and duration of temporary on-site explosives storage will be 

28 minimized.

29 The Blasting Contractor will handle and dispose of dynamite storage boxes in 

30 accordance with relevant federal, state, and local laws. 

31 5.2 Blasting Notification and Safety Procedures 

32 The Construction Contractor will obtain a permit from the appropriate county as needed, 

33 for the period when blasting may occur and will comply with the following requirements 

34 developed by the BLM:

35 • The holder shall publish a proposed blasting schedule in the local newspaper 

36 one week prior to any blasting taking place. The schedule shall identify the 

37 location, dates, and times blasting will occur. No blasting shall occur outside of 

38 the published schedule, except in emergency situations.
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-5

1 • The holder shall post warning signs at all entry points for the Project. Warning 

2 signs shall include information on blasting, including the general hours blasting 

3 might take place, and audible signals to be used warning of impending blasting 

4 and to indicate that the site is all clear. 

5 • Access points to areas where blasting will take place will be blocked to prevent 

6 access by the public at least 30 minutes prior to blasting. The site shall be swept 

7 5 minutes prior to blasting to ensure no unauthorized personnel have wandered 

8 onto the site. An audible warning signal, capable of carrying for one-half mile, 

9 shall be used at least 2 minutes prior to blasting. An “all-clear” signal will be given 

10 once it has been determined the area is safe.

11 • Blasting in the vicinity of pipelines will be coordinated with the pipeline operator 

12 and will follow operator-specific procedures, as necessary.

13 • Damages that result solely from the blasting activity will be repaired or the owner 

14 fairly compensated. 

15 A determination of all clear danger will be derived once the blasting area has been 

16 inspected for undetonated or misfired explosives. The blasting area will also be 

17 inspected for hazards such as falling rock and rock slides. Once the area has been 

18 inspected and these issues have been addressed, the all-clear signal as described 

19 above will sound and persons will be able to safely re-enter the blast zone. 

20 Additional safety precautions will be developed to address site-specific conditions at the 

21 time of the blast. Special attention will be given to preventing potential hazards in the 

22 blasting area resulting from flying rock, destabilized walls, structures, presence of low 

23 flying aircraft, and dispersion of smoke and gases. 

24 5.3 Fire Safety

25 The presence of explosive materials on the Project site could potentially increase the 

26 risk of fire during construction. Special precautions will be taken to minimize this risk in 

27 conjunction with the Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan (Appendix O of 

28 the Plan of Development), including but not limited to: 

29 • Prohibiting ignition devices within 50 feet of explosives storage areas.

30 • Properly maintaining magazine sites so they are clear of fuels and combustible 

31 materials, well ventilated, and fire-resistant.

32 • Protecting magazines from wildfires that could occur in the immediate area.

33 • Posting fire suppression personnel at the blast site during high fire danger 

34 periods.

35 • Prohibiting blasting during extreme fire danger periods.

36 5.4 Transportation of Explosives

37 Transportation of explosives will comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, 

38 including Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Chapter III. These regulations are 

39 administered by the U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) and govern the

40 packaging, labeling, materials compatibility, driver qualifications, and safety of 

41 transported explosives. In general, these regulations require vehicles carrying explosive 
Framework Blasting Plan Appendix M

January 2013 M-6

1 materials must be well-maintained, properly marked with placards, and have a non2 sparking floor. Materials in contact with the explosives will be non-sparking, and the 

3 load will be covered with a fire- and water-resistant tarpaulin. Vehicles also must be 

4 equipped with fire extinguishers and a copy of the Emergency Response Guidebook 

5 (USDOT 2008). Every effort will be made to minimize transportation of explosives 

6 through congested or heavily populated areas. 

7 Prior to loading an appropriate vehicle for carrying explosives, the vehicle shall be fully 

8 fueled and inspected to ensure its safe operation. Refueling of vehicles carrying 

9 explosives shall be avoided. Smoking shall be prohibited during the loading, 

10 transporting, or unloading of explosives. In addition, the following specific restrictions 

11 apply to transport of other items in vehicles carrying explosives:

12 • Tools may be carried in the vehicle, but not in the cargo compartment.

13 • Detonation devices can, in some cases, be carried in the same vehicle as the 

14 explosives, but they must be stored in a specially constructed compartment(s).

15 • Batteries and firearms shall never be carried in a vehicle with explosives.

16 • Vehicle drivers must comply with the specific laws related to the materials being 

17 transported.

18 Vehicles carrying explosives shall not be parked or left unattended except in designated 

19 parking areas with approval of the State Fire Marshall. When traveling, vehicles carrying 

20 explosives will avoid congested areas to the maximum extent possible. 

21 5.5 Other Specific Stipulations and Methods

22 Blasting has the potential to cause environmental impacts. Implementing the protection

23 measures listed Appendix Z of the POD will mitigate these impacts. 

24 Stipulations developed by BLM will be followed for protection of sensitive species as 

25 well as the required notification discussed above in Section 5.2. The Construction 

26 Contractor will notify the CIC and environmental monitors 72 hours prior to scheduled 

27 blasting and comply with the permit requirements for notification by appropriate 

28 counties, including any requirements for dust abatement. Regular field meetings will be 

29 held with the CIC and environmental monitors to review the process and its 

30 implementation. If changes are needed to the notification process, changes will be 

31 made to facilitate protection of environmental resources. 

32 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

33 USDOT (U.S. Department of Transportation). 2008. Emergency Response Guidebook. 

34 Available online at http://www.ehso.com/hmerg.php
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX N

2 FRAMEWORK DUST CONTROL AND AIR QUALITY PLAN

3
Appendix N

Framework Dust Control and Air Quality

Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan Appendix N 

January 2013 N-i 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. N-1 

2.0 PURPOSE ........................................................................................................... N-1 

3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE .......................................................................... N-1 

3.1 Federal Permits ........................................................................................... N-2 

3.2 State Permits ............................................................................................... N-2 

3.3 Local Permits .............................................................................................. N-2 

4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................ N-2 

4.1 Soil Conservation and Erosion .................................................................... N-2 

4.2 Air Quality and Dust Control ........................................................................ N-3 

5.0 MITIGATION MEASURES .................................................................................. N-3 

6.0 MONITORING MEASURES ................................................................................ N-4 

7.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PHASE ..................................................... N-4 
Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan Appendix N

January 2013 N-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION 

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 This Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan addresses regulatory compliance, 

19 environmental concerns, mitigation recommendations, and monitoring. This plan will be 

20 utilized for the construction of the Project to ensure impacts associated with 

21 construction activities are minimized as they relate to soil conservation and air quality.

22 2.0 PURPOSE 

23 This plan provides measures to be utilized by the BLM, Compliance Inspection 

24 Contractor (CIC), and the Construction Contractor to ensure protection of the soils and 

25 air quality that will be affected by the Project. This plan is to be implemented during the 

26 construction, operation, and maintenance phases of the Project. These measures are 

27 intended to 1) address soil erosion and sedimentation, and 2) minimize dust and air

28 emissions from construction-related activities. This document provides a template for 

29 the detailed Final Dust Control and Air Quality Plan to be developed by the Construction 

30 Contractor.

31 3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

32 Construction, operation, and maintenance activities for the Project are subject to various 

33 regulations designed to protect environmental resources and the public from erosion, 

34 dust, and other possible effects to air quality. The following permits and documents 

35 contain requirements for preventing accelerated erosion and minimizing dust and air 

36 emissions. Refer to these documents, along with this plan, when assessing which 

37 mitigation measures are appropriate for a specific area. At a minimum, the Companies 

38 and the Construction Contractor will need to adhere to or obtain the following permits.
Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan Appendix N

January 2013 N-2

1 3.1 Federal Permits

2 • BLM – Right-of-way grant and temporary use permit: Federal Land Policy and 

3 Management Act of 1976 (Public Law 94-579); 43 United States Code (U.S.C.)

4 1761-1771; 43 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 2800

5 • U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) – Clean Water Act (CWA), Section 401: 

6 CWA (33 U.S.C. 1344)

7 • U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) National Pollutant Discharge 

8 Elimination System (NPDES) Construction General Permit

9 3.2 State Permits

10 • Wyoming Department of Environmental Quality (WDEQ) – Air Quality Division 

11 Construction Permit to control fugitive dust emissions during construction.

12 • WDEQ – Sections 401, 402, and 404, CWA, Water Quality Certification (State 

13 implementation of the USACE permits for air quality and stormwater discharges).

14 • Idaho Department of Environmental Quality (IDEQ) – Fugitive dust control plan 

15 for construction projects.

16 • IDEQ – State implementation of the USACE CWA Section 401, 402, and 404 

17 permits.

18 3.3 Local Permits

19 • County conditional use permits, temporary use permits for staging areas, road 

20 crossing permits and/or encroachment permits. May have erosion or air quality 

21 considerations. Requirements vary by county.

22 4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

23 4.1 Soil Conservation and Erosion

24 Soil conservation for the Project includes minimizing impacts that will affect soils from 

25 the construction and operation of the proposed transmission line, such as minimizing 

26 wind and water erosion, soil compaction, surface disturbance, and construction 

27 activities in wet soils. Prior to ground disturbance, geotechnical studies have been

28 conducted and a report for affected areas has been prepared to provide more specific 

29 detail/measures regarding soil conservation for the Project. 

30 Erosion potential is the result of several factors including slope, vegetation cover, 

31 climate, and the physical and chemical characteristics of the soil. Increased soil erosion 

32 may occur when vegetation is removed during construction, or in areas where the 

33 surface is disturbed by heavy equipment. Increased water erosion often occurs during 

34 high-intensity or long-duration rainstorms and may reduce the productivity of the soil as 

35 well as affect water quality of streams by accelerating sediment loading. Wind is also an 

36 erosion factor throughout portions of the Project areas. Soil compaction could also be a 

37 concern if there is repeated traffic use on sections of access roads.
Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan Appendix N

January 2013 N-3

1 Where disturbance is anticipated in areas of steep terrain with high potential for erosion;

2 vegetation clearing and grading will be conducted in a manner to minimize these 

3 effects. Soil stabilization and reclamation practices will also be implemented to reduce 

4 erosion. In select locations, helicopter construction may be used to further reduce these 

5 impacts. In areas of soil compaction (e.g., temporary access roads) soil treatment and 

6 reclamation will be implemented as directed in Appendix D – Framework Reclamation 

7 Plan. In these areas, care should be taken to avoid any installed grounding or 

8 counterpoise.

9 4.2 Air Quality and Dust Control

10 Construction of the transmission line and related facilities will cause a temporary and 

11 minimal increase in fugitive dust. Ambient levels of nitrogen oxides, hydrocarbons, and 

12 carbon monoxide near the construction zone will also be temporarily increased due to 

13 emissions from heavy construction equipment. Related facilities will cause a minimal 

14 increase in fugitive dust.

15 Air quality control measures are intended to minimize fugitive dust and air emissions 

16 and to maintain conditions as free from air pollution where practical. All requirements of 

17 those entities having jurisdiction over air quality matters will be adhered to, and any 

18 permits needed for construction activities will be obtained. The Construction Contractor 

19 will not proceed with any construction activities without taking reasonable precautions to 

20 prevent excessive particulate matter from becoming airborne and creating nuisance 

21 conditions.

22 Excessive exhaust emissions from vehicles and heavy equipment will be prevented by 

23 proper maintenance, and no open burning of construction trash or other open fires will 

24 be allowed.

25 Where necessary, water or magnesium chloride (MgCl2) may be used as BLM-approved

26 dust control methods during construction, including the grading of roads or the clearing 

27 of land and of the right-of-way, and will be applied on unpaved roads, material 

28 stockpiles, and other surfaces, which can create airborne dust. Where application of 

29 water is not possible, material stockpiles will be enclosed or covered. In addition, open30 bodied trucks transporting materials likely to become airborne will be covered. Earth or 

31 other materials that may become airborne will promptly be removed from paved roads. 

32 Matting will be used in rock blasting operations to minimize and control dust (see 

33 Appendix M – Framework Blasting Plan).

34 5.0 MITIGATION MEASURES

35 Mitigation measures will be applicable to Project construction, reclamation, operation, 

36 and maintenance. If new disturbances occur during the operation and maintenance 

37 phases of the Project, or if erosion control and air quality measures implemented during 

38 construction and reclamation are not effective in dust control and maintaining air quality, 

39 the mitigation measures will be reviewed and modified where necessary.

40 Because of potential impacts from construction activities, several measures may be 

41 necessary to mitigate particular impacts. Proposed erosion, dust control, and air quality 
Framework Dust Control and Air Quality Plan Appendix N

January 2013 N-4

1 protection measures that will be included in the final Dust Control and Air Quality Plan 

2 are included in Appendix Z of the Plan of Development (POD).

3 6.0 MONITORING MEASURES

4 Monitoring of erosion control mitigation measures will continue until reclamation efforts 

5 are considered complete and successful, and accelerated erosion and air emissions 

6 have been controlled. Proposed erosion, dust control, and air quality monitoring 

7 measures are included in Appendix Z of the POD.

8 7.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PHASE

9 After construction and reclamation, monitoring the erosion control mitigation measures 

10 will continue on an annual basis during the operation and maintenance phase until 

11 affected soils have been stabilized. Monitoring should continue until there is no or 

12 minimal accelerated erosion or air emissions and until reclamation efforts are 

13 considered complete and successful.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX O

2 FRAMEWORK FIRE PREVENTION AND SUPPRESSION PLAN

3
Appendix O

Framework Fire Prevention and 

Suppression Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................. O-1

1.1 Purpose....................................................................................................... O-1

1.2 Wyoming's Wildfire Protection System........................................................ O-1

1.3 Idaho's Wildfire Protection System.............................................................. O-2

1.4 Responsibilities and Coordination............................................................... O-2

2.0 FIRE PREVENTION MEASURES ...................................................................... O-3

2.1 Preconstruction and Construction ............................................................... O-3

2.1.1 Training........................................................................................... O-3

2.1.2 Smoking .......................................................................................... O-3

2.1.3 Spark Arresters ............................................................................... O-3

2.1.4 Parking, Vehicle Operation, and Storage Areas.............................. O-4

2.1.5 Equipment....................................................................................... O-4

2.1.6 Road Closures ................................................................................ O-4

2.1.7 Refueling......................................................................................... O-4

2.1.8 Burning............................................................................................ O-4

2.1.9 Flammable Liquids and Explosives ................................................. O-5

2.1.10 Communications ............................................................................. O-5

2.1.11 Welding........................................................................................... O-5

2.1.12 Fire Suppression............................................................................. O-5

2.2 Restricted Operations ................................................................................. O-5

2.3 Monitoring ................................................................................................... O-6

3.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE................................................................... O-6

3.1 Operation .................................................................................................... O-6

3.2 Maintenance................................................................................................ O-6

4.0 NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES ........................................................................ O-6

LIST OF TABLES

Table O-1. Fire Suppression Responsibilities in Wyoming....................................................O-2

Table O-2. Fire Suppression Responsibilities in Idaho..........................................................O-2
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project is principally necessary to serve 

12 future needs in Utah and Idaho, though other markets may also be served, including 

13 Wyoming’s oil and gas field electricity needs. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

14 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

15 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

16 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

17 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

18 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

19 Wyoming.

20 This Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan (Plan) describes the framework 

21 for measures to be taken by the Companies and their contractors (Contractor) to ensure 

22 fire prevention and suppression measures are carried out in accordance with federal, 

23 state, and local regulations. Measures identified in this Plan apply to work within the 

24 project area defined as the right-of-way (ROW); access roads; all work and storage 

25 areas, whether temporary or permanent; and other areas used during construction and 

26 operation of the Project. This document provides a template for the detailed Final Fire 

27 Prevention and Suppression Plan to be developed by the Construction Contractor.

28 1.1 Purpose

29 The risk of fire danger during transmission line construction is related to smoking, 

30 refueling activities, operating vehicles and other equipment off roadways, welding 

31 activities, and the use of explosive materials and flammable liquids. During operation, 

32 the risk of fire is primarily from vehicles and maintenance activities that require welding.

33 Additionally, weather events that affect the transmission line could result in the 

34 transmission line igniting a fire.

35 This Plan establishes standards and practices to minimize risk of fire ignition and, in 

36 case of fire, provide for immediate suppression.

37 1.2 Wyoming's Wildfire Protection System

38 The prevention and suppression of wildfires in southern Wyoming is carried out by the 

39 BLM, Forest Service, and local fire districts and agencies (Table O-1). The agencies’ 

40 activities are closely coordinated, primarily through the National Interagency Fire Center 

41 in Boise, Idaho, and Regional Interagency Dispatch Centers in Casper, Wyoming, and 

42 Rawlins, Wyoming. Individual fire crews from BLM field offices and Forest Service 

43 Ranger Districts coordinate fire suppression activities on federal land within their 
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-2

1 jurisdictions. The Wyoming State Forestry Division (WSFD) is responsible for fire

2 suppression on Wyoming state land. Local fire districts and agencies provide fire 

3 prevention and suppression activities on private land, and may assist with fires on state 

4 or federal lands as requested by those agencies. 

5 Table O-1. Fire Suppression Responsibilities in Wyoming

Who Where Miles of Proposed Route

Bureau of Land Management National System of Public Lands 204

U.S. Forest Service National Forest (NF) and National 

Grasslands

7

Bureau of Reclamation Bureau of Reclamation Lands 3

Wyoming State Forestry 

Division

Wyoming State Lands 66

City fire departments and 

rural fire protection districts in 

mutual aid with WSFD

Structures in Wyoming's wildland 

interface areas covered by mutual-aid 

agreements.

256

Source: GIS Ownership_Analysis_20111219.xlsx.

6 1.3 Idaho's Wildfire Protection System

7 Wildland fire suppression in Idaho operates much the same way as described for 

8 Wyoming (Table O-2). Wildland fire suppression and fire-management activities in 

9 Idaho are organized through the National Interagency Fire Center in Boise, Idaho, and 

10 locally on federal land by individual BLM field offices or Forest Service Ranger Districts. 

11 Various mutual-aid agreements with community fire departments and the Idaho 

12 Department of Lands (IDL) are in force throughout the Project area.

13 Table O-2. Fire Suppression Responsibilities in Idaho

Who Where Miles of Proposed Route

Idaho Department of Lands State-owned lands 30

Bureau of Land Management National System of Public Lands 276

Bureau of Reclamation Bureau of Reclamation Lands 2

U.S. Forest Service National Forest (NF) 9

City fire departments and 

rural fire protection districts

Private lands 250

Source: GIS Ownership_Analysis_20111219.xlsx.

14 1.4 Responsibilities and Coordination

15 This Plan will be implemented by the Companies and the Contractor on the Project. The 

16 Companies and the Contractor are responsible for providing all necessary fire-fighting 

17 equipment on the project site to their respective employees and operating under the 

18 requirements of this Plan. Prior to construction, the Companies will contact the 

19 appropriate fire-control authorities to establish communications, obtain any required 

20 permits (such as burning or fire waiver permits prior to conducting any heavy equipment 

21 or burning activities), and/or fulfill other obligations as directed by fire-control authorities. 
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-3

1 The Companies will also do the following:

2 • Ensure prevention, detection, pre-suppression, and suppression activities are in 

3 accordance with this Plan and federal, state, and county laws; ordinances;

4 and regulations pertaining to fire.

5 • Accompany agency representatives on fire tool and equipment inspections and 

6 take corrective action upon notification of any fire-protection requirements not in 

7 compliance.

8 • Restrict operations on federal lands during conditions of high fire danger as 

9 described in Section 2.2, Restricted Operations.

10 The fire prevention and suppression measures described in this Plan will be in effect 

11 from pre-construction to the end of restoration. These restrictions may change by

12 advance written notice by fire-control authorities. However, required tools and 

13 equipment will be kept in serviceable condition and will be immediately available at all 

14 times.

15 2.0 FIRE PREVENTION MEASURES

16 2.1 Preconstruction and Construction

17 Methods and procedures to be implemented prior to and during construction, operation, 

18 maintenance, and termination of the Project to minimize the risk of fire are described in 

19 the following sections.

20 2.1.1 Training

21 The Contractor will train all personnel on the measures to take in the event of a fire. 

22 The Contractor will also inform each construction crew member of fire dangers, 

23 locations of extinguishers and equipment, and individual responsibilities for fire 

24 prevention and suppression during regular safety briefings. Smoking and fire rules also 

25 will be discussed with the Contractor and all field personnel during the Project’s 

26 environmental training.

27 2.1.2 Smoking

28 Smoking is never permitted in any area designated by DANGER or NO SMOKING 

29 signs. Smoking is not permitted in these areas regardless of any other factor. Smoking 

30 is only permitted on access roads, within vehicles, and in approved smoking areas.

31 2.1.3 Spark Arresters

32 During construction, operation, maintenance, and decommissioning of the ROW, all 

33 equipment operating with an internal combustion engine will be equipped with federally34 approved spark arresters. Spark arresters are not required on trucks, buses, and 

35 passenger vehicles (excluding motorcycles) equipped with an unaltered muffler or on 

36 diesel engines equipped with a turbocharger. Agency fire-inspection officers will have 

37 full authority to inspect spark arresters on Project equipment prior to its use on the 

38 Project on federal lands and periodically during construction.
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-4

1 2.1.4 Parking, Vehicle Operation, and Storage Areas

2 In no case will motorized equipment, including worker transportation vehicles, be driven 

3 or parked outside the designated and approved work limits. Equipment parking areas, 

4 the ROW, staging areas, designated vehicle-parking areas, and small stationary engine 

5 sites—where permitted—will be cleared of all flammable material. Clearing will extend a 

6 minimum of 2 feet beyond the edge of the area to be occupied but not beyond the 

7 boundaries of the approved ROW, extra workspace, or ancillary site. Glass containers 

8 will not be used to store gasoline or other flammables.

9 2.1.5 Equipment

10 All motor vehicles and equipment will carry at least 1 long-handled (48-inch minimum), 

11 round-point shovel; a double-bit ax or Pulaski (3.5 pounds or larger); and one dry 

12 chemical fire extinguisher (with an Underwriters Laboratories [UL] rating of at least 5B 

13 or C). Individuals using power saws and grinders will have a shovel as described above, 

14 and an 8-ounce capacity fire extinguisher immediately available. All equipment will be 

15 kept in a serviceable condition and readily available.

16 The Contractor shall maintain a list, to be provided to local fire-protection agencies, of 

17 all equipment that is either specifically designed for, or capable of, being adapted to 

18 fighting fires. The Contractor shall provide basic fire-fighting equipment on-site during 

19 construction, including fire extinguishers, shovels, axes, and other tools in sufficient 

20 numbers so each employee on-site can assist in the event of a fire-fighting operation.

21 2.1.6 Road Closures

22 The Contractor will notify the appropriate fire-suppression agency of the scheduled 

23 closures prior to the open-cut crossing of a road. If required, the Contractor will 

24 construct a bypass prior to the open-cut installation of a road crossing, unless a 

25 convenient detour can be established on existing project-approved roads or within 

26 project-approved work limits. All bypasses will be clearly marked by the Contractor.

27 During road closures, the Contractor will designate one person who knows the bypass

28 to direct traffic. The Contractor will minimize, to the extent possible, the duration of road 

29 closures.

30 2.1.7 Refueling

31 Fuel trucks will have a large fire extinguisher charged with the appropriate chemical to 

32 control electrical and gas fires. The extinguisher will be a minimum size 35-pound 

33 capacity with a minimum 30 BC rating. Power-saw refueling will be done in an area that 

34 has first been cleared of material that could catch fire.

35 2.1.8 Burning

36 Contractor and Companies’ personnel are prohibited from burning slash, brush, stumps, 

37 trash, explosives storage boxes, or other Project debris unless specifically contracted to 

38 do so.
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-5

1 2.1.9 Flammable Liquids and Explosives

2 The handling and use of explosives shall be conducted in strict conformance with all 

3 local, state, and federal regulations as detailed in the Companies’ Construction 

4 Specification on Blasting.

5 2.1.10 Communications

6 The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining contact with fire-control agencies and 

7 will be equipped with a radio or cellular telephone so immediate contact with local fire8 control agencies can be made. If cellular telephone coverage is not available, the

9 Contractor will use the radio to contact their base, who will telephone emergency 

10 dispatch.

11 2.1.11 Welding

12 One 5-gallon backpack pump will be required with each welding unit in addition to the 

13 standard fire equipment required in all vehicles. All equipment will be kept in a 

14 serviceable condition and readily available.

15 2.1.12 Fire Suppression

16 The Contractor will take the following actions should a fire occur within the Project area 

17 during construction:

18 • Take immediate action to suppress fires using all available manpower and 

19 equipment.

20 • Immediately notify the nearest fire-suppression agency of the fire location, action 

21 taken, and status (see Section 4.0).

22 • Immediately notify the Companies of the fire location and action taken.

23 • Relinquish fire-suppression activities to agency fire-management officers upon 

24 their arrival.

25 If a reported fire is controlled, the Contractor will note the location and monitor the progress in 

26 extinguishing the fire. A Contractor’s employee will remain at the fire scene until it is fully 

27 extinguished. The extinguished fire will be monitored in accordance with procedures 

28 described in Section 2.3 of this document.

29 2.2 Restricted Operations

30 The Contractor will restrict or cease operations in specified locations during periods of 

31 high fire danger at the direction of the land-management agency’s closure order.

32 Restrictions may vary from stopping certain operations at a given time to stopping all 

33 operations. The Companies may obtain approval to continue some or all operations if 

34 acceptable precautions are implemented. A written waiver must be issued to the 

35 Contractor.

36 During periods of high fire danger, the Contractor will monitor daily for local restrictions.

37 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure personnel are aware of and following area 

38 fire orders.
Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan Appendix O

January 2013 O-6

1 2.3 Monitoring

2 The contractor will be responsible for compliance with all provisions of this Plan. In 

3 addition, federal, state, and local fire-control agencies may perform inspections in areas 

4 under their jurisdiction at their discretion.

5 To help reduce the potential for fire starts during construction of the Project, the 

6 Companies will implement or require the construction Contractor to implement the 

7 environmental protection measures (EPMs) contained in Appendix Z of the Plan of 

8 Development currently being discussed with the Agencies. When these discussions are 

9 completed, finalized measures will be listed herein.

10 3.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

11 3.1 Operation

12 During transmission line operation, the risk of fire danger is minimal. The primary 

13 causes of fire on the ROW result from unauthorized entry by individuals for recreational 

14 purposes and from fires started outside the ROW. In the latter case, authorities can use 

15 the ROW as a potential firebreak. During transmission line operation, access to the 

16 ROW will be restricted in accordance with jurisdictional agency or landowner 

17 requirements to minimize recreational use of the ROW.

18 3.2 Maintenance

19 During maintenance operations, the Companies or their Contractor will equip personnel 

20 with basic fire-fighting equipment, including fire extinguishers and shovels as described 

21 in Section 2.1.5, Equipment. Maintenance crews will also carry emergency response/fire 

22 control phone numbers.

23 To help reduce the potential for fire starts during the operation and maintenance of the 

24 Project, the Companies or their Contractor will implement the finalized EPMs.

25 4.0 NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES

26 Construction crew members will report all fires, whether extinguished or controlled. If 

27 the fire is uncontrolled, the Contractor will call the nearest fire-suppression agency (911) 

28 and the Companies’ lead environmental inspector. Information regarding the location of 

29 the fire, property ownership, and closest access roads should be reported to 911 and

30 the Companies.

31 If a reported fire is controlled but not extinguished, the fire guard will call to notify the 

32 nearest police/fire authorities using the non-emergency telephone line to alert them of 

33 the situation. The status of the fire will be monitored by the Contractor, and the nearest 

34 fire-suppression agency will be notified.

35 The Companies will maintain and provide the Contractor with an up-to-date list of 

36 landowner and land management agency contacts along the transmission line ROW.

37 To assist with the notification and reporting of fires, the Companies or their Contractor 

38 will implement the finalized EPMs.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX P

2 FRAMEWORK HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 

3
Appendix P

Framework Hazardous Material 

Management Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................P-1

2.0 PURPOSE............................................................................................................P-2

3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE...........................................................................P-2

4.0 FRAMEWORK E HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT PLAN ..............P-5

4.1 Certifications, Acknowledgments, and Designation of Coordinator/ 

Responsible Person .....................................................................................P-5

4.1.1 Certifications ....................................................................................P-5

4.1.2 Amendments....................................................................................P-5

4.1.3 Coordinator/Responsible Person .....................................................P-6

4.2 Facilities Description and Inventory of Materials ..........................................P-6

4.2.1 Site Maps .........................................................................................P-6

4.2.2 Inventory ..........................................................................................P-6

5.0 SPILL PREVENTION PROCEDURES.................................................................P-7

5.1 Overview of Hazardous Materials Proposed for Use....................................P-7

5.2 Refueling and Servicing ...............................................................................P-7

5.3 Transportation of Hazardous Materials ........................................................P-8

5.4 Storage of Hazardous Materials...................................................................P-8

5.4.1 Physical Storage Requirements.......................................................P-9

5.4.2 Container Labeling Requirements....................................................P-9

5.5 Disposal of Hazardous Wastes ..................................................................P-10

5.6 Contaminated Containers...........................................................................P-10

5.7 Waste Oil Filters.........................................................................................P-11

5.8 Used Lubricating Oil...................................................................................P-11

6.0 MITIGATION MEASURES.................................................................................P-12

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure P-1. Sample Hazardous Waste Label for On-Site Storage .......................................P-10

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

Attachment A Sample Hazardous Materials Management Plan Framework Forms
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,100 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current (AC) electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional energy for the Companies’ larger 

11 service areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project is principally necessary 

12 to serve future needs in Utah and Idaho, though other markets may also be served, 

13 including Wyoming’s oil and gas field electricity needs. The Project includes 

14 ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single15 circuit transmission lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and 

16 pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical 

17 supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands administered 

18 by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service, and the states of Idaho 

19 and Wyoming.

20 This Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan for the Project is intended to 

21 reduce the risks associated with the use, storage, transportation, production, and 

22 disposal of hazardous materials (including hazardous substances and wastes). This 

23 Plan will identify Project-specific mitigation measures and other specific stipulations and 

24 methods to address spill prevention, response, and cleanup procedures for the Project. 

25 This document provides a template for the development of a detailed Hazardous 

26 Material Management Plan to be developed by the Construction Contractor. 

27 In conjunction with the Hazardous Material Management Plan, a Spill Prevention,

28 Containment, and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan will be developed to identify specific 

29 legal requirements and practices to achieve identified goals. Refer to Appendix G –

30 Framework Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasures Plan of the Plan of 

31 Development (POD) for more information. 

32 The term “hazardous material,” as presented in this framework plan, will refer to 

33 hazardous substances, hazardous wastes, marine pollutants, elevated temperature 

34 materials, and materials designated as hazardous for transportation as defined in 49 

35 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 171.8.

36 The Hazardous Material Management Plan will clearly identify which legal requirements 

37 apply to specific types of hazardous materials and will identify best management 

38 practices that, although not legally required, will be followed to reduce risks associated 

39 with hazardous materials. Nothing in this framework plan or in the Hazardous Material 

40 Management Plan (to be developed by the Construction Contractor) shall be construed 

41 as an admission regarding the legal applicability of requirements or practices to any 

42 particular class of hazardous material.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-2

1 2.0 PURPOSE 

2 The goal of this framework plan is to 1) minimize the potential for a spill of fuel or other 

3 hazardous material, 2) contain any spill to the smallest possible area, 3) protect areas 

4 that are environmentally sensitive, and 4) provide a template for the development of a 

5 detailed Hazardous Material Management Plan (by the Construction Contractor). This 

6 plan framework includes the following components:

7 • Framework for developing the Hazardous Material Management Plan.

8 • Spill control, response, and cleanup methods.

9 • An overview of the notification and documentation procedures to be followed in 

10 the event of a spill.

11 • Operation and maintenance considerations.

12 In addition, sample hazardous materials management forms (which may be used as 

13 examples by the Construction Contractor) are provided in Attachment A.

14 In general, hazardous materials, hazardous wastes, and cleanup equipment will be 

15 stored in approved containers until they can be properly transported and disposed of at 

16 an approved treatment, storage, and disposal facility. Persons responsible for handling 

17 or transporting hazardous materials for the Project will be trained in the proper 

18 use/management of the materials and should be familiar with all applicable laws, 

19 policies, procedures, and mitigation measures related to such handling or 

20 transportation.

21 It is the responsibility of the Construction Contractor to maintain file records of proper 

22 training/certification for any individual(s) who may potentially handle hazardous 

23 materials for the Project. The Companies reserve the right to audit any subcontractors 

24 to ensure compliance.

25 3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

26 Major legislation pertaining to hazardous materials includes the Comprehensive 

27 Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA), Resource 

28 Conservation and Recovery Act, Clean Air Act, and Clean Water Act.

29 Numerous other federal, state, and local regulations also govern the use, storage, 

30 transportation, production, and disposal of hazardous materials. Some of the key 

31 requirements of these laws are outlined in:

32 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) (29 CFR 1900-1910)

33 • 28 CFR 1900-1910 Occupational Safety and Health Act

34 • 29 CFR 1904 Recording and Reporting Occupational Injuries and Illness

35 • 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazard Communication

36 • 29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-3

1 Clean Water Act (40 CFR 100-149)

2 • 40 CFR 110 Discharges of Oil

3 • 40 CFR 112 Oil Pollution Prevention

4 • 40 CFR 116 Designation of Hazardous Substances

5 • 40 CFR 117 Determination of Reportable Quantities for Hazardous Substances

6 • 40 CFR 129 Toxic Pollutant Effluent Standards

7 • 40 CFR 131 Water Quality Standards

8 • 40 CFR 141-149 Safe Drinking Water Act

9 Clean Air Act (40 CFR 50-99)

10 • 40 CFR 50 National Ambient Air Quality Standards

11 • 40 CFR 61-63 National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

12 Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) (40 CFR 700-799)

13 • 40 CFR 710 TSCA Chemical Inventory Regulations

14 • 40 CFR 761 PCBs Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and 

15 Use Prohibitions

16 CERCLA/Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (40 CFR 300-399)

17 • 40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan

18 • 40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and Notification

19 • 40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification

20 • 40 CFR 370 Hazardous Chemical Reporting: Community Right-to-Know

21 • 40 CFR 372 Toxic Chemical Release Reporting: Community Right-to-Know

22 Solid and Hazardous Wastes (40 CFR 239-299)

23 • 70 CFR 201-211 Noise Abatement Programs

24 • 40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential, 

25 Commercial, and Institutional Solid Waste

26 • 40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General

27 • 40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

28 • 40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste

29 • 40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste

30 • 40 CFR 273 Standards for Universal Waste Management

31 • 40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil

32 Hazardous Materials Transportation Act (49 CFR 100-199)

33 • 49 CFR 130 Oil Spill Prevention and Response Plans
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-4

1 • 49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions

2 • 49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous 

3 Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training 

4 Requirements

5 • 49 CFR 177 Carriage by Public Highway

6 Wyoming-Specific Regulations

7 • Wyoming Department of Environmental Quality (WDEQ) Wyoming Air Quality 

8 Standards and Regulations (WAQSR) Chapter 1 Wyoming Environmental Quality 

9 Act

10 • WAQSR Chapter 2 Ambient Standards

11 • WAQSR Chapter 3 General Emissions Standards

12 • WAQSR Chapter 6 Permitting Requirements

13 • WAQSR Chapter 7 Monitoring Requirements

14 • WAQSR Chapter 8 Non-attainment Area Regulations

15 • WAQSR Chapter 9 Visibility Impairment/PM Fine Controls

16 • WAQSR Chapter 13 Mobile Sources

17 • WDEQ Water Quality Standards (WQS) Chapter 1 Surface Water Quality 

18 Standards

19 • WQS Chapter 4 Regulations for Release of Oil and Hazardous Substances into 

20 Waters of the State

21 • WQS Chapter 8 Quality Standards for Wyoming Groundwater

22 • WQS Chapter 9 Wyoming Groundwater Pollution Control Permit

23 • WDEQ Solid and Hazardous Waste Division (SHWD) Hazardous Waste 

24 Permitting and Corrective Action

25 • SHWD Voluntary Remediation

26 • SHWD Inspection and Compliance

27 • SHWD Storage Tank Program

28 Idaho-Specific Regulations

29 • Idaho Department of Environmental Quality (IDEQ) Idaho Administrative 

30 Procedures Act (IDAPA) IDAPA 58.01.01 Rules for the Control of Air Pollution in 

31 Idaho

32 • IDAPA 58.01.02 Water Quality Standards

33 • IDAPA 58.01.05 Rules and Standards for Hazardous Waste

34 • IDAPA 58.01.11 Ground Water Quality Rule

35 • IDAPA 58.01.18 Land Remediation Rules
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-5

1 • IDAPA 58.01.24 Standards and Procedure for Application of Risk Based 

2 Corrective Action at Petroleum Release Sites

3 4.0 FRAMEWORK E HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 

4 MANAGEMENT PLAN

5 The following sections provide specific methods for the Construction Contractor to 

6 prepare the Hazardous Materials Management Plan and the SPCC Plan (refer to 

7 Appendix G of the POD for more information), if applicable, per 40 CFR 112. The 

8 Construction Contractor shall provide all information requested in the forms at the end 

9 of this appendix to the Companies. In addition, the Contractor shall complete any other 

10 required county, state, or federal forms.

11 4.1 Certifications, Acknowledgments, and Designation of 

12 Coordinator/ Responsible Person

13 4.1.1 Certifications 

14 The Construction Contractor shall certify all of the information provided in the 

15 Hazardous Materials Management Plan is accurate and complete to the best of their 

16 knowledge. The Construction Contractor also will certify they are committed to 

17 implementing the plan as written. If an SPCC plan is required, per the requirements of 

18 40 CFR 112, the Construction Contractor additionally may be required to have the plan 

19 reviewed and certified by a registered professional engineer.

20 4.1.2 Amendments

21 The Construction Contractor shall agree to make all necessary and appropriate 

22 amendments to the Hazardous Materials Management Plan and submit any and all 

23 such amendments to the Companies and the appropriate county (if required), state, or 

24 federal authorities within seven (7) days of finding that an amendment is necessary.

25 Amendments to the Hazardous Materials Management Plan shall be necessary under 

26 any of the following circumstances:

27 • Applicable laws or regulations are revised.

28 • A 100 percent or more increase of a previously disclosed hazardous material.

29 • Any handling of a previously undisclosed hazardous material subject to inventory 

30 requirements.

31 • A change in properties of a previously disclosed hazardous material (e.g. solid to 

32 liquid).

33 • A change of business address, name or ownership.

34 • The list of emergency coordinators changes.

35 • The list of emergency equipment changes.

36 The Construction Contractor may be required to amend any SPCC plan, as required by 

37 the applicable regulations.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-6

1 4.1.3 Coordinator/Responsible Person

2 The Construction Contractor shall identify an emergency coordinator/responsible person 

3 for hazardous materials management and emergency response. Two alternates shall 

4 also be identified. Business, residential, and mobile phone or pager numbers shall be 

5 provided for all three persons to allow for contact on a 24-hour basis. Primary and 

6 alternate emergency response coordinators shall be knowledgeable of the chemicals 

7 and processes involved in construction of the Project, and will have the authority to 

8 commit Construction Contractor resources to implement the plan. They also shall have 

9 stop-work authority in case of non-compliance or danger to human health or the 

10 environment.

11 4.2 Facilities Description and Inventory of Materials

12 4.2.1 Site Maps

13 The Construction Contractor will provide site maps or facility maps in the Hazardous 

14 Materials Management Plan that contain storage and safety precautions for each 

15 location containing hazardous materials and hazardous wastes. Maps shall, at a 

16 minimum, include the following information:

17 • Orientation and scale

18 • Total land area in square feet

19 • Access and egress points

20 • Buildings and/or temporary trailers

21 • Parking areas

22 • Adjacent land uses (if business, indicate business name)

23 • Surrounding roads, storm drains, and waterways (including streams and 

24 wetlands)

25 • Locations of hazardous materials and hazardous waste storage areas

26 • Underground and above ground storage tanks

27 • Containment or diversion structures (dikes, berms, retention ponds)

28 • Shutoff valves and/or circuit breakers

29 • Location of emergency response materials and equipment

30 • Location of material safety data sheets (MSDS), the Hazardous Materials 

31 Management Plan, and the SPCC Plan

32 • Location of emergency assembly area

33 4.2.2 Inventory

34 The Construction Contractor shall provide a complete inventory of all hazardous 

35 materials. The Construction Contractor shall be responsible for consulting with the 

36 relevant agencies if they handle extremely hazardous substances. All inventory forms 

37 shall be provided to the Construction Contractor by the Companies as a part of the 

38 Hazardous Materials Management Plan.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-7

1 5.0 SPILL PREVENTION PROCEDURES

2 Construction, operation, and maintenance of the Project will require the use of certain 

3 potentially hazardous materials, such as fuels, oils, explosives, and herbicides. By 

4 definition, hazardous materials (substances and wastes) have the potential to pose a 

5 significant threat to human health and the environment based upon their quantity, 

6 concentration, or chemical composition. When stored, used, transported, and disposed 

7 of properly, as described below, the risks associated with these materials can be 

8 reduced substantially.

9 5.1 Overview of Hazardous Materials Proposed for Use

10 The following measures pertain to all vehicle refueling and servicing activities, as well 

11 as the storage, transportation, production, and disposal of hazardous materials/wastes. 

12 These measures are intended to prevent the discharge of fuels, oils, gasoline, and other 

13 harmful substances to waterways, groundwater aquifers, and/or other sensitive 

14 resource areas during Project construction and maintenance. 

15 Hazardous materials used during Project construction may include petroleum products 

16 such as gasoline, diesel fuel, and hydraulic fluid; lubricating oils and solvents; 

17 cleansers; explosives; and other substances. Some of these materials will be used in 

18 relatively large quantities at material yards and in rare instances on the right-of-way to 

19 operate and maintain equipment during construction. Explosives will be used for 

20 blasting rock where needed to install transmission towers and associated access roads 

21 (refer to Appendix M – Framework Blasting Plan).

22 Smaller quantities of other materials such as pesticides and fertilizers, paints, and 

23 chemicals (e.g., sulfur hexafluoride) may be used during Project operation and 

24 maintenance. Pesticides and herbicides are hazardous materials and they will be used 

25 according to labeling (see also Appendix E – Framework Noxious Weed Plan). The 

26 Construction Contractor will maintain an inventory of all hazardous materials used and 

27 MSDS for all materials. The Construction Contractor shall maintain copies of the 

28 required MSDS for each hazardous chemical and shall ensure the copies are readily 

29 accessible during each work shift to all employees when they are in their work area(s). 

30 The MSDS will provide basic emergency response information for small and large 

31 releases of the hazardous materials. In the case that bulk hazardous materials are 

32 used, the Emergency Response Guidebook, produced by the U.S. Department of 

33 Transportation (USDOT), is an acceptable reference. The Construction Contractor 

34 should have a well-developed hazardous material program in place and work to use 

35 non-hazardous substances in routine construction and maintenance activities, to the 

36 extent possible.

37 5.2 Refueling and Servicing

38 Construction vehicles (trucks, bulldozers, etc.), helicopters, and equipment (pumps, 

39 generators, etc.) generally will be fueled and serviced in designated areas at least 100 

40 feet from streams (including intermittent and perennial) and wetlands (including dry or 

41 seasonal wetlands). Refueling locations generally should be flat to minimize the chance 

42 of a spilled substance reaching a stream. In most cases, smaller rubber-tired vehicles 

43 will be refueled and serviced at local gas stations or material yards. Tracked vehicles 
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-8

1 typically will be refueled and serviced on site. In some cases, pickup trucks or tankers 

2 will be used to refuel and service construction vehicles on the right-of-way. Every effort 

3 will be made to minimize the threat of a fuel spill during refueling and servicing. 

4 Fuel/service vehicles will carry a suitable absorbent material to collect approximately 20 

5 gallons of spilled materials. In addition, all vehicles will be inspected for leaks prior to 

6 being brought on-site and regularly throughout the construction period.

7 Washing of construction vehicles, such as concrete trucks, will be allowed only in 

8 designated areas at least 100 feet from streams and wetlands (as defined above). 

9 Washing areas will be contained with berms/barriers to prevent migration of wastewater 

10 and/or sediments into streams and waterways. Waste concrete material will be removed 

11 and properly disposed of once it has hardened. Additionally, all preventive measures, 

12 identified in Appendix E – Framework Noxious Weed Plan, will be followed, specifically 

13 relating to vehicle washing procedures.

14 5.3 Transportation of Hazardous Materials

15 Procedures for loading and transporting fuels and other hazardous materials will meet 

16 the minimum requirements established by the USDOT, Wyoming Department of 

17 Transportation, Idaho Transportation Department, and other pertinent regulations. Prior 

18 to transporting hazardous materials, appropriate shipping papers shall be completed. 

19 Transportation of hazardous materials should be performed by a hazardous material 

20 transport firm in accordance with USDOT regulations. In addition, the Construction 

21 Contractor(s) will ensure all handling or packaging of hazardous materials and all 

22 paperwork for transport of hazardous materials is performed by properly trained 

23 personnel in accordance with USDOT and applicable state regulations.

24 At all times, all hazardous materials used for the Project will be properly stored in 

25 approved containers and labeled, including during transportation. Smaller containers will 

26 be used on-site to transport needed amounts of hazardous materials to a specific 

27 location. Transfer of materials from large to small containers will be performed using 

28 appropriate equipment, including pumps, hoses, and safety equipment; hand pouring 

29 techniques will not be utilized. These smaller (service) containers also will be clearly 

30 labeled. Special provisions apply to the transportation of explosives (refer to Appendix 

31 M – Framework Blasting Plan).

32 5.4 Storage of Hazardous Materials

33 Hazardous materials will be stored only in designated material yards. Material yards will 

34 be located at least 100 feet from the edge of perennial and intermittent streams, 

35 wetlands (including dry or seasonal wetlands), and sensitive areas and will be able to 

36 contain the single largest quantity/unit stored at any one time, plus 10 percent. If 

37 material yards cannot be located at least 100 feet from streams and wetlands because 

38 of topographic conditions or space limitations, special precautions will be taken to 

39 prevent the spill or release of hazardous materials into the waterway. These precautions 

40 will include limiting the quantity and amount of time such materials are stored near 

41 waterways, fortifying barriers, providing additional containment between hazardous 

42 materials and the waterway, and using trained personnel to monitor activities at the 

43 yard. Cleanup materials, including absorbent spill pads and plastic bags, will also be 

44 stored in these areas. The Construction Contractor will specify the appropriate spill kit 
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-9

1 containing these materials in the Hazardous Materials Management Plan. Hazardous 

2 materials will not be stored in areas subject to flooding or inundation. The Construction 

3 Contractor shall coordinate with the Compliance Inspection Contractor when storage 

4 areas cannot be located at least 100 feet from streams and wetlands.

5 5.4.1 Physical Storage Requirements

6 Storage Containers: Containers holding hazardous waste or materials will be 

7 compatible with the wastes or materials stored. If the container is damaged or leaks, the 

8 waste must be transferred to a container in good condition. The Construction Contractor 

9 shall inspect containers weekly at a minimum to verify the integrity of the containers and 

10 any containment systems. Containers used for transportation must comply with USDOT 

11 and applicable state transportation requirements.

12 Incompatible Materials: Materials, including hazardous wastes, will not be placed in 

13 containers that previously held an incompatible waste or material.

14 Ignitable or Reactive Materials: Containers holding hazardous wastes or materials 

15 that are reactive or may ignite must be located at least 50 feet from the material yard’s 

16 property line. “NO SMOKING” signs shall be conspicuously placed wherever there is a 

17 hazard from ignitable or reactive material.

18 Container Management: Containers holding hazardous wastes will be kept closed at 

19 all times, except when it is necessary to add or remove contents. Before the handling 

20 and/or transportation of containers carrying hazardous wastes, the containers should be 

21 inspected to ensure they are sealed such that no material spillage occurs. 

22 Secondary Containment: Secondary containment will consist of bermed or diked 

23 areas that are lined and capable of holding 110 percent of the volume of the stored 

24 material and will be provided for liquid hazardous materials stored on-site.

25 Security: Hazardous wastes and materials will be stored in secure areas to prevent 

26 damage, vandalism, or theft. All storage containers will remain sealed when not in use 

27 and storage areas shall be secured (gated, locked, and/or guarded) at night and/or 

28 during non-construction periods.

29 Explosives: Storage of explosives is discussed in Appendix M – Blasting Plan 

30 Framework.

31 5.4.2 Container Labeling Requirements

32 The Construction Contractor(s) shall comply with the following labeling requirements for 

33 any container (including tanks) used on-site to store accumulated hazardous wastes. 

34 Figure P-1 shows an example of a hazardous waste label for on-site storage. The 

35 containers shall be labeled with the information below and as required in 40 CFR 262:

36 • The accumulation start date and/or the date the 90-day storage period began.

37 • The words: “Hazardous Waste”.

38 • The composition and physical state of the waste.

39 • Warning words indicating the particular hazards of the waste, such as flammable, 

40 corrosive, reactive or toxic.

41 • The name and address of the facility that generated the waste.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-10

HAZARDOUS WASTE

Contents: ______________________________________

Physical State (gas, liquid, solid): ___________________

Accumulation Start Date: _________________________

Hazards: _______________________________________

Name and Address of Generator: ____________________

_______________________________________________

_______________________________________________

Contact Person: _________________________________

Telephone: _____________________________________

HANDLE WITH CARE!

CONTAINS HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC WASTES

1 Figure P-1. Sample Hazardous Waste Label for On-Site Storage

2 5.5 Disposal of Hazardous Wastes

3 Hazardous wastes will be collected regularly and disposed of in accordance with all 

4 applicable laws and regulations. The Construction Contractor shall determine details on 

5 the proper handling and disposal of hazardous waste and shall assign responsibility to 

6 specific individuals prior to construction of the Project.

7 Every effort will be made to minimize the production of hazardous waste during the 

8 Project, including, but not limited to, minimizing the amount of hazardous materials 

9 needed for the Project; using alternative non-hazardous substances when available; 

10 recycling usable material such as oils, paints, and batteries to the maximum extent; and 

11 filtering and reusing solvents and thinners whenever possible. 

12 Any generator of hazardous waste must apply for a U.S. Environmental Protection 

13 Agency Identification (ID) Number. The ID number is needed to complete the Uniform 

14 Hazardous Waste Manifest to ship wastes off-site. A generator can accumulate 

15 hazardous wastes on-site for a period of up to 90 days without having to obtain a permit 

16 as a storage facility.

17 5.6 Contaminated Containers

18 Containers that once held hazardous materials as products or held hazardous wastes 

19 must be considered as potential hazardous wastes due to the possible presence of 

20 residual hazardous material. Regulations specify certain requirements, listed below, for 

21 the container to be handled as a non-hazardous waste. 

22 • The containers must be empty, which means as much of the contents have been 

23 removed as possible using the practices commonly employed to remove 

24 materials from that type of container (e.g., pouring, pumping, and aspirating) so 

25 none will pour out in any orientation.

26 • A container that held compressed gas is empty when the pressure in the 

27 container approaches atmospheric.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-11

1 • If empty containers are less than five gallons, they may be disposed of as a non2 hazardous solid waste or scrapped.

3 • If empty containers are less than five gallons, they may be disposed of as a non4 hazardous solid waste or scrapped.

5 • If the empty containers are greater than five gallons, they must be handled in the 

6 following manner: 1) returned to the vendor for re-use, 2) sent to a drum recycler 

7 for reconditioning, or 3) used or recycled on-site.

8 • All these actions must occur within one year of the container being emptied.

9 5.7 Waste Oil Filters

10 Used metal canister oil filters can be managed as non-hazardous wastes if:

11 • They are thoroughly drained of “free flowing” oil (oil exiting drop-by-drop is not 

12 considered “free flowing”).

13 • The filters are accumulated, stored, and transferred in a closed, rainproof 

14 container.

15 • The filters are transferred for the purposes of recycling.

16 • The filters are not terne-plated (an alloy of tin and lead).

17 Terne-plated oil filters are a hazardous waste, exhibiting the hazardous characteristic of 

18 lead. Terne-plated oil filters not recycled must be managed as a hazardous waste.

19 5.8 Used Lubricating Oil

20 Lubrication oil is considered a used oil, as listed below:

21 • Any oil that has been refined from crude oil and as a result of use has been 

22 contaminated with physical or chemical impurities.

23 • Any oil that has been refined from crude oil and, as a consequence of extended 

24 storage, spillage, or contamination with non-hazardous impurities such as dirt, 

25 rags, and water, is no longer useful to the original purchaser.

26 • Spent lubricating fluids that have been removed from a truck, heavy equipment, 

27 automobile, or bus. 

28 Used oil may be a hazardous waste if:

29 • The concentrations of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) exceed 50 parts per 

30 million (ppm).

31 • Total halogens exceed 1,000 ppm.

32 • Mixed with a hazardous waste. 

33 Used oil not being burned or recycled must be managed as a hazardous waste unless it 

34 is determined to be non-hazardous through laboratory analysis.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 P-12

1 6.0 MITIGATION MEASURES

2 Standard mitigation measures, applied Project-wide, will address many of the concerns 

3 associated with hazardous substances and have been developed in accordance with 

4 the BLM standards. The mitigation measures for storage, handling, transport, use, and 

5 disposal of hazardous materials and wastes are presented in Appendix Z of the Plan of 

6 Development.

7
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013

ATTACHMENT A

SAMPLE HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 

MANAGEMENT PLAN FRAMEWORK FORMS
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-1

CERTIFICATIONS, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, AND DESIGNATION

OF EMERGENCY COORDINATOR

The Construction Contractor(s) responsible for managing the material yards shall complete and submit 

the following information:

GENERAL INFORMATION

Business Name

Facility Street Address

( )

City County Zip Code Phone

Mailing Address (if different)

( )

City County Zip Code Phone

EMERGENCY COORDINATOR

( ) ( ) ( )

Primary Emergency Coordinator Business Phone 24-hour Phone Pager/Cellular Phone

( ) ( ) ( )

1st Alternate Business Phone 24-hour Phone Pager/Cellular Phone

( ) ( ) ( )

2nd Alternate Business Phone 24-hour Phone Pager/Cellular Phone

Note: Certification is only necessary if an SPCC Plan is required (see Appendix N).
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-2

SPILL PREVENTION, CONTAINMENT, AND COUNTERMEASURE

The Construction Contractor(s) shall identify all sources of potential spills including tank 

overflow, rupture, or leakage. Spill Prevention, Containment, and Countermeasure information 

must be included for all containers with a capacity of 55 gallons or greater that contain oil 

including petroleum, fuel oil, sludge, oil refuse, and oil mixed with waste.

(1) Material: Total Quantity:

Location of use:

Potential direction of flow: Maximum rate of flow:

Structures of equipment to contain spills:

(2) Material: Total Quantity:

Location of use:

Potential direction of flow: Maximum rate of flow:

Structures of equipment to contain spills:

(3) Material: Total Quantity:

Location of use:

Potential direction of flow: Maximum rate of flow:

Structures of equipment to contain spills:

(4) Material: Total Quantity:

Location of use:

Potential direction of flow: Maximum rate of flow:

Structures of equipment to contain spills:
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-3

EMERGENCY CHECKLIST

** DIAL 911 FOR EMERGENCY RESPONSE**

Emergency Coordinator: ( ) ( )

(day phone) (night phone)

First Alternate: ( ) ( )

(day phone) (night phone)

Second Alternate: ( ) ( )

(day phone) (night phone)

Contractor Telephone Number

Address

EMERGENCY NUMBERS

Emergency Response

(Ambulance, Fire, Police, Sheriff, Utah Highway Patrol) call 911

Poison Control Center (800) 456-7707

Nearest Hospitals (2) Phone:

Phone:

Cleanup Contractor Phone:

Other (specify) Phone:

Other (specify) Phone:

AGENCY NOTIFICATIONS (to be made by the Proponent’s environmental manager or 

environmental field supervisor or emergency response coordinator)

Wyoming Department of Environmental Quality (307) 777-7937

Idaho Department of Environmental Quality: (208) 373-0502

Division of Environmental Response and Remediation

National Response Center (800) 424-8802

Other (specify) Phone #:

Other (specify) Phone #

Note: The Construction Contractor(s) shall verify and update the emergency numbers on this 

page before and during Project construction.
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-4

WEEKLY HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/WASTE INSPECTION LOG

For each item listed below, the Construction Contractor(s) shall indicate whether existing 

conditions are acceptable (A) or unacceptable (U). Resolution of all unacceptable conditions 

must be documented. The Construction Contractor(s) shall inspect all storage facilities on a 

regular basis, but not less than weekly. The Construction Contractor(s) shall keep records of all 

inspections on file.

I. STORAGE AREAS FOR FUELS, LUBRICANTS, AND CHEMCIALS

General

A/U

Material yard and storage areas secured

National Fire Protection Association 704 system symbol posted in storage area or at 

material yard entrance

Storage areas properly prepared and signed

No evidence of spilled or leaking materials

Incompatible materials separated

All containers labeled properly

All containers securely closed

All containers upright

No evidence of container bulging, damage, rust, or corrosion

Material Safety Data Sheets available

Hazardous Materials Management and Spill Prevention Plan available

Secondary Containment Areas

A/U

Containment berm intact and capable of holding 110 percent of material stored

Lining intact

No materials overhanging berms

No materials stored on berms

No flammable materials used for berms

Compressed Gases

A/U

Cylinders labeled with contents

Cylinders secured from falling

Oxygen stored at least 25 feet away from fuel

Cylinders in bulk storage are separated from incompatible materials by fire barriers or 

by appropriate distance
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-5

II. HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

Waste Container Storage

A/U

No evidence of spilled or leaking wastes

Adequate secondary containment for all wastes

Separate containers for each waste stream – no piles

Waste area not adjacent to combustibles or compressed gases

All containers securely closed

Bungs secured tightly

Open-top drum hoops secured

All containers upright

No evidence of container bulging, corrosion

No severe container damage or rust

Containers are compatible with waste (e.g., plastic liner for corrosives, metal liner for 

solvents)

No smoking and general danger/warning signs posted

Waste Container Labeling

A/U

Containers properly labeled

Name, address, and EPA ID number or ID Number of generator listed

Accumulation start date listed

Storage start date listed

Chemical and physical composition of waste listed

Hazardous properties listed

Nonhazardous Waste Areas

A/U

No litter in material yard

No hazardous wastes with trash (e.g., contaminated soil, oily rags, or other oily 

materials)

Empty oil and aerosol containers for disposal as non-hazardous waste are completely 

emptied
Framework Hazardous Material Management Plan Appendix P

January 2013 A-6

III. EMERGENCY RESPONSE EQUIPMENT

A/U

Shovels

Absorbent material

Personal protective equipment (tyvek suit, gloves, goggles and booties, as appropriate)

Fire-fighting equipment

First aid supplies (e.g., medical supplies, squeeze bottle eye wash)

Communication equipment

Bung wrench (non-sparking)

IV. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN (Required for all unacceptable conditions)

Date: Company (print):

Inspected by (print):

Signature:
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX Q

2 FRAMEWORK CONSTRUCTION EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND 

3 RESPONSE PLAN

4
Appendix Q

Framework Emergency Response 

Preparedness and Response Plan 

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Appendix Q

January 2013 Q-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................. Q-1

2.0 PURPOSE........................................................................................................... Q-1

3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE.......................................................................... Q-2

4.0 RESPONSIBILITIES........................................................................................... Q-2

5.0 RESPONSE COORDINATION ........................................................................... Q-2

6.0 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS................................................................... Q-2

6.1 Emergency Contact List .............................................................................. Q-3

7.0 HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONS AND KEY RESPONSE CRITERIA ..................... Q-3

LIST OF TABLES

Table Q-1. Emergency Contact List..................................................................................Q-3
Framework Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Appendix Q

January 2013 Q-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current (AC) electric transmission system consisting of 10 segments 

5 between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway 

6 Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed 

7 transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve 

8 operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric 

9 transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional 

10 energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. 

11 The Project includes ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of 

12 above-ground, single-circuit transmission lines involving towers, access roads, staging 

13 areas, fly yards, pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, 

14 and electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands 

15 administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), 

16 and the states of Idaho and Wyoming.

17 The Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Framework is intended to provide 

18 an overview of methods to be implemented if the need for emergency management is 

19 imminent. This document discusses the existing support structure, chain of command, 

20 and emergency communications protocols to be used as a guide for an Emergency 

21 Preparedness and Response Plan to be completed by the Companies’ Construction 

22 Contractor and approved by the BLM. More specific emergency procedures for blasting, 

23 fire, and hazardous materials are included in Appendices M – Framework Blasting Plan,

24 O - Framework Fire Prevention and Suppression Plan, and P – Framework Hazardous 

25 Materials Management Plan. 

26 Emergency response procedures will be implemented for the following potential events, 

27 or similar events:

28 • Downed transmission lines, structures, or equipment failure

29 • Fires

30 • Sudden loss of power

31 • Natural disasters 

32 • Serious personal injury 

33 2.0 PURPOSE

34 The purpose of an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan is to provide clear 

35 procedures and information to enable the Companies, the Construction Contractor, the 

36 Compliance Inspection Contractor (CIC), and BLM Project Manager to prepare for and 

37 effectively respond to emergency situations. The primary objective of this plan is to 

38 prevent adverse impacts to human health and safety, property, and the environment 

39 that could potentially occur as a result of the construction, operation, and maintenance 

40 of Gateway West Transmission Line Project (Project).
Framework Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Appendix Q

January 2013 Q-2

1 3.0 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

2 Health and safety guidelines related to high-voltage transmission lines are provided by a 

3 number of sources, including the National Electric Safety Code, American National 

4 Standards Institute, American Medical Association Council on Scientific Affairs, 

5 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, various state regulations, 

6 and other organizations. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 

7 also provide regulations for construction activities.

8 4.0 RESPONSIBILITIES

9 The Companies and the Construction Contractor are responsible for the effective 

10 response to any emergency situation or event related to the construction, operation, and 

11 maintenance of the Project. To ensure a coordinated and effective response, a chain of 

12 command will be developed as part of the Emergency Preparedness and Response 

13 Plan and followed in the event of an emergency.

14 In the establishment of a chain of command, considerations such as the level of 

15 activation and the participation necessary to respond to specific situations are to be 

16 taken into account. The following are factors for the establishment of a chain of 

17 command:

18 • Type of event (natural, environmental, electrical supply/outage, external forces)

19 • Severity and geographic area (multiple or combination of events)

20 • Anticipated duration

21 • Multi-division/discipline response required

22 • External agency coordination

23 5.0 RESPONSE COORDINATION

24 The amount of resources and coordination required for response to a specific hazard or 

25 emergency is determined by type, severity, location, and duration of the event. Most 

26 events require managing at the field operations level and will require increasing 

27 resource requirements to match the severity and duration of the event. This emergency 

28 management organization will be included as part of this Emergency Preparedness and 

29 Response Plan and will provide increasing levels of resources and the coordination 

30 necessary to support immediate or escalating emergency events.

31 In the event of an emergency, crews will be dispatched quickly to repair or replace any 

32 damaged equipment. Repair of the transmission line will have priority under emergency 

33 conditions and all reasonable efforts will be made to protect plants, wildlife, and other 

34 resources. Reclamation procedures following completion of repair work will be similar to 

35 those prescribed during construction.

36 6.0 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS

37 Effective communication and exchange of information is essential in every emergency 

38 response. Misdirected, incorrect, or untimely information can be detrimental and even 

39 increase the threat to life or property. As an emergency event escalates, the rapid 

40 increase of information creates chaos and confusion. Simple communication diagrams 

41 can help to alleviate this situation.
Framework Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Appendix Q

January 2013 Q-3

1 6.1 Emergency Contact List

2 In case of emergency, call 911 first. Additional potential emergency contacts are 

3 listed in Table 6-1 and should be called as appropriate, depending on the situation (e.g., 

4 fire, injury). Further guidance on emergency response, notification, and reporting 

5 protocols are included in Appendices M – Framework Blasting Plan, O - Framework Fire 

6 Prevention and Suppression Plan, and P – Framework Hazardous Materials 

7 Management Plan.

8 Table Q-1. Emergency Contact List 

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY - Call 911

FIRE – Call 911 First

Counties: 

Primary Contact:

TBD

Secondary Contact:

TBD

BLM Field Offices:

TBD

USFS Ranger Districts

TBD

State Interagency Fire Centers:

TBD

LAW ENFORCEMENT

County Sheriffs:

TBD

State Highway Patrols:

TBD

POISON CONTROL

National/State Poison Control

Centers:

TBD

HOSPITALS AND CLINICS

County and Municipal as 

Applicable:

TBD

HAZARDOUS SPILL RESPONSE AND NOTIFICATION – Call 911

Directly after 911 notification, the following mandatory notifications will be made by the CIC. Select and notify the 

appropriate government agencies based on geographic location of the spill site. Also see Appendix P – Framework 

Hazardous Materials Management Plan.

Counties:

TBD

State Divisions of 

Emergency Services & 

Homeland Security:

TBD

National Response Center:

TBD

State Departments of 

Environmental Quality:

TBD

OTHER NUMBERS

Counties Fire Dispatch

TBD

BLM Authorized Officer or 

Representative:

TBD

The Construction Contractor 

Manager:

TBD

9

10 This Emergency Contact List shall be verified at the beginning of construction and 

11 updated throughout the Project by the Construction Contractor to ensure accurate 

12 contact information.

13 7.0 HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONS AND KEY RESPONSE CRITERIA

14 The right-of-way corridor for the Project can pose potential hazards or threats in 

15 association with construction activities. The most effective response to any situation is 

16 awareness of the hazard, its potential effects and consequences, and an understanding 

17 of the resources and actions necessary to respond. It would be unreasonable to list all 
Framework Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan Appendix Q

January 2013 Q-4

1 the potential hazards and detail each response. Responses to different events may vary 

2 as the event evolves, but response methods and responsibilities to be determined in the 

3 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan will be essential for any possible 

4 situation.

5 Effective Emergency Response training is based on plausible scenarios and then

6 developing the understanding, elements, and actions necessary to respond. Scenarios 

7 to consider are electrocution, fatality, massive equipment failure, structure failure, 

8 weather/environment, etc. 
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX R

2 FRAMEWORK OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE, AND EMERGENCY 

3 RESPONSE PLAN

4
Appendix R

Framework Operations, Maintenance, and 

Emergency Response Plan

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

PacifiCorp

1407 W. North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

and

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

January 2013
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................... R-1

2.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE................................................................... R-2

2.1 Routine Maintenance (Preventive Maintenance)......................................... R-3

2.2 Corrective Maintenance .............................................................................. R-4

3.0 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS .................................................................................. R-5

4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES...................................................... R-5

4.1 Service Road Management......................................................................... R-5

4.2 Vegetation Management ............................................................................. R-9

4.3 Noxious Weed Control .............................................................................. R-11

4.4 Protection Measures for Aquatic Resources ............................................. R-11

4.5 Protection for Threatened, Endangered, and Sensitive Plant and 

Animal Species ......................................................................................... R-11

4.6 Restoration and Revegetation................................................................... R-12

4.7 Protection Measures for Cultural Resources............................................. R-12

4.8 Fire Protection........................................................................................... R-13

4.9 Emergency Notification Procedures .......................................................... R-13

5.0 O&M PLAN HISTORY ......................................................................................... R-14

6.0 LITERATURE CITED........................................................................................... R-15

LIST OF TABLES

Table R-1. Company Proposed Seasonal O&M Restrictions by Time and Location for Big 

Game Crucial Winter Range ...............................................................................R-7

Table R-2. IVM Recommended Management Heights in the Wire Zone and Regions........R-10

Table R-3. O&M Contact List..............................................................................................R-14

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure R-1. Transmission Line Vegetation Management Zones. .........................................R-10

Figure R-2. Vegetation Management Regions Based on Line Height ..................................R-10
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-1

1 1.0 INTRODUCTION

2 Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

3 construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

4 500-kV alternating current electric transmission system, called the Gateway West 

5 Transmission Line Project (Project), consisting of 10 segments between the Windstar 

6 Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway Substation approximately 30 

7 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed transmission line is needed to 

8 supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve operating limitations, increase 

9 capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric transmission grid, allowing for the 

10 delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts of additional energy for the Companies’ larger service 

11 areas and to other interconnected systems. The Project includes ground-disturbing 

12 activities associated with the construction of above-ground, single-circuit transmission 

13 lines involving towers, access roads, multiuse areas, fly yards, and pulling sites as well 

14 as associated substations, communication sites, and electrical supply distribution lines. 

15 The Project crosses private land and public lands administered by the Bureau of Land 

16 Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (Forest Service), and the states of Idaho and 

17 Wyoming.

18 This document presents the plan proposed by the Companies for conducting routine 

19 and emergency operation and maintenance (O&M) activities for the Project. This plan is 

20 intended to ensure the following:

21 • O&M activities comply with applicable state and federal laws and policies;

22 • Consistency across and within federal jurisdictions;

23 • The Companies are able to access the transmission line and ancillary facilities 

24 and implement the necessary O&M activities in a timely, cost effective and safe 

25 manner; 

26 • Impacts to the environment are avoided where practicable or are minimized; and

27 • The Companies comply with the North American Electric Reliability Corporation 

28 (NERC) and Western Electric Coordinating Council (WECC) reliability and 

29 service requirements.

30 NERC’s mission is to ensure the reliability of the bulk power system in North America. 

31 To achieve that, NERC develops and enforces reliability standards; assesses adequacy 

32 annually via 10-year and seasonal forecasts; monitors the bulk power system; evaluates 

33 users, owners, and operators users for preparedness; and educates, trains, and 

34 certifies industry personnel. NERC works with eight regional entities to improve the 

35 reliability of the bulk power system. The members of the regional entities come from all 

36 segments of the electric industry: investor-owned utilities; federal power agencies; rural 

37 electric cooperatives; state, municipal and provincial utilities; independent power 

38 producers; power marketers; and end-use customers. These entities account for 

39 virtually all the electricity supplied in the United States, Canada, and a portion of Baja 

40 California Norte, Mexico. 

41 The Western Systems Coordinating Council (WSCC) was formed with the signing of the 

42 WSCC Agreement on August 14, 1967 by 40 electric power systems. Those "charter 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-2

1 members" represented the electric power systems engaged in bulk power generation 

2 and/or transmission serving all or part of the 14 Western States and British Columbia, 

3 Canada. The WECC was formed on April 18, 2002, by the merger of WSCC, Southwest 

4 Regional Transmission Association (SWRTA), and Western Regional Transmission 

5 Association (WRTA). WECC's interconnection-wide focus is intended to complement 

6 current efforts to form Regional Transmission Organizations (RTO) in various parts of 

7 the West.

8 WECC and the nine other regional reliability councils were formed due to national 

9 concern regarding the reliability of the interconnected bulk power systems, the ability to 

10 operate these systems without widespread failures in electric service, and the need to 

11 foster the preservation of reliability through a formal organization.

12 WECC members have long recognized the many benefits of interconnected system 

13 operation. During the mid-1960s, expansion of interconnecting transmission lines 

14 among systems in the western United States and western Canada resulted in the 

15 complete interconnection of the entire WECC region. As this expansion was taking

16 place, systems generally adopted the Operating Guides of the North American Power 

17 Systems Interconnection Committee (NAPSIC) to promote consistent operating 

18 practices within the region. NAPSIC later became the NERC Operating Committee.

19 The reliability management system (RMS) was created as a way to enforce compliance. 

20 This contract obligates entities to abide by certain critical reliability standards and to 

21 provide the data needed to verify compliance. The contract also imposes sanctions, 

22 both monetary and non-monetary according to a set schedule, for violations of reliability 

23 criteria. Currently all control areas but one are signatories to the RMS agreement, and 

24 almost 90 percent of the customer load in the Western Interconnection is served under 

25 RMS.

26 This Plan addresses routine, corrective and emergency response activities for O&M of 

27 the transmission line and its ancillary facilities. This Plan will be reviewed and updated 

28 as necessary and as agreed to by the Companies and the BLM, Forest Service, and 

29 Bureau of Reclamation (Agencies).

30 2.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

31 The Companies perform a number of activities to keep transmission lines operational 

32 and in good repair. Most of these activities, such as those for routine patrols, 

33 inspections, or scheduled maintenance, are planned in advance. However, there will be 

34 an occasional need for emergency response in cases where public safety and property 

35 are threatened, to prevent imminent damage to the transmission line and ancillary 

36 facilities, or to restore service in the event of an outage. 

37 Routine, corrective, and emergency response activities will be conducted in accordance 

38 with this O&M Plan without previous notification or approval from the Agencies. 

39 Exceptions where prior notification and approval are required are described in Section 

40 4. Maintenance activities outside of the right-of-way (ROW), outside of established 

41 service and access roads or other Project related ancillary facilities, or that are not 

42 identified in this Plan will not be conducted until approved by the Agencies. An 

43 exception to this would be when emergency action/maintenance is needed which 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-3

1 requires some outside ROW work to be completed to ensure reliable power to 

2 customers.

3 Typical schedules and equipment used for the O&M activities are provided below. 

4 However, additional vehicles and equipment may be necessary depending on the 

5 terrain, site access, and necessary maintenance work. Work may also be conducted 

6 outside of the typical schedule; schedule changes may occur as a result of weather, 

7 manpower, equipment availability, budgets, and other factors.

8 2.1 Routine Maintenance (Preventive Maintenance)

9 Routine maintenance activities are conducted on a regular basis and have been carried 

10 out historically to identify and repair any deficiencies. These activities do not damage 

11 vegetation or soil outside of the ROW, do not adversely impact sensitive resources —

12 including known federal and state listed species, waters of the United States, and 

13 cultural resources — and do not require land manager approval. Personnel are 

14 generally present in any one area for less than one day. The following are examples of 

15 routine maintenance activities:

16 • Routine air patrols from a helicopter to inspect for structural and conductor 

17 defects, conductor clearance problems and hazardous trees.

18 • Routine ground patrols to inspect structural and conductor components. Such 

19 inspections generally require either an all-terrain vehicle (ATV) or pickup and 

20 possibly additional support vehicles traveling on access and service roads and 

21 may rely on either direct line-of-sight or binoculars. In some cases, the inspector 

22 may walk the ROW. Patrols are typically conducted in the spring and fall. Follow23 up maintenance is scheduled depending on the severity of the problem — either 

24 as soon as possible or as part of routine scheduled maintenance.

25 • Climbing surveys may be necessary to inspect hardware or make repairs. 

26 Personnel generally access these structures by pickup, ATV, or on foot. 

27 • Structure or conductor maintenance typically occurs from a bucket truck or boom 

28 truck. The maintenance vehicle may be located on or off a road, and no-to29 minimal grading is necessary to create a safe work area. 

30 • Cathodic protection surveys to check the integrity and functionality of the anodes 

31 and ground beds. These surveys typically require personnel to use an ATV or 

32 pickup and make brief stops. 

33 • Routine cyclical vegetation clearing to trim or remove tall shrubs and trees to 

34 ensure adequate ground-to-conductor clearances. Vegetation clearing cycles 

35 vary from 3 to 10 years or as needed (dependent upon the vegetation present). 

36 Personnel generally access the area by pickup, ATV, or on foot; use chainsaws 

37 to clear the vegetation; and typically spend less than half a day in any one 

38 specific area. In some cases vegetation may be cleared using mechanical 

39 means. 

40 • Removal of individual trees or snags (hazard trees) that pose a risk of falling into 

41 conductors or structures and causing outages or fires. Personnel generally 

42 access hazard trees by truck, ATV, or by foot from an access or service road, 

43 and cut them with a chainsaw or similar tool. Any felled trees or snags are left in 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-4

1 place as sources of large woody debris or as previously directed by the land 

2 management agency. Felled green trees are limbed to reduce fire hazard. 

3 • Wood poles are periodically treated to retard rotting and structural degradation. 

4 Wooden poles are limited to the distribution lines serving substations and 

5 regeneration stations on this Project. Personnel typically access structures by 

6 pickup, ATV, or on foot; inspect and test (including the subsurface) the poles; 

7 and then treat them by injecting preservatives into the poles if required. Wood 

8 pole inspections and treatments generally occur on a 10-year cycle. 

9 • Routine road maintenance, such as blading (as needed) the road to improve 

10 surface condition and drainage, or removing minor physical barriers, such as 

11 rocks and debris. All initial road maintenance is performed by field crews which 

12 typically use ATVs, pickups, chainsaws, and hand tools. Trees and brush are cut 

13 off at grade to minimize damage to vehicles. Slash, deadfall, and boulders are 

14 placed at the edge of the road or down slope of the road bed, depending on site 

15 topography, to serve as a filtering windrow to minimize erosion and 

16 sedimentation. Smaller vegetation (e.g., grasses) is left in the road bed unless it 

17 is too tall, hinders access, or could be construed as a fire hazard to O&M 

18 vehicles.

19 • Vegetation removal may be required on service roads to allow the necessary 

20 clearance for access and provide for worker safety. Field crews access the 

21 service roads by pickup or ATV and use chainsaws and hand tools to clear the 

22 vegetation. Where practicable and feasible, mechanical methods may be used.

23 • Installation of bird protection devices, bird perch discouragers, and the relocation 

24 or removal of bird problem nests posing imminent fire or outage risk.

25 • Noxious weed control and vegetation management activities that include the use 

26 of herbicides. Herbicide use is based on agreement with the landowner or federal 

27 land management agency for the parcel in question and the chemicals used are 

28 agreed to in advance.

29 2.2 Corrective Maintenance

30 Corrective maintenance activities are relatively large-scale efforts that occur 

31 infrequently, may result in more extensive vegetation clearing or earth movement, and 

32 may include rehabilitation seeding and associated activities (e.g., measures to control 

33 noxious weeds). Personnel are generally present in any one location or area for a 

34 prolonged time, generally more than one day. The following are examples of corrective 

35 maintenance:

36 • Non-cyclical vegetation clearing to remove saplings or larger trees in the ROW. 

37 • Structure or conductor maintenance in which earth must be moved, such as the 

38 creation of a landing pad for construction or maintenance equipment. 

39 • Structure (e.g., cross-arm, insulator, structure) replacement. 

40 • Road maintenance involving erosion control, water drainage installation or repair 

41 (such as culverts or rock crossings), road rehabilitation after major disturbances 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-5

1 (such as slumping or a storm event), or other road maintenance requiring heavy 

2 equipment (not including routine grading).

3 • Follow-up restoration activities, such as seeding, noxious weed control, and 

4 erosion control.

5 • Conductor repair or replacement, which requires the use of several types of 

6 trucks and equipment and grading to create a safe work area to hang and pull 

7 the conductor into place. 

8 3.0 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS

9 Emergency situations are those conditions that may result in imminent or direct threats 

10 to public safety or threaten or impair the Companies’ ability to provide reliable 

11 transmission service to its customers. Emergency situations may include: 

12 • Failure of conductor splices;

13 • Damage to structures or conductors from wildfire, high winds, ice, or other 

14 weather-related conditions;

15 • Line or system outages or fire hazards caused by trees falling into conductors;

16 • Breaking or imminent failure of cross-arms or insulators, which could, or does, 

17 cause conductor failure; or

18 • Damage to structures or conductors from vandalism.

19 In the case of an emergency where life or substantial property is at risk or there is a 

20 potential or actual interruption in service, the Companies will promptly respond to the 

21 emergency and conduct any and all activities, including emergency repair requiring 

22 heavy equipment access to the structures or other ancillary facilities, needed to remedy 

23 the emergency and will implement feasible and practicable environmental protection 

24 measures (EPMs). Follow-up actions will follow this Plan.

25 4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES 

26 O&M activities are planned to minimize impacts to the environment. EPMs will be 

27 implemented by the Companies during routine and corrective O&M activities and, to the 

28 extent possible, during emergency situations.

29 4.1 Service Road Management

30 Transmission line service roads are necessary for access to, and maintenance of, 

31 transmission lines, structures or ancillary facilities, but they are not part of the public or 

32 federal network of roads. They are generally closed to the public and will be maintained 

33 by the Companies. 

34 During routine operations, vehicular access will be needed to reach each structure for 

35 periodic inspections and maintenance and to areas of forest or tall shrubs to control 

36 vegetation in the ROW for safe operation. The Companies plan to employ live-line 

37 maintenance techniques on the transmission line (see Appendix B, Section 3.1.3). Live 

38 line maintenance and repair techniques require the utilization of high-reach bucket trucks 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-6

1 and other trucks and equipment. Roads required as routine service roads for the 

2 operational life of the Project will be revegetated following construction but will not be 

3 recontoured; they would be maintained free of trees and shrubs for a minimum 8-foot 

4 width.

5 For non-routine maintenance requiring access by larger vehicles, the full width of the 

6 access road may be used. Roads would be repaired, as necessary, but would not be 

7 routinely graded. In order to preserve the ability to enter rapidly, the road structure (cuts 

8 and fills) would be left in place. In an emergency (i.e., in the event of a tower or 

9 conductor failure) full emergency access, including cranes and other heavy equipment, 

10 will be needed. Based on historical reliability of h-frame and lattice structures, it is 

11 anticipated that only a small fraction of the tower sites will require emergency access 

12 over the life of the Project. 

13 Other roads may be travelled over by the Companies during operations. However,

14 these roads are not classified as service roads and will not be maintained by the 

15 Companies except as noted. These include:

16 • Public roads, including state highways and county roads—These roads are for 

17 public use, and the appropriate state or county entity maintains them. 

18 • Open roads on federal land—The appropriate federal agency (typically BLM or 

19 Forest Service) maintains these roads, which are open to the public. These 

20 roads, including drainage features, cuts, and fill slopes, would be repaired by the 

21 Companies if damaged during O&M activities but not maintained on a routine 

22 basis. 

23 • Closed federal land roads—These roads are still needed for administrative or 

24 emergency functions, but they have been closed to the public because of 

25 management policies to protect natural resources or reduce maintenance costs. 

26 If utilized during O&M activities The Companies would assume some 

27 maintenance responsibilities proportionate to their use for O&M purposes. 

28 The Companies typically perform two types of road maintenance activities: 1) vegetation 

29 and debris clearing to maintain safe access and 2) repairs using heavy equipment. 

30 Roads are inspected generally every 3 to 6 years and repairs are made as necessary. 

31 Typically, a small crew uses hand tools to cut small brush and trees (greater than 12

32 inches tall); remove dead-fall and debris; and repair and replace signs on access and 

33 service roads. Crews also prepare an inventory of road damage that will require ground 

34 disturbance (e.g., repair of a failed bank), and repair work is scheduled accordingly 

35 (typically the following year). Inspections and maintenance are typically conducted from 

36 spring through summer, when roads are clear of snow.

37 The Companies will implement the O&M EPMs described in Appendix Z of the POD 

38 when maintaining roads and follow the seasonal restrictions by time and location for big 

39 game crucial winter range time shown in Table R-1.
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-7

Table R-1. Company Proposed Seasonal O&M Restrictions by Time and Location for Big Game Crucial Winter Range

Field Office Seasonal Timing Description

Segment 

Proposed

Species

Mile Marker where Seasonal Restriction is Applicable (mileage)

Mule Deer Elk Antelope Moose

Bighorn 

Sheep

BLM Casper 

Field Office

No surface-disturbing and 

wildlife-disturbing activities are 

allowed from November 15 

through April 30 on all crucial 

big game winter ranges.

1W(a) 19.0 – 26.2

1W(c) 6.1 – 20.3 2.4 – 6.7

BLM Rawlins 

Field Office

No surface disturbance and 

distrupting activities within big 

game crucial winter range are 

allowed from November 15 to 

April 30.

1W(a) 71.7 – 77.88 (end) 57.4 – 63.4

76.7 – 77.88 (end)

1W(c) 67.1 – 77.81 (end) 51.5 – 57.7

70.2 – 77.81 (end)

2 0 – 1.5 0 – 9.0

25.3 – 28.6 29.1 – 37.7

32.7 – 37.6 62.6 – 67.9

44.0 – 51.9

3 18.7 – 22.6

BLM Rock 

Springs Field 

Office

Big game winter ranges would 

be protected to ensure 

continued usability by limiting 

activities during crucial 

seasons of use and by limiting 

the amount of habitat 

disturbed

3 4.7 – 7.7 22.6 – 45.27 (end)

4 (Anticline 

to Jim 

Bridger tiein)

0 – 3.0

4.9 – 5.02 (end)

4 0 – 1.1

6.2 – 16.2

19.0 – 20.8

24.8 – 30.9

51.8 – 57.8

BLM 

Kemmerer 

Field Office

(winter and parturition) 4 117.0 – 123.1 109.5 – 119 83.5 – 85.1 106.0 – 107.2

115.6 – 118.9

BLM 

Pocatello 

Field Office

None Identified 4 132.5 – 147.6 141.4 – 144.7

153.7 – 161.1 158.5 – 162.1

169.6 – 173.9 170.9 – 173.8

176.5 – 177.1

178.7 – 184.0

186.0 – 196.2

5 3.2 – 11.9

20.3 – 21.1
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-8

Table R-1. Company Proposed Seasonal O&M Restrictions by Time and Location for Big Game Crucial Winter Range (continued)

Field Office Seasonal Timing Description

Segment 

Proposed

Species

Mile Marker where Seasonal Restriction is Applicable (mileage)

Mule Deer Elk Antelope Moose

Bighorn 

Sheep

BLM 

Pocatello 

Field Office 

(cont’d)

5 (cont’d) 26.9 – 32.2

34.0 – 49.5

50.0 – 52.2

7 3.1 – 11.0

19.8 – 21.1

26.4 – 31.9

33.5 – 40.9

44.0 – 46.8

BLM Burley 

Field Office

None Identified 5 53.7 – 55.0

7 51.1 – 56.9

76.4 – 81.3

82.1 – 88.5

109.7 – 118.0

9 0 – 10.0

BLM 

Shoshone 

Field Office

None Identified 8 0 – 0.3

4.5 – 16.4

24.3 – 45.3

10 15.7 – 19.1

7.6 -13.2

0 – 1.6

BLM Four 

Rivers Field 

Office

Cascade RMP - No surface 

occupancy during December 1 

through April 1 in crucial 

habitat, Kuna MFP –

Restricted/closed in critical 

winter range if necessary –

November 15 through April 15. 

8 45.3 – 56.7 74.4 – 90.0 72.1 – 79.6 124.0 –

125.5

BLM Owyhee 

Field Office

None Identified 9 137.1 – 159.4
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-9

1 4.2 Vegetation Management

2 The Companies manage vegetation within their ROWs and in access and service roads 

3 to minimize interference with the flow of electricity, to address safety issues, and to 

4 facilitate O&M activities. The vegetation management complies with the National 

5 Electric Safety Code, ANSI A300 Part 7: American Operations Integrated Vegetation 

6 Management and Electric Utility Rights-of-Way and the ISA Best Management 

7 Practices. Additionally, the Companies comply with vegetation management standards 

8 required by the NERC and WECC vegetation management guidelines; failure to comply 

9 with these requirements can result in substantial financial penalties.

10 Objectives of Integrated Vegetation Management (IVM) on utility ROWs are to establish 

11 sustainable plant communities that are compatible with the electric facilities. The intent 

12 is to provide stable, low growing plant ecotypes that reduce fire risk and maintain safe 

13 access to the line and associated facilities. In general, this involves removing tall 

14 growing tree species. Establishment of vegetation will also reduce the potential for 

15 noxious weeds to become established in the ROW. 

16 IVM has a series of control methods used to achieve the aforementioned objectives. 

17 These include, but are not limited to:

18 • Manual Control Methods: workers with hand-carried tools, including power tools, 

19 used in selective or environmentally sensitive areas.

20 • Mechanical Control Methods: conducted with a large variety of different types of 

21 machines that are efficient in clearing dense stands of vegetation. 

22 • Chemical Control Methods: 

23 - Tree Growth Regulators that are designed to reduce the natural growth rates by interfering 

24 with natural plant processes.

25 - Herbicides: Noxious or invasive weeds along with stumps and saplings of tall growing 

26 species may be controlled with EPA approved herbicides.

27 • Biological Control Methods: use of natural processes to control undesirable 

28 vegetation.

29 • Cultural Control Methods: take advantage of seed banks of native, compatible 

30 species lying dormant on-site; this encourages the establishment of early 

31 successional plant communities.

32 For the purposes of IVM, the ROW has been divided into the wire zone and the border 

33 zone as shown in Figure R-1 and as defined below:

34 • Wire Zone – The ROW portion directly under the wires and 10 feet beyond the 

35 outside phases.

36 • Border Zone – The outside edge of the wire zone to the edge of the ROW. 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-10

1

2 Figure R-1. Transmission Line Vegetation Management Zones.

3 The IVM control method(s) implemented may be directed by the distance of the 

4 conductor to the ground surface (based on maximum calculated sag) as shown on 

5 Table R-2 and Figure R-2, and is defined by region as follows: Region A, where the 

6 lines are less than 50 feet off the ground, Region B where the lines are 50 to 100 feet 

7 off the ground, and Region C where lines are greater than 100 feet off the ground. Table 

8 R-2 indicates the heights at which vegetation will be managed, based on zones and 

9 regions.

10 Table R-2. IVM Recommended Management Heights in the Wire Zone and Regions

Zone

Region

A B C

Wire Zone Remove All Trees Remove all trees if less than 50 

feet clearance between top of tree 

and conductor.

Remove all trees if less than 50 

feet clearance between top of tree 

and conductor.

Border Zone Remove all trees greater 

than 25 feet in height.

Removal of any hazard trees*. Removal of any hazard trees*.

11 * Hazard tree is defined as any tree that is structurally unsound that could strike a target (any utility related 

12 infrastructure) when it falls. Hazard trees can occur outside of the ROW and are typically removed annually.

13

14

15 Figure R-2. Vegetation Management Regions Based on Line Height
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-11

1 Generally, the Companies propose to conduct IVM control methods/activities within the 

2 ROW every 3 to 10 years, depending on a variety of conditions such as topography, 

3 vegetation type and growth rates, and the potential for vegetation to interfere with safe 

4 operation of the line prior to the next clearing cycle. The Companies propose to use a 

5 variety of IVM control methods and have developed the O&M EPMs described in 

6 Appendix Z of the POD for maintaining vegetation within the transmission line ROW.

7 4.3 Noxious Weed Control

8 Maintenance vehicles, ATVs, and equipment have the potential to transport weed seeds 

9 from one area to another via dirt and debris that inadvertently collects on the equipment. 

10 The Companies will implement the O&M EPMs described in Appendix Z of the POD.

11 4.4 Protection Measures for Aquatic Resources

12 Streams or watercourses with definable streambeds or stream banks, regardless of 

13 whether there is flowing water, are important because they provide habitat for a variety 

14 of animal and plant species. The Project transmission lines parallel and cross numerous 

15 waterways and riparian areas. Of critical importance is the protection of habitat for 

16 sensitive plant and animal species, including aquatic species. The Companies propose 

17 the O&M EPMs described in Appendix Z of the POD to protect aquatic resources while 

18 maintaining vegetation in and around important aquatic resources.

19 4.5 Protection for Threatened, Endangered, and Sensitive Plant and 

20 Animal Species

21 The Companies have taken a thorough, systematic approach in providing protection for 

22 threatened, endangered, and sensitive plant and animal species. After taking into 

23 consideration wildlife and plant resources as well as other important resources during 

24 siting and routing, the Companies recognized the need for additional measures to 

25 minimize the impact from construction of the Project and submitted a Wildlife 

26 Conservation Measures Plan. 

27 The Companies will implement the O&M measures described in Appendix Z of the POD 

28 to protect plant and animal species during routine and corrective O&M activities: 

29 Nesting, roosting, and perching birds can cause power outages if their feces or nesting 

30 materials interfere with conductors, insulators, or air gap. The Companies, in 

31 consultation with the U.S Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), manage nesting on 

32 transmission line structures to reduce conflicts. Such management may include 

33 relocating nests, modifying structures, and providing nesting platforms. The Companies

34 will continue to consult with the USFWS, and when a problem nest is located on federal 

35 or state lands, the appropriate land management agency.

36 If an emergency occurs and access is immediately needed, the federal agency will be 

37 notified as soon as possible. Depending on the urgency, the agency may not have 

38 responded until after the repair work has begun. Timing restrictions may not be adhered 

39 to, but the other measures listed above will be followed to the extent possible. 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-12

1 4.6 Restoration and Revegetation

2 The Reclamation, Revegetation, and Weed Management Plan to be written by the 

3 Companies and approved by the appropriate agency with regulatory authority over 

4 lands within the Project area, will include site-specific restoration measures, species to 

5 be replanted, and monitoring. It combines the Companies’ best management practices 

6 (BMPs) with site-specific mitigation developed in consultation with the agencies. After 

7 ground-disturbing maintenance activities, the Companies propose to use the O&M 

8 EPMs described in Appendix Z of the POD to ensure that appropriate reclamation and 

9 revegetation is implemented, and to prevent accidental introduction or transport of 

10 noxious weeds along the ROW. 

11 4.7 Protection Measures for Cultural Resources

12 As part of the environmental impact statement preparation, and prior to any construction 

13 activities, a 100 percent pedestrian survey of the ROW and areas proposed for 

14 disturbance outside the ROW will have cultural and/or paleontological surveys 

15 conducted. All cultural and/or paleontological resources or historic or prehistoric sites or 

16 objects discovered by the Companies, or their designated contractor, will be 

17 immediately reported. Additional surveys will not be conducted for O&M activities if the 

18 work area was previously surveyed prior to construction of the line and ancillary 

19 facilities.

20 If new probable historic, cultural, or paleontological resources are discovered during 

21 routine or corrective O&M activities, potentially destructive work within 300 feet of the 

22 find will be halted and the appropriate federal or state agency notified. The Companies

23 will also immediately implement the O&M measures described in Appendix Z of the 

24 POD.

25 a) Flagging will be erected to prohibit potentially destructive activities.

26 b) The Companies’ archaeologist or designated archaeologist will make a 

27 preliminary assessment of the newly discovered resource.

28 c) If the archaeologist determines that the discovery represents a potential new site 

29 or an undocumented feature of a documented site, the appropriate federal or 

30 state agency will be notified.

31 d) O&M will not resume in the identified area until cleared by the appropriate 

32 Agency.

33 Regarding routine and corrective, the Companies propose to use the O&M EPMs

34 presented in the POD to ensure that appropriate protection to cultural resources is 

35 given. 

36 All human interments will be treated with the respect accorded them by state and 

37 federal laws applying to human remains. If human remains are discovered during O&M 

38 activities, the Companies will stop all work in the immediate area to protect the integrity 

39 of the find and notify the appropriate law enforcement agency and the landowner or land 

40 management agency as soon as possible. In addition, the location of the find will be 

41 flagged or fenced off to protect it from further impacts. The law enforcement agency or 

42 coroner will determine the age of the human remains. If the remains are not modern, 
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-13

1 then the Companies will work with the federal or state agency to determine what 

2 mitigation is necessary and, once the mitigation is complete, resume work in the area.

3 4.8 Fire Protection

4 Fire regulations on federally managed lands are generally in effect between April 1 and 

5 October 31 and at other times with unusual weather conditions. O&M activities will

6 follow the requirements and procedures specified by the appropriate federal or state 

7 agency when conducted on federal or state lands.

8 The Companies are responsible for inspecting the transmission lines for fire hazards. 

9 When working during fire season, the Companies and/or their contractor will carry the 

10 following suppression tools and equipment:

11 • All power-driven equipment shall be equipped with one (1) fire extinguisher 

12 having a UL rating of at least 5 BC and one “D” handled or long handled round 

13 point shovel, size “0” or larger; 

14 • Each motor patrol, truck, and passenger-carrying vehicle shall be equipped with 

15 a double-bit axe or Pulaski, 31/2 pounds or larger; and

16 • Each internal combustion engine shall be equipped with a spark arrester that 

17 meets the federal land managing agency’s standards.

18 The Companies and the federal or state land manager will work cooperatively to 

19 evaluate request for Industrial Fire Precaution Level (IFPL) Waivers that would allow the 

20 Companies and/or their contractors to continue working when certain fire restrictions are 

21 in place.

22 Transmission lines in the western United States may be interconnected with the lines of 

23 other utilities. Continued operation of these lines provides stability to the entire 

24 interconnected Western transmission system. In addition, continuous operation of the 

25 transmission lines is necessary for the Companies to supply electric service to their

26 customers. Therefore, the federal or state agency will use its best efforts to avoid using 

27 fire suppression techniques that could take the lines out of service. If the federal or state 

28 land manager determines that it must use fire suppression techniques, they will notify

29 the Companies of any and all fire suppression efforts that could come into close 

30 proximity (2 miles) with the transmission lines prior to initiating those efforts.

31 The Agencies will notify the Companies if they are planning a prescribed burn within two 

32 (2) miles of the transmission line or ancillary facilities.

33 4.9 Emergency Notification Procedures

34 If the Companies become aware of an emergency situation that is caused by a fire on or 

35 threatening federal or state land that could damage the transmission lines or their 

36 operation, they will notify the appropriate federal contact. Likewise, if the federal or state 

37 land manager becomes aware of an emergency situation that is caused by a fire on or 

38 threatening federal or state land and that could damage the transmission lines or their 

39 operation, it will notify the Companies.
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-14

1 5.0 O&M PLAN HISTORY

2 The O&M Plan is a living document and changes are anticipated after the plan’s 

3 acceptance. Amendments will include the date on which changes were made, a brief 

4 description of those changes, and the signatures of authorized representatives of the 

5 Companies and the agency accepting the changes.

6 This plan and its updates will be distributed to the following BLM and Forest Service 

7 field offices (see Table R-3). Additionally, the Plan will be made available, as 

8 appropriate, to Company personnel and their contractors. The Companies will be 

9 responsible for distributing updates when they are made. If the federal agencies identify 

10 additional parties that require a copy of the Plan, they are responsible for distribution 

11 and ensuring that party has the current plan.

12 In addition, the following items will become part of this section of the O&M plan: 

13 • List of road closures, and gate locations.

14 • Maps containing known locations of sensitive plant and animal species mapped 

15 as “sensitive areas” without specifying the resource.

16 • Known locations of cultural features mapped as “sensitive areas” without 

17 specifying the resource.

18 Table R-3. O&M Contact List

Department/Role Contact Name Telephone Cell Phone Email

Idaho BLM

Boise District Office & 

Four Rivers Field Office

3948 Development 

Avenue

Boise, ID 83706

Aden Seidlitz (DO)

Terry Humphreys

(FO)

(208) 384-3391

(208) 384-3300

(208) 850-5268

None 

aiden_seidlitz@blm.gov

terry_humphreys@blm.gov

Twin Falls District

440 W F Street

Shoshone, ID 83352

Jenifer Arnold (208) 736-2382 (208) 308-1003 jenifer_arnold@blm.gov

Bruneau Field Office

3948 Development 

Avenue

Boise, ID 83706

Cecil Werven (208) 384-3455 (208) 384-3493 cecil_werven@blm.gov

Owyhee Field Office

20 First Avenue West

Marsing, ID 83639

Kelley Moore (208) 896-5917 (208) 896-5940 kelly_moore@blm.gov

Jarbidge Field Office

440 W F Street

Shoshone, ID 83352

Brian Davis (208) 736-2380 None bdavis@blm.gov

Burley Field Office

15 East 200 South

Burley, ID 83318

Mike Courtney (208) 677-6635 None mike_courtney@blm.gov

Shoshone Field Office

440 W F Street

Shoshone, ID 83352

Ruth Miller (208) 732-7227 None ruth_miller@blm.gov

Idaho Falls District

4350 Cliffs Drive

Pocatello, ID 83204

Joe Kraayenbrink (208) 524-7500 None joe_kraayenbrink@blm.gov

Pocatello Field Office

4350 Cliffs Drive

Pocatello, ID 83204

David Pacioretty (208) 478-6341 None david_pacioretty@blm.gov

19
Framework Operations, Maintenance, and Emergency Response Plan Appendix R

January 2013 R-15

1 Table R-3. O&M Contact List (continued)

Department/Role Contact Name Telephone Cell Phone Email

Wyoming BLM

Wyoming State Office PO 

Box 1828

Cheyenne, WY 82003

Diane Schurman (307) 775-6189 None diane_schurman@blm.gov

Rawlins Field Office

PO Box 2407

Rawlins, WY 82301

Matt Simons (307) 328-4282 None matt_simons@blm.gov

Rock Springs Field Office 

280 Highway 191 North 

Rock Springs, WY 82901

Patricia Hamilton (307) 352-0334 None patricia_hamilton@blm.gov

Casper Field Office

2987 Prospector Drive

Casper, WY 82604

Randy Sorenson (307) 261-7522 None randy_sorenson@blm.gov

Kemmerer Field Office

312 Highway 189 North

Kemmerer, WY 83101

Kelly Lamborn (307) 828-4505 None kelly_lamborn@blm.gov

Forest Service

Caribou/Targhee NF

1405 Hollipark Drive

Idaho Falls, ID 83401

Dennis Duehren (208) 847-8935 None dduehren@fs.fed.us

Medicine Bow NF

2468 Jackson St.

Laramie, WY 82070

Misty Hays (307) 358-7102 None mahays@fs.fed.us

Sawtooth National NF

Minidoka Ranger District

2306 Hiland Avenue

Burley, ID 83318

Scott Nannenga (208) 678-0430 None snannenga@fs.fed.us

2 6.0 LITERATURE CITED

3 IPC and RMP (Idaho Power Company and Rocky Mountain Power Company). 2010. 

4 Revised Proposed Plant and Wildlife Conservation Plan – Construction Activities. 

5 Report dated December 12, 2008.
Plan of Development Gateway West Transmission Line Project

January 2013

1 APPENDIX Z

2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES
Appendix Z

Environmental Protection Measures

Gateway West Transmission Line Project

Prepared by:

Idaho Power Company

1221 West Idaho Street

Boise, ID 83702

and

Rocky Mountain Power

1407 W North Temple

Salt Lake City, UT 84116

January 2013
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................Z-1

1.1 Purpose........................................................................................................Z-1

1.2 Relationship to Other Environmental Protection Plans.................................Z-1

1.3 Contents.......................................................................................................Z-2

LIST OF TABLES

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures ........................... Z-3
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Rocky Mountain Power and Idaho Power Company (Companies) are proposing to 

construct and operate approximately 1,000 miles of new 230-kilovolt (kV), 345-kV and 

500-kV alternating current (AC) electric transmission system consisting of 10 segments 

between the Windstar Substation at Glenrock, Wyoming, and the Hemingway 

Substation approximately 30 miles southwest of Boise, Idaho. The proposed 

transmission line is needed to supplement existing transmission lines in order to relieve 

operating limitations, increase capacity, and improve reliability in the existing electric 

transmission grid, allowing for the delivery of up to 1,500 megawatts (MW) of additional 

energy for the Companies’ larger service areas and to other interconnected systems. 

The Project includes ground-disturbing activities associated with the construction of 

above-ground, single- circuit transmission lines involving towers, access roads, staging 

areas, fly yards, pulling sites as well as associated substations, communication sites, 

and electrical supply distribution lines. The Project crosses private land and public lands 

administered by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), U.S. Forest Service (USFS), 

and the states of Idaho and Wyoming.

This document presents the environmental protection measures (EPMs) proposed by 

the Companies for the avoidance and minimization of impacts to environmental 

resources related to construction and operation activities for the Gateway West

Transmission Line Project (Project). 

1.1 Purpose

The objectives of this plan are to recognize the substantial effort already invested by the 

Companies in avoiding and minimizing impacts and to present a comprehensive plan 

that does the following:

• Meets the intent of the current BLM and USFS management guidance for 

federal lands;

• Apply EPMs from a practical perspective based on differences in land ownership 

and management patterns of the Project; and

• Balances cost, practicality, and feasibility of Project implementation with avoiding 

or minimizing environmental impacts.

1.2 Relationship to Other Environmental Protection Plans 

Section 4.0 and Table 4-1 of the POD describe the framework plans the Companies will 

use to ensure environmental protection during construction, operation, and 

maintenance. Each plan will include EPMs. These measures have been developed by 

the Companies to maintain environmental quality and meet requirements of various 

agencies. For the purposes of ongoing review and discussion with agencies, the 

measures are submitted herein as Appendix Z. Once the measures are finalized, they 

will be incorporated into individual plans. The Companies will be responsible to ensure 

their contractors and employees will implement these measures. 
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-2

1.3 Contents

• Column 1: This column contains the EPM number as presented in the DEIS. By 

presenting this number the reader can more easily reference back to the DEIS to 

see the frame of reference in which it was presented and how the wording of the 

measure may have changes based on comments received during the DEIS 

comment period, through additional analysis and discussions with BLM. 

• Column 2: This column contains the EPM number agreed to between the 

Companies and BLM to allow for a clear and consecutive presentation of EPMs 

by resource. 

• Column 3: A description of the EPM that the Companies are proposing to 

implement during construction and operations. There EPMs become part of the 

Project as proposed by the Companies.

• Columns 4-6: These columns serve as a guide to the phases of the project for 

which the EPM would apply: design and engineering; construction; or operations 

and maintenance. 

• Columns 7-9. These columns identify where the EPM is proposed to be applied 

by the Companies based on ownership. In addition the Companies propose to 

apply the EPMs more broadly for certain segments based on land pattern 

characteristics. The Wyoming segments of the proposed Project cross a 

relatively large percentage of Federal land, and private lands tend to be unsigned 

and isolated sections of land in a checkerboard pattern. In Idaho, the proposed 

Project for Segments 6, 8, and 9 is largely on Federal land, with private and state 

land interspersed. Therefore, in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8, and 9, the 

EPMs will be applied to the entire segment (i.e., including the private and state 

land) except as follows:

o Proposed substation and regeneration sites located on private land unless 

they are standard EPMs of the Companies; 

o EPMs that are only applicable to a specific BLM Field Office;

o EPMs that are only applicable to National Forest System lands; and 

o Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request 

of the property owner and don’t violate the law. 

In Idaho, Segments 4, 5, 7 and 10 are predominantly private ownership in 

agriculture and other development, and for the most part, the Federal land in 

these segments is clustered. In these segments, EPMs will be applied based on 

ownership as identified in Table Z-1 below except as follows:

o Proposed transmission line substation and regeneration sites located on 

private land unless they are standard EPMs of the Companies; and 

o Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request 

of the property owner and don’t violate the law.
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-3

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 

G-1 G-1 Resource Management Plan (as amended) design criteria, Best Management Practices 

(BMPs), and mitigation requirements will apply on BLM-managed lands. • • • •

G-2 G-2

Forest Plan Standards and Guidelines (as amended) will apply on National Forest 

System (NFS) lands. Ground-disturbing and vegetation management activities will 

comply with all Agency-wide, regional, and state BMPs.

• • • •

– G-3

Third-party Environmental Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC) Monitors approved 

by the Agencies will monitor construction activities. Monitoring activities will be structured 

in accordance with the Environmental Compliance Management Plan included as 

Appendix C of the Plan of Development.

• •

– G-4

All wildlife and plant surveys/pre-construction surveys will be considered as “casual use” 

activities and will not be restricted or prevented to occur due to overlapping season and 

temporal restrictions.

• •

OM-1 OM-1 The Proponents will comply with the road maintenance standards of the federal or state 

agency controlling the land. • • • • •

OM-2 OM-2

Roads will be maintained to have crossroad drainage in order to minimize the amount of 

channeling or ditches needed. Water bars will be installed at all alignment changes 

(curves), significant grade changes, and as requested by the federal or state agency. 

• • • •

OM-3 OM-3

All access road drainage structures, constructed and installed for Proponent use only, 

will be maintained or repaired by the Proponents during O&M activities or emergency 

response.

• • • •

OM-4 OM-4

Although routine and corrective O&M is of limited duration and impact, the Proponents 

will attempt to adhere to specific closure periods and areas and are proposing not to 

conduct any routine and corrective O&M activities during the timeframes and at the 

locations identified in Table R-1 in Appendix R of the Plan of Development to the 

greatest extent practical. The appropriate federal or state agency will notify the 

Proponents of any spatial or temporal restrictions that are in effect for the Project area 

(e.g., fire restrictions). 

• • • •

OM-5 OM-5 Existing improvements (fences, gates, etc.) will be repaired or replaced if they are 

damaged by O&M activities, as agreed to by the parties involved. • • • •

OM-6 OM-6 The Agencies may restrict general public access to closed federal or state roads and • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-4

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

access roads that the Proponents maintain (Proponents will maintain access roads 

constructed for Proponent use only). In cases of restricted access, the Proponents will 

physically close the road with a gate. Gates will be locked with both a lock supplied by 

the Proponents and with a federal agency lock. This access management plan will be 

updated as necessary to reflect current road closures and gate locations. 

OM-8 OM-7

Any integrated vegetation management (IVM) control method, including those listed on 

pages 9 and 10 in Appendix R of the Plan of Development, may be used to control the 

growth of trees and tall shrubs to maintain clearances, the IVM recommended wire and 

border zones as indicated in Table R-2 [page 10 in Appendix R of the Plan of 

Development] and improve access to facilities.

• • • •

OM-9 OM-8

Any IVM control method including those listed on pages 9 and 10 in Appendix R of the 

Plan of Development may be used to control the growth of additional vegetation to 

maintain clearances, the IVM recommended wire and border zones as indicated in Table 

R-2 [page 10 in Appendix R-1], and improve access to facilities.

• • • •

OM-10 OM-9

Where possible, low-growing vegetation and small tree species within the ROW that will not 

grow into the minimum required clearance distance will be left in place; trees may be removed 

on a subsequent maintenance cycle as they increase in size. Hazard trees are typically those 

trees or snags within or adjacent to the ROW that are likely to interfere with or fall into 

transmission lines or associated facilities. Hazard trees and other “hot spots” (high priority areas 

requiring vegetation management actions) are identified during routine line inspections and 

removed annually. In addition to hazard trees, other critical conditions that may require 

immediate attention include trees that interfere with transmission conductors and trees whose 

growth will not allow safe clearance until the next scheduled maintenance cycle.

• • • •

OM-11 OM-10

Any control method may be used for vegetation maintenance on access roads; this is 

typically scheduled at the same time as vegetation maintenance within the ROW. 

However, in cases where vegetation grows quickly, removal may occur annually. 

Vegetation that will not interfere with the safe operation of vehicles and equipment will be 

left in place.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-5

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

OM-12 OM-11

Slash will be lopped and scattered throughout the surrounding land. Stumps resulting 

from vegetation treatments will not be over 1 foot tall (unless the tree is not able to be 

safely cut at or below one foot from the ground surface), and lopped slash will be left as 

close to the ground as possible. Lopped slash will be a maximum of 18 inches in length 

for small trees and limb wood. If the federal land managing agency determines that fuel 

levels are unacceptable, they shall notify the Proponents and develop a mutually agreed 

upon method to reduce fuels. This may include, but is not limited to, chipping.

• • • •

OM-13 OM-12

Hazard trees will be felled in a direction away from the ROW. Slash and limbs that fall 

within the ROW will be treated as described above; boles of trees greater than 8 inches 

will be left in place.

• • • •

OM-14 OM-13

Any chemical control will be done in accordance with any applicable local, state, and federal 

rules and regulations. Herbicides or other chemical control will be selected from the BLM and 

Forest Service’s list of previously approved herbicides and in accordance with any herbicide 

plans. If the federal land managing agency determines that a previously approved herbicide 

and/or plan is unacceptable, they shall notify the Proponents.

• • • •

OM-16 OM-14

Before beginning an O&M project on federal or state land, the Proponents or their 

subcontractors will clean all equipment that will operate off-road or disturb the ground. 

Tracks, skid plates, and other parts that can trap soil and debris will be removed for 

cleaning when feasible, and the entire vehicle and equipment will be cleaned at an offsite location. 

• • • •

OM-17 OM-15

To help limit the spread and establishment of noxious weed species in disturbed areas, desired 

vegetation needs to be established promptly after disturbance. The Proponents will rehabilitate 

significantly disturbed areas as soon as possible after ground-disturbing activities and during the 

optimal period. Seed and mulch will be certified “noxious weed free” and seed mix will be 

agreed to in advance by the landowner or land managing agency. 

• • • •

OM-18 OM-16

Routine and corrective O&M activities in streams with sensitive fish species will occur 

from July 1 to September 1 in an effort to minimize impact to spawning and migration 

activities. These activities include, but are not limited to, culvert installation and or 

replacement, stream bank stabilization. Fording streams at existing crossings on existing 

roads (e.g., dip, culvert, bridge) will occur as necessary throughout the year. 

• • • •

OM-19 OM-17 Woody vegetation management within 50 feet of streams will be conducted by hand 

crews. • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-6

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

OM-20 OM-18

Herbaceous plants and low-growing shrubs will be left in place if they do not interfere 

with the safe O&M of Project lines and equipment as described in Table R-2 in Appendix 

R of the Plan of Development. 

• • • •

OM-21 OM-19

The Proponents will use existing stream crossings or new, permanent crossings that 

were approved as part of the Project, and will not create additional crossings without 

prior agency permitting and approval. 

• • • •

OM-22 OM-20

Only herbicides approved by the land managing agency as safe to use in aquatic 

environments and reviewed by the Proponents for effectiveness will be used within 100 

feet of sensitive aquatic resources. 

• •

OM-23 OM-21

Prior to the start of O&M activities, all supervisory personnel will be instructed on the 

protection of natural resources, including sensitive plant and wildlife species and 

habitats. If a contractor is used, the construction contract will address (a) the sensitive 

plant species that may be present in a particular area based on previous surveys and 

literature review; (b) the federal and state laws regarding protection of plants and wildlife; 

(c) the importance of these resources; (d) the purpose and necessity of protecting them; 

and (e) methods for protecting sensitive resources (e.g., Endangered Species Act, 

Migratory Bird Treaty Act, Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act, and BLM wildlife 

policy).

• • • •

OM-24 OM-22

Sensitive plant populations that occur within or near the ROW and work areas will be 

marked on the ground, where practical, to ensure that they are avoided. If species are 

discovered during the work, the Proponents will establish a spatial buffer zone, will 

contact the appropriate Agency within 24 hours, and will continue with the O&M activities 

outside of the established buffer unless otherwise directed. The Agency may evaluate 

the adequacy of the buffer on a case-by-case basis. Unless the Proponents are informed 

otherwise, work outside of the buffer area will continue. If the Proponents need to work 

within the buffer area, the Agencies and Proponents will work together to develop a 

solution that is acceptable to both parties and will allow for the Proponents to complete 

the work in a timely manner or within the scheduled outage window, if applicable. After 

the project is complete or no longer poses a threat to the plant population, the marking 

(stakes), if used, will be promptly removed to protect the site’s significance and location 

from unwanted attention. As needed, marking will be reinstated during the land 

rehabilitation period.

• •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-7

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

OM-25 OM-23

If sensitive wildlife species are discovered during O&M activities, and the animals are not 

directly within ground disturbance areas, they will be protected by marking the edges of 

the ROW and new access roads in the general vicinity to ensure that workers do not 

leave those areas. If the animals are within work areas that have, or will have, ground 

disturbance, the Proponents will establish an appropriate buffer zone and will contact the 

federal or state land manager immediately. The federal or state agency may evaluate the 

adequacy of the buffer on a case by case basis. Unless the Proponents are informed 

otherwise, work outside of the buffer area will continue. If the Proponents need to work 

within the buffer area, the Agencies and Proponents will work together to develop a 

solution that is acceptable to both parties and will allow for the Proponents to complete 

the work in a timely manner or within the scheduled outage window, if applicable. After 

the O&M activities are completed, or no longer pose a threat to the species, the marking 

(stakes) will promptly be removed to protect the site’s significance and location from 

unwanted attention. As needed, marking will be reinstated during the land rehabilitation 

period.

• • • •

OM-28 OM-24

The Proponents will provide crews and contractors with maps showing avoidance areas; 

these maps will include work zones as well as ROW areas where overland travel will be 

avoided.

• • • •

OM-29 OM-25

In the event any sensitive plants require relocation, permission will be obtained from the 

federal agency. If avoidance or relocation is not practical, the topsoil surrounding the 

plants will be salvaged, stored separately from subsoil, and respread during the 

restoration process.

• •

OM-30 OM-26 If sensitive wildlife species are killed or injured due to O&M activities, the appropriate 

federal agency will be notified. • •

OM-31 OM-27 All on-site personnel will be made aware that all birds of prey are protected by federal 

and state laws. • • • •

VISUAL

VR-1 VIS-1

The 500-kV transmission line lattice steel towers will be specified to have a dull 

galvanized finish. The proposed surface finish is a galvanized finish, treated after the 

initial galvanizing process to produce a dulled finish to reduce surface reflectivity. This 

process results in an installed tower with more visual absorption and thus allows the 

towers to blend in better with the landscape.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-8

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

VR-2 VIS-2

The three subconductor (500-kV) and two subconductor (230-kV) that make up the conductor 

bundles would be specified to have a non–specular finish. Similar to the dulled finish of the 

transmission structures, the conductors reduce surface reflectivity. This process results in 

eliminating the shiny ribbon effect often seen in older untreated transmission lines and thus 

allows the conductors to blend in better with the landscape.

• • • •

VR-3 VIS-3

The proposed 230-kV transmission lines between Windstar and Aeolus would use a steel 

H-frame structure configuration similar to the existing 230-kV in the same general 

location. The steel pole H-frame would utilize self-weathering steel. Self-weathering steel 

is manufactured from a group of steel alloys that were developed to eliminate the need for 

painting. This type of steel alloy forms a stable rust-like appearance if exposed to the 

weather for several years. In areas where the 230-kV structures are skylined, dull 

galvanized steel will be considered to minimize visual impacts. Dulled galvanized steel has 

a galvanized finish, treated after the initial galvanizing process to produce a dulled finish to 

reduce surface reflectivity. This process results in an installed tower with more visual 

absorption and thus allows the towers to blend in better with the terrain, while at the 

same time preserving the corrosion resistant properties of the galvanized coating on the 

steel.

• • • •

VIS-1 VIS-4

No paint or permanent discoloring agents would be applied to rocks or vegetation to 

indicate limits of survey or construction activity except as required under the timber sale 

contracts.

• • • •

VIS-2 VIS-5

To minimize ground disturbance and/or reduce scarring (visual contrast) of the 

landscape, the alignment of any new access roads or cross-country routes will follow the 

landform contours where practicable, providing that such alignment does not impact 

resource values additionally or result in new impacts to resources that were previously 

avoided.

• • • • •

VIS-3 VIS-6

To minimize sensitive feature disturbance and/or visual contrast in designated areas on 

federal lands, structures will be placed so as to avoid sensitive features such as, but not 

limited to, riparian areas, water courses and cultural sites and/or to allow conductors to 

clearly span the features, within the limits of standard tower design. Where conflicts arise 

between resources, the applicable land manager will be consulted.

• • •

VIS-4 VIS-7 To reduce visual impacts on federal land, including potential impacts on recreation 

values and safety, towers will be placed at the maximum feasible distance from the • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-9

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

highway, canyon and trail crossings within limits of standard design and to the extent 

practical.

VIS-5 VIS-8

Crossings of rivers shall be at approximately right angles where practical. Strategic 

placement of structures will be done both as a means to screen views of the 

transmission line and rights-of-way and to minimize the need for vegetative clearing.

• • • • •

VIS-6 VIS-9

Insulators will be made of materials that have reduced potential to reflect and refract 

light. Glass insulators that are highly reflective will not be permitted in scenic areas on 

federally managed lands. . 

• • •

VIS-7 VIS-10

For segments of the line 1) within the 0- to 0.5-mile zone of Interstate highways where 

existing lines of the same voltage are paralleled and 2) within the 0- to 0.5-mile zone of 

residences where existing lines of the same voltage are paralleled, new towers will be 

located adjacent to existing towers, within the limits of standard transmission line design 

and considering the ruling span length of adjacent proposed and existing lines.

• • • • •

VIS-8 VIS-11

Site-specific “micrositing,” within the limits of standard engineering design, will be 

required near certain sensitive areas, as identified by the agencies, where proposed 

transmission facilities would impact visual quality; these situations include:

• Crossings over major highways;

• Crossings of high quality historic trails;

• Crossings over the North Platte and Snake Rivers;

• Sensitive travelways, use areas, residential areas, recreational facilities as identified 

by the agencies (including national recreation and scenic trails, campgrounds, 

recreation areas, and trailheads), and other areas identified by management plans; 

and

• To avoid bisecting forest patches within the Sawtooth NF.

The Proponents will consult with the applicable local land management agency during 

transmission line design.

• • •

VIS-11 VIS-12

The lighting specified for the marshaling yards will be the minimum required to meet 

safety and security standards. All light fixtures within 1,000 feet of a residence will be 

hooded to eliminate any potential for glare and to prevent light from spilling off the site or 

up into the sky. Additionally, the fixtures will have sensors and switches to permit the 

lighting to be turned off at times when it is not required.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-10

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

VIS-13 VIS-13

To reduce visual contrast in areas where overstory vegetation is removed for access,

tower pads, or conductor clearance, specific sections of the right-of-way on federal land 

will have uneven edges (trees will be removed from the edge of the right-of-way out or 

away from the right-of-way boundary) to give a natural appearance, where not in conflict 

with regulatory requirements (e.g., NERC, WECC, and Occupational Safety and Health 

Administration requirements). This will be a onetime application and conducted with 

agency approval.

• • • •

VIS-15 VIS-14

To mitigate potential visual impacts on federal land, the construction and maintenance plan to 

be developed by the Proponents will include measures to reduce ROW scarring and enhance 

restoration. The plan will be approved by the land management agency prior to ground clearing 

and construction.

• • •

CULTURAL

CUL-1 CR-1 All work conducted in accordance with the Historic Properties and Trails Plan (HPTP) will 

be performed by qualified paleontologists and archeologists with trained assistants. • • • •

CUL-2 CR-2

An Unanticipated Discovery Plan will be included as part of the HPTP. This plan will 

specify what steps will be taken if a subsurface cultural resource or fossil is discovered 

during construction, including stopping construction in the vicinity of the find, notification 

of the appropriate land management agency, identification of a qualified archaeologist or 

paleontologist to conduct an evaluation of the find, and the development of an approved 

data recovery program or other mitigation measures.

• • • •

CUL-3 CR-3

The Cultural Resource and Paleontological Monitoring and Mitigation Plan will include 

provisions for the preparation and curation of any fossil collections from federal lands and for 

the preparation of a final report based on the data recovered for activities on federal lands.

• •

CUL-4 CR-4

Literature reviews and Class III surveys will be completed for cultural resources. A 

literature review will be conducted on public and private lands and will cover a study area 

of one-half mile on either side of the proposed and alternate transmission line alignments 

as well as areas identified for use as staging areas and access roads. Class III surveys 

covering a 500-foot-wide area centered on the transmission line will be conducted on 

100 percent of federal and state lands, and for those private lands for which survey 

access is granted, prior to the completion of the NEPA process. A good-faith effort will 

be made to obtain survey permission prior to the completion of the NEPA process.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-11

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

CUL-5 CR-5

If construction will adversely affects any properties listed on, or eligible for listing on, the NRHP, 

mitigation will be required. Mitigation will be in accordance with the HPTP and may include, but 

not be limited to, one or more of the following measures: a) avoidance through the use of 

relocation of structures through the design process, realignment of the route, relocation of 

temporary workspace, or changes in the construction and/or operational design; b) data 

recovery, which may include the systematic professional excavation of an archaeological site or 

the preparation of photographic and/or measured drawings documenting standing structures; 

and c) the use of landscaping or other techniques that will minimize or eliminate effects on the 

historic setting or ambience of standing structures.

• • • •

CUL-6 CR-6 Avoidance areas will be flagged prior to construction activities. Flagging will be removed 

once construction is completed in an area. • • • •

CUL-7 CR-7

To minimize unauthorized collecting of archaeological material or vandalism to known 

archaeological sites, all workers will attend mandatory training on the significance of 

cultural resources and the relevant federal regulations intended to protect them. 

• • • •

CUL-8 CR-8 If human remains are discovered, construction will be halted and the coroner will be notified and 

measures specified in the HPTP will be followed. • • • •

CR-5 CR-9

On NFS lands, a management plan should be developed for each historic property 

nominated to the NRHP. The plan should be drafted during the nomination process. The 

National Heritage Strategy should be used to guide decisions on issues related to the 

Heritage Program.

• • •

RECLAMATION

REC-1 REC-1

Proponent personnel and their contractors will be trained on noxious and invasive weed 

identification to facilitate avoidance of infestations where possible or identification of new 

infestations. 

• • • •

REC-2 REC-2 Pre-construction weed treatment would be conducted prior to the start of grounddisturbing activities and at the time most appropriate for the target species. • • • •

REC-3 REC-3

Pre-construction weed treatment would be limited to the areas that are expected to have 

surface-disturbing activities. The final Reclamation Plan will include a schedule showing the 

phased in-service dates for different segments. Pre-construction weed treatment will be 

scheduled accordingly.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-12

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

REC-4 REC-4 Pre-construction treatment may use mechanical control, hand spraying, grazing, or 

herbicides. The final Reclamation Plan will discuss those options, as applicable. • • • •

REC-5 REC-5

All herbicide applications would comply with label restrictions, federal, state and/or county 

regulation, the Proponents’ specifications and landowner agreements. No spraying would 

occur prior to notification of the applicable land management agency. On federal or state 

controlled lands, a herbicide use plan will be submitted prior to any herbicide application as 

recommended in the BLM herbicide EIS 

(http://www.blm.gov/wo/st/en/prog/more/veg_eis.html). The herbicide use plan will include 

the dates and locations of application, target species, herbicide, adjuvants, and application 

rates and methods (e.g., spot spray vs. boom spray). No herbicide would be applied to any 

private property without written approval of the landowner. The final Reclamation Plan will 

contain a list of herbicides that may be used, target species, best time for application, 

application rates, and if they are approved for use on BLM-managed and NFS lands. 

• • • •

REC-6 REC-6

Herbicides may be applied using a broadcast applicator mounted on a truck or all-terrain 

vehicle (ATV), backpack sprayers, or with hand sprayers as conditions dictate. Herbicide 

applications would be conducted only by licensed operators or under the supervision of a 

licensed operator. Where allowed, a broadcast applicator would likely be used. In areas 

where noxious weeds are more isolated and interspersed with desirable vegetation, 

noxious and invasive weeds would be targeted, thereby avoiding other plants. Preconstruction herbicide applications would not occur adjacent to known special status 

species or near water bodies.

• • • •

REC-7 REC-7 All areas treated would be documented using GPS technologies and included in the 

annual report. • • • •

REC-8 REC-8 Areas of existing noxious weeds and invasive species will be avoided where possible. • • • • •

REC-9 REC-9 Project vehicles will arrive at the job site clean of all soil and herbaceous material. • • • • •

REC-10 REC-10

When the contractors demobilize from the job site where identified infestations of noxious 

weeds are present, they will use appropriate decontamination measures as defined in 

the final Reclamation Plan.

• • • • •

REC-11 REC-11

Soil stockpiles from areas that did not have noxious weeds or invasive species present, 

will not be placed adjacent to populations of noxious weeds or invasive species, where 

practicable. 

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures 

 January 2013 

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT 

1 2 3 4-6 

DEIS 

Number 

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures 

Application 

Phase 

Design and 

Engineering 

Construction 

Operations and 

Maintenance 

REC-12 REC-12 

Areas disturbed by Project activities are susceptible to the establishment and spread of noxious weeds. Erosion control measures identified in the SWPPP(s) would also assist 

in preventing the establishment of weeds on exposed soils. 

 

REC-13 REC-13 

Project-related storage and staging yards, fly yards, and other areas that are subject to 

regular long-term disturbance will be kept weed-free through regular site inspections and herbicide applications, subject to the consent of the land owner. 

 

REC-14 REC-14 

Where pre-construction surveys have identified noxious or invasive weed species infestations, topsoil and other soils will be placed next to the infested area and clearly identified as coming from an infested area. Topsoil would be returned to the area it was taken from and will not be spread in adjacent areas. If the topsoil is not suitable for 

backfill, then it will be spread in another previously disturbed area and clearly identified for future weed treatments as applicable. 

 

REC-15 REC-15 

Straw or hay that may be used as a BMP to control erosion and sedimentation must be certified weed free. If certified weed-free materials are not available, then alternative BMPs will be used. 

The use of alternative BMPs will be coordinated with the construction storm water inspector. 

 

REC-16 REC-16 The topsoil layer will be removed, taking care not to mix it with the underlying sub-soil. Where topsoil separation is employed, topsoil will be stored in a separate stockpile.  REC-17 REC-17 

Certified weed-free straw, mulch, gravel, and other BMPs as appropriate, will be used as described in the SWPPP to stabilize the stockpile and limit erosion and standing water, control dust, and control the establishment of noxious or invasive weeds in stockpiled soils. 

 

REC-18 REC-18 Topsoil and sub-surface soils will be replaced in the proper order during reclamation. REC-19 REC-19 

Where it is necessary to spread soils (subsurface soils or waste rock resulting from excavations or foundation drilling), it will be done where practicable and in close proximity to where the disturbance occurred (within the ROW). Material will be spread uniformly to match existing contours and covered with topsoil when available and reseeded. 

 
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-14

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

REC-20 REC-20

Temporarily disturbed lands within the ROW will be re-contoured to blend with the surrounding 

landscape. Re-contouring will emphasize restoration of the existing drainage patterns and 

landform to pre-construction conditions, to the extent practicable. (Tower pads would not be 

recontoured.)

• • • •

REC-21 REC-21

De-compaction: Areas within the ROW, laydown or staging yards, and other areas of 

extensive vehicle travel will typically contain compacted soils. These soils will be decompacted on a case-by-case basis through negotiation with the landowner or land 

management agency. 

• • • •

REC-22 REC-22

Final Cleanup: Final cleanup will ensure that all construction areas are free of any 

construction debris including but not limited to: assembly scrap metals, oil or other 

petroleum-based liquids, construction wood debris, and worker-generated litter. 

Permanent erosion control devices will be left in place.

• • • •

REC-23 REC-23

The Proponents will utilize soil amendments (e.g., fertilizer, wood or straw mulches, 

tackifying agents, or soil stabilizing emulsions) on a case-by-case basis and with 

landowner or land management agency approval. Specific soil amendments will be 

identified in the final Reclamation Plan and be consistent with the SWPPP. 

• • • •

REC-24 REC-24

Broadcast seeding will apply the seed directly on the ground surface. The type of 

broadcast spreader will depend on the size of the area to be seeded, and the terrain. 

Seed will be placed in direct contact with the soil, ideally at a depth of approximately 0.5 

to 1-inch deep. It will then be covered by raking or dragging a chain or harrow over the 

seed bed; to remove air pockets. 

• • • •

REC-25 REC-25

Drill seeding would be used on areas of sufficient size with moderate or favorable terrain 

to accommodate mechanical equipment. Drill seeding provides the advantage of 

planting the seed at a uniform depth. 

• • • •

REC-26 REC-26

Hydroseeding, which is the spraying of seeds and water onto the ground surface, or 

hydroseeding/hydromulching, which is the spraying of seeds, mulch and water, may be 

implemented on steeper slopes. Tackifier may be added to facilitate adherence of 

hydromulch to slopes greater than 25 percent.

• • • •

VEGETATION

REC-2–17, 

23–26

REC-2–17, 

23–26 (Described under Reclamation)
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-15

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

VEG-2 VEG-1

During construction, blading of native plant communities should be minimized, consistent 

with safe construction practices. Where feasible, shrubs should be cut at or near ground 

level to facilitate re-growth after construction. The footprint of construction and operations 

facilities should be kept to the minimum necessary.

• • • •

VEG-3 VEG-2

Where feasible, locate new access roads to minimize the number of trees removed 

during construction . However, new access roads will not be relocated if the change 

would result in an increase in the overall disturbance (acres); require additional cut and 

fill activities, or impact other sensitive resources (e.g., sagebrush plant community, 

sensitive species habitat, and/or cultural resources or viewshed). 

• •

VEG-4 VEG-3

In areas where revegetation would be completed, topsoil salvage and replacement 

should be used for all areas of cut or fill areas and for areas larger than 1 acre where 

soils would be disturbed during construction.

• • • •

VEG-8 VEG-4

Prior to the start of construction and maintenance activities, all contractor vehicles and 

equipment (including personal protective equipment) will be cleaned of soil and debris 

capable of transporting invasive plant seeds or other propagates. All vehicles and

equipment will be inspected by Agency-approved inspectors and certified as weed free 

by agency approved personnel, in order to ensure they have been cleaned properly. The 

final Reclamation and Noxious Weed Plans will include the location of all cleaning 

stations, how materials cleaned from vehicles at these stations will be either captured or 

treated so that cleaning station locations would not also become infected, and who would 

confirm/certify that vehicles leaving cleaning stations and/or entering construction sites 

are free of invasive plant materials.

• • • •

VEG-9 VEG-5

The Agency-approved Environmental Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC) will 

approve weed-free straw or other erosion control materials on federally managed lands 

prior to application.

• •

VEG-10 VEG-6

The Proponents will consult with the appropriate land management agency to 

determine tree seedlings to be planted in decommissioned roadbeds and other 

temporarily disturbed areas on federally managed lands (where trees were removed) to 

assure seedlings are matched to site conditions.

• •

VEG-11 VEG-7 The Proponents will notify the Forest Service when topsoil salvage operations are 

scheduled and seek assistance with field identification of top soil material. • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-16

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

VEG-12 VEG-8

Annual post-construction monitoring and treatment of invasive plants on closed roads 

(access roads dedicated for use by Proponents only), temporary roads, fly yards, and 

other disturbed areas in the ROW shall continue for 3 years in areas where infestations 

or populations of noxious weeds have been identified. If after 3 years post-construction 

conditions are not equivalent to or better than pre-construction conditions (in accordance 

with applicable permit), monitoring and treatment will continue until these conditions are 

met. If adjacent land uses are contributing to the introduction and/or persistence of 

invasive plant species within areas disturbed by the project, then Proponents will not be 

required to treat noxious weeds for more than three years.

• •

VEG-13 VEG-9

The Proponents will meet the terms and stipulations within the timber sale contracts for 

timber removal operations on the Medicine Bow-Routt, Caribou-Targhee, and Sawtooth 

NFs.

• •

TES-PLANTS

OM-23–24 

and 28–29

OM-21–22 and 

24–25

(Described under Operations and Maintenance.)

PPC-1 TESPL-1

Blowout Penstemon – Surface disturbance will be allowed in suitable habitat where 

species-specific surveys have determined that no populations are present. The speciesspecific surveys will be conducted the year prior to construction, and the proposed 

disturbance areas will be redesigned to avoid direct impact to populations. 

• •

PPC-2 TESPL-2 

Colorado Butterfly Plant – Surface disturbance will be allowed in suitable habitat where speciesspecific surveys have determined that no populations are present. The species-specific surveys 

will be conducted the year prior to construction, and the proposed disturbance areas will be 

redesigned to avoid direct impact to populations. 

• •

TESPL-3 TESPL-3

Qualified botanists shall conduct pre-construction surveys during a season when target species 

are readily identifiable for special status or globally rare species. Where feasible, micrositing of 

project facilities shall avoid direct impacts to identified populations. Survey reports documenting 

the surveys, their results, and recommendations must be provided to land management agency 

for approval prior to construction. Agency botanists may evaluate individual sites based on sitespecific conditions. Documentation of the evaluation of avoidance of impacts to sensitive and 

globally rare plants must be provided to the Agencies prior to construction.

• •

TESPL-4 TESPL-4 Slickspot Peppergrass – Environmental monitors will survey for and mark slickspots and • • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-17

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

aboveground populations of slickspot peppergrass within 50 feet of the construction area prior to 

ground disturbance (including roads) in potential or occupied slickspot peppergrass habitat. No 

construction shall occur within 50 feet of any slickspot peppergrass plants or slickspots found by 

the environmental monitor. Also, construction shall not occur within 50 feet of previously known 

occupied slickspot peppergrass areas, based on Idaho CDC data, even if aboveground plants 

are not observed by the environmental monitor. Within proposed critical habitat, impacts to 

Primary Constituent Elements, such as native sagebrush/forb vegetation, will be avoided to the 

extent practicable. Seeding during reclamation in areas of suitable habitat will use methods that 

minimize soil disturbance such as no-till drills or rangeland drills with depth bands. Reclamation 

will use certified weed-free native seed. Excess soils will not be stored or spread on slickspots.

TESPL-6 TESPL-5 Sand dune and cushion plant communities should be avoided, where feasible. • • •

TESPL-1 TESPL-6

Goose Creek Milkvetch – Surface disturbance will be allowed in suitable habitat for Goose 

Creek milkvetch where species-specific surveys have determined that no populations are 

present. The species-specific surveys will be conducted the year prior to construction, and the 

proposed disturbance areas will be redesigned to avoid direct impacts to populations.

• • •

TESPL-3 TESPL-7

Ute Ladies’-tresses – Qualified botanists shall conduct pre-construction surveys during a 

season when target species are readily identifiable for special status or globally rare 

species. Where feasible, micrositing of project facilities shall avoid direct impacts to 

identified populations. Survey reports documenting the surveys, their results, and 

recommendations must be provided to land management agency for approval prior to 

construction. Agency botanists may evaluate individual sites based on site-specific 

conditions. Documentation of the evaluation of avoidance of impacts to sensitive and 

globally rare plants must be provided to the Agencies prior to construction.

• • • •

WEEDS 

REC-1–15 REC-2–15 (Described under Reclamation)

OM-14, 

16–17, 22

OM-13, 14–15, 

20

(Described under Operations and Maintenance) 
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-18

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

WEED-1 WEED-1

The Proponents shall consult with each appropriate local land management agency (Forest 

Service and BLM) office to determine appropriate seed mix and commercial seed source for 

revegetation. The Reclamation, Revegetation, and Weed Management Plan shall specify the 

approved seed mixes for federal lands. Disturbed soil will not be allowed to support the growth 

of noxious weeds or invasive weedy species. Prevention of noxious weeds will apply to all 

phases of the Project.

• • • •

WEED-2 WEED-2

Weed control and prevention measures shall adhere to all agency standards and 

guidelines. These measures shall be developed in consultation with local, state, and 

federal weed agencies; all implemented measures would follow the principle of 

integrated weed management. 

• • • •

WEED-6 WEED-3

Soil stockpiles in areas containing noxious weeds and invasive plant species shall be 

kept separate from soil removed from areas that are free of noxious weed and invasive

plant species, and the soil will be replaced in or near the original excavation. If requested 

by the applicable land-management agency, soil stockpiles shall be covered with plastic 

if the soil stockpile will be in place for two weeks or more and is not being actively used. 

On lands managed by the Forest Service or per private landowner request, stockpiles 

will not be covered with plastic.

• •

WETLANDS

REC-1–22 REC-1–22 (Described under Reclamation) 

SW-1, 4–5 WQA-1, 4–5 (Described under Water Quality)

SW-6 WQA-6 (Described under Water Quality)

SW-7–12 WQA-13–18 (Described under Water Quality)

WET-1 WET-1

Impacts on wetland and riparian areas will be avoided unless physically or economically 

infeasible or where activities are permitted. Land management agencies’ plans (RMPs, 

MFPs, and Forest Plans) that have standards, guidelines, stipulations, or avoidance 

buffers will be adhered to. Where these do not exist, Inland Fish Strategy (INFISH) 

buffers will be followed, 

• •

WET-2 WET-2

Wetland delineations will be performed prior to construction to support CWA Section 404 

permitting and to minimize Project impacts. The delineation will identify both wetland and 

non-wetland waters of the United States that would be affected by the Project.

• • • •

WET-3 WET-3 Where impacts on wetlands are not avoidable, site-specific crossing plans and measures • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-19

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

to mitigate impacts will be submitted to the appropriate regulatory agency, as well as the 

land managing agency. The Proponents will obtain all necessary permits prior to 

discharging dredged or fill material to waters of the U.S. and state.

WET-4 WET-4

To meet USACE requirements for CWA 404 permitting, the Proponents will submit a 

mitigation plan that is accepted by the USACE. The framework for this plan is included in 

the Final EIS. 

• • • •

FISH

OM-18 OM-16 (Described under Operation and Maintenance)

BLA-2 BLA-2 (Described under Public Safety)

FISH-1 FISH-1

On BLM-administered land, all culverts, whether temporary or permanent, must be 

designed to meet BLM Gold Book standards (Surface Operating Standards and 

Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration Development). On NFS lands, Forest Plan 

standards and guidelines shall apply.

• •

FISH-3 FISH-2

When taking water from TES fish-bearing streams for road and facility construction and 

maintenance activities, intake hoses shall be screened with the most appropriate mesh 

size (generally 3/32 of an inch), or as determined through coordination with NMFS and/or 

USFWS.

• • • • •

FISH-4 FISH-3

All wetlands and waters in the project area are assumed to contain aquatic invasive 

species and all equipment contacting water will be properly disinfected. After work is 

complete in a waterbody, any equipment involved in construction in that waterbody must 

be washed to remove any propagules of aquatic invasive species and to prevent the 

spread of those species to other waterbodies.

• • • •

WILDLIFE

WILD-1 WILD-1

Requests for exceptions from closure periods and areas will be submitted by the 

Proponents to the appropriate BLM Field Office in which the exception is requested 

through the Environmental Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC). Established 

exception processes on BLM-managed lands will be followed. The agency, the CIC, or a 

contractor chosen by the Proponents and approved by the agency will conduct any 

surveys and coordinate with any other agencies as necessary. Factors considered in 

granting the exception include animal conditions, climate and weather conditions, habitat 

conditions and availability, spatial considerations (e.g., travel routes and landscape 

• • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-20

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

connectivity), breeding activity levels, incubation or nestling stage, and timing, intensity, 

and duration of the Proposed action. Requests will be submitted in writing no more than 

2 weeks prior to the proposed commencement of the construction period, to ensure that 

conditions during construction are consistent with those evaluated. The authorized 

officer, on a case-by-case basis, may grant exceptions to seasonal stipulations, and has 

the authority to cancel this exception at any time. A good faith effort will be made to act 

on exceptions within 5 business days of receiving a request to allow for orderly` 

construction mobilization. The CIC will conduct any required site visit and report the 

status to BLM for consideration of the decision to accept or deny the request. There is 

no exception process for NFS lands; all closure periods will be adhered to. Any 

proposed modifications to closure periods will be discussed on a case-by-case basis with 

the Forest Service.

WILD-2 WILD-2

Vehicular speeds during construction and operations will be limited to 25 mph on all 

unsurfaced access roads. Crew and vehicle travel will be restricted to designated routes 

while on federally designated big game winter range (except for areas within the ROW).

• • •

WILD-3 WILD-3

The Project will be designed and constructed in compliance with Avian Power Line 

Interaction Committee (APLIC) standards (APLIC 2006, 2012) in order to reduce impacts 

to avian species. Any changes to the Project’s design, as requested by federal, state, or 

local jurisdictions, as well as any changes considered by the Proponents, will also be in 

compliance with APLIC guidance.

• • • • • •

WILD-4 WILD-4

Pre-construction pedestrian or aerial nest surveys will be conducted in suitable habitat 

during the appropriate nesting time periods needed to identify new raptor nest locations, 

and to establish the status of previously identified raptor nests. Appropriate buffers will 

be applied to active nests during construction. All encounters of nesting raptors in the 

Analysis Area will be reported to the biological monitor and to appropriate agencies.

• •

WILD-5 WILD-5

Surveys will be conducted along the route across the Caribou-Targhee NF prior to 

construction for caves, abandoned mines, and adits. If suitable bat roosts are identified, 

the Proponents will consult with the Forest Service to determine appropriate protective 

measures.

• • •

WILD-7 WILD-6 Guy wires will be marked with bird deterrent devices on federal lands to avoid avian 

collisions with structures, as directed by local land manager. • • •

WILD-8 WILD-7 Flight diverters will be installed and maintained where the transmission line crosses • • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-21

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

rivers at the locations identified in Table 3.10-4. Additional locations may be identified by 

the Agencies or the Project Proponents. The flight diverters will be installed as directed in 

the Proponents’ approved Avian Protection Plans and in conformance with the MBTA 

and Eagle Acts as recommended in the current collision manual of the Avian Power Line 

Interaction Committee (APLIC).

WILD-9 WILD-8

Pre-construction pedestrian or aerial surveys will be completed during appropriate 

nesting time periods, needed to identify each raptor species. The Proponents will provide 

survey results to the authorized officer for approval. (See WILD-1)

• •

WILD-10 WILD-9

To the extent feasible, all vegetation clearing would be conducted prior to the onset of 

the avian breeding season (generally April 15 through July 31, depending on local 

conditions and federal land management plan requirements) in order to minimize impacts 

to migratory birds. Where this is not feasible, pre-construction surveys within the 

disturbance footprint shall be conducted within seven days prior to clearing. If an active 

nest (containing eggs or young) of a bird species protected under the MBTA is found 

during either pre-construction surveys or construction activities, the nest will be identified 

to species, inconspicuously marked, and left in place until any young have fledged before 

the vegetation is removed.

• • • •

WILD-11 WILD-10

Snags will be maintained to the extent practical and where it does not conflict with the 

Proponents vegetation management specifications along the outer portions of the 

Project’s ROW in order to reduce the impacts to habitat for cavity nesters.

• •

WILD-12 WILD-11

Any areas that may require blasting will be identified and a blasting plan will be submitted 

to the appropriate agency for approval. Blasting within 0.25 mile of a known sensitive 

wildlife resource will require review and approval by the appropriate agency. 

• •

TES-WILDLIFE

TESWL- 3 TESWL-1

H-frame structures will be equipped with anti-perch devices to reduce raven and raptor 

use, and limit predation opportunities on special status prey species on federally 

managed lands.

• • • •

TESWL-4 TESWL-2

In the event that an ESA-listed species not covered by the Biological Opinion (BO) is 

discovered during surveys, construction will cease, the USFWS will be notified, and Section 7 

consultation will be initiated. In addition, the transmission line or structures will be relocated to 

minimize direct impacts to newly discovered ESA species, to the extent practical. 

• • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-22

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

TESWL-5 TESWL-3

Black-footed Ferret – Pre-construction surveys will be conducted for the black-tailed 

prairie dog (in addition to those already proposed for the white-tailed prairie dog) in 

Segment 1W.

• • • • • •

TESWL-8 TESWL-4

The Environmental Construction Inspection Contractor (CIC), an agency biologist, or 

agency designee will accompany the Construction Contractor site engineers during the 

final engineering design or prior to ground-disturbing activities to verify and flag the 

location of any known occupied structures (e.g., nests, burrows, colonies) utilized by 

sensitive species. This will include, but not be limited to, artificial burrows that have been 

constructed as part of research/restoration efforts, prairie dog colonies, and raptor nests, 

which could be impacted by the Project based on the indicative engineering design. The 

final engineering design will be “microsited” (routed) to avoid direct impact to these 

occupied structures to the extent practical within engineering standards and constraints.

• •

TESWL-10 TESWL-5

Sharp-tailed Grouse – Proponents will provide the Agencies a list of the protocols that 

the Proponents will use during greater sage-grouse and sharp-tailed grouse preconstruction surveys. The Agencies will either approve these protocols, or suggest 

alternative protocols to be used.

• • • •

TESWL-11 TESWL-6

Sharp-tailed Grouse – In areas where sharp-tailed grouse leks occur in proximity to 

greater sage-grouse leks, surface disturbance will be avoided within 4 miles of occupied 

or undetermined greater sage-grouse leks from March 1 to July 15. In areas where 

sharp-tailed grouse leks occur in isolation from greater sage-grouse leks, surface 

disturbance will be avoided within 1.2 miles of occupied or undetermined sharp-tailed 

grouse leks from March 15 to July 15.

• • • •

TESWL-13 TESWL-7

Yellow-billed cuckoo - A pre-construction survey for the yellow-billed cuckoo will be 

conducted at any proposed crossing of suitable habitat. If these birds are detected within 

1 mile of the centerline (within existing habitat), construction will not occur until the young 

have fledged or the nest is abandoned. The crossing-specific plan will contain proposed 

monitoring measures to assure compliance with this measure. 

• • • •

TESWL-14 TESWL-8

Sage-Grouse – On federal lands, there will be no surface occupancy (NSO) within 0.6 

mile of the perimeter (or centroid if the perimeter has not been mapped) of occupied 

greater sage-grouse leks located within Core areas in Wyoming, and NSO within 0.25 

mile in non-Core areas (as required by BLM IM WY-2012-19 and BLM land management 

• • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-23

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

plans). “No surface occupancy,” as used here, means no new surface facilities, including 

roads, will be placed within the NSO area. Other activities (i.e., non-surface occupancy) 

may be authorized, with the application of appropriate seasonal stipulations, provided the 

resource’s protected area is not adversely affected.

TESWL-15 TESWL-9

Sage-Grouse – On federal lands, surface disturbance will be avoided within 4 miles of 

occupied or undetermined greater sage-grouse leks from March 1 to July 15. This 

distance (i.e., 4 miles) may be reduced on a case-by-case basis by the applicable 

agency, if site-specific conditions would allow the Project to be located closer to the lek 

than 4 miles (e.g., topography prevents the Project from being visible from the lek, or a 

major disturbance such as a freeway or existing transmission line is located between the 

Project and the lek).

• • •

TESWL-19 TESWL-10

Sage-Grouse – If Winter Concentration Areas for the greater sage-grouse are 

designated, there will be no surface disturbances within the designated areas from 

November 1 through March 15. 

• • •

TESWL-22 TESWL-11 Sage-Grouse – No structures that require guy wires will be used in occupied sagebrush 

obligate habitats within the area managed under the Kemmerer RMP. • • •

TESWL-17 TESWL-12

Colorado River T&E Fishes – A payment of a one-time fee, based on a fee schedule 

provided by the USFWS, will be made based on the amount of water used during 

construction of any segments that cross the Colorado River system.

• • • •

TESWL-18 TESWL-13

Midget faded rattlesnake – Preconstruction surveys for occupied or potential midget 

faded rattlesnake hibernacula (i.e., rock outcrops with south to east aspect) will be 

conducted. The Proponents shall prepare a plan identifying measures to reduce impacts 

to midget faded rattlesnake if they are discovered. This plan shall require approval by 

BLM and the WGFD prior to its implementation

• • • •

PALEONTOLOGICAL RESOURCES

CUL-9 PALEO-1

If significant fossil materials are discovered during Project construction, all surfacedisturbing activities in the vicinity of the find will cease until notification to proceed is 

given by the authorized officer. The site will be protected to reduce the risk of damage to 

fossils and context. Appropriate measures to mitigate adverse effects to significant 

paleontological resources will be determined by the authorized officer.

• • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-24

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

PALEO-1 PALEO-2

Paleontological resources (as defined by omnibus Public Land Management Act –

Paleontological Resources Preservation Section) on federally managed land shall be 

managed and protected using scientific principles and expertise. Appropriate plans for 

inventory, monitoring, and the scientific and educational use of these resources shall be 

developed in accordance with applicable agency laws, regulations and policies.

• • • •

PALEO-2 PALEO-3

Where fossil-bearing sediments are exposed by construction, the sediments must be 

covered with a 4-inch layer of soil where feasible to reduce unauthorized removal or 

disturbance of resources.

• • • • •

GEOLOGIC HAZARDS

BLA-1, 2 BLA-1, 2 (See description under Public Safety)

GEO-2 GEO-1 Review the final location of the preferred alternative with affected mine operators and 

lessees to ensure all measures are taken to protect against subsidence. • • • •

GEO-4 GEO-2

A site-specific soil analysis shall be conducted prior to construction to verify any areas 

identified as unstable or marginally unstable on federal lands. A site-specific 

geotechnical analysis shall be conducted of federal lands prior to construction to locate 

areas where there is landslide risk. If such areas are identified, the Proponents will 

develop mitigation and submit a report to the appropriate land management agency.

• • •

SOILS

SW-1, 4, 5, 

7–13 WQA-1–13 [See description under Water Quality]

SPC-1-5 WQA-13–17 [See description under Water Quality]

SOIL-1 SOIL-1

The Wyoming BLM State Reclamation Policy and applicable Agency management plan 

requirements for soil management will be followed on federal lands in the state of 

Wyoming.

• • • • •

SOIL-2 SOIL-2

The Proponents will submit a Compaction Monitoring Plan for review and Agency 

approval prior to construction that specifies the conditions under which construction will 

either not start or will be shut down due to excessively wet soils. Conditions will be 

measurable in the field and easy to demonstrate to construction workers.

• • • •

SOIL-3 SOIL-3

During decommissioning, some obviously compacted areas, such as established newly 

constructed access roads, will require loosening prior to revegetation. If necessary to reestablish vegetation, the Proponents will use a ripper blade, till, or similar instrument to 

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-25

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

loosen the surface soil layer.

SOIL-6 SOIL-4

Detrimental soil disturbance such as compaction, erosion, puddling, and displacement 

will be minimized through implementing measures identified in the SWPPP. Measures 

may include road ripping, frequent waterbars, cross-ditching (e.g., rolling dips) or other 

methods to reduce compaction while preventing gully formation. Ripping pattern should 

be altered to a crossing, diagonal, or undulating pattern of tine paths to avoid 

concentrated runoff patterns that can lead to gullies. 

• • • • • •

SOIL-7 SOIL-5

The Proponents are responsible for monitoring to ensure soil protection is achieved, and 

providing a monitoring report on reseeding success and/or other methods to stabilize 

soils to the Forest Service by the end of each growing season for areas on NFS lands for 

3 years or until requirements are met for the applicable permit.

• • •

SOIL-8 SOIL-6

Reclamation of all temporary disturbances on NFS lands (such as road cuts) should 

include replacement of material to original contours and re-compaction to predisturbance compaction percentage (which should be identified during reclamation at 

adjacent locations to the disturbance). Guidelines for streambank re-compaction to 

maximize vegetative regrowth and mechanical stability are covered in USACE 

publication ERDC TN-EMRRP-SR-26 (Goldsmith et al. 2001).

• • •

SOIL-10 SOIL-7 In order to meet Forest Plan Soil Standards on NFS lands, the Reclamation and 

Revegetation Plan will describe on-site restoration using topsoil salvaging. • • • •

WATER QUALITY

SW-1

WQA-1

The appropriate NPDES permits for construction activities that disturb one acre or more 

of land will be obtained from the Department of Environmental Quality and USEPA or 

their designees.

• • • • •

SW-2 WQA-2 NPDES permit requirements will be met. This includes implementing and maintaining 

appropriate BMPs for minimizing impacts to surface water. • • • • •

SW-3

WQA-3

One or more responsible persons will be designated to manage stormwater issues, 

conduct the required stormwater inspections, and maintain the appropriate records to 

document compliance with the terms of the NPDES permit.

• • • • •

SW-4 WQA-4 The SWPPPs will be modified as necessary to account for changing construction 

conditions. • • • • •

SW-5 WQA-5 The SWPPPs will identify areas with critical erosion conditions that may require special • • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-26

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

construction activities or additional BMPs to minimize soil erosion.

SW-7 WQA-6 Stormwater BMPs will be maintained on all disturbed lands during construction activities, 

as described in the SWPPP. • • • • •

SW-8 WQA-7 Approved sediment and erosion control BMPs will be installed and maintained until 

disturbed areas meet final stabilization criteria. • • • • •

SW-9 WQA-8 Temporary BMPs will be used to control erosion and sediment at staging areas 

(equipment storage yards, fly yards, lay down areas) and substations. • • • • •

SW-10 WQA-9 The construction schedule may be modified to minimize construction activities in rainsoaked or muddy conditions. • • • • •

SW-11 WQA-10 Damaged temporary erosion and sediment control structures will be repaired in 

accordance with the SWPPP. • • • • •

SW-12

WQA-11

Upon completion of construction, permanent erosion and sediment BMPs will be installed 

along the transmission line within the ROW, at substations, and at related facilities in 

accordance with the SWPPPs.

• • • • •

SW-13 WQA-12 In areas of droughty soils, the soil surfaces will be mulched and stabilized to minimize 

wind erosion and to conserve soil moisture in accordance with the SWPPPs. • • • •

SPC-1 WQA-13 Construction industry standard practices and BMPs will be used for spill prevention and 

containment. • • • •

SPC-2 WQA-14 Construction spills will be promptly cleaned up and contaminated materials hauled to a 

disposal site that meets local jurisdictional requirements. • • • •

SPC-3 WQA-15 All staging areas will contain fueling areas with containment. Where fueling must be 

conducted along the ROW, the plan will specify BMPs. • • • •

SPC-4 WQA-16

If an upland spill occurs during construction, berms will be constructed with available 

equipment to physically contain the spill. Absorbent materials will be applied to the spill 

area. Contaminated materials will be excavated and temporarily placed on and covered 

by plastic sheeting in a containment area a minimum of 100 feet away from any wetland 

or waterbody, until proper disposal is arranged. 

• • • •

SPC-5 WQA-17

If a spill occurs which is beyond the capability of on-site equipment and personnel, an 

Emergency Response Contractor will be identified and available to further contain and 

clean up the spill.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-27

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

SPC-6 WQA-18

For spills in standing water, floating booms, skimmer pumps, and holding tanks will be 

used as appropriate by the contractor to recover and contain released materials on the 

surface of the water.

• • • •

SPC-7 WQA-19

If pre-existing contamination is encountered during operations, work will be suspended in the 

area of the suspected contamination until the type and extent of the contamination is 

determined. The type and extent of contamination; the responsible party; and local, state, and 

federal regulations will determine the appropriate cleanup method(s) for these areas.

• • • •

SPC-8 WQA-20

The SPCC Plan will include details on the types and quantities of absorbent and 

protective materials (e.g., visqueen, booms) that must be readily available to construction 

personnel and requirements for the restocking of materials.

• • • •

SPC-9 WQA-21

Materials such as fuels, other petroleum products, chemicals, and hazardous materials 

including wastes will be located in upland areas at least 500 feet away from streams, 400 

feet for public wells, and 200 feet from private wells.

• • • •

SPC-10 WQA-22

Pumps and temporary fuel tanks for the pumps will be stored in secondary containment. 

Containment will provide a minimum volume equal to 110 percent of the volume of the 

largest storage vessel located in the yard.

• • • •

WQA-1 WQA-23

Avoid placement of road bed material in channels (perennial, intermittent or ephemeral). 

Road bed material contains considerable fines that would create sedimentation in coarse 

cobble dominated stream channels. Even in seasonally dry reaches those fines could be 

transported during flow periods and negatively impact fish spawning reaches below. 

• • • • • •

WQA-2 WQA-24

On federal lands, consult with appropriate land management agency staff prior to siting 

and design for stream crossings (location, alignment, and approach for culvert, drivethrough, and ford crossings). This may include a hydrologist, engineer and, for perennial 

and many intermittent streams, an aquatic biologist.

• •

WQA-3 WQA-25

All culverts on NFS lands, both permanent and temporary, shall be designed and 

installed to meet desired conditions for riparian and aquatic species as identified in the 

applicable Forest Plan. Culverts should not be hydraulically controlled. Hydraulically 

controlled culverts create passage problems for aquatic organisms. Culvert slope should 

not exceed stream gradient and should be designed and implemented (typically by 

partial burial in the streambed) to maintain streambed material in the culvert.

• • • •

WQA-4 WQA-26 Culvert sizing on NFS lands should also comply with Guidance for Aquatic Species • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-28

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

Passage Design, Forest Service Northern Region & Intermountain Region (Forest 

Service 2003f).

WQA-5 WQA-27 On non-federal lands, culvert placement should comply with state BMPs. • • • •

SW-6 WQA-28 Migration of construction-related sediment to all adjacent surface waterbodies will be 

prevented. • • •

TR-3 WQA-29

If the Project proposes to obtain water from wells or surface water sources to suppress 

dust, written approval from the landowner or regulatory agency will be obtained prior to 

appropriation. 

• •

LAND USE

TR-7 TR-5 (See description under Transportation)

LU-1 LU-1

Signs shall be posted at access points to access roads where public access is restricted by a 

land use plan, and on private, state, and Tribal lands at the request of the landowner, agency, or 

Tribal government. Signs shall indicate the restriction or regulation, location, penalty for violation, 

and appropriate contact information for reporting violations. Signage shall be maintained and 

replaced as part of the routine maintenance.

• • • •

AGRICULTURE

AGRI-18 AGRI-1 Consult with the Farm Service Agency and landowners to determine how construction may 

affect the CRP status of the land currently enrolled in CRP. • •

TRANSPORTATION

TR-1 TRANS-1

A Traffic and Transportation Management Plan will be developed and implemented to 

provide site-specific details showing how the Project will comply with the EPMs listed in 

this attachment. This plan will be submitted to and approved by the appropriate federal, 

state, and local agencies with authority to regulate use of public roads, and approved, 

prior to the issuance of a Notice to Proceed with construction. 

• • • •

TR-4 TRANS-2

If a construction method requires the closure of a state- or county-maintained road for 

more than 1 hour, a plan will be developed to accommodate traffic as required by a 

county or state permit.

• • • •

TR-5 TRANS-3

On county- and state-maintained roads, caution signs will be posted on roads, where 

appropriate, to alert motorists of construction and warn them of slow traffic. Traffic 

control measures such as traffic control personnel, warning signs, lights, and barriers will 

be used during construction to ensure safety and to minimize traffic congestion.

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-29

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

TR-6 TRANS-4 To reduce traffic congestion and roadside parking hazards, an equipment yard will be 

provided for primary parking for employee personal vehicles. • • • • •

TR-7 TRANS-5 Unauthorized vehicles will not be allowed within the construction ROW or along 

roadsides near the ROW. • • • •

TR-8 TRANS-6 Construction vehicles will follow a 25 mph speed limit on unposted project roads. • • • •

TR-10 TRANS-7 Landowners will be notified at least 48 hours prior to the start of construction within 0.25 

mile of a residence. • • • •

TR-11 TRANS-8 Emergency vehicle access to private property will be maintained. • •

TR-12 TRANS-9 Roads in residential areas will be restored as soon as possible, and construction areas 

near residences will be fenced off at the end of the construction day. • •

TR-13 TRANS-10 Roads negatively affected by construction and as identified by the agencies will be 

returned to pre-construction condition. • • • •

TR-14 TRANS-11

Roads developed specifically for this project that are identified by the Proponents as no 

longer necessary will be reclaimed as specified in the Final Reclamation, Plan. Culverts 

will be removed.

• • • •

TRANS-1 TRANS-12 The Proponents will attempt to identify existing two-track trails as preferred access roads 

for construction. • • • • •

TRANS-2 TRANS-13 Roads will be designed so proper drainage is not impaired and roads will be built to 

minimize soil erosion. Consult with appropriate Agencies during design stage. • • • • • •

TRANS-3 TRANS-14

Access roads built for the Project on federal lands shall be closed to the public unless 

otherwise agreed upon with the land management agency. Signs shall indicate the 

restriction or regulation, location, penalty for violation, and appropriate contact 

information for reporting violations. Signage and road closure measures shall be 

evaluated during routine visits and maintained or replaced as necessary as part of 

routine maintenance. Access roads constructed solely for use by the Proponents will be 

maintained by the Proponents as needed for Proponents use in accordance with the 

ROW grant/special use permits.

• • • •

TRANS-4 TRANS-15

Roads to be abandoned may be left intact through mutual agreement of the land 

management agency, landowner, the tenant, and the Proponents, unless located in flood 

areas or drainage hazard areas or otherwise restricted by federal, state, or local 

regulations.

• • • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-30

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

AIR QUALITY

AIR-1 AIR-1 Minimize idling time for diesel equipment whenever possible. • • • •

AIR-2 AIR-2 Ensure that diesel-powered construction equipment is properly tuned and maintained, 

and shut off when not in direct use. • • • •

AIR-3 AIR-3 Prohibit engine tampering to increase horsepower. • • • •

AIR-4 AIR-4 Reduce construction-related trips as feasible for workers and equipment, including 

trucks. • • • •

TR-2 AIR-5

Dust suppression techniques will be applied, such as watering construction areas or 

removing dirt tracked onto a paved road as necessary to prevent safety hazards or 

nuisances on access roads and in construction zones near residential and commercial 

areas and along major highways and interstates.

• • • •

ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

– EE-1 During final design, limit the conductor surface gradient in order to meet the IEEE Radio 

Noise Guideline. • • • •

– EE-2

During construction, identify objects such as fences, metal buildings, pipelines, and other 

metal objects within or near the proposed ROW that have the possibility for induced 

potentials and currents and implement electrical grounding of these objects according to 

the utility’s and National Electric Code standards. 

• • • •

– EE-3

During final design and construction, identify areas where large equipment is anticipated and 

provide sufficient conductor clearance to ground to meet the NESC 5 mA rule or limit size or 

access of large equipment.

• • • •

PUBLIC SAFETY (Blasting, Fire, Contamination)

BLA-1 BLA-1

The Blasting Plan will identify blasting procedures including safety, use, storage, and 

transportation of explosives that will be employed where blasting is needed, and will 

specify the locations of needed blasting.

• • • •

BLA-2 BLA-2

All blasting will be performed by registered licensed blasters who will be required to 

secure all necessary permits and comply with regulatory requirements in connection with 

the transportation, storage, and use of explosives, and blast vibration limits for nearby 

structures, utilities, wildlife, and fish (where blasting is conducted in waterbodies).

• • • •

– BLA-3 Appropriate flags, barricades, and warning signals will be used to ensure safety during 

blasting operations. Blast mats will be used when needed to prevent damage and injury 

• • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-31

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

from fly rock.

– BLA-4 Blasting in the vicinity of pipelines will be coordinated with the pipeline operator, and will 

follow operator-specific procedures, as necessary.

• • • •

– BLA-5 Damages that result from blasting will be repaired or the owner fairly compensated. • • • •

FIRE-1 FIRE-1

Train all personnel about the measures to take in the event of a fire including fire 

dangers, locations of extinguishers and equipment, and individual responsibilities for fire 

prevention and suppression.

• • • • •

FIRE-2 FIRE-2 Equip all construction equipment operating with internal combustion engines with spark 

arresters. • • • • •

FIRE-3 FIRE-3 Restrict motorized equipment, including worker transportation vehicles, to the designated 

and approved work limits. • • • • •

FIRE-5 FIRE-4 Require all motor vehicles and equipment to carry, and individuals using handheld power 

equipment to have, specified fire prevention equipment. • • • • •

FIRE-6 FIRE-5 Provide a list of equipment capable of being adapted to fighting fires to local fire 

protection agencies. • • • • •

FIRE-7 FIRE-6 Notify the appropriate fire suppression agencies of scheduled road closures. • • • • •

FIRE-8 FIRE-7 Prohibit burning of slash, brush, stumps, trash, explosives storage boxes, or other 

Project-generated debris unless authorized by the applicable land management agency. • • • • •

FIRE-9 FIRE-8

Designate a Fire Guard on each construction crew prior to the start of construction 

activities each day and provide a communications system for maintaining contact with 

fire control agencies.

• • • • •

FIRE-10 FIRE-9 The Proponents shall comply with fire restrictions and/or waivers as applicable. • • • • •

ENV-2 CON-1 All construction staff will be trained on the types of contamination that could be

encountered and how to respond if contamination is encountered.

• •

NOISE

NOISE-2 NOISE-1

Identify and provide a public liaison person before and during construction to respond to 

concerns of neighboring receptors, including residents, about noise construction 

disturbance.

• • • • •

NOISE-3 NOISE-2 Establish a toll-free telephone number for receiving questions or complaints during construction 

and develop procedures for responding to callers. • • • •

NOISE-4 NOISE-3 Implement and maintain a noise complaint review process to deal with residents’ or other • • • •
Environmental Protection Measures Appendix Z

January 2013 Z-32

Table Z-1. Companies’ Proposed Environmental Protection Measures

GATEWAY WEST TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

1 2 3 4-6 7-9

DEIS 

Number

New EPM 

Number for 

FEIS 

Submittal Environmental Protection Measures

Application 

Phase

Applicable to Land 

Ownership1/

Design and EngineeringConstructionOperations and MaintenanceFederal Land and all land in Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8 and 9State Land in IdahoPrivate Land in Idaho Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10

potential queries and complaints as they arise. Such complaints would be logged and 

investigated on an individual basis to facilitate resolution of the issue of concern.

1/ In Wyoming and Idaho Segments 6, 8, and 9, the EPMs will be applied to the entire segment (i.e., including the private and state land) except as follows: 

• Proposed substation and regeneration sites located on private land unless they are standard EPMs of the Companies; 

• EPMs that are only applicable to a specific BLM Field Office;

• EPMs that are only applicable to National Forest System lands; and

• Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request of the property owner and don’t violate the law. 

In Idaho, Segments 4, 5, 7, and 10 are predominantly private ownership in agriculture and other development, and for the most part, the Federal land in these segments is clustered. 

In these segments, EPMs will be applied based on ownership except as follows:

• Proposed transmission line substation and regeneration sites located on private land unless they are standard EPMs of the Companies; and 

• Different practices will be followed on private property that are at the request of the property owner and don’t violate the law.